Loading...
NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER EXPANSION/RENOVATIONS AND NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS - 08-0020-PR-ANORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER EXPANSION/RENOVATIONS NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO.: 08-0020-PR- (A) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for Clearwater ISSUED FOR BID April 27, 2011 OP ID: BR CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MMIDD1IYYYY) THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONEY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). .? N. CONTACT PRODUCER 877-866-1384 NAME, Maggie's Management, LLC 866-407-6715 PHONE FAX No): Insurance Department No. Fix* (AIC, 1019 Route 519 ADDRESS: Eighty Four, PA 15330 PRODUCER pILLA-1 Steve Douglas CUSTOMER INSURER 5) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC S INSURED Pillar Homes LLC INSURER A : Mid-Continent Casualty Co 23418 Pillar Construction Group LLC INSURER B :American Interstate Ins Co 31895 1312 Bowman Street INSURER c? Y Clermont, FL 34711 INSURER D INSURER E : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE IN$R V1 POLICY NUMBER (MMIDDAWY) EPP POLICY EXP LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 A X IABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL L 04GL000809695 01/01111 01107/12 PDAMAGE TO KlmN I ED REMISES Ea occurrence $ 100,000 • ? OCCUR CLAIMS-MADE 9 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 1 I PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 X perPr*j-t Ago GENERALAGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGG S 2,000,000 POLICY PRO- LOC $ AUT OMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ SCHEDULED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE HIRED AUTOS (Per accident) $ NON-OWNED AUTOS $ UMBRELLA LIAR X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 X EXCESS LAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ A DEDUCTIBLE 04XS171789 02/11/11 01101/12 $ RETENTION $ WORKERS COMPENSATION X WC STATU- OTH- T RY LIMITS B AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEYIN AVWCFL1980002011 01101/11 01101/12 E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED' ? Y (Mandatory In NH) N / A E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ 1,000,000 If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT 1,000,000 $ A Contractors Equipm 04IM00051711 05117111 05/17112 Equipment 21,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule„ N more space Is required) /"C?TrCr/+ATC u?r nco f`AAI!`FI I ATInki CITCLRI SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City of Clearwater PO Box 4748 Clearwater FL 33758-4748 RESENTATIVE AUTHORIZED RE , P cS) 1955-ZUUV A(;VKL1 t;UKYUKA 1 IUN. Ali ngnts reservea. ACORD 25 (2009/09) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD City of Clearwater, Florida NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER EXPANSION/RENOVATIONS NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO.: 08-0020-PR- (A) TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT PERMIT PRE-QUALIFICATION APPLICATION SECTION IV ARCHITECTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1 Cover Table of Conten[s.doc Page 11 10110/2008 SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER RENOVATION & EXPANSION NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO.: 0$-0020-PR-(A) CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myClearwater.com/cibTroiects, ON Monday. May 2. 2011, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work consist of site work and not limited to clearing & grubbing, tree protection, installation of silt fencing, tree barricades, removal of existing concrete slabs, sidewalks, footings, rough & fine grading, installation of storm water piping & under drain system, sanitary sewer, 6" thick concrete slabs; construct classroom additions, concrete, masonry, plumbing, electrical, HVAC system, stucco, flooring system, roofing system, drywall, ceiling grid, doors & hardware, millwork, painting, flooring, & restoration of contractor's staging area and all disturbed sodding. Work includes base bid North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovation & Expansion, Alternate Add North Greenwood Library Renovation of computer class room for such item as: drywall, ceiling grid, electrical, HVAC system, doors & hardware, millwork, painting, and flooring. A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held at 9:00 AM on MONDAY, MAY 9, 2011 AT THE NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER, 900 N. MARTIN LUTHER KING, JIL AVE, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33756 - MULTI-PURPOSE ROOM. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Architect/Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3 d Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, MAY 19 2011, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER RENOVATIONS & EXPANSION & ALTERNATE NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO.: 08-0020-PR-(A). A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction category of COMMERICAL BUILDING with a minimum pre-qualification amount of $750,000.00 Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 SectionI.doc Page 1 of I 8/27/2008 1 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: SECTION II ................................................................................................................................... i 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................. 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3 6 CONTRACT TIME .......................................................................................................... 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS ...................................................................................................... 3 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7 19 BID PROTEST .................................................................................................................. 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES ....................................................................................... 8 SectionIl.doc i 9/27/2010 1 Section 11-- Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myclearwater.com/cityproiects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non-refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so i only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant ¦ any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758- 4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in Sectionll.doc Page 1 of 9 9/27/2010 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and famishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and ftiu-nishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. Sectionll.doc Page 2 of 9 9/27/2010 Section 11-- Instructions to Bidders 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal' items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Sectionil_doc Page 3 of 9 9/27/2010 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for famishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"x11" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. SectionlHoc Page 4 of 9 9/27/2010 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the convection is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically Sectionll.doc Page 5 of 9 9/27/2010 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV - Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III - General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. Seetionll.doc Page 6 of 9 9/27/2010 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST ' 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of 5ectionll.doc Page 7 of 9 9/27/2010 Section II - Instructions to Bidders intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida `T'rench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or storrwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. Sectionll.doc Page 8 of 9 9/27/2010 1 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. 1 NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater En ineerin Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best Management Practices. References EPA website 1 J ?I I ' Fl I? 1 1 n L.I 1 Sectionll.doc Page 9 of 9 9/27/2010 I? SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1 DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................................................................... 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ........................••-..............................-----•-•-------.................. .. 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT ..................................•----...........--•--............--------............................----... .. 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ................................................................... .. 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ...................................................................... .. 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS .-• ........................................................................................... .. 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 7 3.1 INTENT ...................................................................... . ----------- 7 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES ................................... ... .. 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................... 8 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ........................................................................................ . 8 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ........................................................................... . 8 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ..................................... 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS .......................................•--.............-•------.................................... . 9 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND...... ....... ................ . 9 5.2 INSURANCE ..............................................•-------....---....................----............................. . 9 5.2-1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ......................................................... 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE.. ... ....... .............. 10 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE A UTOMOBILE LIABILITY . . ........ . ... . ..................................... 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS ........................................... ........... 12 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 14 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES .............................................................................•-•-.--.--.....- ....... 15 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS..... ............... ... - ..... I .................. 15 6. 5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS ....................................... ........-................. 15 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 16 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ..............................................•-------.......------•----.............. 16 6.8 PERMITS ....................................................................................................................... 16 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 17 6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................ .... 18 6.11 DRAWINGS ....................................................................•--................... ... 18 Sectionlll.doc i 11/03/2010 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ........................ 18 6. 11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ....................................................................................... ..... 19 6. 11.3 CAD STANDARDS .............................................................................................. ..... 21 6 11.4 DELIVERABLES :............................................................................................... .....23 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ...................... ..... 23 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ................................................................................... ..... 23 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION ............................................................................................... ..... 23 OTHER WORK .............................................................................................................. 24 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ..........................................•---..................--- ............... ..... 24 7.2 COORDINATION ............................•-..--......----..................................................•--••- ----- 24 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 25 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE .......................•.............................----...................... .... 25 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 25 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK .................................................................... .... 26 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .............................. .... 26 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES .................................................................................... .... 26 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES ......... .... 27 CHANGES IN THE WORK ...................................................................................... .... 2'7 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ............................................................... .... 28 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................ .... 28 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ................... .... 29 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK ................................................•...........................---......---........ .... 30 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 30 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ............................................................................................... 31 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION ...................................................•---------.......................--- --- 31 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK .................................................................................... ... 32 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK ....................................... 32 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ..................................... ... 32 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ................................................................... ... 33 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................ ... 33 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK .................................................... ... 33 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ...................................... ... 34 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................ ... 34 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................ ... 35 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ............................. ... 35 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ......................................................................•-.---•-.----•----- ... 36 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ................................................................................................ ... 36 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................ ... 37 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................ ... 37 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ........................................................................••----------.......... 0 1 2 3 --- 38 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 SectionIII.doc ii 11/03/2010 15 15.1 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ............................................ OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK. ........ 38 38 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE .............................................................................. ........ 38 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ................................... ........ 39 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ...................................................................................... ........ 40 17 17.1 MISCELLANEOUS ............................................................................................... SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ......................................................... ........ 40 ........ 40 17.2 17.3 GIVING NOTICE .................................................................................................. NOTICE OF CLAIM ............................................................................................. ........ 40 ........ 40 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ............................. ........ 40 17.5 17.6 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ......................................................................... RENEWAL OPTION ........................................................................................... ........ 41 ........ 41 17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS ......................................... ........ 41 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 41 19 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 41 ' 20 21 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 41 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ....................................................... 41 22 22.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 42 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 42 22.2 EXAMPLE .............................................................................................................. ...... 42 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ..................................................................... ....... 43 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ........................................................................................ ....... 43 1 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE .......................................... ....... 43 23.3 FIXED SIGN .......................................................................................................... ....... 43 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS ............................................................................................... ....... 43 23.5 SIGN COLORING .................................................................................................. ....... 44 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT .............................................................................................. ....... 44 ' 23.7 23.8 SIGN MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................... TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN ..........................................•.----..............................---.. ....... 44 ....... 44 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE ........... ....... 45 t 1 Sectionlll.doc iii 11/03/2010 Section III -- General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the city. 1 Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performanc a and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. ' Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects ' City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding SectionIII-doc Page 1 of 45 11/03/2010 Section 111-- General Conditions contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule--CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings. which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement. which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent Sectionlll.doc Page 2 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III -- General Conditions professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. FD. D. T Specifications ' The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) i A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner t The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. SectionIII.dOC Page 3 of 45 11/03/2010 1 Section 111-- General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. SectionlIl.doc Page 4 of 45 11/03/2010 1 Section III - General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, ' gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or ' water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. ' Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ' 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ' When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ' Engineer shall furnish to Contractor two (2) copies of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request; at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. ' 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the ' Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable Sectionlll.doc Page 5 of 45 11/032010 Section Ill - General Conditions field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as-built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalitication. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. SectionIll.doc Page 6 of 45 11/03/2010 1 1 1 fl 1 FJ t Section III - General Conditions 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof: Sectionlll.doc Page 7 of 45 11/03/2010 1 Section III - General Conditions 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface.or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (1) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction., and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. SectionllI.doc Page 8 of 45 11/03/2010 Section Ill - General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily SectionIII.doc Page 9 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (1) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: SectionllI.doc Page 10 of 45 11/03/2010 1 1 Section III - General Conditions Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ' including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence ' Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for ' purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide ' full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Lon shore and Harbor Worker's Com ensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. ' Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. Sectionlll.doc Page 1 I of 45 11/03/2010 1 Section 111- General Conditions 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed Section111.doc Page 12 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the ' Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a ' result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and ' conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 1 SeetionIll.doc Page 13 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Sectionlll.doc Page 14 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. Sectionl ll.doc Page 15 of 45 11/0312010 Section III - General Conditions • Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. SectionlIl.doc Page 16 of 45 11/03/2010 Section 111- General Conditions - Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. I Sectionlll.doc Page 17 of 45 11/03/2010 t Section III - General Conditions 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's SectionlII.doc Page 18 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay SectionIIl.doc Page 19 of 45 11103/2010 Section III - General Conditions request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 61G17-6.002 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal andlor vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also know as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As-Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional SectionllI.doc Page 20 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the ass-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX - suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2 La er Namin Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers SectionlIl.doc Page 21 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. Sectionlll.doc Page 22 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas.Mahon m clearwater_com. 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (1) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, SectionllI.doc Page 23 of 45 11/03/2010 Section Ill - General Conditions disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or intcrference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (1) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. SectionIII.doc Page 24 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall famish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependant of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 1 r SectionllI.doc Page 25 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. Sectionlll.doc Page 26 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. SectionllI.doc Page 27 of 45 11/03/2010 Section Ill - General Conditions Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the. claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph, The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by SectionlIl.doc Page 28 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law)_ Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment SectionlIl.doc Page 29 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an SeetionIII.doc Page 30 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. Sectionlll.doc Page 31 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to famish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). Sectionlll.doc Page 32 of 45 11/03/2010 Section 111- General Conditions 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from Sectionlll.doc Page 33 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. SectionIII.doC Page 34 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with Sectionill_doc Page 35 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. SectionIII.doc Page 36 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and -other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and "other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to SectionIII.doc Page 37 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise: than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem SectionlIl.doc Page 38 of 45 11/03/2010 Section 111- General Conditions expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): r for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; i f i ces ng serv orm for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in per and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work Sectionlll.doc Page 39 of 45 11/03/2010 J Section III - General Conditions until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions'on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. SectionIII.doc Page 40 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll-off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Tom Glenn at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562-4923 or email: tom.glenn@,myclearwater.com. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications. Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. SectionIlI.doc Page 41 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.I - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents. 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-'/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 22.2 EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state t}pe of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, SectionIll_doc Page 42 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") belmv grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"00") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080- inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. Sectionlll.doc Page 43 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 23.6 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN SectionIll.doc Page 44 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) (DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT CONTRACTOR: _ COMPLETION DATE:.- FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:.....-.- _._..... Clearwater U j l+l III ? ?I i it 'II .II. 1 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Section]]]-doc Page 45 of 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. SectionlIi.doc Page 46 of 45 t 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 11/03/2010 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: 1 SCOPE OF WORK ...........................................................................................................1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .................................................................................. 4 2 FIELD ENGINEERING .................................................................................................. 5 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............. .. 5 2. 1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS.. ............ - ............................................... .......... .. 5 2. 1.2 LAYOUT DATA ............................... 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ............................... .. 6 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................................................................................... 6 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ....................................................................................... .. 6 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ......................................................................... .. 6 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. .. 8 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK ........................................................ .. 8 6 CONCRETE ............................................................................•....................................... ..9 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK ........................................ .. 9 7.1 EXCAVATION .............................................................................................................. .. 9 7.2 FORMS ............................................................................ .... 10 8 REINFORCEMENT ....................................................................................................... 10 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................. ....... 10 9 OBSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................................... 10 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT .......................................................................................... 10 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS .................................................................11 12 DEWATERING ................................................................................................................11 12.1 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................11 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS .................... ........................ 12 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... 12 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON-CONTAMINA TED SITEACTIVITY ........................... 12 13 SANITARY MANHOLES .............................................................................................. 15 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 15 13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 15 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) .. . .. . ............ . ..................... 16 13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 16 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 16 SectionlV.doc i 10/11/2010 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 16 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ...................................................................... ....... 16 14 BACKFILL ......................................................................................................................16 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC ........................................................................................17 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................17 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..............................•------....................................... 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL .....................................................................17 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................•--...----.................................................... ...... 17 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........................................................................................... ...... 17 18 UNDERDRAINS ....................................................................................................... ......18 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................ ...... 18 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........................................................................................... ...... 18 19 STORM SEWERS .................................................................................................... ......18 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ....................•-------------.................................---............. ...--- 19 19.2 TESTING ...................................................... ......................................................... ...... 19 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..............•--------.....................................--------....................... ...... 19 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS ........................................................ ......19 20.1 MATERIALS ..................................................... ............................................... ...... 19 20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE .................................................................................. ..... 19 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ........................................................................................ ..... 20 20.2 INSTALLATION .....................•-----..............................................---........................ ...... 20 20.2.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ............................................ ...................................... ..... 20 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ...................................................................................... ..... 21 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 21 20.4 TESTING ................................................................................................................. ..... 21 20.4.1 TESTING OFGRAVITYSEWERS ................................................................... ..... 21 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS-- ................................................................... ..... 21 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................... ......................... ..... 21 20.5.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ................................................................................... ..... 21 20.5.2 FORCEMAINPIPE ........................................................................................ .....22 21 DRAINAGE ................................................................................................................ .....22 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE ...............................................................•--... ..... 22 22.1 BASE .................................................................................... ............................. ..... 22 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE.- .......... .... . 24 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE .......................... ..... 24 22.2 SUBGRADE ............................................................................................................ .....24 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................................... .....24 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........................................................................................ .... 24 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 25 23.1 . ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................•------.....................•----.--.........---... 25 SectionlV.doc ii 10/1112010 11 f] fl 1 1 u n n 1 23.1.1 AGGREGATE ............................................................................................. ...........25 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ...................................................................... ........... 25 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................. ........... 25 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES ......................................................... ........... 26 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS .................... ........... 26 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ......................................... ........... 27 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION ................................................... ........... 27 23.6 CRACKS .................................................................................................... ...........27 23.62 POTHOLES ................................................................................................ ...........27 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES .................................................................... ........... 27 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ................................................. ........... 28 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ......................................................... ........... 29 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................................... ........... 29 23-11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ....................................................... ........... 29 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT ....................... ........... 30 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 30 25.1 IRRIGATION ............................... .......... .......................................................... ........... 30 25. 1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... ..........30 25.1.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................ ..........32 25.13 EXECUTION,.,... .... ......... -- .............. ........................... ....... - .................. . ........ 36 25.2 LANDSCAPE ............................................................................................................... 40 25,2 GENERAL ........................................ ......----------- -_.-.---........ ..... ............ ......... .......... 40 25.2.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................ ..........45 25.2.3 EXECUTION-- ......................................................................................... ..........48 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 55 26.1 INTENT .............................................................................................................. .......... 55 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY .............. .......... 55 26.3 MATERIALS ......................................... .............-- 55 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................. ........ .......... 56 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ................................................................. .. 57 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION -------------------------------------------- ----- ....... .......... 57 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ........................................................................... .......... 57 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................. .......... 57 26.9 PAYMENT .......................................................................................................... ..........58 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ................................................................................. .......... 58 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................ .......... 58 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .... ......................... --......................................................... .......... 58 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ...................... .......... 58 29 CONCRETE CURBS ...................................................................................•---.... .......... 58 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................ .......... 58 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ....................................................................................... .......... 58 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 59 SectionlV_doc iii 10/11/2010 1 I I 11 1 1 I I 1 1 IJ n 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS ...................................................•------................................ 59 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................ . 59 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT------------------- ............................................. ..------- - 59 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................•-----------•---••-•--•--••---•----.------............... . 59 31 SODDING ........................................................................................................................59 32 SEEDING .........................................................................................................................60 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 60 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ..........................................................................•..... 61 33.2 PRECAST TYPE .....................................................................................................•---- 61 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................•.----..---............. 61 34 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 61 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 61 36 STREET SIGNS .............................................................................................................. 62 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 62 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................ 62 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING ................................................... 62 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... 62 37.4 EQUIPMENT ........... .......................................................... ....--............ ................... 62 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 62 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 63 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ...................................................... ......... ........................... . 63 37.8 LIGHTING ..................................................................................................... 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL .................................................................................................... 63 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX .................................. .............................................................. 63 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ..................................................... ..... 64 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ............................. ......--.... 64 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 64 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 64 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 64 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 64 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ..................... ............................. ........•------.--.--- 64 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ....................................................................................... 65 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 65 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 65 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 65 38.9 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 66 38.10 COMPLIANCE ......................................•--••---------------------.................---•---•--------............ 66 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................. 69 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 69 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES ....................................................................................................... 69 SectionlV.doc iv 10/11/2010 1 1 t 1 1 u I] 41.1 SCOPE --------------------------------------------69 41.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................. ... 70 41.2.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... ...70 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS...... .................................. ........ ..... . _ 70 41.2.3 GATE VALVES ................................................................................................... ... 72 41.24 VALVE BOXES ................................................................................................... ... 72 41.25 HYDRANTS ........................................................................................................ ...73 41.2-6 SERVICE SADDLES ........................................................................................... .. 74 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS ............................................................... ... 74 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS .............................................................................. .. 74 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ........................................................................................... .. 75 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS .................................................................................... .. 75 41.3 CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................................... ... 75 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................... . ............................................................. .. 75 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING ...................................................................... ............................ ... .. 75 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS ....................................... .. 77 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................. .. 77 41.4 TESTS ........................................................................................................................ ...78 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ....................................................................................... .. 78 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST. ... .- ............................. ................... ......... --- .......... .. 78 41.5 STERILIZATION ...................................................................................................... ... 78 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT ....................................................................................... .. 78 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM ......................... ...................... .. . ........................................ .. 78 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE .................. . -- .................. .................... ......... . . 78 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS......... ........ ... --- .................. -- .... --,- .......... .. 79 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS ............................................................................................ .. 79 41.6 ME ASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ...............................................•---...----.............. ... 79 41.61 GENERAL ........................................................................................................... ..79 41.62 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ......................................................... .. 80 41,63 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS ................................................................. .. 80 41.64 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS .............................. ......................................................................... .. 80 41.6.5 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS .......... .......................... .. 80 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 81 43 TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... 81 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ........................................................................................ .. 81 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS .... ...................... ............................... -.-........ .. 81 43.1-2 BASE COURSE ........................ •--.........-------- -.-.-- ..................................._-........ .. 81 43.1-3 PRIME COAT ..................................................................................................... ..81 43.14 LEVELING COURSE ......................................................................................... .. 81 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE ........................................................................................... .. 81 43.1.6 COLOR COAT .................................................................................................... .. 82 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS ..................................................................... ........... .. 83 43.2.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................... ..83 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION-.. .... ........................ .... ------- ............................... ... .. 84 43.2.3 SLOPE. ..................... - ............................... ------ ......... ................... . 84 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION... .................................................... - ...... . . ................... .. 85 SectionlV.doc v 10/11/2010 1 1 1 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING ....................................................................................... 85 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE ............................................................................................. 85 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER ........................................................................................... . ....... 85 43.2.8 FENCING ....................................................................................... 86 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS ................................................................................................... 86 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................... 86 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE. ...... ........ .......................................................................... 88 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) .................................................................................. 88 43.2.13 CONCRETE......... ................ .... - ....... ............................. -- ............ -- ............... 88 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING ................................................. 88 43.2.15 WATER COOLER .......................................... .................................................. 89 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION .............................................................................................. 89 43.2.17 WARRANTY ........................................................................................................... 89 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 90 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL .. ....... 90 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES . 91 ............................. .•-----... ......---................. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS . ..... 91 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ........... ...... 91 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS ...... . ...... 91 ...• 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ...... ............ ..... .... . .... .. . . . .. 91 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ............................. ...... 91 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .............. ...... 92 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ....................................... ...... 92 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR...... ...... 92 45.1 INTENT .................................................................................................................. ...... 92 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR (INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY .................. ...... 93 45.3 MATERIALS .......................................................................................................... ......93 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................................. ...... 93 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ................................................................................. ...... 94 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... ...... 94 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ............................................................................... ...... 94 45.9 PAYMENT ........................ •................................................................................... . ...... 94 46.1 MATERIALS .......................................................................................................... ...... 95 461.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS....... ---- ..... ... ...... .................. ........ ............... - --- 95 461.3 SAMPLES ............................ .......................... .... .................................... 95 461.4 REJECTION ..................................................................................................... .....95 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ................................................................................................ ..... 95 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ................................................................................. 96 463.1 HANDLING OFPIPE ...................................................................................... ..... 96 463.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS .............................................................. ..... 96 ' 45 ' 46 ' 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 90 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY ......................................................................................... 90 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .............................................................................. 92 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................................... 94 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ..................................... 95 461.2 QUALITYCONTROL ......................................................................................... 95 SectionIV.doc A 10/1 1/2010 t 1 1 1 1 . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ro 1 1 1 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING ................................................................................................... .. 96 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ........................................................................... .. 96 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ........................................................................................ 96 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS .................................................... .. 96 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION ......................................................................... .. 96 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS .................................................. . .. 97 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER .............................................................................. .. 97 46.4. S CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES .................................................................... .. 97 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED ........................................ ...... .. 97 46.4.7 BACKF7LLING ................................................................................................... ..98 46.4.8 POINTREPAIR ................................................................................... .............. ..98 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ................................................................................. .. 98 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ...................... 98 47.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ ..98 47.2 MATERIALS .............................................................................................................. .. 98 47.3 PIPE ................................................................ ------------......................................... .. 98 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ------------------------••---..........................--............ .. 99 47.5 FITTINGS ................................................................................................................... ..99 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... .. 99 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT .............................................................................. .. 99 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ............... .. 99 48.3 COMPOSITION ................................................................... ..................................... .. 99 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 100 48.5 MATERIALS .............................................................................................................. 100 48.6 WATER .......................................................................................... 100 48.7 REINFORCEMENT ................................................................................................... 100 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 100 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ................... ........................................ 101 48.10 PROPORTIONING ......................................... ...... 101 48.11 MIXING ...... -....................... •........... ............................................................................ 101 48.12 APPLICATION ........................................................................................................... 101 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ....................................................................................... 102 48.14 SURFACE FINISH ..................................................................................................... 102 48.15 CURING ..................................................................................................................... 102 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ................................................................... 102 48.17 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................ 103 48.18 EQUIPMENT ....................................... .......................... 103 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ......................... 104 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ................................... ........................ 104 49.2 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................. 104 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS .......................................................................... 104 49.3.1 MATERIALS ................................................... ....................................... ....... .•--... 104 49.3.2 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION .................................................................. 105 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 105 49.4.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 1 06 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ....................................... ...•..... .................................... 7 8 9 106 SectionlV.doc vii 10/11!2010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 106 49.7 LINER MIX ........................................................................................................... ..... 106 49.8 WATER .................................................................................................................. ..... 107 ........................ .... 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ----•..-•---• ........................................ ....--•- ..... 107 49.10 EQUIPMENT ..............................•----------.........-------•--•-----...-----------------•-----.-----...... ..... 107 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION .................................................................. ..... 107 49.11.1 PREPARATION .............................................................................................. .....107 49.11.2 MIXING .......................................................................................................... .....108 49.11.3 SPRAYING ...................................... .............................................................. ..... 108 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING .................................................................................... ..... 108 49.11.5 CURING ......................................................................................................... .....108 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................. ..... 109 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .. ..... 109 49.12.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................... .....109 49.12.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................... .....109 49.12.3 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION ............................................................. ......111 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ...........................................................................113 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM .............................................................113 51.1 SCOPE ................................................................•---------•------------------------------......---- ..----113 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ................................................................................ ......114 51.2-1 ASPHALT ....................................................................................................... .....114 51.2.2 CONCRETE.. . ........... __ ... _ ............ ............................................................... ..... 114 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX_ .................................................................... .....114 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ..................................................... .....114 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEMPAVE ...................................................... .....115 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .....................................................................................115 51.6 PLAYING LINES ........................................................................................................115 51.7 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. .....115 51.8 LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................ .....115 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................116 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ............................................................................. .....116 53.1 MATERIAL ............................................................................................................ .....116 533.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL .............................................. .....116 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL : .......................................... .....118 53,13 MATTRESS WIRE .................................... .. .....119 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ................................................................................... .....119 53.2 PERFORMANCE ...........................................................•--.----................................ .....119 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................... .... 120 54.1 SCOPE ......................................... ................................. ........ ................................. .... 120 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK ................................................................. ......... .... .... 120 54.3 WORK METHODS ..............................................................•-••-----•------...---............ .... 121 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING .................................................................. .. ... 121 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ........ .............................................................. .. .. . 121 54.4 LITTER .................................. ................................................................................. .... 121 54.5 VISUAL CHECK ................................................................................................... 0 1 2 3 4 .... 121 SectioniV.doc Vul 10/112010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING .......................................................... 121 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)..... 121 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL .................................................................................................. 121 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................................................ 122 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................ 122 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION .......................................................................................... 122 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ......................................................... 122 54.13 MULCH CONDITION ............................................................................................... 122 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 122 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ..................................................... 122 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION .....................................................•........•.........---.------......--.. 122 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 123 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 123 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ................................................•---......................----.---..... 123 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. 123 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS .............................................................. .... 123 55 MILLING OPERATIONS ........................................................................................... 124 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ...................................... 124 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 124 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS ................................................................................. 125 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 125 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .................. 125 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 125 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................................................................................................ 125 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 126 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 126 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 126 56 C LEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 126 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 126 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 126 57 R IPRAP ......................................................................................................................... 126 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 126 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 127 58 T REATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................ 127 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL .................................................................•............----.........-- 127 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 127 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 127 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 128 60 SIGNING AND MARKING ......................................................................................... 128 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 128 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING .............................................................................................. 128 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 128 SectionIV.doc ix 10/11/2010 62 62.1 TREE PROTECTION .................................................................................................. TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................ 129 129 62.2 ROOT PRUNING ..............................•--•-----................................................-............... 129 62.3 63 PROPER TREE PRUNING .......................................................................•-•--------...... PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................................................................................. 130 131 63.1 63.2 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 131 131 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 131 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ..................... 132 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ........................................................................................... 132 63.6 POSTING .................................................................................................................... 132 ' 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ..............•------•---...................................-•--.------.....---.------...... 132 1! ScctionIV.doc x 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications ' 1 SCOPE OF WORK i 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: North Greenwood Recreation Center - Expansion & Renovations (NGRC-E&R) Alternate North Greenwood Library Renovations (NGLR) PROJECT NO.: 07-0035-PR-D Scope of Work: 1. The work consist of. site work and not limited to clearing & grubbing, tree protection, installation of silt fencing, tree barricades, removal of existing concrete slabs, sidewalks, footings, rough & fine grading, installation of storm water piping & under drain system, sanitary sewer, 6" thick concrete slabs; construct classroom additions, concrete, masonry, plumbing, electrical, HVAC system, stucco, flooring system, roofing system, drywall, ceiling grid, doors & hardware, millwork, painting, flooring, & restoration of contractor's staging area and all disturbed sodding. Work includes base bid North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovation & Expansion, Alternate Add North Greenwood Library Renovation of computer class room for such item as: drywall, ceiling grid, electrical, HVAC system, doors & hardware, millwork, painting, and flooring. 2. Contractor shall collect Building Permit no. BCP-2011-03342 (NGRC-E&R) Clearing Grubbing Permit and Tree No Removal Permit & Building Permit no. BCP-2011-03343 (NGLR) from the Building Dept. at the Development Services 2nd Floor of the Municipal Service Building - 100 South Myrtle Ave. after he has installed silt fence of the limits of the proposed limits of work area. 3. North Greenwood Recreation Center & the North Greenwood Library will be programmed during the 1 construction of the expansion & renovation of buildings and the general contractor and his sub contractors shall provide all Safety Measures to Ensure Safety and Welfare of the Public, Park & Recreation and Library staff during the construction of this project. 4. The geotechnical report is included in this document and the contractor shall review and adhere to the recommendations of the geotechnical engineer as indicated in the report. 5. The City has applied and received the SWFWMD Permit No.: 646896/44022757.001 a copy is attached with this document. 6. The contractor shall be required to install minimum size 1/4" and larger conduits for all low voltage wiring. Where hard ceilings are installed and is not accessible in the attic space the contractor shall provide the junction box from the location on the walls, ceilings or soffits to where they are accessible above the ceiling for the Owner's low voltage vendor. The owner's vendor will provide the installation of the low voltage wiring above the ceiling hung from '.{' hooks attached to the rafters. All low voltage will be installed by the owner's vendors unless otherwise noted on the drawings or stated in this paragraph. Where required the general contractor shall provide all penetrations through the firewalls and shall coordinate these with the owner's low voltage vendor. The low voltage security intrusion, data/telephone, cable television & WYFI systems expansion will be provided by the owner's low voltage vendor. The fire alarm system low voltage expansion shall be perform by the General Contractor (even if it is stated on the contract drawings) awarded this project, the system shall be a complete operable fire alarm system acceptable by the City of Clearwater Fire Marshal Inspector and the Owner. 7. Any items not included in the listed in bill of quantities of the contract documents for the North Greenwood Recreation Center Expansion & Renovations and the Alternate North Greenwood Library Renovations shall have been included cost for those items somewhere in the pricing of the General SectionlV.doc Page 1 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Contractor proposal to construct this facility. No additional funds will be provided by the Owner for missed items by the General Contractor or his sub-contractors to implement this project. All discrepancies between the construction plans and the technical specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and the Owner for clarification in writing prior to the General Contractor in submitting his bid for this project. After award of the contract discrepancies brought to the attention to the Owner or Architect the most stringent of the discrepancy shall be utilized in the implementation of the North Greenwood Recreation Center Expansion & Renovations and the Alternate North Greenwood Library Renovations and no additional compensation will be provided by the Owner. 9. The contractor will be required to restore any disrupted areas of the within the limits of work area and any disturbed areas outside of the limits of work areas by the General Contractor of this project. Video and photographs of the existing conditions is recommended prior to the contractor mobilizing on to the site. 10. The owner will provide electricity and water for construction of this project. 11. The owner will provide and install the compost soil for the planting beds at the main entrance to the building. The contractor shall note the palms locate at the front entrance shall remain and the excavation for the under drain system shall avoid the disruption of the palms. 12. The contractor will be required to provide sanitation for his employees and sub contractor during the construction period of this project and will not be allow utilize Owner facilities. 13. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amount submitted at the pre-construction meeting. This schedule of value shall be utilized as the basis of his application of payment for the project. The contractor shall utilize the standard AIA form in making his application for payment on or prior to the 25`h of every month. This application shall be submitted to the Architect for his review and approval prior to forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean wavier with each payment. Upon final payment request the contractor shall provide with his invoice the certificate of final payment. The contractor shall place the note `Invoice Due Upon Receipt' on his payment application. 14. The contractor shall be required to update `As-Built deviations from the contract drawings. These deviations from the contract drawings shall be recorded on a set of clean plans and mark in red ink as this changes occur during the project. A list shall be developed in conjunction with the recorded information on the drawing, shall be numbered sequentially as they occur, a date when the deviation occurred. The `As-built drawings will be reviewed at the same time the request for payment is submitted for payment. The contractor shall be required to provide signed sealed site civil survey of the exterior items constructed for this project which includes underground piping, conduits, paved surfaces with grades of depth of piping, conduits and finish grade of paved surfaces by a licensed land surveyor and shall be submitted to the consulting civil engineer at the end of the project for approval. 15. The contractor shall be required to provide a third party geo-testing lab for testing of materials and original report shall be provided to the owner, copies of report provided to the architect/engineer. Number of copies will be determined at the pre-construction meeting. 16. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction schedule outlining all work of minor and major milestones for the project, show long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be providing at the pre-construction SectionIV.doc Page 2 of 127 10111/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 16. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a list of shop drawings as well as list of material submittals for review by the Architect, this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the Architect as the required submittal list for the project. 17. The owner will require 3 copies of the each shop drawing, material submittal and shall be maintained by the contractor in separate file boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file folder. These documents shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as part of the close out materials. Also include a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact information such as contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 18. The contractor is to supply spare parts as listed below: a. Minimum one gallon of paint of each color or type un-open containers, plus left over open paint containers; contractor to provide color name, draw down of each colors & type; color design mix for each colors in each of the O & M manuals provided to the Owner b. HV/AC unit filters, return duct filters 1 each for each grill and a/c unit c. 1 spare light ballasts for each type of fixture d. Spare lamps for each type of light fixture minimum of 4 lamps e. Spare VCT Floor Tiles 2% of each color or minimum of one box/carton as packed by manufacture whichever is greater and open boxes of tiles (same lot number as installed) f. Vinyl Floor Base 2% (same lot number as installed) 19. Submittals shall be sent directly to the Architect for his review and one copy sent to the owner project manager for review at the same time they are sent to the architect. Total number of submittals will be determined at the pre-construction meeting. 20. Progress meeting will be required during the duration of the project and shall be every two weeks and dates shall be determined at the pre-construction meeting. 21. Schedule & Sequence of Work: a. Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting 9:00 AM, Monday, May 9, 2011, North Greenwood Recreation Center, 900 N. Martin Luther King, Jr. Ave., Clearwater, FL 33756 b. Last day for questions regards to the project 12:00 Noon, Thursday, May 12, 2011 c. Bid due date May 19, 2011 @ 1:30 PM d. City Council to Award Project June 14, 2011 e. General Contractor to collect contract to execute contract & performance bond f. Pre-construction meeting during the week of June 20 - 24, 2011 & Notice to Proceed during the week of June 27 - July 1, 2011 h. All work completed within 150 consecutive calendar days from notice to proceed i. Estimated completion date week of November 28 - December 2, 2011 j. The recreation center & library will be in full operation during summer camp and the contractor shall have his employees and the sub-contractor employees to be aware of this fact and minimal disruptions of the facility operations. k. It is recommended that the classroom 101 and all exterior work would be completed first. 1. Work at the front entrance to the facility would not begin until after summer camp is over late August of 2011. CONTRACT PERIOD: 150 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS SectionlV.doc Page 3 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: North Greenwood Recreation Center - Expansion & Renovations (NGRC-E&R) Alternate North Greenwood Library Renovations (NGLR) PROJECT NO.: 07-0035-PR-D The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked 0 as shown below: 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 0 Scope Of Work 2.1 0 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed B The Contractor 2.2 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 0 Definition Of Terms 4 0 Order And Location Of The Work 5 0 Excavation For Underground Work 6 0 Concrete 7 0 Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 0 Reinforcement 9 0 Obstructions 10 0 Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 0 Dewaterin 13 0 Sanitary Manholes 14 0 Backfill 15 ? Street Crossings, Etc. 16 0 Raisin Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 0 Unsuitable Material Removal 18 0 Under Drains 19 0 Storm Sewers 20 0 Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 Z Drainage 22 Roadway Base And S6 grade 23 0 Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ? Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 ? General Planting Specifications J 26 ? HDPE Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 [] Plant Mix Driveways 28 Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 0 Concrete Curbs 30 0 Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 0 Sodding 32 ? Seeding- .33 0 Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 0 Material Used 35 0 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 Street Si ns I SectionIV.doc Page 4 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 37 0 AudioNideo Recording Of Work Areas 38 0 Erosion And Siltation Control 39 0 Utility Tie In Location Markin 40 0 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 ? Gas System Specifications 43 Tennis Courts 44 Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ? Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining 46 ? Specifications for Polyethylene Slip Lining 47 ? Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 ? Gunite Specifications 49 ? Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 0 Project Information Signs 51 In-Line Skating Surfacing System 52 ? Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 Gabions and Mattresses 54 ? Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 Milling Operations 56 0 Clearing and Grubbing 57 Ri ra 58 Treatment Plant Safety 59 ? Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 ? Signing And Markin 61 Roadwa Lighting_ 62 0 Tree Protection 63 ? Project Web Pages 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the n SectionlV.doc Page 5 of 127 10/11/2010 I Section 1V - Technical Specifications Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. ' A.AMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association 1 SectionlV.doc Page 6 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association SectionIV.doc Page 7 of 127 10/11/2010 I Section IV - Technical Specifications ' PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National SMC Association Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB SSPC Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 - ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. SectionlV.doc Page 8 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a SectionlV.doc Page 9 of 127 10/11/2010 I Section IV -- Technical Specifications point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry". 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM Al 85). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements. r 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ' Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 70 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS CURBS. SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as SectionlV.doc Page 10 of 127 10/1112010 u Section IV - Technical Specifications base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the SectionlV.doc Page 1I of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS r 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must r collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance. I STATE OF FLORIDA r DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY 1 Section]V.doc Page 12 of 127 10/11/2010 11 Section IV -Technical Specifications The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table I do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/l 10.0 mg/l PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury - by Method 1631E 0.012 µg/l 0.025 µg/l Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg/l Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg11 2.9 gg/l Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/l 5.6 µg/l Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/l 86.0 gg/l Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/l 50.0 µg/l Benzene 1.0 µg/l 1.0 µg/1 Naphthalene 100.0 µg/l 100.0 µg/l If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The SectionI.V.doc Page 13 of 127 10/11/2010 1 1 1 1 r I 11 1 11 Section IV - Technical Specifications Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg/1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg/1. In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOT request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. SectionlV.doc Page 14 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type 11 cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3. SeetionlV.doc Page 15 of 127 10/11/2010 I 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 r? 1 I n Section 1V -- Technical Specifications Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A I or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 - Asphaltic Concrete - Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type TI Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of Type 11 Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class 1) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. SectionlV.doc Page 16 of 127 10/11/2010 r1 l_I Section 1V - Technical Specifications Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction ofAASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backhll shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. SectionlV.doc Page 17 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of 46 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ' Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 1 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street Section]V.doc Page 18 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration_ In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly SectionIV.doc Page 19 of 127 10/11/2010 1 1 t t 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B S. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. ' Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. SectionlV.doc Page 20 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. SectionIV_doc Page 21 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications ' Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 1 Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be S" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. ' Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. SectionIV.doc Page 22 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the. wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6 SectionIV.doe Page 23 of 127 10/11/2010 r Section 1V - Technical Specifications ' of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. t 1 1 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all SectionlV.doc Page 24 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV --Technical Specifications incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of t/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the sectionlV.doc Page 25 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of 1/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the ' pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Ins Rector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 1 1 t I 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table I.- Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) Type S--I Type S-I with Type S-III Top Layer Type S-III FC-3 Type S--ITI with FC -3 Top Layer Type S-1 with FC-3 Top Layer 1st 2nd 1 st 2°d 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1'/2 1'/2 2 1'/4 3/4 * 1 1 2'/z 1'/4 1'/4 1'/z 1 1'/2 1 3 1'/2 l'/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: I. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. r SectionIV.doc Page 26 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S--III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: I. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. SeetionlV.doc Page 27 of 127 10/11/2010 r Section IV -- Technical Specifications ' The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or ' fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring ' section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. ' All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving ' operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc_ will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all ' utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. ' 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed ' by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the ' road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely ' manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 1 SectionlV_doc Page 28 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be ''/a" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. SectionlV.doc Page 29 of 127 10/11/2010 r-, I? i Section IV - Technical Specifications 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in ' accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet ' site. The address is: http://wwwl l.myflorida.corn. It is under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850-4144000. ' 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period ' for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. ' 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or ' specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the ' turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. ' 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. SectionlV.doc Page 30 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible ]Wanner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. SectionlV.doc Page 31 of 127 10/11/2010 1 1 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY Section 1V - Technical Specifications A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785_ C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 1 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 5ectionlV.doc Page 32 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non-Shock Safe-T Shear Stem 5. Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2'/Z" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 200 lb. O. W.G 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprcne material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a I" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. SectionIV.doc Page 33 of 127 10/11/2010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use anAmetek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self- flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7". B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline_ 25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. SectionIV.doc Page 34 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high- impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an SectionIV.doc Page 35 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications ' infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. ' B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., California USA Glendora , . 1 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, ' except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. ' D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. ' E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these "Technical Special Provisions. ' F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall b t d b th C t a t t n dditio l st e correc e y e on r or a o a na co . c G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract SectionIV.doe Page 36 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. 1. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than '/2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area. compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. SectionIV.doc Page 37 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to-Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install 1 lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. ' 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. i 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. SectionlV.doc Page 38 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement maybe installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. Section]V.doc Page 39 of 127 10/11/2010 ' 25.2 LANDSCAPE Section IV --Technical Specifications 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish i grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the r SectionlV.doc Page 40 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk- D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT.: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. CT: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SectionlV.doc Page 41 of 127 10/11/2010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f I 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications C. W : Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST. TR.: Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. o. C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DIA. : Diamete r. LVS. : Leaves. D. B. H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL. : Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD. Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. SectionlV.doc Page 42 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications Owner's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. SectionIV.doc Page 43 of 127 10/11/2010 1 1 1 1 1 1 i H Cl Section IV - Technical Specifications H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. SectionIV.doc Page 44 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger SectionIV.doc Page 45 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 1 1 1 1 1 r_i 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. SectionlV.doc Page 46 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than '/4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two ` 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over V. C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 -- 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under l gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to S inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. SectionIV.doc Page 47 of 127 10/11/2010 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - '/a feet above grade. 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. 1 SectionlV.doc Page 48 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -'technical Specifications D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/2 inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub- grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. SectionIV.doe Page 49 of 127 - 10/11/2010 I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well- drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet SectionIV.doc Page 50 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each ''/2" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backf ll tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. 1. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. SectionIV.doc Page 51 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two 3/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. SectianlV.do 52 27 10/11/2010 c Page of 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: Sectionlv.doc Page 53 of 127 10/11/2010 1 F-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t r 1 1 1 r Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. L if evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. SectionIV.doc Page 54 of 127 10/11/2010 r Section 1V -- Technical Specifications 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, SectionlV_doc Page 55 of 127 10/11/2010 1 71 1 I 1 1 1 t 1 t 1 Section 1V-Technical Specifications from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Pr- aperty ASTM Method Value HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi HDPE Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. SectionlV.doc Page 56 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. SectionIV.doc Page 57 of 127 10/11/2010 I Section IV - Technical Specifications 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.1. at 28 days. Expansion points shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SectionlV.doc Page 58 of 127 10111/2010 Section 1V -Technical Specifications 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and SectionlV.doc Page 59 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly, watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the ?j Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the. elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. SectionlV.doc Page 60 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 - MATERIAL USED. .35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 - CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Section]V.doc Page 61 of 127 10/11/2010 1 36 STREET SIGNS 1 1 I 1 t f I 0 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIOIVIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances. audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. SectionIV.doc Page 62 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in Sp mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. SectionIV.doc Page 63 of 127 10/11/2010 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, SectionIV.doc Page 64 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications darns or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site. shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. SectionlV.doc Page 65 of 127 10/11/2010 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionlV.doc Page 66 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1 st occurrence - Warning 2nd occurrence - $32 Re-inspection Fee 3rd occurrence - $80 Re-inspection Fee 4th occurrence - Stop Work Order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 562-4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750. SectionIV.doc Page 67 of 127 10/11/2010 rr ors ?r r r r?r ws ¦t rr ri¦? r ?r r r ¦r MM . . Section IV -Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DIVISION 7 - EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Re-inspection Fee $80.00 Re-inspection Fee Stop Work Order CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741 ENGINEERING/CONSTRUCTION 727 562-4750 DATE POSTED: Inspector's Name: Received b y: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings of the inspector.) Inspector's Signature: IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED SectionlV,doc Page 68 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION 111, ARTICLE 24 -- AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. SectionIV.doc Page 69 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 1 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. ' Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: 1 SectlonlV_doc Page 70 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Pitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. SectionlV.doc Page 71 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with ' respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. ' Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.WWA. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3_ piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. SectionlV.doc Page 72 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant + AVK Nostalgic 2780. + American Darling B-84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A. W W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. Athrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. 5ectionlV.doc Page 73 of 127 10/11/2010 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-1/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: SectionIV.doc Page 74 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. SectionlV,doc Page 75 of 127 10/11/2010 1 F 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with 1 approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a ' watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ' ANSUAWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. SectionlV.doc Page 76 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18-inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clear-water's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant nmout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. SectionIV.doc Page 77 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ' The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 1 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new ' construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "11TH" or "Perchloron". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. ' 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a ' minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. SectionIV.doc Page 78 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests. shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid .Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill + Grading + Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials + Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SectionIV.doc Page 79 of 127 10/1112010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT ' The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. ' 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for fumishing all plant, labor, ' materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT ' The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. ' 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ' 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SectionlV.doc Page 80 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1 " leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 'RIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of V of Type S-I11 Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than ?W' exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of V of Type S-Ill Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will SectionlV.doc Page 81 of 127 10/11/2010 Section 1V - Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionlV.doc Page 82 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV --Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 Degree's F and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in I conformance with the specifications and drawings. SectionlV.doc Page 83 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS ' The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its ' sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY 1 The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 1 t 1 t 1 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction liniits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T 180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SectionIV.doc Page 84 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionlV.doc Page 85 of 127 10/11/2010 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS 1 All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT 25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high- density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT ' 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven- eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support 1 SectionlV.doc Page 86 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design -- Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30- wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) f- six-foot length aluminum. Section]V.doc Page 87 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" - 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SectionlV.doc Page 88 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.1 6 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. SectionlV.doc Page 89 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction SectionIV.doc Page 90 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C-View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. SectionIV.doc Page 91 of 127 10/11/2010 Section 1V - Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44:5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal farm. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURENN-PLACE PIPE LINING w 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand SectionlV.doc Page 92 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites Staies and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SectionlV.doc Page 93 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. SectionlV.doc Page 94 of 127 10/11/2010 Section 1V -Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. SectioniV.doc Page 95 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. ¦ 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer. 16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer. 18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer. '41 1'/2.-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing server. 28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer. 34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer. 42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a r bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. SectionlV_doc Page 96 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -'T'echnical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling, in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. SectionIV.doc Page 97 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -- Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the ,use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. SectionIV.doc Page 98 of 127 10/11/2010 Section ]V - Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C 150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shoterete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. Section]V.doc Page 99 of 127 10111/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type 1. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10% 7 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. SectionlV.doc Page 100 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the SectionIV.doc Page 101 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzlernan shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACT 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. 11 Section]V.doc Page 102 of 127 10/112010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 15/8 15/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 21/2 2 1 /2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressur shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). SectionlV.doc Page 103 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. I SectionlV.doc Page 104 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts_ Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material, Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SectionlV.doc Page 105 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. ?. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, I hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX r Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. SectionlV.doc Page 106 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and SectionIV.doc Page 107 of 127 10/11/2010 ?J r 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 1 1 1 1 n 1 1 t 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1 /2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications, The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. SectionlV.doc Page 108 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1 /2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi SectionIV.doc Page 109 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength 380 psi (2.62 MPa) at 100% RH (7 day cure) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) at 50% R11 ASTM C 190 Permeability 8.1x10 llcm/sec to (3 day cure) 7.6x10 cm/sec CRD 48 55 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Acuminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days SectionIV.doc Page 110 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity - <0.04 X0.06 c0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10--20 Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloro ethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor 011, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. SectionlV,doc Page 111 of 127 10/11/2010 Section 1V -Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 1 1 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. SectionlV.doc Page 112 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION Ill, ARTICLE 23 - PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the SeetionIV.doc Page 113 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System • I Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder I to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10. 17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix SectionIV.doc Page 114 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 140°F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. SectionIV.doc Page 115 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 4. 'Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative humidity. I I. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized ware core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461 H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating 1 shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4'/Z inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 '/z), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite SectionIV.doc Page 116 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A-641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC 1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging'-Pests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B-117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. SectionlV.doc Page 117 of 127 10/11/2010 ' Section IV -- Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature -Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12% SectionIV.doc Page 118 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the ]mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. Sectionlv.doc Page 119 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ' 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. 1 SectionlV.doc Page 120 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. SectionIV.doc Page 121 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. r 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. SectionlV.doc Page 122 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will famish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 64.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days Of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. SectionIV.doc Page 123 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be ' performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. ' 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for SectionlV.doc Page 124 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. Section(V.doc Page 125 of 127 10/11/2010 1 ?J 1 i? Section 1V -Technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (lastest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand- cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. SectionIV.doc Page 126 of 127 10/11/2010 Section 1V -Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: • Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, SectionlV.doc Page 127 of 127 10/11/2010 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of ' existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All ' mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 1 t LI 69.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM'S (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SectionIV_doc Page 128 of 127 10111/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing band tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by SectionIV.doc Page 129 of 127 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said ' root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. ' Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or r burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may ' require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or ' under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and ' other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. SectionlV.doc Page 130 of 127 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as:.Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.orfy-/TR/I 999/WAI-WEBCONTENT, ..19990505/ h!tp-//www.section508.gov/ In particular. use of variable-width tables. user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. 5ectionlV.doc Page 131 of 127 10/11/2010 Section 1V -"technical Specifications 1 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. M 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages ' up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 1 SectionlV.doc Page 132 of 127 10/11/2010 2379 Broad Street, Brooksville, Florida 34604-6899 Water Managem ent District (352) 796-7211 or 1-800-423-1476 (FL only) 6103 FL l SUNCOM 628 4150 TDD l 1 800 231 on y) ( on y - - - - *,, o ^ry'?CLM?? On the Internet at WaterMatters.org Bartow Service Office Sarasota Service Office Tampa Service Office An Equal 170 Century Boulevard 6750 Fruitville Road 7601 Highway 301 North Opportunity Bartow, Florida 33830-7700 Sarasota. Florida 34240-9711 Tampa, Florida 33637-6759 Employer (863) 534-1448 or (941) 377-3722 or (813)9W7481 or 1-800-492-7862 (FL only) 1-800-320-3503 (FL only) 1-800-836-0797 (FL only) April 22, 2011 City of Clearwater 100 South Myrtle Avenue / Leroy Chin Clearwater, FL 33756 Subject: Notice of Final Agency Action for Approval ERP General Construction Modification Project Name: Northwest Recreation and Aquatic Center App ID/Permit No: 646895 / 44022757.001 County: PINELLAS Sec/Twp/Rge: S101T29S/R15E Dear Permittee(s): This letter constitutes notice of Final Agency Action for approval of the permit referenced above. Final approval is contingent upon no objection to the District's action being received by the District within the time frames described below. You or any person whose substantial interests are affected by the District's action regarding a permit may request an administrative hearing in accordance with Sections 120.569 and 120.57, Florida Statutes, (F.S.), and Chapter 28-106, Florida Administrative Code, (F.A.C.), of the Uniform Rules of Procedure. A request for hearing must. (1) explain how the substantial interests of each person requesting the heating will be affected by the District's action, or proposed action, (2) state all material facts disputed by the person requesting the hearing or state that there are no disputed facts, and (3) otherwise comply with Chapter 28-106, F.A.C. Copies of Sections 28-106.201 and 28-106.301, F.A.C. are enclosed for your reference. A request for hearing must be filed with (received by) the Agency Clerk of the District at the District's Brooksville address within 21 days of receipt of this notice. Receipt is deemed to be the fifth day after the date on which this notice is deposited in the United States mail. Failure to file a request for hearing within this time period shall constitute a waiver of any right you or such person may have to request a hearing under Sections 120.569 and 120.57, F.S. Mediation pursuant to Section 120.573, F.S., to settle an administrative dispute regarding the District's action in this matter is not available prior to the filing of a request for hearing. Enclosed is a "Noticing Packet" that provides information regarding the District Rule 40D-1.1010, F.A.C., which addresses the notification of persons whose substantial interests may be affected by the District's action in this matter. The packet contains guidelines on how to provide notice of the District's action, and a notice that you may use. Approved construction plans are part of the permit, and construction must be in accordance with these plans. These drawings are available for viewing or downloading at www. watermatters.org. 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 App ID/Permit No-646895 / 44022757.001 Page 2 April 22, 2011 If you have questions, please contact Robin Mcgill, at the Tampa Service Office, extension 2072. For assistance with environmental concerns, please contact Chastity Collins, extension 2092. Sincerely, Alba E. Mfis, P.E. Authorized Signature Director, Tampa Regulation Department Enclosures: Approved Permit w/Conditions Attached Statement of Completion Notice of Authorization to Commence Construction Noticing Packet (42.00-039) Section 28-106.201 and 28-106.301, F.A.C cc: Brian A. Barker, P.E., Deuel & Associates SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCE GENERAL CONSTRUCTION MODIFICATION PERMIT NO.44022757.001 EXPIRATION DATE: April 22, 2016 PERMIT ISSUE DATE: April 22, 2011 This permit is issued under the provisions of Chapter 373, Florida Statutes, (F.S.), and the Rules contained in Chapters 40D-4 and 40D-40, Florida Administrative Code, (F.A.C.). The permit authorizes the Permittee to proceed with the construction of a surface water management system in accordance with the information outlined herein and shown by the application, approved drawings, plans, specifications, and other documents, attached hereto and kept on file at the Southwest Florida Water Management District (District). Unless otherwise stated by permit specific condition, permit issuance constitutes certification of compliance with state water quality standards under Section 401 of the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. 1341. All construction, operation and maintenance of the surface water management system authorized by this permit shall occur in compliance with Florida Statutes and Administrative Code and the conditions of this permit. PROJECT NAME: Northwest Recreation and Aquatic Center GRANTED TO: City of Clearwater 100 South Myrtle Avenue / Leroy Chin Clearwater, FL 33756 OTHER PERMITTEES: N/A ABSTRACT: This permit modification is for the addition to an existing building at the recreation center. Runoff from the project area will drain to the existing pond for treatment and attenuation. The proposed addition was accounted for in the original design of the surface water management system. OP. & MAIN. ENTITY: City of Clearwater OTHER OP. & MAIN. ENTITY: N/A COUNTY: PINELLAS SEC1TWP/RGE: S10/T29S/R15E TOTAL ACRES OWNED 5.68 OR UNDER CONTROL: PROJECT SIZE: 0.17 Acres LAND USE: Government DATE APPLICATION FILED: March 21, 2011 AMENDED DATE: N/A 3 1 ' I. Water Quantity/Quality Runoff from the project area will drain to the existing pond (Pond 1) for treatment and attenuation. The water quality treatment method is effluent filtration, A mixing zone is not required, A variance is not required. 11. 100-Year Floodplain Encroachment Compensation Compensation Encroachment (Acre-Feet of fill) (Acre-Feet of Type Result' (feet) excavation 0.00 0.00 No Encroachment N/A 'Depth of change in flood stage (level) over existing receiving water stage resulting from floodplain encroachment caused by a project that claims Minimal Impact type of compensation. 1 III. Environmental Considerations No wetlands or other surface waters exist within the project area. A regulatory conservation easement is not required. t A proprietary conservation easement is not required. 1 1 1 1 Specific Conditions 1. If the ownership of the project area covered by the subject permit is divided, with someone other than the Permittee becoming the owner of part of the project area, this permit shall terminate, pursuant to Rule 40D-1.6105, F.A.C. In such situations, each land owner shall obtain a permit (which may be a modification of this permit) for the land owned by that person. This condition shall not apply to the division and sale of lots or units in residential subdivisions or condominiums. 2. Unless specified otherwise herein, two copies of all information and reports required by this permit shall be submitted to the Regulation Department at the District Service Office that services this permit. The permit number, title of report or information and event (for recurring report or information submittal) shall be identified on all information and reports submitted. 3. The Permittee shall retain the design engineer, or other professional engineer registered in Florida, to conduct on-site observations of construction and assist with the as-built certification requirements of this project. The Permittee shall inform the District in writing of the name, address and phone number of the professional engineer so employed. This information shall be submitted prior to construction. 4. Within 30 days after completion of construction of the permitted activity, the Permittee shall submit to the Tampa Service Office a written statement of completion and certification by a registered professional engineer or other appropriate individual as authorized by law, utilizing the required Statement of Completion and Request for Transfer to Operation Entity form identified in Chapter 40D-1, F.A.C., and signed, dated, and sealed as-built drawings. The as-built drawings shall identify any deviations from the approved construction drawings. 5. The District reserves the right, upon prior notice to the Permittee, to conduct on-site research to assess the pollutant removal efficiency of the surface water management system. The Permittee may be required to cooperate in this regard by allowing on-site access by District representatives, by allowing the installation and operation of testing and monitoring equipment, and by allowing other assistance measures as needed on site. This modification, Construction Permit No.44022757.001, amends the previously issued Construction Permit No. 44022757.000, and adds conditions. All other original permit conditions remain in effect. The District, upon prior notice to the Permittee, may conduct on-site inspections to assess the effectiveness of the erosion control barriers and other measures employed to prevent violations of state water quality standards and avoid downstream impacts. Such barriers or other measures should control discharges, erosion, and sediment transport during construction and thereafter. The District will also determine any potential environmental problems that may develop as a result of leaving or removing the barriers and other measures during construction or after construction of the project has been completed. The Permittee must provide any remedial measures that are needed. This permit is issued based upon the design prepared by the Permittee's consultant. If at any time it is determined by the District that the Conditions for Issuance of Permits in Rules 40D-4.301 and 40D-4.302, F.A.G., have not been met, upon written notice by the District, the Permittee shall obtain a permit modification and perform and construction necessary thereunder to correct any deficiencies in the system design or construction to meet District rule criteria. The Permittee is advised that the correction of deficiencies may require re-construction of the surface water management system. 1 J 1 I GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. The general conditions attached hereto as Exhibit "A" are hereby incorporated into this permit by reference and the Permittee shall comply with them. 1 I- L t P Alba E. Mils, P.E. Authorized Signature EXHIBIT A GENERAL CONDITIONS: All activities shall be implemented as set forth in the plans, specifications and performance criteria as approved by this permit. Any deviation from the permitted activity and the conditions for undertaking that activity shall constitute a violation of this permit. 2. This permit or a copy thereof, complete with all conditions, attachments, exhibits, and modifications, shall be kept at the work site of the permitted activity. The complete permit shall be available for review at the work site upon request by District staff. The permittee shall require the contractor to review the complete permit prior to commencement of the activity authorized by this permit. 3. For general permits authorizing incidental site activities, the following limiting general conditions shall also apply: a. If the decision to issue the associated individual permit is not final within 90 days of issuance of the incidental site activities permit, the site must be restored by the permittee within 90 days after notification by the District. Restoration must be completed by re-contouring the disturbed site to previous grades and slopes re-establishing and maintaining suitable vegetation and erosion control to provide stabilized hydraulic conditions. The period for completing restoration may be extended if requested by the permittee and determined by the District to be warranted due to adverse weather conditions or other good cause. In addition, the permittee shall institute stabilization measures for erosion and sediment control as soon as practicable, but in no case more than 7 days after notification by the District. b. The incidental site activities are commenced at the permittee's own risk. The Governing Board will not consider the monetary costs associated with the incidental site activities or any potential restoration costs in making its decision to approve or deny the individual environmental resource permit application. Issuance of this permit shall not in any way be construed as commitment to issue the associated individual environmental resource permit. 4. Activities approved by this permit shall be conducted in a manner which does not cause violations of state water quality standards. The permittee shall implement best management practices for erosion and a pollution control to prevent violation of state water quality standards. Temporary erosion control shall be implemented prior to and during construction, and permanent control measures shall be completed within 7 days of any construction activity. Turbidity barriers shall be installed and maintained at all locations where the possibility of transferring suspended solids into the receiving waterbody exists due to the permitted work. Turbidity barriers shall remain in place at all locations until construction is completed and soils are stabilized and vegetation has been established- Thereafter the permittee shall be responsible for the removal of the barriers. The permittee shall correct any erosion or shoaling that causes adverse impacts to the water resources. 5. Water quality data for the water discharged from the permittee's property or into the surface waters of the state shall be submitted to the District as required by the permit. Analyses shall be performed according to procedures outlined in the current edition of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater by the American Public Health Association or Methods for Chemical Analyses of Water and Wastes by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. If water quality data are required, the permittee shall provide data as required on volumes of water discharged, including total volume discharged during the days of sampling and total monthly volume dis-charged from the property or into surface waters of the state. 6. District staff must be notified in advance of any proposed construction dewatering. If the dewatering activity is likely to result in offsite discharge or sediment transport into wetlands or surface waters, a written dewatering plan must either have been submitted and approved with the permit application or submitted to the District as a permit prior to the dewatering event as a permit modification. A water use permit may be required prior to any use exceeding the thresholds in Chapter 40D-2, F.A.C. 1 7. Stabilization measures shall be initiated for erosion and sediment control on disturbed areas as soon as practicable in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased, but in no case more than 7 days after the construction activity in that portion of the site has temporarily or permanently ceased. 8. Off-site discharges during construction and development shall be made only through the facilities authorized by this permit. Water discharged from the project shall be through structures having a mechanism suitable for regulating upstream stages. Stages may be subject to operating schedules satisfactory to the District. 9. The permittee shall complete construction of all aspects of the surface water management system, including wetland compensation (grading, mulching, planting), water quality treatment features, and discharge control facilities prior to beneficial occupancy or use of the development being served by this system. 10. The following shall be properly abandoned and/or removed in accordance with the applicable regulations: a. Any existing wells in the path of construction shall be properly plugged and abandoned by a licensed well contractor. b. Any existing septic tanks on site shall be abandoned at the beginning of construction. ' c. Any existing fuel storage tanks and fuel pumps shall be removed at the beginning of construction. 11. All surface water management systems shall be operated to conserve water in order to maintain environmental quality and resource protection; to increase the efficiency of transport, application and use; to decrease waste; to minimize unnatural runoff from the property and to minimize dewatering of offsite property. 12. At least 48 hours prior to commencement of activity authorized by this permit, the permittee shall submit to the District a written notification of commencement indicating the actual start date and the expected completion date. 13. Each phase or independent portion of the permitted system must be completed in accordance with the permitted plans and permit conditions prior to the occupation of the site or operation of site infrastructure located within the area served by that portion or phase of the system. Each phase or independent portion of the system must be completed in accordance with the permitted plans and permit conditions prior to transfer of responsibility for operation and maintenance of that phase or portion of the system to a local government or other responsible entity. 14. Within 30 days after completion of construction of the permitted activity, the permittee shall submit a written statement of completion and certification by a registered professional engineer or other appropriate individual as authorized by law, utilizing the required Statement of Completion and Request for Transfer to Operation ?. Entity form identified in Chapter 40D-1. F.A.C. Additionally, if deviation from the approved drawings are discovered during the certification process the certification must be accompanied by a copy of the approved permit drawings with deviations noted. r 15. This permit is valid only for the specific processes, operations and designs indicated on the approved drawings or exhibits submitted in support of the permit application. Any substantial deviation from the approved drawings, exhibits, specifications or permit conditions, including construction within the total land area but outside the approved project area(s), may constitute grounds for revocation or enforcement action by the District, unless a modification has been applied for and approved. Examples of substantial deviations include excavation of ponds, ditches or sump areas deeper than shown on the approved plans. 16. The operation phase of this permit shall not become effective until the permittee has complied with the requirements of the conditions herein, the District determines the system to be in compliance with the permitted plans, and the entity approved by the District accepts responsibility for operation and maintenance of the system. The permit may not be transferred to the operation and maintenance entity approved by the t District until the operation phase of the permit becomes effective. Following inspection and approval of the permitted system by the District, the permittee shall request transfer of the permit to the responsible operation and maintenance entity approved by the District, if different from the permittee. Until a transfer is approved by the District, the permittee shall be liable for compliance with the terms of the permit. 17. Should any other regulatory agency require changes to the permitted system, the District shall be notified of the changes prior to implementation so that a determination can be made whether a permit modification is required. 18. This permit does not eliminate the necessity to obtain any required federal, state, local and special District authorizations including a determination of the proposed activities' compliance with the applicable comprehensive plan prior to the start of any activity approved by this permit. 19. This permit does not convey to the permittee or create in the permittee any property right, or any interest in real property, nor does it authorize any entrance upon or activities on property which is not owned or controlled by the permittee, or convey any rights or privileges other than those specified in the permit and Chapter 40D-4 or Chapter 40D-40, F.A.C. 20. The permittee shall hold and save the District harmless from any and all damages, claims, or liabilities which may arise by reason of the activities authorized by the permit or any use of the permitted system. 21. Any delineation of the extent of a wetland or other surface water submitted as part of the permit application, including plans or other supporting documentation, shall not be considered binding unless a specific condition of this permit or a formal determination under section 373.421(2), F.S., provides otherwise. 22. The permittee shall notify the District in writing within 30 days of any sale, conveyance, or other transfer of ownership or control of the permitted system or the real property at which the permitted system is located. All transfers of ownership or transfers of a permit are subject to the requirements of Rule 40D-4.351, F.A.G. The permittee transferring the permit shall remain liable for any corrective actions that may be required as a result of any permit violations prior to such sale, conveyance or other transfer. 23. Upon reasonable notice to the permittee, District authorized staff with proper identification shall have permission to enter, inspect, sample and test the system to insure conformity with District rules, regulations and conditions of the permits. 24. If historical or archaeological artifacts are discovered at any time on the project site, the permittee shall immediately notify the District and the Florida Department of State, Division of Historical Resources. 25. The permittee shall immediately notify the District in writing of any previously submitted information that is later discovered to be inaccurate. 1 PART II HEARINGS INVOLVING PART 111 PROCEEDINGS AND HEARINGS DISPUTED ISSUES OF MATERIAL. FACT NOT INVOLVING DISPUTED ISSUES OF MATERIAL FACT 28-106.201 Initiation of Proceedings. 28-106.301 Initiation of Proceedings (1) Unless otherwise provided by statute, and except for (1) Unless otherwise provided by statute and except for agency enforcement and disciplinary actions that shall be agency enforcement and disciplinary actions initiated under initiated under Rule 28-106.2015, F.A.C., initiation of subsection 28-106.2015(1), F.A.C., initiation of a proceeding proceedings shall be made by written petition to the agency shall be made by written petition to the agency responsible responsible for rendering final agency action- The term for rendering final agency action. The term 'petition" includes "petition" includes any document that requests an evidentiary proceeding and asserts the existence of a disputed issue of any document which requests a proceeding. Each petition shall be legible and on 8 1/2 by 11 inch white paper or on a form material fact. Each petition shall be legible and on 8 1/2 by 11 provided by the agency. Unless printed, the impression shall be inch white paper. Unless printed, the impression shall be on one on one side of the paper only and lines shall be doubled-spaced. side of the paper only and lines shall be doublespaced. (2) All petitions filed under these rules shall contain: (2) All petitions filed under these rules shall contain: (a) The name and address of each agency affected and (a) The name and address of each agency affected and each each agency's file or identification number, if known; agency's file or identification number, if known; (b) The name, address, and telephone number of the (b) The name, address, and telephone number of the petitioner; the name, address, and telephone numbar of the petitioner; the name, address, and telephone number of the petitioner's representative, if any, which shall be the address petitioner's representative, if any, which shall be the address for for service purposes during the course of the proceeding; and service purposes during the course of the proceeding; and an an explanation of how the petitioner's substantial interests will be explanation of how the petitioner's substantial interests will be affected by the agency determination; affected by the agency determination; (c) An explanation of how the petitioner's substantial (c) A statement of when and how the petitioner received interests will be affected by the agency determination; notice of the agency decision; (d) A statement of when and how the petitioner received (d) A statement of all disputed issues of material fact. If there notice of the agency decision; are none, the petition must so indicate; (e) A concise statement of the ulti mate facts alleged, (e) A concise statement of the ultimate facts alleged, including the specific facts the petitioner contends warrant including the specific facts the petitioner contends warrant reversal or modification of the agency's proposed action; reversal or modification of the agency's proposed action; (f) A statement of the specific rules or statutes that the (f) A statement of the specific rules or statutes the petitioner contends require reversal or modification of the petitioner contends require reversal or modification of the agency's proposed action; agency's proposed action, including an explanation of how the (g) A statement of the relief sought by the petitioner, alleged facts relate to the specific rules or statutes; and stating precisely the action petitioner wishes the agency to (g) A statement of the relief sought by the petitioner, stating take with respect to the agency's proposed action; and precisely the action petitioner wishes the agency to take with (h) A statement that no material facts are in dispute. respect to the agency's proposed action. (3) Upon receipt of a petition involving disputed issues of Specific Authority 120.54(5) FS. Law Implemented 120.54(5), 1 material fact, the agency shall grant or deny the petition, and if granted shall, unless otherwise provided by law, refer 120.569, 120.57 FS. History-New 4-1-97, Amended 9-17-98. 1-15-07, 12-24-07. the matter to the Division of Administrative Hearings with a request that an administrative law judge be assigned to conduct the hearing. The request shall be accompanied by a copy of the petition and a copy of the notice of agency action. Specific Authority 120.54(3), (5) FS. Law Implemented 120.54(5), 120.569, 120.57 FS. History-New 4-1-97, Amended 9-17-98, 1-15-07. 1 11 1 2379 Broad Street, Brooksville, Florida 34604-6899 Water Management District (352) 796-7211 or 1-800-323-1476 (FL only) SUNCO l a M 628-4150 TDD only 1-800-231-6103 (FL on y) O th I pi n e Internet at: WaterMatters.org -EM K O- Bartow Service office Sarasota Service Office Tampa Service Office An Equal 170 Century Boulevard 6750 Fruitville Road 7601 Highway 301 North Opportunity Bartow, Florida 33830-7700 Sarasota. Florida 34240-9711 Tampa, Florida 33637.6759 Employer (863) 534-1448 or (941) 377-3722 or (813) 985-7481 or 1-800-492-7862 (FL only) 1-800-320-3503 (FL only) 1-800-836-0797 (FL only) NOTICING PACKET PUBLICATION INFORMATION PLEASE SEE THE NEXT PAGE OF THIS NOTICE FOR A LIST OF FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ) The District's action regarding the issuance or denial of a permit, a petition or qualification for an exemption only becomes closed to future legal challenges from members of the public ("third parties"), if 1.) "third parties" have been properly notified of the District's action regarding the permit or exemption, and 2.) no "third party" objects to the District's action within a specific period of time following the notification. Notification of "third parties" is provided through publication of certain information in a newspaper of general circulation in the county or counties where the proposed activities are to occur. Publication of notice informs "third parties" of their right to challenge the District's action. If proper notice is provided by publication, "third parties" have a 21-day time limit in which to file a petition opposing the District's action. A shorter 14-day time limit applies to District action regarding Environmental Resource Permits linked with an authorization to use Sovereign Submerged Lands. However, if no notice to "third parties" is published, there is no time limit to a party's right to challenge the District's action, The District has not published a notice to "third parties" that it has taken or intends to take final action on your application. If you want to ensure that the period of time in which a petition opposing the District's action regarding your application is limited to the time frames stated above, you must publish, at your own expense, a notice in a newspaper of general circulation. A copy of the Notice of Agency Action the District uses for publication and guidelines for publishing are included in this packet. Guidelines for Publishing a Notice of Agency Action 1. Prepare a notice for publication in the newspaper. The District's Notice of Agency Action, included with this packet, contains all of the information that is required for proper noticing. However, you are responsible for ensuring that the form and the content of your notice comply with the applicable statutory provisions. 2. Your notice must be published in accordance with Chapter 50, Florida Statutes. A copy of the statute is enclosed. 3. Select a newspaper that is appropriate considering the location of the activities proposed in your application, and contact the newspaper for further information regarding their procedures for publishing. 4. You only need to publish the notice for one day. 5. Obtain an "affidavit of publication" from the newspaper after your notice is published. 6. Immediately upon receipt send the ORIGINAL affidavit to the District at the address below, for the file of record. Retain a copy of the affidavit for your records. Southwest Florida Water Management District Records and Data Supervisor 2379 Broad Street Brooksville, Florida 34604-6899 Note: If you are advertising a notice of the District's proposed action, and the District's final action is different, publication of an additional notice may be necessary to prevent future legal challenges. If you need additional assistance, please contact us at ext. 4360, at the Brooksville number listed above. (Your question may be on the FAQ list). 12 1 FAQ ABOUT NOTICING 1. Q. Do I have to do this noticing, and what is this notice for? A. You do not have to do this noticing, unless you are issued a permit classified as an "Individual". You need to publish a notice if you want to ensure that a "third party" cannot challenge the District's action on your permit, exemption, or petition at some future date. If you choose not to publish, there is no time limit to a third party's right to challenge the District's action. 2. Q. What do I need to send to the newspaper? A. The enclosed one page notice form entitled "Notice of Final Agency Action (or Proposed Agency Action) By The Southwest Florida Water Management District." You must fill in the blanks before sending it. 3. Q. Do I have to use the notice form, or can I make up my own form? A. You do not have to use our form. However, your notice must contain all information that is in the form. 4. Q. Do I send the newspaper the whole form (one page) or just the top portion that has blanks? A. Send the full page form which includes the NOTICE OF RIGHTS section on the bottom half. 5. Q. The section 50.051, F.S. (enclosed) proof of publication form of uniform affidavit has blanks in the text. Do I fill in these blanks and send that to the newspaper? A. No. That section shows the affidavit the newspaper will send you. They will 511 in the blanks. 6. Q. If someone objects, is my permit or exemption no good? A. If you publish a notice and a "third party" files a request for administrative hearing within the allotted time, the matter is referred to an administrative hearing. While the case is pending, generally, you may not proceed with activities under the challenged agency action. When the hearing is complete, the administrative law judge's (ALJ) recommendation is returned to the District Governing Board, and the Governing Board will take final action on the ALJ's recommendation. There is no time limit for a "third party" to object and file a request for administrative hearing if you do not publish a notice. 1 i r r r 1 13 CHAPTER 50, FLORIDA STATUTES LEGAL AND OFFICIAL ADVERTISEMENTS 50.011 Where and in what language legal notices to be published. 50.021 Publication when no newspaper in county. 50,031 Newspapers in which legal notices and process may be published. 50.041 Proof of publication; uniform affidavits required. 50.051 Proof of publication; form of uniform affidavit. 50.06 Amounts chargeable. 50.0711 Court docket fund; service charges; publications. 50.011 Where and In what language legal notices to be published.- Whenever by statute an official or legal advertisement or a publication, or notice in a newspaper has been or is directed or permitted in the nature of or in lieu of process, or for constructive service, or in initiating, assuming, reviewing, exercising or enforcing jurisdiction or power, or for any purpose, including all legal notices and advertisements of sheriffs and tax collectors, the contemporaneous and continuous intent and meaning of such legislation all and singular, existing or repealed, Is and has been and is hereby declared to be and to have been, and the rule of interpretation is and has been, a publication in a newspaper printed and published periodically once a week or oftener, containing at least 25 percent of its words in the English language, entered or qualified to be admitted and entered as periodicals matter at a post office in the county where published, for sale to the public generally, available to the public generally for the publication of official or other notices and customarily containing information of a public character or of interest or of value to the residents or owners of property in the county where published, or of interest or of value to the general public. History,-•s. 2, ch. 3022, 1877; RS 1296; GS 1727; s. 1, ch. 5610, 1907; RGS 2942; s. 1, ch. 12104, 1927; CGL 4666, 4901; s. 1, ch. 63-387; S. 6, ch. 67-254; s. 21, ch. 99-2. Nate.-Former s. 49.01. 50.021 Publication when no newspaper in county. When any law, or order or decree of court, shall direct advertisements to be made in any county and there be no newspaper published in the said county, the advertisement may be made by posting three copies thereof in three different places in said county, one of which shall be at the front door of the courthouse, and by publication in the nearest county in which a newspaper is published. History: RS 1297; GS 1728; RGS 2943; CGL 4667; s. 6, ch. 67-254. Note.-Former s. 49.02. 50,031 Newspapers in which legal notices and process may be published. No notice or publication required to be published in a newspaper in the nature of or in lieu of process of any kind, nature, character or description provided for under any law of the state, whether heretofore or hereafter enacted, and whether pertaining to constructive service, or the initiating, assuming, reviewing, exercising or enforcing jurisdiction or power, by any court in this state, or any notice of sale of property, real or personal, for taxes, state, county or municipal, or sheriff's, guardian's or administrator's or any sale made pursuant to any judicial order, decree or statute or any other publication or notice pertaining to any affairs of the state, or any county, municipality or other political subdivision thereof, shall be deemed to have been published in accordance with the statutes providing for such publication, unless the same shall have been published for the prescribed period of time required for such publication, in a newspaper which at the time of such publication shall have been in existence for 1 year and shall have been entered as periodicals matter at a post office in the county where published, or in a newspaper which is a direct successor of a newspaper which together have been so published; provided, however, that nothing herein contained shall apply where in any county there shall be no newspaper in existence which shall have been published for the length or time above prescribed. No legal publication of any kind, nature or description, as herein defined, shall be valid or binding or held to be in compliance with the statutes providing for such publication unless the same shall have been published in accordance with the provisions of this section. Proof of such publication shall be made by uniform affidavit. History.-ss. 1-3, ch. 14830, 1931; CGL 1936 Supp. 4274(1); s. 7, ch. 22858, 1945; s. 6, ch. 67-254; s. 1, ch. 74-221; s. 22, ch. 99-2. Note.-Former s. 49.03. 50.041 Proof of publication; uniform affidavits required. (1) All affidavits of publishers of newspapers (or their official representatives) made for the purpose of establishing proof of publication of public notices or legal advertisements shall be uniform throughout the state. (2) Each such affidavit shall be printed upon white bond paper containing at least 25 percent rag material and shall be 8.5 inches in width and of convenient length, not less than 5.5 inches. A white margin of not less than 2.5 inches shall be left at the right side of each affidavit form and upon or in this space shall be substantially pasted a clipping which shall be a true copy of the public notice or legal advertisement for which proof is executed. (3) In all counties having a population in excess of 450,000 according to the latest official decennial census, in addition to the charges which are now or may hereafter be established by law for the publication of every official notice or legal advertisement, there may be a charge not to exceed $2 for the preparation and execution of each such proof of publication or publisher's affidavit. History.-s. 1, ch. 19290, 1939; CGL 1940 Supp. 4668(1); s. 1, ch. 63-49; s. 26, ch. 67-254; s. 1, ch. 76-58. Note.-Former s. 49.04. 50.051 Proof of publication; form of uniform affidavit.- The printed form upon which all such affidavits establishing proof of publication are to be executed shall be substantially as follows: 14 NAME OF NEWSPAPER Published (Weekly or Daily) (Town or City) (County) FLORIDA STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Before the undersigned authority personally appeared , who on oath says that he or she is of the , a newspaper published at in County, Florida; that the attached copy of advertisement, being a in the matter of in the Court, was published in said newspaper in the issues of Affiant further says that the said is a newspaper published at in said County. Florida, and that the said newspaper has heretofore been continuously published in said County. Florida, each and has been entered as periodicals matter at the post office in , in said County, Florida, for a period of 1 year next preceding the first publication of the attached copy of advertisement; and affiant further says that he or she has neither paid nor promised any person, firm or corporation any discount, rebate, commission or refund for the purpose of securing this advertisement for publication in the said newspaper. Swom to and subscribed before me this day of (year), by , who is personally known to me or who has produced (type of identification) as identification. (Signature of Notary Public)_ (Print, Type, or Stamp Commissioned Name of Notary Public)_ (Notary Public)- History.-s. 2, ch. 19290, 1939; CGL 1940 Supp. 4668(2); s. 6, ch. 67-254; s. 1, ch. 93-62; s. 291, ch. 95-147; s.23, ch 99-2; s. 3, ch. 99-6. Note.-Former s. 49.05. 50.061 Amounts chargeable,, (1) The publisher of any newspaper publishing any and all official public notices or legal advertisements shall charge therefore the rates specified in this section without rebate, commission or refund. (2) The charge for publishing each such official public notice or legal advertisement shall be 70 cents per square inch for the first insertion and 40 cents per square inch for each subsequent insertion, except that: (a) In all counties having a population of more than 304,000 according to the latest official decennial census, the charge for publishing each such official public notice or legal advertisement shall be 80 cents per square inch for the first insertion and 60 cents per square inch for each subsequent insertion. (b) In all counties having a population of more than 450,000 according to the latest official decennial census, the charge for publishing each such official public notice or legal advertisement shall be 95 cents per square inch for the first insertion and 75 cents per square inch for each subsequent insertion. (3) Where the regular established minimum commercial rate per square inch of the newspaper publishing such official public notices or legal advertisements is in excess of the rate herein stipulated, said minimum commercial rate per square inch may be charged for all such legal advertisements or official public notices for each insertion, except that a governmental agency publishing an official public notice of legal advertisement may procure publication by soliciting and accepting written bids from newspapers published in the county, in which case the specified charges in this section do not apply. (4) All official public notices and legal advertisements shall be charged and paid for on the basis of 6-point type on 6-point body, unless otherwise specified by statute. (5) Any person violating a provision of this section, either by allowing or accepting any rebate, commission, or refund, commits a misdemeanor of the second degree, punishable as provided in s. 775.082 or s. 775.083, (6) Failure to charge the rates prescribed by this section shall in no way affect the validity of any official public notice or legal advertisement and shall not subject same to legal attack upon such grounds. History.-s. 3, ch. 3022,1877; RS 1298; GS 1729; RGS 2944; s. 1, ch. 12215, 1927; CGL 4668; ss. 1, 2, 2A, 2B, ch. 20264, 1941; s. 1, ch. 23663, 1947; s. 1, ch. 57-160; s. 1, ch. 63-50; s. 1, ch. 65-569; s. 6, ch. 67-254; s. 15, ch. 71-136; s. 35, ch. 73-332; s. 1, ch. 90-279. Note.-Former s. 49.06. 50.0711 Court docket fund; service charges; publications.- (1) The clerk of the court in each county may establish a court docket fund for the purpose of paying the cost of publication of the fact of the filing of any civil case in the circuit court of the county by the style and of the calendar relating to such cases. This court docket fund shall be funded by $1 mandatory court cast for all civil actions, suits, or proceedings filed in the circuit court of the county. The clerk shall maintain such funds separate and apart, and the proceeds from this court cost shall not be diverted to any other fund or for any purpose other than that established in this section. The clerk of the court shall dispense the fund to the designated record newspaper in the county on a quarterly basis. (2) A newspaper qualified under the terms of s. 50.011 shall be designated as the record newspaper for such publication by an order of the majority of the judges in the judicial circuit in which such county is located, and such order shall be filed and recorded with the clerk of the circuit court for such county. The designated record newspaper may be changed at the end of any fiscai year ul the county by a majority vote of the judges of the judicial circuit of the county ordering such change 30 days prior to the end of the fiscal year, notice of which order shall be given to the previously designated record newspaper. (3) The publishers of any designated record newspapers receiving payment from this court docket fund shall publish, without additional charge, the fact of the filing of any civil case, suit, or action filed in such county in the circuit. Such publication shall be in accordance with a schedule agreed upon between the record newspaper and the clerk of the court in such county. (4) The publishers of any designated record newspapers receiving revenues from the court docket fund established in subsection (1) shall, without charge, accept legal advertisements for the purpose of service of process by publication under s. 49.011(4), (10), and (11) when such publication is required of persons authorized to proceed as indigent persons under s. 57.081. History.--s. 46. ch. 2004.265. 1 1 15 NOTICE OF FINAL AGENCY ACTION BY THE SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT Notice is given that the District's Final Agency Action is approval of the ERP STANDARD GENERAL on_ 0.17 acres to serve PARKS AND RECREATION AREAS known as Northwest Recreation and Aquatic- Center. The project is located in PINELLAS County, Section/Township/Range S10/T29S/R15E . The permit applicant is City of Clearwater who address is - 100 South Myrtle Avenue / Leroy Chin_ Clearwater, FL 33756, The permit No. is 44022757.001. The file(s) pertaining to the project referred to above is available for inspection Monday through Friday except for legal holidays, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., at the Southwest Florida Water Management District 7601 Highway 301 North, Tampa, Florida_ 33637=6739. NOTICE OF RIGHTS Any person whose substantial interests are affected by the District's action regarding this permit may request an administrative hearing in accordance with Sections 120.569 and 120.57, Florida Statutes (F.S.), and Chapter 28-106, Florida Administrative Code (F.A.C.), of the Uniform Rules of Procedure. A request for hearing must (1) explain how the substantial interests of each person requesting the hearing will be affected by the District's action, or final action; (2) state all material facts disputed by each person requesting the hearing or state that there are no disputed facts; and (3) otherwise comply with Chapter 28-106, F.A.C. A request for hearing must be filed with and received by the Agency Clerk of the District at the District's Brooksville address, 2379 Broad Street, Brooksville, FL 34604-6899 within 21 days of publication of this notice (or within14 days for an Environmental Resource Permit with Proprietary Authorization for the use of Sovereign Submerged Lands). Failure to file a request for hearing within this time period shall constitute a waiver of any right such person may have to request a hearing under Sections 120.569 and 120.57,F.S. Because the administrative hearing process is designed to formulate final agency action, the filing of a petition means that the District's final action may be different from the position taken by it in this notice of final agency action. Persons whose substantial interests will be affected by any such final decision of the District on the application have the right to petition to become a party to the proceeding, in accordance with the requirements set forth above. Mediation pursuant to Section 120.573, F.S., to settle an administrative dispute regarding the District's final action in this matter is not available prior to the filing of a request for hearing. 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I r QUALIFICATION APPLICATION OF PROSPECTIVE BIDDER CITY OF CLEARWATER CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS TO: City of Clearwater Engineering Dept./Construction Division Attn: Alice Eckman, Construction Specialist 100 So. Myrtle Ave., Ste #220 Clearwater, Florida 33756 or (PO Box 4748, Clearwater, FL. 33758-4748) DATE: PURPOSE: To provide the City with reasonable assurance that the prospective bidder on City of Clearwater formal construction contracts has the financial assets, resources, work force, and work experience to successfully complete contemplated construction contract agreements with the City. CONTRACTOR FIRM NAME: BUSINESS ADDRESS: CITY - STATE - ZIP CODE: PHONE NUMBER: FAX NUMBER: E-MAIL ADDRESS: TYPE OF ORGANIZATION: (Individual, Corporation, Partnership, etc_) LIST ALL PRINCIPALS OF ORGANIZATION: (President, Vice-President, Secretary-Treasurer, Partner, etc.) DATE ORGANIZATION BEGAN UNDER PRESENT NAME: OTHER NAMES AND DATES UNDER WHICH ORGANIZATION EXISTED: REFERENCES: 1 1 1 1 CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE NUMBER: INDIVIDUAL HOLDING LICENSE: ISSUING AUTHORITY: CLASSIFICATION OF LICENSE: HAS YOUR FIRM EVER FAILED TO COMPLETE WORK AWARDED TO YOU? IF SO, WHERE AND WHY? NUMBER OF FULL TIME EMPLOYEE'S DIRECTLY ON APPLICANTS PAYROLL: PRESENT VALUE OF AND GENERAL TYPE OF ALL CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT DIRECTLY OWNED BY THE APPLICANT (INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MOST RECENT FINANCIAL STATEMENT & INCLUDE LONG TERM LEASE/PURCHASE EQUIPMENT): The pre-qualification to bid limitation is an amount of dollars equal to the amount of the largest single construction project which has been successfully completed by the Contractor. The pre-qualification amount is limited to the particular construction categories in which the Contractor is approved to perform work. This pre-qualification amount may be adjusted as the Contractor may successfully complete larger construction projects. The Contractor may exhibit where two or more similar projects were substantially accomplished by the Contractor at the same time where the aggregate amount of these projects in excess of the largest single project accomplished. This aggregate amount will be considered as the pre-qualification amount up to an amount equal to 1500 of the largest single project amount. Pre-qualification amounts and categories may be limited as warranted by the City's experience with the Contractor's construction projects. LARGEST SINGLE PROJECT COMPLETED BY THE CONTRACTOR. 1. AMOUNT: $ 2. DATE OF COMPLETION: 3. TYPE OF WORK: 4. OWNER/REREPRESENTATIVE: Address. Phone Number Fax Number Email Address 1 I L_1I 1 1 I 1 ALTERNATE PRE-QUALIFICATION AMOUNT IS BASED ON THE AGGREGATE TOTAL AMOUNT OF CONCURRENT PROJECTS COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WITH A MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF 150 OF LARGEST SINGLE PROJECT LISTED ABOVE. LARGEST AGGREGATE AMOUNT COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WHERE WORK WAS PERFORMED AT THE SAME TIME: (Total aggregate amount determined from project list below PROJECT 1 1 2 3 4 5 AMOUNT: $ DATE OF START OF WORK: DATE OF COMPLETION: TYPE OF WORK: OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE- .-Telephone Number: Address: Email. PROJECT 2 I PROJECT 3 1 1. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5_ AMOUNT: $ DATE OF START OF WORK: DATE OF COMPLETION: TYPE OF WORK: OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE:_ Telephone Number: Address: Email Fax Fax AMOUNT: $ DATE OF START OF WORK: DATE OF COMPLETION: TYPE OF WORK: OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE:_ Telephone Number: Address: Email THE FOLLOWING THREE ADDITIONAL ITEMS ARE TO ACCOMPANY THIS APPLICATION: 1. A current Financial Statement for your company which will dff be returned uncopied upon completion of review- 2. A list of major projects completed (each project is to include type of work, dollar volume, name and phone/fax number of project representative or owner w/email address). 3. Three letters of reference are requested from owners your company has performed work for. The reference letters shall be on the owner's letterhead and contain the following information: A.) Location and type of work. B.) Dollar volume with your company. C.) Project owner's name, address & phone number. D.) Surety Company involved, if any. E.) Consulting Engineer or Architect, address and phone/fax number. F.) Start and completion dates. Pre-qualification is limited to particular construction categories or construction activities in which the Contractor has successfully 3 Fax 1 1 1 f 1 i completed construction projects or extensive work in the category in conjunction with larger project work. Following are the general categories of construction work which are available for contractor pre-qualification approval by the City of Clearwater. Check those categories for which your firm is seeking pre-qualif ication approval. To receive approval in a particular construction category, your application must contain documentation of successfully completed work experience in that category. This documentation is to be included in your firm's completed project list as described above. In addition, your application must exhibit that your firm has sufficient equipment, resources, and employees on your firm's direct payroll to complete work as a prime contractor in each approved construction work category. Contractors with an insufficient work force or insufficient resources will not be approved for pre-qualification or will not receive pre-qualification in particular work categories. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE RESURFACING ..................... BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AND MODIFICATION............... COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS .............................. COMMERCIAL SWIMMING POOLS .......................... 1 1 1 1 CONCRETE FLAT WORK (CURBS, WALKS, COURTS, ETC.).... CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SERVICES. . . . . . . ..... DEMOLITION ......................................... DESIGN BUILD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXCAVATION/SITE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . GUNITE RESTORATION ................................. HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING. . . . . . . INDUSTRIAL PAINTING ................................ f r 1 p 1 LANDSCAPE & IRRIGATION ........................... MARINE CONSTRUCTION ................................ MARINE DREDGING ................................... ROADWAY AND PARKING LOT CONSTRUCTION ............... SANITARY PUMP STATIONS ............................. SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS .......................... STORMWATER MANAGEMENT CONSTRUCTION ................. TENNIS COURTS ...................................... 4 1 ' URBAN STREETSCAPE ................................ WASTEWATER & WATER TREATMENT FACILITIES............ WATER AND FORCE MAINS .............................. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n 1 1 1 WELL CONSTRUCTION .................................. 1 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS TRUE AND CORRECT TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE. FIRM: BY: (Please Type) SIGNATURE: TITLE: (Owner, President, etc.) DATE: 6 r1 I NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER EXPANSION/RENOVATIONS NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER LIBRARY 1 ARCHITECTURAL TECIIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 1 11 1 1 r 1.1 April 27, 2011 1-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center ' Renovations & Expansion DIVISION 1 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 012300 ALTERNATES 013100 PROJECT COORDINATION 013300 014000 SUBMITTALS QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 014200 REFERENCE STANDARDS 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017400 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 017700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 032900 VAPOR BARRIER 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 - METALS 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 053100 STEEL DECKING 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 075510 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 079200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 084113 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 087100 FINISH DOOR HARDWARE & HARDWARE SETS 088000 GLAZING 088300 MIRRORS TABLE OF CONTENTS North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 089000 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096710 RESINOUS FLOORING 096813 TILE CARPETING 099100 PAINTING - DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101400 SIGNAGE 102800 TOILET ACCESSORIES 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 21 - FIRE PROTECTION 21 1300 FIRE PROTECTION REFERENCE OTHER DIVISION 23 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 1000 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 22 3300 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES REFERENCE OTHER DIVISION 23 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAUHVAC 230500 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 23 0519 PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 0523 VALVES 23 0529 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0593 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 230700 THERMAL INSULATION 23 2114 PIPE AND FITTINGS 232300 REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEM 23 3113 DUCTWORK 233300 DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 23 3416 FANS 23 3713 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 8126 SPLIT PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 23 8130 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260080 TESTS AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0519 WIRES AND CABLES TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 260526 GROUNDING 260533 OUTLET BOXES 260539 RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260653 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS 262420 SAFETY SWITCHES 262726 WIRING DEVICES 26 5100 LIGHTING 28 3111 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION DIVISION 31- EARTHWORK 313116 TERMITE CONTRQL ATTACHMENTS LIBRARY ASBESTOS SURVEY RECREATION CENTER ASBESTOS SURVEY REPORT OF THE GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 u 1 fl 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates. B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents. C. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Alternates. E. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate. 1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Add Alternate No. 1: Add Library Renovation work in its entirety. See A0.1, Sheet Index for applicable drawings. END OF SECTION 012300 I ALTERNATES 012300-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 013100, PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and.other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for Project coordination including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Coordination. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. General installation provisions. 4. Cleaning and protection. B. Requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule are included in Section "Submittals". 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderiy installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results. 2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. These facilities are to remain operational. Notify Owner and Architect of any foreseen construction activity that would impact the facilities operation and safety of occupants and users. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project Close-out activities. I PROJECT COORDINATION 013100-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with , consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. E. Periodic Coordination Meeting: Job progress meetings between Owner, Contractor and Architect will be held every week during construction. When necessary, subcontractor representatives will be invited to attend. F. Full time on-site Contractor supervision: The Contractor is required to provide a full time project superintendent assigned to this project, on site at all times when construction activity is under way. G. On-site documents: Contractor is to maintain a copy on site for Owner and Architect reference, a copy of all drawings, specifications, submittals, ASI's, PR's, CO's and other pertinent documents that describe or direct the progress of the project. These documents are to be administered by the Contractor's designated job superintendent. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination drawings where close and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals." 4. Refer to Division-15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements," and Division-16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements" for specific coordination drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractors principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each temporary telephone. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Manufacturers Instructions: Comply with manufacturers installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. PROJECT COORDINATION 013100 - 2 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 0. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure _ Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. ' F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as ' necessary to prevent deterioration. H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry and ADA for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A ress and adjoining rotect construction in ro clean and and installation handlin D i . p g p g , ur ng materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 6. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 3. Excessively high or low temperatures. 4. Thermal shock. 5. Excessively high or low humidity. 6. Air contamination or pollution. 7. Water or ice. 8. Solvents. 9. Chemicals. 10. Abrasion. 11. Heavy traffic. 12. Soiling, staining and corrosion. 13. 14. Rodent and insect infestation. Combustion. 15. Electrical current. 16. Improper lubrication, 17. Unusual wear or other misuse. 18. Contact between incompatible materials. 19. Misalignment. 20. Unprotected storage. 21. Improper shipping or handling. 22. Theft and vandalism. END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT COORDINATION 013100 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS . A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including; 1. Contractors construction schedule. 2. Submittal schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Shop Drawings. 5. Product Data. 6. Samples. ' B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division-1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: 1. Permits. 2. Applications for payment. 3. Performance and payment bonds. 4. Insurance certificates. 5. List of Subcontractors. C. The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Section "Applications for Payment." D. Inspection and test reports are included in Section "Quality Control Services." 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and ' related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. ' a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 1 SUBMITTALS 013300-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion a. Allow two weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. c. Allow two weeks for reprocessing each submittal. d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractors review and approval markings and the action taken. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. Transmittal Form: Contractors standard format. D. Use of Architect's Electronic Files: Contractor may request a copy of electronic drawing files for use in preparation of submittals. These files will be transmitted on zip disk, one time, to Contractor only. These files are to be used only for preparation of submittals for this Project, any other use is strictly forbidden. 1.4 A. B CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE The Preliminary Project Schedule is to be prepared for submittal at the pre-construction meeting. The Owner will provide to the Contractor a notice of intent to award notification to the successful bidder shortly after submission of bids. The successful bidder is to use the time period between Notice of Intent to Award and the pre-construction meeting to prepare the Project Schedule. Critical Path Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, critical path Contractors construction schedule. Submit for review no latter than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed. Provide a separate time line for each significant construction activity. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values", and any other item that would impact the Project's schedule, ex; Mechanical equipment delivery. Indicate SUBMITTALS 013300 - 2 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion durations of each activity and the sequence of all activities through project completion. Confirm with Architect format of schedule prior to preparation. 2. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 3. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. 4. Coordinate the Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other schedules. 5. Indicate completion by the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made, or as a minimum submit an updated schedule with each payment application. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. 1.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the submittal schedule within 15 days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. ' 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list of products as well as the Contractor's construction schedule. ' 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during the first 90 days of construction. Provide the following information: a. Scheduled date for the first submittal. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the part of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmittal g. Scheduled.date the Architect's final release or approval. ' B. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office. ' 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. D. All submittals must be made within the first 90 days after the Notice to Proceed. SUBMITTALS 013300 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1 1.6 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the ' site; and submit multiple copies to the Architect at weekly progress meetings: 1. List of subcontractors at the site. ' 2. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 4. Accidents and unusual events. ' 5. Meetings and significant decisions. 6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 7. Emergency procedures. 8. Orders and requests of-governing authorities. 9. Change Orders received, implemented. 10. Services connected, disconnected. 11. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. ' 12.. Partial Completions, occupancies. 11 Substantial Completions authorized. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS I A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy ' standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings. include the following information: 1. Dimensions. ' 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full- size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11" but no larger than 24" x 36". 7. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable translucent reproducible print and two blue- or black-line print for the Architects review; the reproducible print will be returned. 8 Re-Submittal: Submit as for initial, with all previous notations from the initial review reflected in the reproducible. 9. Retain one set of approved submittals for distribution to the Owner at the end of the Project. 10. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. C. Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and ' integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended. 1. Preparation of coordination Drawings is specified in section "Project Coordination" and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data. 2. Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. 1.8 PRODUCT DATA SUBMITTALS 013300.4 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturers installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings." 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. ' d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. ' 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. 3. Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies where required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one, and will return the other marked with ' action taken and corrections or modifications required. ' a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. 4. Distribution: Fumish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable is in the installers possession. ' b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. 1 1.9 SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern. ' 1. Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect's Sample. Include the following: ' a. Generic description of the Sample. b. Sample source. c. Product name or name of manufacturer. d. Compliance with recognized standards. ' e. Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between ' the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. M 1 SUBMITTALS 013300 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations. 3. Preliminary submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a one full set of choices for the material or product a. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Architect's mark indicating selection and other action. 1.10 ARCHITECTS ACTION A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "Accepted", that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Accepted as Noted", that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Not Accepted, Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. a. Do not permit submittals marked "Not Accepted, Revise and Resubmit" to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "Action Not Required". C. For all computer file plan backgrounds requested by the Contractor for use in preparing submittals, shop drawings and/or close-out documents - the Contractor shall pay the Architect $100 for each plan background forwarded. Note that in all cases only the background or base plan drawing will be available - notes, detail references, dimensions, etc. will not be included. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTALS 013300 - 6 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion L - SECTION 014000 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL I 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services. B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports, performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not ' include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with ' Contract Document requirements. D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. 1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, ' cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures. 2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. ' 3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. ' 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar quality ' control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing authorities, or are provided by another identified entity; these services include those specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. 1. The Owner shall engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to perform inspections and tests specified. 2. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections, ' tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractors responsibility. ' a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractors responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction. y 1 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 014000-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center 1 Renovations & Expansion Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required ' inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to: a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. ' b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories. ' d. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site. ' B. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform inspections, ' sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Specification Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 1. The agency shall notify the Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies , observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work. , 3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. C. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a , minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid. the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and ' similar activities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1 A. The independent testing agency thru the Contractor, shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service, to the Architect, in duplicate. 1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. , 2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, but not be limited to: a. Date of issue. ' b. Project title and number. c. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. ' e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and interpretations of test results. I. Ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing. QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 014000 - 2 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion ' k. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. 1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. I 1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State in which the Project is located. 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired ' construction. C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of ' responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services. END OF SECTION 014000 1 ' QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 014000 - 3 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1 SECTION 014200 - REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. ' B. Indicated: The term indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help ' the reader locate the reference. There is no limitation on location. . C. Directed: Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required, and permitted mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. ' D. Approved: The term approved, when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. E. Regulations: The term regulations includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the ' construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. Furnish: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. Install: The term install describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. i H. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. Installer: An Installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term experienced, when used with the term Installer, means having a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authority having ' jurisdiction. 2. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. 3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are 1 REFERENCE STANDARDS 014200 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center , Renovations & Expansion requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. However, the ultimate , responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and , similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. J. Project site is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. K. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests either, at the Project site or, elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. _ 1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION , A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16-Division format and MASTERFORMAT numbering system. B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations ' or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words that are implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements ' expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon () is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent ' requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality ' levels; refer requirements that are different but apparently equal and other uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. REFERENCE STANDARDS 014200 - 2 i 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards- generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the Text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work. ¦ PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 014200 1 w REFERENCE STANDARDS 014200 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 A RELATED DOCUMENTS lementar General and Su in ludin tr l i i f th C t D i d . g pp y genera prov s ons o e on ac , c ngs an raw Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 7.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, including utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection. B. Temporary utilities required include but are not limited to: 1. Water service and distribution. 2. Temporary electric power and light. 3. Telephone service. 4. Storm and sanitary sewer. C. Temporary construction and support facilities required include but are not limited to: 1. Field offices and storage sheds. 2. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water. 3. Temporary Project identification signs and bulletin boards. 4. Waste disposal services. 5. Rodent and pest control. 6. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities required include but are not limited to: 1. Temporary fire protection. 2. Barricades, warning signs, lights. I 3. Fencing around construction limits. ri [1 F 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations if authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations", ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition", and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." 1. Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services", prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations. 2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70). C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. D. Electric Power Service: Electric power paid by owner. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of the permanent service. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials; if acceptable to the Architect, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division-6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 1. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior type, Grade B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay Plywood conforming to PS-1, of sizes and thickness indicated. 2. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges and similar uses provide minimum 5/8" thick exterior plywood. C. Paint: Comply with requirements of Division-9 Section "Finish Painting." 1. For job-built temporary offices, shops, sheds, fences and other exposed lumber and plywood, provide exterior grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer. 2. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. 3. For interior walls of temporary offices, provide two coats interior latex flat wall paint. D. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. Water will be provided by the Owner through sources at the existing Center. E Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 11-gage, galvanized 2-inch, chain link fabric fencing 6-feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2" I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2" I.D. for comer posts. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide new equipment; if acceptable to the Architect, undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4" heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 ft. long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system; provide adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge. C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- 120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools and equipment. Owner will provide construction power through sources at the existing Center. The source of power will be available, the Contractor will make the necessary safe modifications to deliver the power-where needed. D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use "hand-service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. F. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air- conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading. Provide a meeting room with table and chairs capable of accommodating 12 people. The temporary office must be equipped with a facsimile machine, answering machine and telephone. G. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. H. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. I Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "A" fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class "ABC" dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for the exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION >f. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. C. Temporary Lighting: Whenever overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements, without operating the entire system, and will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. D. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. 1. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. E. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout the construction period. Install telephone on a separate line for each temporary office and first aid station. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. F. Sewers and Drainage: Sewers facilities are available; provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off the site in a lawful manner. 1. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. 2. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. Following heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. G. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. H. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project's needs. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material. 1. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit-type privies will not be permitted. J Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition. K. Drinking Water Facilities: Provide containerized tap-dispenser bottled-water type drinking water units, including paper supply. L. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and other signs of the size indicated; install signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on posts or framing of preservative treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. Have sign copy approved by Architect prior to sign fabrication. Attain Owner approval prior to installation. Project Identification Signs: Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics. Comply with details indicated. Only one 4'x8' sign by Contractor is allowed. Contractor, major subcontractors and members of the Design team are to be identified. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. M. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner. N. Rodent and Pest Control: Retain a local exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches and other pests. Employ this service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be relatively free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations in a lawful manner using environmentally safe materials. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or longer as requested by the Architect. B. Temporary Fire Protection. Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers," and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations." 1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguisher;, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas. 4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. C. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security. 1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. E. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities that have been used during the construction period, including but not limited to: a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace significantly wom parts and parts that have been subject to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace lamps that are burned out or noticeably dimmed by substantial hours of use. END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000 - 6 1 ff r? 1 r 1 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 3. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire-rated construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long servicestsystems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinfoncement with original structure. I CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 7. Architect's Approval: patching. Approval unsatisfactory work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of A. LEED Requirements for Building Reuse: 1. Credit MR 1.1: Maintain existing building structure (including structural floor and roof decking) and envelope (exterior skin and framing, excluding window assemblies and nonstructural roofing material) not indicated to be removed; do not cut such existing construction beyond indicated limits. 2. Credit MR 1.3: Maintain existing interior nonstructural elements (interior walls, doors, floor coverings, and ceiling systems) not indicated to be removed;-do not cut such existing construction beyond indicated limits. 3. Credit MR 1.2: Maintain existing nonshell, nonstructural components (walls, flooring, and ceilings) not indicated to be removed; do not cut such existing construction beyond indicated limits. B. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. C. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following- 1 . Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. D. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers" 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 5. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. F. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential t CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. dk PART 2 - PRODUCTS _ 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. t. It I CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 017400 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers' standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section "Project Closeout." 3. Specific requirements for warranties, for the Work, products, and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -16. 4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. C. Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime Contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. I WARRANTIES AND BONDS 017400-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owners Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. F. Provide a general warranty in addition to specific warranties for a duration of one year beyond Substantial Completion. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. C. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -16 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose- leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS, the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor. WARRANTIES AND BONDS 017400 - 2 1 1 f' 1 1 1 t t 1 1 t 1 E North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable). END OF SECTION 017400 I WARRANTIES AND BONDS 017400 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 017700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions-2 through -16. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, ' complete the following. List exceptions in the request: 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 6. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions. 7. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. I PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017700-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request: 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to, the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 5. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance - requirements. B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. 3. Re-inspections: The Contractor will compensate the Architect at a rate of $95.00 per hour per person to review any outstanding Report item more than one time. Compensation will be made to the Architect by Change Order to the Contract Sum (credit in the amount of the Architect's changes). To prevent this compensation the Contractor is advised not to request the Final Completion Report until each item in the Substantial Completion Report and previous or subsequent Field Visit Reports have been carefully verified to be completed. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours. 1. Status of documentation of Record Documents will be reviewed at monthly job progress meetings. If documentation is found not to be correlating with job progress, applicable month's payment application will be delayed until Record Documents are brought up to date. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross- reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017700 - 2 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Record sets should be produced in a reproducible format and should clearly distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. C. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work-performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site, and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record drawings and Specifications. 1. Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Architect for the Owners records. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owners records. E. Submit a summary list of all paint products used on the project. List manufacturer, paint name, paint color, specific paint mix and location where additional quantities may be purchased. F. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended "turn around" cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Fixture lamping schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owners personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturers representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items: . 1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and materials. 4. Tools. 5. Lubricants. I PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017700 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 6. Fuels. 7. Identification systems. 8. Control sequences. 9. Hazards. 10. Cleaning. 11. Warranties and bonds. 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Start-up. - 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section "Temporary Facilities". B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even- textured surface. C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. END OF SECTION 017700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017700 - 4 1 1 f 1 1 t 1 r I i `? n 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017700 - 5 1 f 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations A Expansion SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 1 1 1 w 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section 'Temporary Facilities" for temporary construction and environmental- protection measures for selective demolition operations. 2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and patching" for cutting and patching procedures. DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 1 B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. r 1 1 E D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. B. Historical items indicated remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner. C. Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to the Owner, which may be encountered during demolition, remain the Owner's property. Care- I SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion fully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. B. Proposed dust-control measures. C. Proposed noise-control measures. D. Schedule of demolition activities indicating the following: 1. Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Dates for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. E. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged. F. Inventory of items to be removed by Owner. G. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition opera- tions. H. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." 1. 'Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. 1. Landfill records for record purposes indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 1 f 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect I SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 2.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICALIELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mech-anicaVelectrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. The Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. if services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall. I 2.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities". B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities". C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement,. settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 2.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the_ extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of 1 governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely todamage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Reuse of Building Elements: • Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval. 1. Building Structure and Shell: 100 percent. 2. Nonshell Elements: 50 percent. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area off-site designated by Owner. I SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. F. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction, as follows: 1. Completely remove below-grade construction, including foundation walls and footings, unless indicated to remain. 2. Break up and remove below-grade concrete slabs, pipes, culverts, miscellaneous footings, conduit, wiring, drain inlets, tanks, unless indicated to remain. G. Filling Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demoli- tion of buildings and pavements with soil materials according to requirements specified in Divi- sion 2 Section "Earthwork." H. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by demolition operations. 1. At close of demolition project, all soil material remaining in the upper twelve inches of the site shall pass a one and one half inch (1 1/2") screen. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. 2.5 B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6 1 s t 1 i 1 1 1 F 0 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 07 Section 07610 for new roofing requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. F. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. 2.6 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted. 2.7 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 1. Do not create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution, when using water. B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and ar- eas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level. C. Clean adjacent buildings and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition opera- tions. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of demolition. 2.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owners property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not bum demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.9 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 2.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Existing Construction to Be Removed: See contract drawings. S. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged: See contract drawings. C. Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled: See contract drawings. D. Existing Items to Remain: See contract drawings. END OF SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 8 1 1-1, 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 Y North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion SECTION 032900 - VAPOR BARRIER PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied Under This Section 1. Vapor Barrier, seam tape, pipe boots, detail strip for installation under concrete slabs. B. Related Sections 1. Section 03300 Cast-in-place Structural Concrete. 2. Section 07260 Under-Slab Vapor Retarder. - 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM E1745-97 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil. 2. ASTM E 154-88 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs. 3. ASTM E 96-95 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 4. ASTM E 1643-98 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 302.1 R-96-Vapor Barrier Component (plastic membrane) is not less than 15 mils thick. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control / Assurance 1. Independent laboratory test showing compliance with ASTM & ACI Standards. 2. Manufacturer's samples, literature. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions for placement, seaming and pipe boot installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Vapor Barrier (Performance based specification) 1. Vapor Barrier membrane must have the following properties. a. Minimum 15-mil thick polyolefin geomembrane b. Manufactured from prime virgin resins c. Water Vapor Barrier. ASTM E-1745 meets or exceeds Class B d. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM E-96 0.006 gr./ftz/hr./ or lower VAPOR BARRIER 032900-1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion e. Permeance Rating: ASTM E-96 0.01 gr./ft2/hr./or lower f. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E-1745 minimum 1970 grams g. Tensile Strength: ASTM E-1745 minimum 45.0 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape 1. High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum width 4 inches. B. Pipe Boots 1. Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape per manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Ensure that subsoil is approved by Architect. 1. Level and tamp or roll aggregate, sand or tamped earth base. a. Unroll Vapor Barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. b. Lap Vapor Barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. C. Overlap joists 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. d. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer's pipe boot. e, No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. f. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape. END OF SECTION 032900 VAPOR BARRIER 032900 - 2 1 1 1 r 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Concrete paving and walks are specified in Division 2. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General - Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect. C. Shop drawings for reinforcement, prepared by registered Professional Engineer for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Shop drawings for formwork, prepared by a registered Professional Engineer for fabrication and erection of forms for specific finished concrete surfaces. Show form construction including jointing, special form joint or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete visually. Formwork shop drawings must be signed and sealed by a professional engineer In the State of Florida. 1. Architects review is for general architectural applications and features only. Design of formwork for structural stability and efficiency is Contractor's responsibility. E. Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions, as follows: 1. Normal weight aggregates. 2. Fibrous reinforcement. 3. Reglets. 4. Waterstops. 5. Vapor retarder. F. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. Provide test data sample with standard deviation calculations for each mix submitted. G. Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards - Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 2. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 3. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Transporting, and Placing Concrete." 4. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection." 5. ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Concrete Structures" 8. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork" 7. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Concrete Testing Service - Engage a testing laboratory acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at Contractors expense. D. Full cooperation shall be given to mechanical, electrical, and plumbing installers to allow them time to coordinate and install all items of their work which are to be encased or built into concrete. Contractor to assure that other work such as sleeves, electrical conduits, pipes, anchors, etc., are properly placed and secured in position before concrete is placed. Items that require inspection shall have been inspected and tested for both material and mechanical operation and shall have been completed before concrete is placed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep reinforcement steel under cover and off the ground using supports. Protect reinforcing steel from rusting, oil, grease, or distortion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with a rigid non-absorptive material to offer optimum appearance and leave a smooth, stain-free surface. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without objectionable bow or deflection. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "A-C or B-13 High CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2. North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion Density Overlaid Concrete Form," Class I. 2. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood," Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete - Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. C. Fomn Coatings - Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350 mg/I that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. D. Form Ties - Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface. 1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1-inch diameter in concrete surface. E. Form Release Agent; Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 mg/I volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars - Reinforcing steel must be correctly rolled to section and free from all surface defects and shall be in accordance with ASTM A615 Grade 60 as evidenced by manufacture's certificates. The grade of steel shall be intermediate, new billet stock. All bars shall be deformed and rolled with raised symbols to identify the manufacturer and the size of the bar. B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars - ASTM A 767, Class II (2.0 oz. zinc psf) hot-dip galvanized, after fabrication and bending. C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars - ASTM A 775. D. Steel Wire - ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel. E. Welded Wire Fabric - ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. F. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric - ASTM A 497. G. Supports for Reinforcement - Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire-bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs-0n-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2). 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement - ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect B. Fly Ash - ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F., 20% max. by weight C. Normal Weight Aggregates - ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exterior exposed surfaces,. do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances. 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect. D. Lightweight Aggregates - ASTM C 330. E. Water - Drinkable. F. Admixtures, General - Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. G. Air-Entraining Admixture - ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Air-Tite," Cormix. b. "Air-Mix" or "Perma-Air," Euclid Chemical Co. C. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair," W.R. Grace & Co. d. "MB-VR" or "Micro-Air," Master Builders, Inc. e. "Sealtight AEA," W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. "Sika AER," Sika Corp. H. Water-Reducing Admixture - ASTM C 494, Type A. 1 _ Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Chemtard," ChemMasters Corp. b. "PSI N," Cormix. C. "Eucon WR-75," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "WRDA," W.R. Grace & Co. e. "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed," Master Builders, Inc. f. "Prokrete-N," Prokrete Industries. g. "Plastocrete 161," Sika Corp. 1. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer) - ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. May be used in all pumped concrete and concrete with a water-cement ratio below 0.50. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Super P," Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. b. "PSI Super," Cormix. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 . 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. "Eucon 37," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "WRDA 19" or "Daracem," W.R. Grace & Co. e. "Rheobuild," Master Builders, Inc. f. "PSP," Prokrete Industries. g. "Sikament 300,' Sika Corp. J. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture - ASTM C 494, Type E. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Q-Set," Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co. b. "Gilco Accelerator," Cormix. C. "Accelguard 80," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Daraset," W.R. Grace & Co. e. "Pozzutec 20," Master Builders, Inc. K. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture - ASTM C 494, Type D. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "PSI-R Plus," Cormix. b. "Eucon Retarder 75," Euclid Chemical Co. C. "Daratard-17," W.R. Grace & Co. d. "Pozzolith R," Master Builders, Inc. e. "Protard," Prokrete Industries. f. "Plastiment," Sika Corporation. L. Fibrous Reinforcement - Engineered polypropylene fibers designed for secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs (Slabs on grade only). 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Fiberstrand 100," Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Fibermesh," Fibermesh, Inc. C. "Forta CR," Forta Corp. d. "Grace Fibers," W.R. Grace & Co. 1 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS 1 1 r A. Joint Filler: Expansion joint fillers shall be asphalt impregnated fiber board conforming to ASTM D-1751. Joint fillers shall extend full depth of slab or joint and be thickness and lengths indicated on drawings. B. Anchor Slots: Hot-Dipped galvanized, #22 ga. metal, felt filled, equal to No. 305 made by Hohman & Bernard or approved equal. C. Inserts: Inserts shall be either adjustable, threaded or wedge types depending on use as manufactured by Hohman & Bernard or approved equal. D. Reglets - Where resilient or elastomeric sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets of not less than 0.0217 inch thick (26-gage) galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion or debris. E. Waterstops - Provide flat, dumbbell-type or centerbulb-type waterstops at construction joints and other joints as indicated. Size to suit joints. F. Rubber Waterstops - Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513. 1. Available Manufacturers - Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. The Burke Co. b. Progress Unlimited. C. Williams Products, Inc. G. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops - Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 1. Available Manufacturers - Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. The Burke Co. b. Greenstreak Plastic Products Co. C. W.R. Meadows, Inc. d. Progress Unlimited. e. Schlegel Corp. f. Vinylex Corp. H. Granular Base - Evenly graded mixture of fine and coarse aggregates to provide, when compacted, a smooth and even surface below slabs on grade. 1. Sand Cushion - Clean, manufactured or natural sand. J. Vapor Retarder - Provide vapor retarder cover over prepared base material where indicated below slabs on grade. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: 1. Water-resistant barrier consisting of heavy Kraft papers laminated together with glass-fiber reinforcement and overcoated with black polyethylene on each side. K. Vapor Barrier - Premoulded membrane, seven-ply construction consisting of reinforced ' core and carrier sheet with fortified bitumen layers, protective weathercoating, and plastic antistick sheet. Water vapor transmission rate of 0.00 grains/sq. ft./hr. when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B. Provide manufacturer's recommended mastics and gusset tape. 1. Product - "Sealtight Premoulded Membrane with Plasmatic Core," W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2. Absorptive Cover - Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. L. Moisture-Retaining Cover - One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. CAST4N-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 1 1 1 11 1 f] 1 1 1 1 [7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion M. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound - ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Conhard," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. "Safe Cure and Seal," Dayton Superior Corp. C. "Aqua-Cure," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Dress & Seal #1 8W13," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. "Masterseal W," Master Builders, Inc. f. "Intex," W.R. Meadows, Inc. g. "Sika Membrane," Sika Corp. _ N. Evaporation Control - Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Eucobar," Euclid Chemical Co. b. "E-Con," LAM Construction Chemicals, Inc. C. "Confilm " Master Builders, Inc. 0. Underlayment Compound - Free-flowing, self-leveling, pumpable, cement-based compound for applications from one inch thick to feathered edges. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "K-15," Ardex, Inc. b. "Conflow," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. C. "LevelLayer II," Dayton Superior Corp. d. "Flo-Top," Euclid Chemical Co. e. "Levelex," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. "Pourcrete," Master Builders, Inc. g. "Stoncrete LIU," Stonhard, Inc. h. 'Thom Underlayment Self-Leveling," Thoro System Products. P. Bonding Compound - Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only): 1. "Superior Concrete Bonder," Dayton Superior Corp. 2. "Euco Weld," Euclid Chemical Co. 3. "Weld-Crete," Larsen Products Corp. 4. "Everweld," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene: 1. "Acrylic Bondcrete," The Burke Co. 2. "Strongbond," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. 3. "Day-Chem Ad Bond," Dayton Superior Corp. I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 4. "SBR Latex," Euclid Chemical Co. 5. "Daraweld C," W.R. Grace & Co. 6. "Homweld," A.C. Hom, Inc. 7. "Everbond," L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 8. "Acryl-Set," Master Builders Inc. 9. "Intralok," W.R. Meadows, Inc. 10. "Sonocrete," Sonnebom-Rexnord. 11. "Stonlock LB2," Stonhard, Inc. Q. Epoxy Adhesive - ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type," "Grade," and "Class" to suit project requirements. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the-following: a. "Burke Epoxy M.V.," The Burke Co. b. "Spec-Bond 100," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. C. "Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Epoxtite Binder 2390," A.C. Hom, Inc. e. "Epabond," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. "Concresive 1001," Master Builders, Inc. g. "Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod," Sika Corp. R. Non-Shrink Grout: Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed non-shrink grout as called for on drawings shall be manufactured by: 1. The Euclid Chemical Company ='Euco N-S Group" (All exposed grout). 2. The Euclid Chemical Company - "Firmix". 3. Master Builders - "Embeco 885". 4. Anto-Hydro Company - "Axpandcrete Metallics." 5. Sonneborn - "Ferrolith G". 6. Lambert Corporation - "Vibropruf #11" 2.5 S. Chemical Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lbs. of fluosilicate per gal. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batches are selected as the method of proportioning, the mix design shall be proportioned to achieve an average 28-day compressive strength of 1200 psi in excess of the design strength indicated on the Contract drawings, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing. 1. Limit use o flash to not exceed 20 percent of cement content b wei ht. B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect. C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.42 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.40 maximum (air-entrained). 2. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.45 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.42 maximum (air-entrained) 3. 3500-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.48 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.45 maximum (air-entrained). 4. 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.52 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.48 maximum (air-entrained). 5. 2500-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.56 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.54 maximum (air-entrained). 6. Maximum water-cement (WIC) ratio for the following conditions should be as follows: a. Subjected to freezing and thawing; W/C 0.45. b. Subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers; W/C 0.40 C. Concrete required to be watertight; W/C 0.40. D. Lightweight Concrete - Proportion mix as specified. Design mix to produce strength and modulus of elasticity as noted on drawings, with a splitting tensile strength factor (Fct) of not less than 5.5 for 3000-psi concrete and a dry weight of not less than 95 lbs. or more than 110 lbs. after 28 days. Limit shrinkage to 0.03 percent at 28 days. E. Maximum Slump: 1. Concrete containing the specified high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) shall have a maximum slump of 8 inches after addition of HRWR, unless otherwise approved by the Architect. 2. Ramps Slabs, and sloping surfaces - Not more than 3 inches. 3. Reinforced foundations system - Not less than 1 inch and not more than 4 inches. 4. All other concrete shall have a maximum slump of 4 inches, +/-1 inch. F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes - Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work. ' 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C). C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture (HRWR) in pumped concrete, concrete for industrial slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water/cement ratios below 0.50. D. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5% within following limits: E. I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE . 033000 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or hydraulic pressure. a. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 5.5 percent (severe exposure) 1-1/2-inch max. aggregate. b. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 1-inch max, aggregate. C. 5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 3/4-inch max. aggregate. d. 5.5 percent (moderate exposure); 7.0 percent (severe exposure) 1/2-inch max. aggregate. 2. Other concrete (not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure) or to receive a surface hardener. 3% air. F. Use admixtures for water reduction and set. control in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Job-Site Mixing - Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. For mixers of one cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu. yd., increase minimum and maximum mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. or fraction thereof. B. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced. C. Ready-Mix Concrete - Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. D. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS A. General - Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-10 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses and the like for easy removal , , . E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed comers and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Provisions for Other Trades - Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate ' work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. H. Cleaning and Tightening - Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. ' 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERIBARRIER INSTALLATION A. General Following leveling and tamping of granular base for slabs on grade, place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal vapor barrier joints with manufacturers' recommended mastic and pressure-sensitive tape. C. After placement of vapor retarder/barrier, cover with sand cushion and compact to depth as shown on drawings. 3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General - Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. B. Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-11 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.5 by Architect. E. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. F. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. JOINTS D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. I A. Construction Joints - Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect. Construction joints must be per FBC Sections 1907.4.1 and 1907.4.2. B Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. Accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. E. Waterstops - Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. F. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground - Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-ground at points of contact between slabs-on-ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated. G. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7 Sections of these specifications. H. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-ground to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by 1/4 slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by 1/4 of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. 2. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate. 3. If joint pattern not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays). CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Joint Spacing: Unless otherwise noted, the maximum spacing of construction joints shall be as follows: 1. Foundation walls, walls: Forty-five (45) feet. 2. Slabs: Fifteen (15) feet. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A General - Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive thru-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, relieving angles, and other conditions. C. Forms for Slabs - Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. ' 3.7 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. General - Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, fonn-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturers instructions. C. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the forms as quickly as possible by method which will prevent segregation and loss of materials. Concrete shall be ' deposited in the forms as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid re-handling. Special care shall be exercised to prevent splashing of forms or reinforcement with concrete in advance of pouring. Concrete shall be deposited in a continuous manner until a given unit of construction, as approved by the Architect, has been completed. Placement of the followin concrete shall be prohibited: 1. Partially hardened concrete. 2. Contaminated concrete. 3. _ _Rg empered concrete. 4. Concrete that has been re-mixed after initial set. B. Inspection - Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-13 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. General - Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as herein specified. D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. E. Placing Concrete in Forms - Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. F. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, nodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. G. Placing Concrete Slabs - Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement. H. Cold-Weather Placing - Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. Water shall not be heated over 180 deg. F. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 4. Concrete work shall be protected by wind breaks, curing compounds, and blanket covers if necessary in order to maintain the concrete in-place temperatures of at least 50 deg. F. for a period of seven (7) days after placing. If high early strength concrete is used, this time period may be reduced to three (3) days Hot-Weather Placing - When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair , CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 -14 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 4. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractors option. 5. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 6. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed. ' 7. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect. 1 3.9 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish - For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work ' or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Form Finish - For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or other similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and ' smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Grout-Cleaned Finish - Provide grout-cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces that ' have received smooth form finish treatment. 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and a ' 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to consistency of thick paint. Blend standard Portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. E. Related Unformed Surfaces - At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. -1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-15 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish - Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerances for floor flatness (Ff) of 15 and floor levelness (Fl) of 13. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. B. Float Finish - Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and as -otherwise indicated. After screening, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of Ff 18 - FI 15. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3.11 C. Trowel Finish - Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances of Ff 20 - A 17. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish - Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. E. Nonslip Broom Finish - Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. F. After completion of float finishing and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lbs. of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified. G. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water to expose nonslip aggregate. CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General - Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture CAST-IN-PEACE CONCRETE 033000-16 1 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days at 50 degrees F minimum temperature. C. Curing Methods - Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing and by combinations thereof as herein , , specified. ' D. Provide moisture curing by following methods. _ 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water-fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover thoroughly saturate , cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4-inch lap over adjacent ' absorptive covers. E. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. F. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows, 1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or ' roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete. ' G. Curing Formed Surfaces - Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by ' methods specked above, as applicable. H. Curing Unformed Surfaces - Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method. 1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.12 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. General - Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory construction, and as herein specified. I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-17 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.13 3.14 3.15 B. Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures 4 stories or less, unless otherwise permitted. C. Extend shoring at least 3 floors under floor or roof being placed for structures over 4 stories. Shore floor directly under floor or roof being placed, so that loads from construction above will transfer directly to these shores. Space shoring in stories below this level in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members where no reinforcing steel is provided. Extend shores beyond minimums to ensure proper distribution of loads throughout structure. D. Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support work without excessive stress or deflection. - E. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, and longer if required, until concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed. REMOVAL OF FORMS A. General - Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. REUSE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In - Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-18 - I North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1 Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Reinforced Masonry - Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement. 3.96 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS ' - A. Patching Defective Areas - Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect. B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by. ' tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound has dried. C. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. D. Repair of Formed Surfaces - Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. E. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry-pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. F. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete. G. Repair of Unformed Surfaces - Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having required slope. 1 H. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 1. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. ' J. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching compound. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect K. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-19 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations 8. Expansion clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 3.17 L. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-112 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry-pack before bonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. M. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. N. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. QUALITY CONTROL. TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General - The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by Architect... 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete - ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump - ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. 3. Air Content - ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. 4. Concrete Temperature - Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and each time a set of compression test specimens is made. 5. Compression Test Specimen - ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required. C. Compressive Strength Tests - ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. D. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. E. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., Architect may waive strength test if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 20 i 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion ' F. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. G. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. ' H. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready-Mix Producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete ' placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. 1. Nondestructive Testing - Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. J. Additional Tests - The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to ' determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with K. ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 033000 1 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 21 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Reinforcing steel. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Damp proofing" for damp proofing applied to interior face of exterior wall. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide masonry units that develop the following net-area compressive strengths on the CMU at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C-140. The compressive strength of the masonry (fm') shall be determined by the Unit Strength Method. ' Concrete Unit Masonry: As indicated on the structural notes and drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured ' product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: ' 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." [Show elevations of reinforced walls.] CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-1 1 North.Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.6 1.7 C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. 2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. 2. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 3. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, ' as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-2 J 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 13. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be - left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in AC1530.11ASCE 6ITMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART2-PRODUCTS 1 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Provide Type II, nonmoisture-controlled units. 4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 6 inches nominal; 5-5/8 inches actual. b. 8 inches nominal; 7-5/8 inches actual. C. 12 inches nominal; 11-5/8 inches actual. 5. Exposed Faces: Obtain split face masonry units of uniform texture and color; or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Water: Potable. 2.3 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 6161A 616M, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60 (Grade 400). 2.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows: 1. Mill galvanized, carbon- steel wire for interior walls and hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units where indicated. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. For single-wythe masonry, provide truss or ladder type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. . 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel. Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating. C. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153. D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from PVC. I B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. 2.7 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION A. Foam Plastic Insulation: Manufactured pre-mixed two component amino-plast resin and a catalyst foaming agent insulation for foaming in place; 100 pcf density. 1. Outgassing of formaldehyde shall be less than one (1) part per million after 24 hours. Outgassing shall be certified by an independent testing agency. 2. The installer shall retain product labels and Material Specification Data Sheets (MSDS) on the site for the UBCI Inspector. B. Products: Acceptable products include the following: 1. CORE-FILL 500 Insulation as manufactured by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. 2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-5 1 _ North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.9 A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES I A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Fumish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and 3. lime. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type M. 4. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S. 5. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other r Sections of the Specifications. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external comers, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS n A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-7 1 1 - North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at comers, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. 3.5 B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal width dimensions at comers or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work, In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one- half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions to height indicated. 1. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Firestopping." MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 0422200-8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.6 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION A. Install Foam Plastic Insulation in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and with the manufacturers recommended equipment B. Holes for installation of foam plastic insulation in the face shells of exposed to view CMU, shall be made above the ceiling line on interior surfaces or behind finish material on exterior surfaces. 3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 24 inches beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T' sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, be, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.11ASCE 61TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530. VASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality- control testing indicated below. 1. Payment for these services will be made by Contractor. 2. Retesting of materials failing to meet-specified requirements shall be done at Contractors expense. B. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof, C. Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780 D. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 140. 3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned 0 1 r CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-10 t i i t 1 r 1 1 1 1 i 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL. A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owners property- - END OF SECTION 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-11 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections apply to work on this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide structural steel work as shown on drawings and specified herein. Hoisting of the metal deck shall be the responsibility of Contractor. Structural steel is that work defined in AISC "Code of Standard Practice", and as otherwise shown on drawings. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Steel Joist Framing - Section 052100. 2. Steel Decking - Section 053100. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards 1. Comply with provisions of following, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified 2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel l for Buildings," including the "Commentary' and Supplements thereto as issued. 4. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 5. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code," latest editions. 6. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use. B. Qualifications for Welding Work 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the WS "Standard Qualification Procedure." 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. 3. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractors responsibility and at his expense. pr, 1.4 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall fully coordinate the structural steel work. Coordinate with Metal Deck Installer for hoisting of the metal deck. B. Contractor shall fully verify all dimensions and details. Any discrepancies shall be immediately reported to the Architect. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations &.Expansion 1.5 C. Contractor shall locate dimensionally on setting plans all anchor bolts, inserts, base plates, etc. and shall prepare and deliver all required templates and fully dimensioned setting plans, all in time for the proper execution of the work. D. Contractor shall set the anchor bolts and inserts. Contractor shall field survey all such settings for correctness after they have been cast in place, and before proceeding with steel enaction. Checking shall be performed within ten days of notification by concrete installer that his work is complete. E. Contractor shall within 10 days report to the Architect and certify that he has complied with the above checking requirements and shall indicate any inaccuracies found and corrections which must be made. Any inaccuracies not included in this report and found during or after steel erection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and the cost of corrective measures shall be borne by him. F. Use base lines, bench marks, or other standards for survey work. If permanent building bench marks have been established, they will be used for the aforementioned field checking. G. Contractor shall coordinate erection areas and sequence and temporary bracing locations. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Submit a copies of producer's or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards). a. Structural Steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering the chemical and physical properties. b. High strength bolts. C. Structural steel primer paint. B. Shop Drawings 1. Structural steel shop drawings shall be signed, sealed and dated b the rofessional en ineer registered in the state of Florida onl if the -proposed connections b the fabricator deviate from those specifically- detailed on the contract documents. Such proposed deviations shall be approved in advance b the Architect/Engineer. Shop drawings shall give all necessary information for the fabrication and erection of the structure and shall be based on AISC Specifications. Minimum connections used shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall support the total uniform load capacity of members. Provisions for the connection of other work required shall be indicated and provided by Steel Installer. Index sheets shall be furnished with all beam and column details at the same time the details are submitted for the review of the Architect. Standard connection details conforming to those shown on the drawings shall be submitted with first erection plan. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. 2. The review of shop drawings shall be for size and arrangement of principal members and strength of connections only. 3. Provide anchor bolt and setting drawings, templates, and directions for STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2 1 1 t 1 1 t t 1 l 1 1 N 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. 4. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated. 5. Shop drawings shall bear the initials of the detailer's checker prior to submission. 6. Shop drawings shall indicate the sequence and extent of areas to be erected by using division or derrick numbers. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time so as not to delay that work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports, Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. The Contractor shall be responsible for any demurrage charges due to failure to unload or store materials properly. Structural steel shall be kept properly drained. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members of the supporting structures. D. Protection - Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. E. Replacement - In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the owner. F. Shop Fabrication and Assembly 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on approved shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. 2. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. G. Connections 1. Shop connections shall be welded or high strength bolted. Field Connections shall be bolted with high strength bolts in friction-type connections conforming to ASTM Designation A325, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 2. Combinations of bolts and welds in the same connections are not permitted, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 3. Where structural joints are made using high strength bolts, hardened washers and nuts tightened to a high tension; the materials, methods of installation and tension control, type of wrenches to be used, and inspection methods shall STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion conform to ASTM Designation A325 as approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. Each bolt shall have a hardened washer under the nut. 4. The high strength bolts used shall have a suitable identifying mark placed on top of the head before leaving the factory. 5. Tightening of nuts shall be done with properly calibrated pneumatic wrenches. The minimum bolt tension for the size of the bolt used shall be in accordance with tables listed in the above referenced Standards. Each wrench shall be checked for accuracy at least once daily for actual conditions of application. 6. Bolts that have been completely tightened shall be marked with identifying symbols. 7. The Contractor shall have a properly calibrated torque gauge on hand, and when requested by the Architect, shall provide a check on any bolt at any time until final acceptance of the work by the Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General - For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam markers, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes. B. Structural Steel Shapes -- ASTM A992 (50 KSI) Plates, and Bars - ASTM A36 C. Steel Pipe - ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B. D. Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 with size and shape as indicated on the drawings. E. Column Base Plates- ASTM A36 F. Arc Welding Electrodes shall conform to the AWS Code as Revised. All electric current require shall be furnished by Contractor. G. Paint for Shop Painting Structural Steel and Field Touch-up shall be manufacturers standard primer. H. All items exposed to weather, such as shelf angles and items as noted on the drawings, shall be zinc coated in accordance with the provisions of ASTM Designation A123 as revised to date. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General - Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the approved shop drawings. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4 r 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Bearing surfaces shall be planed to true beds, and abutting surfaces shall be closely fitted. All columns and bearing stiffeners shall be milled to give full bearings. Bolt holes shall be drilled or punched in accordance with AISC Specifications, subject to C . the provisions specified herein. Hales shall be accurately centered and shall register true upon erection. Poor matching of. holes shall be cause for a rejection. Small errors may be repaired by drilling or reaming. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before assembly. Assembled parts shall be D . brought into close contact Drift pins shall be used only for aligning members and shall not be used in a manner which will damage metal or enlarge or distort holes. Members requiring accurate alignment shall be provided with slotted holes and/or washers for truing up the steel as required. All finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends, and open joints. E. Welding shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with the American Welding Society "Standard Qualification Procedure" to perform the type of work required. Such qualification test shall have been passed within the preceding 12-month period. Shop drawings shall indicate the size, length, spacing, and type of all welds. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and for methods used in correcting welding work. F. Holes for Other Work - Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on approved shop drawings. G Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive . H. other work. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. Provide one shop coat of paint as specified under Article "Materials" to all steel except for members receiving galvanizing or as specified hereafter. B. Paint shall be delivered to the shop in original sealed containers which shall be clearly marked with the manufacturers name and the identifying brand number or name. The paint shall be used as prepared by the manufacturer without thinning or other admixtures. C. Surface Preparation - After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted " or complying with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning, SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Do not paint contact surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted. No paint shall be applied within 3" of any high strength bolt holes. E. Do not paint any zinc-coated items. F Paint shall be applied under dry and dust-free conditions and unless otherwise allowed . 051200 - 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion by the Architect, shall not be applied when the temperature is below 45 deg. F. Painting shall be done in workmanlike manner so as to produce an even dry film of uniform thickness of 2 mil. Edges, comers, crevices, and joints shall receive special attention so that they are thoroughly cleaned and they receive an adequate 7thickness of paint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. General - Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is-to be installed, and notify the contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B, Codes - Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified. Maintain work in a safe and stable condition during erection. C. Anchor Bolts - Steel installer shall furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work, Steel installer shall furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. Contractor shall set anchor bolts and other insert anchors required. D. Field Assembly - Set structural members to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. E. Temporary Shoring and Bracing - Provide as required, with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy line to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. Coordinate locations of temporary bracing with the Contractor. F. Splice members only where indicated. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins. Ream or drill holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Touch-up Painting - Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraided areas of the shop paint, and paint all exposed areas with the same materials as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry file thickness of 2.0 mils. 3.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing five days in advance of the starting of STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6 1 r f North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion fabrication and of erection of the structural steel. B. The Owner and his agents shall have free access and the Contractor shall provide same, to all points where materials for this project are being fabricated and/or erected, and all materials, equipment and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, tests and approval by the Owner's agents or laboratories. They shall have full authority to reject all material and work that fails to conform in every respect to these specifications. , C. Owner will engage in independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. D. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements and specifically state any deviations therefrom. E. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however, Architect reserves right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with specific requirement. F. Shop inspection will include periodic inspection at the place of fabrication and identification of tested material, checking of fabrication for compliance with approved shop drawing and these Specifications, and inspection of shop painting, as well as the following: 1. Examination of all steel for straightness and alignment. i l ans on p 2. Examination of all fabricated pieces and checking of same with erect and detail drawings. 3. Shop-Bolted Connections - Inspect in accordance with AISC Specifications. See paragraph entitled "High Strength Bolt Inspection" below. 4. Shop Welding - Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies as follows: a. Check that welders are certified. Record type and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies or defects found. b. Perform periodic visual inspections of random welds. C. Perform the following: 1. Ultrasonic Inspections - ASTM E164. 100% of first 400 butt 5% welds or more until rejection rate is less than 5% and then 2 as long as rejection rate remains below 5%. 2. Magnettic Particle Testing - ASTM E109. 25% of fillet welds with size larger than 3/8". 5. Examination of surface preparation, painting/priming and galvanizing. G. Field inspection will include periodic inspection after delivery at site of material, fabrication, and shop painting, and work connected with erection and field painting of steel structure, as well as the following: 1. Proper erection of all pieces. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 7 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Proper installation of bolts. 3. Plumbness of structure. 4. Condition of shop painting after erection and field touch-up painting. 5. Field-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. See paragraph below titled "High-Strength Bolt Inspection." 6. Field Welding - Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows: a. Check that welders are certified. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies or defects found. b. Perform periodic visual inspections of random welds. C. Perform the following: 2. 3. 1. Ultrasonic Inspection - All penetrating welds performed in the field shall be tested by ultrasonic testing. 2. Magnetic Particle Testing - Perform as described above. High Strength Bolt Inspection - Perform inspection of installation of high-strength bolts to determine that selected installation procedures as prescribed in the Specification for structural joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts are properly used and that bolts are properly tightened and as follows: a. All bolted connections shall be visually inspected. b. At least two bolts of every connection between girders and columns and trusses and columns shall be checked. C. All bolted connections that fail shall be corrected and all bolts in that connection shall be retested. H. Contractor shall correct deficiencies in structural steel work, which inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements, perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as may be necessary to re-confirm any non- compliance of the original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work. 1. When required by Architect or Contractor's engaged Inspection Organization, Contractor shall make available to Inspector a calibrated torque wrench and calibrating device, as well as the manpower required to operate same, for the purpose of checking high- strength bolts. Adequate platforms and scaffolding shall be provided to ensure safe performance of this operation. J. Report Copies and timing - Immediately after tests or inspection have been made, and in no case later than seven (7) days after tests of inspection have been made, the laboratory shall furnish copies of all test and inspection reports as follows: 1. One (1) copy to the Architect. 2. One (1) copy to Contractor. 3. One (1) copy to Structural Engineer. 4. One (1) copy to Owner. END OF SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1 r 1 r 1 1 r L 051200 - 8 1 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division -1 Specification Section, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK - A. Provide steel joists work as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1. Related Work Specified Elsewhere a. Structural Steel Framing - Section 051200. b. Steel Decking - Section 053100. B. References: (All latest editions) 1. ASTM A 307 - Carbon Steel Threaded Standard Fasteners. 2. ASTM A 325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 3. AWD D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. 4. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 5. Steel Joist Institute (SJI) - Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K- Series, Standard Specifications for Long Span Steel Joists, LH Series and Deep Long Span Steel Joists, DLH Series, and Standard Specification for Joist Girders. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inform to SJI Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight Tables. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, fasteners, cambers, and loads. B. Indicate specified procedures concerning erection and fastening of steel joists. C. Provide welding certificates for welders used to fabricate joists. D. The specialty, engineer for the steel joist supolier certify (signed and sealed) that the steel joist bottom chords will safe resist the wind u lift considering the s acin of brid in . PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 A. Open Web Steel Joist Members - SJI Type K Open Web and Type LH longspan. B. Primer - Manufacture's standard primer. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications, including headers, supplementary framing, and cambers. B. Provide bottom and top joist chord extensions when indicated. C. Clean steel work to be painted complying with Steel Structures Painting Council, SSPC Sty-3, "Power Tool Cleaning". D. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded or high strength bolted. Apply one coat of primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 1.00 mil. Bituminous type primers will not be allowed PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Erect steel joists in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications. B. Bear joists on supports in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications and the drawings. C. During erection, provide temporary bracing for induced loads and stresses. 0. Field weld joist seat to bearing surface after aligning and positioning joists and after installation of bridging. Deep longspan joists and joist girders shall be high strength bolted. E. Do not field cut or alter joists without approval of the Architect. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not primed. Use the same primer as the specified shop coat. END OF SECTION 052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 2 1 1 i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 f 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Section, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide steel decking as shown on the drawings, including basic layout and type of deck units required, and specified herein. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. Structural Steel Framing: Section 051200. 2. Steel Joist Framing: Section 052100. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified; 1. AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 2. AWS "Structural Welding Code." 3. SDI "Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof Decks." 4. MRDTI "Specifications for Steel Roof Deck Construction" as adopted by the Metal Roof Deck Technical Institute. B. Qualifications of Field Welding 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." Welding decking in place is subject to inspection and testing by a Testing Laboratory engaged by the Owner. Remove and replace work found to be defective and not complying with requirements. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Uplift Loading 1. Install and anchor roof deck units to resist the net uplift loading indicated in the plans. B. Underwriter's Label 1. Provide metal deck units manufactured by a firm listed in the Underwriters laboratories "Fire Resistance Director - Index of Manufacturers." Each required type deck unit shall bear the UL label and marking. STEEL DECKING 053100-1- North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Submit four copies of manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories. Include manufacturers certification as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit detailed drawings showing size and location of floor and roof framing supports, layout and types of deck panels, deck finish and method, lengths and piece marks of deck units, fastening and anchorage details, and any openings to be cut in field. Deck units shall be marked to show sequence or erection. Detailed drawings shall also indicate closure pieces, fittings, sump pans, any special jointing, and other accessories necessary to provide a complete decking installation. Indicate welds by standard welding symbols adopted by The American Welding Society. Weld washers shall be used for all roof deck. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall coordinate loading of deck units on the steel frame and erection sequence with Structural Steel Installer. Contractor shall coordinate the actual size and depth of sump pans. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Metal Deck B. Roof Deck Units: Roof deck shall be wide rib, galvanized metal deck size and gage as indicated in the plans. C. Floor Deck Units: Floor deck shall be phosphatized top, painted bottom for interior use or galvanized for exterior conditions. See drawings for specific location of application, deck size and gage. D. Metal Cover Plates: Fabricate metal cover plates for end-abutting deck units of not less than 18 gage sheet steel. Form to match contour of deck units and approximately 6 inches wide. E. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips, for openings between decking and other construction, of not less than 18-gage sheet steel. Form to provide tight-fitting closure at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 . INSPECTION STEEL DECKING 053100-2 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which metal decking is to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 3.2 INST ALLATION A. General 1. Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings, and as specified herein. 2. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. 3. Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run. 4. Place deck units fiat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. 5. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel installer in loading decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. 6. Do not use floor deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured. B. End Closures: Tack weld or use machine screws at 3'-0" o.c. for fastening end closures. 1. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work. C. Side Laps. Steel roof deck and floor deck shall have nesting side laps of adjacent units attached by 3/4-inch diameter #12 screws or button punching at the center of each span or 12 inches o.c., whichever is a least dimension, unless noted otherwise on plans. D.' Cutting and Fitting: Saw cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking as shown on the drawings. E. Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of floor deck units. F. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at all open perimeter ends, interior openings, uncovered ends and edges of roof and floor decking, and in the voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. G. Touch-Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on the top surface of roof deck units. H. Touch-up painted surfaces with the above specified paint applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. END OF SECTION 053100 STEEL DECKING 053100-3 1 r I 1 1 1 r t. 1 1 1 I 1 i 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 054000- COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements, Contractual Conditions, and General Requirements of Division One shall apply to all work hereunder. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The intent of this Section provides for the furnishing and installation of structural steel studs as shown on Drawings and specified herein, including all materials, labor, equipment, accessories and incidental items necessary to complete the work. B. Work under this Section shall be coordinated with other trades to insure proper spacing and location of studs for application of other materials, windows, equipment, etc. 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 092400 - Portland Cement Plastering. B. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All structural properties and allowable weld loads shall conform with the AISI and AISC Specifications for the Design Light-Gauge of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition, as well as Standard Engineering Design Practices. B. Welding - In accordance with the Standard Code of Ar and Gas Welding in Building Construction and conform to American Welding Society (AWS) D.13, latest edition of Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. C. Materials shall be obtained in as much as possible from a single manufacturer. 1.5 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) - Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition. B. American Welding Society, (AWS) D.1.3, latest edition, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A446. 2. ASTM A525. 3. ASTM A568. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 4. ASTM A645. D. American Institute of Steel Construction (RISC) - Manual of Steel Construction, latest edition. E. All Federal, State and Local Codes. Should conflict occur, the most stringent requirements shall prevail. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings - In accordance with Section 01340; furnish complete calculations, properties, loading, fabrication and erection drawings for approval prior to commencement of fabrication. Include descriptive literature containing product installation specifications and details, as well as current and valid welder's certificates. Indicate that calculations for wind loading are based on ASCE 7-05 Code, and shall be designed for the wind speed shown in the structural plan documents. The deflection shall be limited to L/600 for those areas with brick cladding, and L/360 for other finishes. Submit signed and sealed drawings and calculation prepared by the structural engineer registered in the State of Florida. B. Certification - Submit written certification from manufacturer that studs, components and accessories are compatible and suitable for intended application. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Upon delivery, all materials shall be protected from inclement weather. Store material off ground, covered where required to protect material from the elements, ventilated to prevent condensation and sloped to permit drainage. B. Handle materials to prevent damage. Any material damaged, rusted, bent, etc. shall be removed from the job site immediately. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURES A. Subject to compliance with requirements, the following manufacturers offer products that may be incorporated into the work: 1. Unimast. 2. Dale/Incur Industries. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. Gold Bond Building Products. B. Other manufacturers offering similar products may be considered subject to complete data submittal and Architect approval prior to bidding in accordance with Division 1. 2.2 MATERIALS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-2 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. All framing members shall be formed from hot-dipped galvanized steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A653, with a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi for studs, and ASTM A653, with a minimum yield strength of 33 ksi for runner tracks. Materials shall comply with A.I.S.I Standard: North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. B. Studs shall be "C" shaped of minimum 18 gauge galvanized, punched members. Channel shaped runner tracks shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized, unpunched members, and as shown on-the Drawings. C. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A525, G-60. All framing components shall be galvanized. Other components or accessories shall be galvanized or given a coat of rust- resistant paint, lead free. D. Bridging channels shall be 1-1/2" cold-rolled 16 gauge galvanized steel with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi. Bridging channels shall be spaced vertically 4'-0" o.c. maximum. E. Miscellaneous clips, angles, splice plates, etc. shall be of minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel, located as shown or where required to complete the stud assembly. F. Welding is the preferred method of attachment, however, if screws are used, Type S-12, head type as required, shall be utilized. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for screw attachment, quantity, torque, etc. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Structural metal stud framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Prefabricated panels must fit precisely into wall system. No splicing will be allowed at any time. B. All framing components shall be cut squarely, or on an angle, as required to fit squarely and accurately against abutting members. Members shall be held firmly in position until properly fastened. C. Attachments of similar components shall be done by welding. Dissimilar stud components shall be attached by welding, screw attaching, or bolting. Wire tying of framing components in structural applications shall not be permitted. D. Prefabricated panels shall be square and braced against racking. Lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done in a manner so as not to cause local distortion in any member. E. Tracks shall be continuous and welded to all vertical studs. F. Abrasions and welds shall be touched-up with approved galvanizing paint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. Inspection - Prior to installation, inspect work of all other trades. Verify that all such work is complete and accurate to the point where this installation may properly commence in strict accordance with framing Shop Drawings. B. Discrepancies 1. Immediately notify Architect of all discrepancies. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancies until such discrepancy has been fully resolved. Beginning installation indicates acceptance of conditions and responsibility for performance of complete specified system. 3.02 ERECTION A. All studs and runner tracks shall be welded to horizontal steel angles, welded to steel structure or anchored to concrete slab as shown on Drawings. Provide diagonal stud braces as shown or otherwise required to resist lateral loads. B. Studs shall be seated squarely in the track with the stud web and flanges abutting the track web, plumbed or aligned and securely attached to the flanges or web of both the upper and lower tracks. Studs shall be plumb, aligned, and vertical to maximum 1/8" in 10'-0" any direction. Maximum deviation in any one (1) run shall be 3/8" total variation. C. Butt welds or splices shall be used at all butt joints in the track. D. Splices in axial loaded studs shall not be permitted. E. All welds shall be fully developed fillet plug, butt or seam type. F. Where studs abut back to back, they shall be secured together by bolting or welding at the point of attachment to horizontal steel angles. G. All connections shall be carefully examined. Defective, faulty or suspect conditions shall be corrected immediately. H. Temporary bracing, where required, shall be provided until erection is completed. 1. Provide insulation equal to that specified elsewhere in all double jamb studs, double header members, or other areas which may be inaccessible to the insulation installer at time of installation. J. Isolate all studs and metal components from dissimilar materials that may cause adverse reactions. K. At door and window openings, unless otherwise specified, provide double studs at each side of opening and headers of 16 gauge runner track. At window sill, provide 16 gauge runner track. L. At all building expansion joints, discontinue runner track top and bottom and place stud each side of joint. At other material control joints, provide stud each side of joint as required. COLD-FORMED METAL FR.AMIlVG 054000-4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.3 WELDING RECOMMENDATIONS A. Arc welding is the most common method for joining framing components. 1. Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) is typically used for 18 gauge and heavier steel members. Good welds- may be obtained with 3/32" or 1/8" diameter AWS Type E-6012, E-6013 or E-7014 rods. Equipment heat settings vary depending on material thickness. A 200 ampere "hot box" electric welder or gasoline generator welder is suitable. 2. Gas metal arc welding (GMAW) is preferred for lighter 20 gauge members. Good welds may be obtained with AWS E-705-3, -5 or -6 wire electrode in .030" to .035" diameter using C02, Argon-oxygen, or Argon C02 gas shielding. A wire-feed welder with a capacity of 60-11- amperes at approximately 23 volts requiring 220-volt, 3 phase electric service is suggested for fast, uniform welding. B. Welding may be employed in the field, or in the shop when prefabricated panels are utilized. C. All welds and abrasions shall be touched-up with approved galvanizing paint after erection. D. Welds and techniques shall be verified with steel stud manufacturer prior to fabrication or erection. 3.4 CLEANING A. Prior to installation of any track, thoroughly clean surface to receive track. B. During and after installation, remove discarded, scrap and excess materials, waste products, construction debris, etc. caused by steel stud erection process. Leave site clean and ready for next trade. C. After installation, and just prior to enclosing the stud system with sheathing or gypsum wallboard, inspect complete assembly for proper attachment, weld integrity, rigidity, etc. Remove, replace or repair any faulty conditions immediately. Any rust shall be removed and spot painted. END OF SECTION 054000 r 1 1 f-1. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 -5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. RY 1.2 -SUMMA A. This Section includes the following: 1. Pipe guards. 2. Metal Thresholds. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products fumished comply with requirements. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." 2. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r i t 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.3 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316L. C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes. ASTM A 276, Type 316L. D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. E. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. 1. Products: a. IKG Industries, a Harsco company; Mebac. b. W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT. F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.4 NONFERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 63216 632M, Alloy 6061-T6. D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 261B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A, with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. I METAL. FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1 . D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. G. Lag Bolts: ASME 618.2.1. H. Wood Screws: Flathead, ASME 818.6.1. 1. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1. J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME 818.21.1. K. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. L. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Zinc Rich Primer. Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Products: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM 18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. C. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. G. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 1. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld comers and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. I METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion F G. H 2.8 A. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed. C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings. D. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated. 1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated. 2. Drill girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated. 3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches o.c. E. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness, unless otherwise indicated. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch baseplates with four 5/8-inch anchor bolts and 1/4-inch top plates. F. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. G. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 1. placement to produce concrete core free of voids. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f. 1 2.9 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter comers and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim. D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. 2.11 PIPE GUARDS A. Fabricate pipe guards from 3/8-inch thick by 12-inch wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts. B. Galvanize pipe guards after fabrication. 2.12 ABRASIVE METAL THRESHOLDS A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast aluminum with an integral abrasive finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in sizes and configurations indicated and in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Manufacturers: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion b. Balco Inc. C. Bart' Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc. d. Granite State Casting Co. e. Safe-T-Metal Co. f. Wooster Products Inc. 2. Thresholds: Fluted-saddle-type units, 5 inches wide by 1/2 inch high, with tapered edges. B. Extruded Units: Aluminum with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in sizes and configurations indicated and in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Manufacturers: a. ACL Industries, Inc. - b. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. C. Amstep Products. d. Armstrong Products, Inc. e. Balco Inc. f. Granite State Casting Co. g. Wooster Products Inc. 2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch above aluminum extrusion. C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer. D. Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate not more than 4 inches from ends and not more than 12 inches o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if recommended by manufacturer. 1. Provide 2 rows of holes for units more than 5 inches wide, with 2 holes aligned at ends and intermediate holes staggered. E. Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of cast-metal units set into concrete. F. Apply clear lacquer to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of extruded units set into concrete. 2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer. SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 1 2.15 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. C. Bright, Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. D. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. E. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 1 2.16 ALUMINUM FINISHES 1 r 1 1 I- A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified). C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 10 1 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS - A. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors or anchor bolts. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard, unless otherwise indicated. E b d h b l t l 4 i h i t m e anc or o ts a east nc es n concre e. 1. B. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard. C. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. D. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into pipe sleeves preset into concrete Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward internal sleeve. E. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align sleeves in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured. F. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inch machine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner will furnish padlocks. G. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. 3.s INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS 1 f' t- A. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not protected by curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4- inch bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 26 inches above driving surface. I METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-11 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.6 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS AND THRESHOLDS A. Center nosings on tread widths. B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces. C. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to provide a watertight installation. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-12 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A i l d th followin : Thi S ti . nc u es e g ec s on 1. Wood grounds, nailers and blocking. 2. Wood furring. 3. Sheathing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1A DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: 1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. ti f i h d C. on nspec gra e stamp o Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked wit agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing and mill. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. I ROUGH CARPENTARY 061000-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. For structural light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide), provide the following grade and species: 1. "No. 2" grade. 2. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules. 3. Spruce-Pine-Fir graded under NLGA rules. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds,- stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: "Standard" grade light framing size lumber of any species or board-size lumber as required. "No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION PANELS, GENERAL A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA PRP-108. B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory-marked with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 2.5 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant- treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ANSI 818.2.1. ROUGH CARPENTARY 061000 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion i F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A: with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. 2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified including the following: 1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: - Provide products for which model code evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. B. Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 (commercial quality) cold rolled steel sheet or ASTM A 570, Grade 33 (structural quality) hot-rolled steel sheet, as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated, coated after fabrication with manufacturers standard, fast-curing, lead-free "universar primer" resistant to normal atmospheric corrosion. 2.8 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative-treated wood or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. B. Pressure-treat above ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. C. Pressure-treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf. D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. I ROUGH CARPENTARY 061000 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. _ Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F. Use common wire nails, -unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 3.3 WOOD FURRING A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces. B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1-inch by 3-inch furring at 2 feet o.c., horizontally and vertically. Select furring for freedom from knots capable of producing bent-over nails and resulting damage to paneling. C. Suspended Furring: Install suspended furring members of size and spacing indicated, including hangers and attachment devices. Level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, except 1/4 inch in 10 feet for thick-coat plasterwork. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial," for types of construction panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: Plywood Backing Panels: Nail to supports. END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTARY 061000 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 3. Solid-surfacing-material countertops 4. Closet and utility shelving. 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 3. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish[, with 1 sample applied to core material] [and specified edge material applied to 1 edge]. 3. Decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish[, with edge banding on 1 edge]. 4. Solid-surfacing materials. D. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For fabricator. I INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023-1 1.6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. C. Decorative Panels: Plywood with plastic laminate finish. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2 1 , 1 1 D. 1 t 11 1 Ll 1 2.2 a. Avonite, Inc. b. ABA Industries. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. C. Formica Corporation. d. LG Chemical, Ltd. e. Meganite Inc.; a division of the Pyrochem Group. f. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. g. Samsung; Cheil Industries Inc. h. Swan Corporation (The). i. Staron Surfaces j. Transolid, Inc. k. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 3. Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 4. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standard range. CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening. C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 3 inches long, 1 1/2" projection, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center . Renovations & Expansion 1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. Lamin Art, Inc. _ b. Formica Corporation C. Panolam Industries International Incorporated. d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. e. Pionite E. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion E. Catches: Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071. F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, 804071; with shelf rests, B04081. G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1 HD-100 and Grade 1 HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 1. Door and Drawer Locks: Key operated, pin tumbler, nearly flush in round hole, flangeless, with 3/32° width bolt and minimum 1-3/16" throw, UA26D over brass finish. Cabinet locks by Best, or Best compatible. Provide locks on 100% of all cabinets and drawers. - J. File holder supports: Metal rod supports integrated with cabinetry to support file holders. K. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD, black, molded- plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturers standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. D. Handrail Brackets: Extruded from aluminum with wall flange drilled for exposed anchor and with support arm for screwing to underside of rail. Sized to provide 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance between handrail and wall. E. Handrail/Bumper Rail Brackets: Pairs of extruded-aluminum channels; one for fastening to back of rail and one for fastening to face of wall. They are then assembled in overlapping fashion and fastened together top and bottom with self-tapping screws. Sized to provide 1-1/2- inch (38-mm) clearance between handrail and wall. 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion d contact cement t U i i L i t F. . np gmen e am na e: Adhesive for Bonding Plast c 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. r C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Comers of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). i m li t ti E. mu on, o max ca Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware app extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. Grade: Custom. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. WI Construction Style: Style A, Frameless. D. WI Construction Type: Type II, single-length sections to fit access openings. E. WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay. F. Reveal Dimension: 1/8 inch. G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL. I INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: Grade VGS, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. H. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGL. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade'HGS. 4. Edges: Grade VGS, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. 1. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. - J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Solid colors, gloss and/or matte finish. b. Patterns, gloss and/or matte finish. K. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Custom. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Vertical Surfaces Basis of Design: by Nevamar: Navy Matrix Textured, MR-3-5T b. Horizontal Basis of Design: Nevamar: Navy Matrix Textured, MR-3-5T D. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Plywood. G. Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood. H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion substrate unterto d id f b ki 1. . p ng on un ers e o co ac Paper Backing: Provide paper (r 2.7 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Premium. h 1/2 I B. nc . Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid- surfacing material complying with the following requirements: 1. Basis of design: by Caesar Stone, 4250H, Jerusalem Sand Honed. i l lid f i t D. er a ng-ma -sur ac Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with so manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. r 1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. 2. Fabricate tops with shop-applied backsplashes where indicated on drawings. E. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings, soap dispensers and grommets in shop. 2.8 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING A. Grade: Custom. B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch (19-mm) medium-density fiberboard with radiused edge on adjustable metal wall brackets. 2.9 SHOP FINISHING A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION A ATION 3.1 PREP R A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails[ or finishing screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, masonry or hanging strips. H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through comer blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 8 I r END OF SECTION 064023 1 I A 1 I 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion r SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY - A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation -- forced foam installation in masonry. 2. Cavity wall insulation. r 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation products. i D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING r A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: r THERMAL INSULATION 072100-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Forced Foam Insulation in Masonry a. Core-Fill 500 by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. b. Thermco Foam Insulation by Thermco Corporation of America. C. cfiFOAM, Inc. by Southern Foam Insulation, Inc. 2. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. C. Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Owens Coming. INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or fail-scrim- polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face; consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 2.3 A. B AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 u 1 1 w, North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2A INSULATION FASTENERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Eckel Industries of Canada Limited; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. C. Gemco; Spindle Type. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150. b. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150. - C. Gemco; Dome-Cap. d. Gemco; R-150, e. Gemco; S-150. 3. Anchor Adhesives: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Eckel Industries of Canada Limited; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive. C. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive. B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations: a. Crawlspaces. b. Ceiling plenums. C. Attic spaces. d. Where indicated. C. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of dimension indicated between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached. 1. Air Space: 1 inch. 2. Air Space: 2 inches. 3. Air Space: 3 inches. D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. , 3.4 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY CELL INSULATION A. Foam wall insulation is to be pumped into open block cavities indicated to receive insulation, taking care to fill voids completely. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close ports after confirming complete coverage. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for product liquid ratios at mixing gun. B. Foam wall insulation shall be installed from exterior face of masonry units wherever possible so that holes in masonry will be covered with exterior finish material. INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. , B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in i 3.5 THERMAL INSULATION - 072100 - 4 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. D. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following ' requirements: Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities farmed by framing members. If more 1 ' . than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. ' 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unlaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of ' metal studs. h h E. own. ere s Stuff glass fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces w Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5-lb/cu. ft. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor- ' retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. t 1--- E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 5 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 075110 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING ' PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Supplementary General Provisions and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: _ 1. Four Ply White Coated Mineral Surfaced Fiber Glass Built-Up Roofing System. ' B. This Section also includes the following roofing related work: 1. Roof insulation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Resistance (R-value) is the reciprocal of thermal conductance (C-value) which is the rate of heat flow through a material of the thickness indicated. Thermal resistance (R-value) is expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause 1 Btu to flow through 1 sq. ft. per hour at the mean temperature indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Supplementary General Provisions. ' B. Product data, including manufacturer's technical product information, installation instructions, and recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. 1. For asphalt bitumen, provide a label on each container or certification with each load of bulk bitumen, indicating flash point (FP), softening point (SP), and equiviscous temperature (EVT)_ C. Manufacturer's Certification indicating that all bulk bituminous materials delivered to Project comply with required standards. Include quantity and statistical and descriptive data for each product. Submit certificate with each load before it is used. ' 1. Include continuous log showing time and temperature for each load of bulk bitumen, indicating date obtained from manufacturer, where held, and how transported prior to final heating and application on roof. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer (Roofer) to perform built-up asphalt roofing work who has specialized in installing built-up asphalt roofing systems similar to that required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary roofing materials. f 1. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer of built-up roofing system certifying that Installer is approved by manufacturer to install specified roofing system. Provide copy of certification for Architect prior to awarding roofing work. 1 BUILT-UP,ASPHALT ROOFING 075510-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain a full-time supervisortforeman who is on job site during times that built-up asphalt roofing work is in progress and who is experienced in installing roofing systems similar to type and scope required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain primary products, including each type of roofing sheet (felt), bitumen, composition flashings, and any vapor retarder, from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products to use with roofing ' system specified. C. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparing and submitting roof installation acceptance ' certification as necessary in connection with fire and extended-coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. D. UL Listing: Provide built-up roofing system and component materials that have been tested for ' application and slopes indicated-and that are listed by UL for Class A external fire exposure. 1. Provide roof-covering materials bearing UL Classification Marking on bundle, package, or container indicating that materials have been produced under UL's Classification and Fallow- ' up Service. 2. Provide built-up roofing system that can be installed to comply with UL requirements for Fire Classified and Class 120 uplift resistance requirements. ' E. FM Listing: Provide built-up roofing system and component materials that have been evaluated by FM System for fire spread, uplift resistance (specific FM 1-120 test of roof assembly not required), and hail damage and are listed in "Factory Mutual Approval Guide" for Class I ' construction. 1. Provide roof covering materials bearing FM approval marking on bundle, package, or ' container, indicating that material has been subjected to FM's examination and follow-up inspection service. F. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials that are identical to materials , whose fire performance characteristics, per requirements listed in Part 2 of this Section, have been determined from tests by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. G. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial Solar Reflectance Index not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. ' H. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products. 1. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1. Preapplication Roofing Conference: Approximately 2 weeks prior to scheduled commencement ' of built-up roofing installation and associated work, meet at Project site with Installer, installer of each component of associated work, installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in and around roofing that must precede or follow ' roofing work--including mechanical work, Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with work performance, including Owner's insurers, test agencies, and governing authorities, where applicable. 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075510 = 2 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion a. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates decks), inspect and discuss condition ( of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Review structural loading limitations of steel deck and inspect deck for loss of flatness and for required mechanical fastening. c. Review roofing system requirements: drawings, specifications, and other contract documents. d. Review required submittals, both complete and incomplete. e. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability ' of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. f. Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material use accounting procedures. g. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with ' unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing, if it is nota mandatory requirement_ 2. Record (Contractor) discussions of conference, including decisions and agreements or ' disagreements reached, and furnish a copy for each attendee. If substantial disagreements exist at the conclusion of the conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set a date for reconvening the conference. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. Do not proceed with work if rain is forecasted for the duration of each days work. ' 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle roofing materials to ensure dryness. Store in a dry, well-ventilated, weather-tight ' place. Unless protected from weather or other moisture sources, do not leave unused felts on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or another raised surface. Handle and store materials or equipment in a ' manner to avoid significant or permanent deck deflection. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit two executed copies of industry standard 2-year water tightness Roofing Warranty on the form included at the end of this Section, covering work of this Section, including roofing membrane, composition flashing, roof insulation, any vapor retarders, and roofing accessories, signed and countersigned by Installer (Roofer) and Contractor. ' Warranty is for water tightness of complete installation including but not limited to all flashings, and coping. ' B. Manufacturers Warranty: Submit executed copy of roofing manufacturer's standard Limited Service Warranty agreement, including flashing endorsement, signed by an authorized representative of built-up roofing system manufacturer, on form that was published with product literature as of date of Contract Documents. ' C. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other ' provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075510 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center ' Renovations & Expansion 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF INSULATION ' A. Rigid roof insulation board composed of closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core bonded in the manufacturing process to universal fiber glass reinforced facer: For use over metal decks. Meet ' ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2. Rated FM Global fire- and wind-resistant systems for Built-Up Roof. UL Class A. Comply with EPA requirements Flat board thickness: 3 inches, minimum. Tapered board thickness: 3 inches, minimum. 1. Provide rigid roof insulation board product approved by the built-up roof membrane system , manufacturer. 2. Basis of Design: Johns Manville "ENRGY 3'. 2.2 BUILT-UP ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM - A. Basis of Design: Johns Manville 4GIC CR Four Ply White Coated Mineral Surfaced Fiber Glass Built-Up Roof. For use over Johns Manville insulation or other approved insulations, on inclines up , to 6' per foot. 1. Composition: 3 plies Johns Manville "GlasPly Premier" Felt & 1 ply "GlasKap CR". 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, one of the following built-up asphalt roofing system manufacturer's may also be provided. a. Celotex Corp. . b. GAF Corp. c. GS Roofing Products Co. ' e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. f. Tamko Roofing Products, Inc. 2.3 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM EDGE/PENETRATION MATERIALS A. Roofing Cement: Asphaltic cement, asbestos-free, complying with ASTM D 4586. B. Glass-Fiber Fabric: Minimum 1.5-lb woven glass-fiber sheet impregnated with asphalt, complying ' with ASTM D 1668. C. Preformed Edge Strips: Rigid insulation units matching roof insulation, or asphalt-impregnated ' organic-fiber insulation units, molded to form 3-1/2-by-3-1/2-inch by 45-degree cant strips and 1- 5/8-by-18-inch tapered-edge strips to receive roofing ply-sheet courses and lift edges above main roofing surface. 2.4 SHEET METAL ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Coordinate below with Section 07600, "Flashing and Sheet Metal." B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, AISI type 302/304, No. 2D finish, temper as required for forming 1 and performance; 0.015 inch thick (28 gage), unless indicated otherwise. C. Solder for Sheet Metal: Unless indicated otherwise or recommended by metal manufacturer, ' provide 50:50 tin/lead type (ASTM B 32) for tinning and soldering joints; use rosin flux. 1. Solder stainless steel joints with 60:40 tin/lead type solder. ' 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Wood Members, Units: Comply with requirements of Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for , nailers, blocking, shims, walkway units, and other wood members indicated as roofing system work. Provide wood pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for above-ground use BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075510 - 4 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion (AWPB LP-2). Provide sufficient quantities of adequately sized members and sections for correct alignment, support and securing of roofing finishes and related components. ' B. Walkway Protection Boards: Mineral-surfaced, bituminous composition boards, approximately 1/2 inch thick, manufactured specifically for hot bituminous application on built-up roofing as a protection course for foot traffic. ' 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carey-Tread, Celotex Corp. b. J-Walk, Manville Building Materials Corp. ' c. White Walk, W.R. Meadows, Inc. C. Substrate Joint Tape: 6-inch- or 8-inch-wide, coated, glass-fiber joint tape. D. Asphaltic Primer over concrete deck: Comply with ASTM D 41. Apply minimum of 1 gallon per square or as required by primer manufacturer. ' 2.6 FABRICATING SHEET METAL. ACCESSORIES A. SMACNA and NRCA Details: Conform metal work with details shown and with applicable fabrication requirements of Architectural Sheet Metal Manual by SMACNA. Comply with installation details of NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. B. Prefabricate units as indicated or provide standard manufactured units complying with ' requirements; fabricate from sheet metal indicated. C. Provide 4-inch-wide flanges set in roofing cement for applying built-up asphalt roofing system membrane concealed by composition stripping. D. Fabricate work with flat-lock soldered joints and seams; except where joint movement is necessary, provide 1-inch-deep interlocking hooked flanges filled with mastic sealant. ' E. Fabricate gravel rings and aggregate divider strips with 1-inch-high standing leg of folded sheet metal, notched from top with 5/8-inch-deep V notches. Space notches 3 inches o.c. where strip intersects flow of water on roof, 6 inches o.c. elsewhere. Fabricate rings to sizes and shapes ' indicated (but not less than 36 inches square), and fabricate running strips (as shown) in maximum 4-foot lengths for butt joint installation (with 1/4-inch gaps). ' F. Fabricate penetration sleeves with minimum 8-inch-high stack of diameter 1 inch larger than penetrating element. Counterflashing is specified as work of another section of these specifications. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSPECTING SUBSTRATE A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built-up roofing system and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions ' have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ' A. Cooperate with inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing built-up roofing system. i- BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075510-5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Protect other work from spillage of built-up roofing materials, and prevent liquid materials from ' entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace/restore other work damaged when installing built-up roofing system work. ' C. Insurance/Code Compliance: Install and test, where required, built-up roofing system to comply with governing regulations and the following insurance requirements: , 1. FM requirements for Class I or Noncombustible, including zoned wind resistance as specified by FM Class 1-90 uplift approval. 2. UL Fire Classified and Class 90 uplift resistance. D. Coordinate installing insulation, roofing sheets, flashin9s, stripping, coatings, and surfacings so that insulation and felts are not exposed to precipitation or exposed overnight. Provide cutoffs at end of each day's work to cover exposed felts and insulation with a course of coated felt with ' joints and edges sealed with roofing cement. Remove cutoffs immediately before resuming work. E. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen according to EVT Method as recommended by NRCA. Do not raise temperature above minimum normal fluid-holding temperature necessary to ' attain EVT more than 1 hour prior to application. Discard bitumen that has been held at a temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature (FBT) for more than 3 hours. Determine flash point, FBT and EVT of bitumen, either by information from bitumen producer or by suitable tests. Determine maximum fire-safe handling temperature and do not exceed that temperature in ' heating bitumen. In no case heat bitumen to a temperature higher than 215 deg F (minus 4 deg C) below flash point. For aggregate-surfaced pour coats of bitumen, limit application temperature to minimum required for proper aggregate embedment and maximum that will permit retaining a ' coating of weight required (depends on slope of surface). Keep kettle lid closed except when adding bitumen. F. Bitumen Mopping Weights: For interply mopping, and for other moppings except as otherwise ' indicated, apply bitumen between plies at the rate of 28 lb of asphalt per roof square (plus or minus 10 percent on a total job average basis). G Substrate Joint Penetrations: Do not allow bitumen to penetrate substrate joints and enter ' building or damage insulation, vapor retarders, or other construction. Where mopping is applied directly to a substrate, tape joints or, in the case of steep asphalt, hold mopping back 2 inches from both sides of each joint. ' H. Cutoffs: At the end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Provide temporary covering of two plies of No. 15 roofing felt ' s work. Glaze-coat areas set in full mappings of hot bitumen; remove at beginning of the next day ' of completed organic ply sheets that cannot be flood-coated and aggregate-surfaced before the end of each day's work. 1. Coordinate with Owner to ensure building is unoccupied during roofing operations. , 3.4 INSTALLING INSULATION A. General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions and recommendations handling, , installing, and bonding or anchoring insulation to substrate. B. Secure insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for attaching ' specified board-type insulation to deck type shown. Fasten insulation over entire area of roofing at spacing as required by FM for Windstorm Resistance Classification 1-90. Run long joints for insulation in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slope with end joints staggered between rows. , BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075510 - 6 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. B. Two-Layer Installation: Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install required thickness in two layers with joints of second layer offset from joints of first layer a minimum of 12 inches each direction. Install second layer in full mopping of hot Type II asphalt applied within temperature range of EVT plus or minus 25 deg F (minus 4 deg C) and at rate of 30 lb per 100 sq. ft. (plus or minus 25 percent on total-job average basis). 3.5 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION ?J 1 t 1 3.6 f A. Shingling Plies: Except as otherwise indicated, install membrane with ply sheets shingled uniformly to achieve required amount of membrane thickness throughout Shingle in proper direction to shed water on each large area of roofing where slope is significant (over 1/2 inch per foot). Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations. B. Cant Strips/Tapered-Edge Strips: Except as otherwise shown, install preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of built-up asphalt roofing system membrane with vertical surface. Provide preformed, tapered-edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. C. First Ply: Install one lapped course of base ply. Mop to insulation substrate with steep Type III asphalt, except use special adhesive where indicated. D. Interply Sheets: Install the number and type(s) of ply sheets (felts) indicated, lapped (shingled) amount specified to form a continuous, uniform membrane with continuous bitumen moppings between sheets so that ply sheet does not touch ply sheet. As ply-sheet membrane is laid up, glaze-coat top surface with a 20-lb mopping per square of same bitumen. 1. Mop base of membrane to base ply. 2. Extend built-up roofing membrane to 2 inches (nominal) above top edge of cant strip and terminate. 3. Provide a folded-back envelope at edges and penetrations of built-up roofing membrane where it is not turned up on a tapered strip to provide positive protection against flow of bitumen into building or off the edge. Extend base sheet to form envelope or, where no base sheet is provided, install one ply of coated felt set in steep asphalt with joints sealed. Seal comers and other interruptions of envelope with large beads of roofing cement to protect against bitumen flow. 4. Nail edges of roofing membrane to wood blocking at perimeter edges of roof prior to installing metal gravel stops/fascias. Space nails at minimum 8 inches o.c. COMPOSITION FLASHING AND STRIPPING A. Install composition flashing at cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof. Install two ply of glass-fiber-reinforced flashing, each set in a continuous coating of roofing cement and extended onto deck 4 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Nail or provide other forms of mechanical anchorage of composition flashing to vertical surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. Except where concealed by elastic flashing, apply a heavy coating of roofing cement over composition flashing. B. Install composition stripping where metal flanges are set on roofing. Provide not less than one ply of glass-fiber fabric and one ply of reinforced glass-fiber flashing; set each in a continuous coating of roofing cement and extended onto the deck 4 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Except where concealed by aggregate surfacing or elastic flashing, apply a heavy coating of roofing cement over composition stripping. C. Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim that adjoins roofing. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075510 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Counter-Flashings: Counter-flashings, cap flashings, expansion joints, and similar work to be coordinated with built-up roofing work are specified in other sections of these specifications. E. Roof Accessories: Miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including insulation vents and other devices, and any major items of roof accessories to be coordinated with built-up roofing system work are specified in other sections of these specifications. 3.7 PROTECTING ROOFING A. Upon completing roofing, including associated work, institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing and prepare a written report with copies to Architect and Owner describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage found. B. Repair or replace, as required, deteriorated or defective work found at time of above inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to requirements of specified warranty. END OF SECTION 07511 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075510 - 8 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim: - 1. Manufactured through-wall flashing. 2. Manufactured reglets. 3. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim. 4. Formed wall flashing and trim. 5. Formed equipment support flashing. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. ' C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identify material, thickness, weight and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats and attachments to adjoining work. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 4. Details of expansion joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim indicated with factory-applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure and noncorrosive installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not. limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 1. Mill Finish: Standard two-sides bright. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 2. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil for topcoat. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full standard range. 3. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturers standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. 1) Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full standard range. 4. Anodized Finish: Apply the following coil-anodized finish: a. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. 1. Finish: No. 2D (dull, cold rolled). C. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. f t f 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 structural quality. 3. Exposed Finishes. Apply the following coil coating: a. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester- enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil topcoat. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full standard range. b. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1) Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2604, except as modified below: a) b) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours. Salt-Spray Resistance: 2000 hours. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center ' Renovations & Expansion 2) Color. As selected by. Architect from manufacturers full range. D. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperfora_ted. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 5-lb/100 sq. ft. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. 4. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. D. Solder for Lead: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. E. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet. F. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. 1. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. K. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200 - 4 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ( A. Through-Wall Ribbed Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing for embedment in masonry with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face to receive counterflashing. 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. a. Products: _ 1) Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail). 2) Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.; Cheney Flashing (Sawtooth). 3) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone Three-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing. B. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory- mitered and -welded comers and junctions. Manufacturers: a. Cheney Flashing Company, Inc. b. Fry Reglet Corporation. C. Heckmann Building Products Inc. d. Hickman, W. P. Company. e. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc. f. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc. 2. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick. 3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. 4. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials. 5. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends. 6. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. 7. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. 8. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricates items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1.. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat- lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. F G H 2.7 A. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required and as detailed on the drawings with no flange trim to exterior, 4-inch wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. 1. Fabricate parapet scuppers from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch wide joint cover plates. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch wide concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate with scuppers as shown on drawings. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. 3. Fabricate scuppers from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch wide concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate copings from the following material: a. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0396 inch thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200 - 6 . North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. E. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead: 4.0-lb/sq. ft, hard tempered. G. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead: 4.0-lb/sq. ft, hard tempered. 2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 12 foot long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch high-end dams. Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. 2.10 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 1. Coat side of uncoated aluminum, stainless-steel and lead sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick. coat of asphalt roofing cement where. required for waterproof performance. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches part. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners. 3. Copper Use copper or stainless steel fasteners. 4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200 - 8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at f temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder prepainted, metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet. 2. Pretinning is not required for lead. 3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Pretin edges of uncoated sheets to be soldered using solder recommended for stainless steel and phosphoric acid flux. Promptly wash off acid flux residue from metal after soldering. 4. Where surfaces to be soldered are lead coated, do not tin edges, but wire brush lead coating before soldering. 5. Lead-Coated Copper Soldering: Wire brush edges of sheets before soldering. 6. Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. J. Aluminum Flashing: Rivet or weld joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength. ' 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. 1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper. C. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow. 3A ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 149 for specified wind zone and as indicated. 1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 24-inch centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 24-inch centers. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 24-inch centers. D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. -1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant. F. _ Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies." C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete and 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies." 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200-10 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 076200 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076200 -11 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 077200 - ROOF. ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: - 1. Equipment supports. 2. Roof hatches. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leak proof, weather tight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. B. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. METAL MATERIALS Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coated. 3. Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 coated. a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements in AAMA 2604except as modified below: 1) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours. 2) Salt-Spray Resistance: 1000 hours. C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and mill finish. 1. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: Nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. D. E. F. G. H. 2.3 A. B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use, mill finished. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked-enamel finished. Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, 1 inch thick. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type no corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. D. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil thick, polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. E. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other no corrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. or PVC; or EPDM e i f F. , , neopren gn o Gaskets: Manufacturers standard tubular or fingered des flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. H. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Equipment Supports: Provide metal equipment supports, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints, with integral metal cant and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Manufacturers: a. Colony Custom Curbs. b. Commodity Products Company, Inc. C. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc. d. Curbs Plus Inc. e. Custom Curb, Inc. f. LM Curbs. g. Loren Cook Company. h. Metallic Products Corporation. i. Pate Company (The). j. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. k. Roof Products, Inc. 1. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. M. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. n. Uni-Curb, Inc. o. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Load Requirements: See mechanical drawings. 3. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick. a. Finish: Clear anodic. 4. Factory-install continuous wood nailers 5-1/2 inches wide at tops of equipment supports. 5. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturers standard removable counterflashing, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support. 6. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 7. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.5 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated single wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weather tight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware. 1. Manufacturers: a. Babcock-Davis; a Cierra Products Inc. Company. b. Bilco Company (The). C. Bristolite Skylights, d. Custom Curb, Inc. e. Dur-Red Products. f. Hi Pro International, Inc. g. J. L. Industries, Inc. h. Metallic Products Corporation. I. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company. j. Nystrom, Inc. k. O'Keeffe's Inc. I. Precision Ladders, LLC. M. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. n. ThyCurb; Div of Thybar Corporation. o. Wasco Products, Inc. p. Western Canwell. 2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-Ibf/sq, ft. external and 20-Ibf/sq. ft. internal loads. 3. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches. 4. Curb and Lid Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch thick. 5. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, 1 inch thick. 6. Interior Lid Liner. Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. 7. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal curb. 8. Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal curb. 9. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 10. Hardware. Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. 11. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position. a. Test Load: 250 lbs. b. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. c. Material and Finish: Steel tube, galvanized. d. Diameter: Pipe with 1-5/8-inch OD tube. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories. 2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION Anchor roof structions i itt r A. . n en s wr General: Install roof accessories according to manufacture accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. C Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, . protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating 1 . where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in or tool marks klin i b il . g, ng, uc cann alignment, excessive o E. Equipment Support Installation: 1. Set equipment support so top surface of equipment support is level. F. Roof Hatch Installation: 1. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. 2. Attach safety railing system to roof hatch curb. 3. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. H. 33 TOUCH UP A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance with Division 9 painting Sections. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3A CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturers written instructions. END OF SECTION 077200 ?11 1 1 1 i 1 r r I ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - B ?j j North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL i e 1.2 t i r t i r i t RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Note that all exterior joints shall be approved by the Architect and Owner prior to completion. SUMMARY This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. C. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. f. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. g. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls, b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. C. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances. f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. g. Other joints as indicated. 4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. C. Other joints as indicated. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1A SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. F. Qualification Data: For Installer. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installers Warranty: Installers standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings and other related materials that are compatible . with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. d to be ifi B. e Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are spec nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Products: a. Dow Coming Corporation; 799. b. . GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000. C. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC. d. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-631. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus. f. Tremco; Proglaze SG. g. Tremco; Spectrem 2. h. Tremco; Tremsil 600. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass and ceramic tile. E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Products: a. Pecora Corporation; 898. b. Tremco; Tremsil 600 White. C. Dow Corning. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: vertical surfaces of ceramic tile and at joints between walls and plumbing surfaces. F. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. Products: a. b. C. d. e. f. 9• h. I. JOINT SEALANTS Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 900. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 915. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 916 Textured. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 2639. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. Polymeric Systems Inc.; Flexiprene 1000. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-901. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7100. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7108. 079200-4 1 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion j. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7110. k. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex -15LM. 1. Tremco; DyMonic. m. Tremco; Vulkem 921. n. Tremco; Vulkem 931. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and ISIS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. . B. For use to bridge joints between hollow metal frames and drywall surfaces and other similar conditions. C. Products: 1. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 2. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 3. Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 4. Tremco; Tremflex.834. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, . paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2. Available Products: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. B Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, . nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. Products: 1 . a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. 2.6 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral- curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. 1. Products: JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion a. Dow Coming Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. b. GE Silicones; UltraSpan US 1100. C. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span. d. Tremco; Spectrem Ez Seal. B. Preformed Foam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant that is manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent; is factory produced in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; is coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping; develops a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and, complies with the following: 1. Products: a. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. b. illbruck Sealant Systems, Inc.; Wilseal 600. C. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Polytite B. d. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Polytite Standard. e. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal. 2. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining and compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants. a. Density: Manufacturers standard. 2.7 PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS A. Back-Bedding Mastic Tape Sealant: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Tape Sealant: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape sealant; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, 'and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- W adhesive tape where applicable. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS - A Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of . sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants i i ng or n and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of sta harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturers written instructions and the following requirements: ith adhesion of f ld i t ere w er n 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that cou joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: Concrete a . . b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 13. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1- Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. F. G Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 1 . 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise 3 . indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 58 in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacture's written instructions. I. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with 2 . preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturers written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 114 inch inside masking tape. 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical 4 . joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. J. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion i SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown on the drawings and as specified, but not limited to, the following. 1. Steel Doors 2. Steel Door Frames - 3. Steel Sidelight, Borrowed lite & transom frames 4. Louvers Installed in Steel Doors 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Masonry mortar B. Steel lintels C. Rough carpentry D. Wood Doors and Frames E. Finish Hardware F. Glass and Glazing G. Painting of steel doors and frames 1.3 REFERENCES A. Steel Doors and Frames in this section must meet all standards as established by the following listing. 1. Door and Hardware Preparation ANSI 115.1. 2. Life Safety Codes NFPA-101 (Latest edition). 3. Fire Doors and Windows NFPA-80 (Latest edition). 4. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate approved shop drawings with all other trades and manufacturers whose products are used in conjunction with the Steel Doors and Frames under section 08100. B. Finish hardware supplier is to fumish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. Each floor of the building is to be detailed separately. D. The steel door and frame supplier will furnish to the architect (6) complete copies of the proposed steel door and frames schedule and/or shop drawings. Using the same reference number for details and openings as those on the contract drawings. After receipt of the approved door schedule the steel door and frame supplier will make any corrections submit to the architect (6) sets of corrected schedules, for file and field use. E. All door openings including wood, aluminum, overhead etc. must be listed on the steel door schedule. Include details on the following list of items: 1. Frame elevations STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Door design elevations 3. Frame sections 4. Details of construction 5. Anchorage 6. Opening conditions 7. Joints and connections 8. Hardware locations F. If any opening is not by the steel door manufacturer only the door opening number should be shown along with the type of material (alum, wood etc.). G. Upon request of the architect or for any substitution to this specification, (4) copies of the door manufacturers catalog cut sheets are to be submitted to the architect before any material is placed on the job site. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Steel Doors and Frames complying with the Steel Door institute recommended specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSI/SDI 100 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All steel doors and frames must be properly marked with door opening mark number to correspond with the schedule. B. Deliver all the steel doors in cartons and palletized to provide protection during transit and job storage. C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be repaired, provided they are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. D. Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. Place units on wood sills or on the floor in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4 inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company 2.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND GENERAL REINFORCEMENTS A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufactures standard location. B. Steel frames for use with wood doors the hardware preparation on the doors is governed by its location on the frames. If the doors are factory mortised, the door supplier is responsible for coordinating hardware locations. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufactures standard location. B. Steel frames for use with wood doors the hardware preparation on the doors is governed by its location on the frames. If the doors are factory mortised, the door supplier is responsible for coordinating hardware locations. C. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. _ D. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Through bolt holes, attachment holes, drilling and tapping for surface hardware, shall be _ done by others. 2.3 STEEL DOORS A. Material - Exterior doors and as indicted on the schedule 1. GrainTechO Doors: Fabricated from steel that has an embossed wood grain pattern extending the full height and width of the door. Provide doors with continuous vertical mechanical inter-locking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams. The wood grain embossment minimum .005" deep. The wood grain face sheets must be cleaned, phosphatized and prime painted with a stain absorbing primer. Vertical edges must be stained using conventional stains to achieve an ash color. After staining, the door must be clear coated with UV inhibitors. Applied grain pattern or material will not be permitted. 2. Hinge reinforcement shall be not less than 7gage (3/16") plate 1-1/4" X 9". Approved equal is a 12 gage continuous channel with formed holes drilled and tapped. The manufacture to provide test information that this type reinforcement is equal to a 3116" or 7 gage plate reinforcement. 3. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 14 gage galvanized A60, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel flush with the face sheets and screwed into the door. Plastic fillers are not acceptable. 4. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and laminated to inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to both panels and honeycomb core. 5. Acceptable Manufactures a) Steelcraft GrainTech b) Curries: Curristain B. Materials - Interior doors as indicted on the schedule 1. Face sheets are to be made of commercial quality Cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A366 or 620. Grade II -18ga. 2. Vertical edges are to have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams. The internal portion of the seam shall be sealed with epoxy. 3. Hinge reinforcement shall be not less than 7 gage (3/16") plate 1-1/4" X 9". Approved equal is a 12 gage continuous channel with formed holes drilled and tapped. The manufacture to provide test information that this type reinforcement is equal to a 3/16" or 7 gage plate reinforcement. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 4. Doors over 7 feet in height and or 3 feet in width shall have continous type gear hinges 5. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 14 gage galvanized A60, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel screwed in place so that the web of the channel is flush with the face sheets and screwed into the door. 6. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and laminated to inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to both panels and honeycomb core. 7. Acceptable Manufactures: a) Steelcraft Manufacturing - L. 2.6 STEEL FRAMES A. Materials - exterior and as indicted on the schedule. 1. Are to be hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM designations A924 A60, 16ga. 2. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame comer or intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. 3. Acceptable Manufactures: a) Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series S. Materials all other frames as indicted on the schedule. 1. Will comply with ASTM A366-68 or ASTM A569-66T, 16ga. 4. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. 2. Acceptable Manufactures: b) Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series C. Fabrication 1. General design and construction I a) Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lit?s, and other openings to the size and design as shown on the architectural dralslings. b) All finished work to be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects. c) Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends to be as scheduled and shown on approved shop drawings. d) When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in sections designed for splicing in the field by others. e) Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. f) Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for template mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and template provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling, and tapping shall be done by others. g) Hinge reinforcements, to be 7ga steel. D. Anchors STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-4 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 1. Floor anchors shall be provided at each jamb. 2. Anchors for in masonry are to be of the wire type. 3. Anchors for stud partitions are to be steel of a suitable design, not less than 18ga thickness. 4. Dust boxestmortar guards to be no less than 26 gage. 5. All frames that are welded, to be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only not to be used to size the frame opening. 6. Loose glazing stops are to be of 18 gage galvanized at labeled openings and 20 gage galvanized on non-labeled openings, butted at the comer joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws. 7. Provide 3 silencers on single door and 2 silencers for double door openings. 2.7 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with current issue of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard Number 80, as scheduled. B. Doors and/or frames for labeled openings are to bear either a stamped or applied label from Warnock Hersey or Underwriters Laboratory 2.8 PRIME FINISH: A. Doors and frames are to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a coat of rust inhibiting baked on primer applied at the factory. The finish shall meet the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A224.1 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces." The baked on prime finish is not intended to be the final layer of protection from the elements. Field painting using a good grade of paints are to be used in accordance with the recommendations of the door and frame manufacturer. For specialty types of finished coatings, the paint supplier should also be consulted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to make sure that all dimensions for existing opening or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.) given to the steel manufacturer are accurate. B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to see that any scratches or disfigurements caused in shipping or handling are properly cleaned and touched up with a rust inhibiting primer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Frames 1. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist and out of square conditions. 2. Place frames prior to enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 3. Fill frames in masonry walls with mortar. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 4. When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the plaster or mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames will coat the inside of the frames, in the field, with a corrosion inhibiting bituminous material. 5. SDI-105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" and SDI-110 "Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction" shall indicate the proper installation procedures. B. Doors 1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten them to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI-110. 3. Where necessary, only metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances. 4. "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware" published by DHI is recommended for further details. C. Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper condition. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply to touch-up or compatible air-drying primer. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. After installation, copies of the door schedules will be turned over to the owner when the building is accepted. END OF SECTION 081113 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WOOD DOORS, NON-RATED AND FIRE-RATED A. Flush B. Glazed C. Louvers 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS - A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry B. Section 064023 - Interior Architectural Woodwork C. Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Frames D. Section 087100 - Door Hardware E. Section 088000 - Glazing 1.3 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. ASTM E152-81a - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. B. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1995 Edition. C. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 9th Edition. D. UBC 43-2 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. F. Quality Standards: 1, NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A-97 (National Wood Window and Door Association). 2, AWI Quality Standards 7th Edition, Version 1.01997. 3. ANSI A115. W Series, Wood Door Hardware Standards. (American National Standard Institute) G. Labeling Agencies 1. Intertek Testing Services-Wamock Hersey (ITS-WH) 1.4 DOO R DESCRIPTION A. Interior Doors (Non-rated) 1. DPC-1, 5 Ply Particle Board Core Door, 1-3/4" (44mm) B. Interior Doors (Rated) 1. DFM-90, 90 Minute Mineral Core Door, 1-3/4" (44mm), rated by ITS/WH 1 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, special beveling, blocking for hardware in mineral core doors, identify cutouts. C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials, thickness, construction, veneer species, cut and matching requirements, factory machining and factory finishing criteria. D. Construction Samples: Submit one or more of manufacturer's standard samples demonstrating door construction. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-1 11 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion E. Finish Samples: A set of 3 illustrating the range of color and grain of the specified door face materials. F. Manufacturer's Full Lifetime Warranty 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Meet or exceed NWWDA I.S.1-A Premium Grade and/or AWI Version 7 Custom Grade. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING, AND SITE CONDITIONS A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of NWWDA, AWI and manufacturer's instructions. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's standard packaging. Inspect for damage upon receipt. C. Do not store in damp or wet areas or in areas where light might cause oxidization. ' D. HVAC systems should be operating and balanced prior to arrival of doors. Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25% nor greater than 55%. E. Break seal on packages while at site to permit ventilation. 1.8 COORDINATION A Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01620. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, doorframe and door hardware installation with a pre-installation conference. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty to the following term: 1. Interior Solid Core Doors: "Full Life of Original Installation" including re-hang and refinish if door(s) do not comply with Warranty tolerance standards. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Algoma B. Eggers C. Weyerhaeuser Company 2.2 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with NWWDA/AWI workmanship for veneer faces, vertical edges, crossbands, horizontal edges and dimensional tolerances. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Door Construction Grade 1. Except as may be otherwise shown on the drawings, fabricate the work of this section to NWWDA "Premium Grade/"AWI "Custom Grade". B. Flush Door Facing, Slice Or Cut, Matching, And Finish FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 u t 1 d Id- 1 1 t 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion Wood Veneer. AWI - A Grade: The veneer species, slice or cut, finish and matching shall be: a. Rotate White Birch Veneer with a consistent appearance, both ingrain and color, suitable for stained finish. Match existing door finish. Doors shall be pre-machined. C. Doors In Pairs Or Sets 1. Specify per project requirements. Door schedule shall reflect pairs and sets by door numbers. 2. The veneer, slice or cut, finish and veneer matching shall match. Matching between paired doors shall be in a sequence. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Door And Transom Panel Core Construction 1. Non-rated: ANSI A208. 1-LD-2 Particleboard. 2. 45, 60 or 90 minute Fire-Rated: Mineral Core. 3. Bond stiles and rails to core, abrasive sand core assembly to achieve uniform thickness. B. Vertical Edges (Stiles) 1. Non-rated - a. Edges to match face veneer. (May include veneer banding and structural composite lumber backers or inner-plies). 2. 45, 60, 90 Minute Rated Pairs a. Mineral core door stiles to be veneer banded to match faces veneer over manufacturer's edge for improved screw holding. (Metal edges required). 3. Mineral Core a. Mineral core door stiles to be veneer banded to match faces veneer over manufacturer's edge for improved screw holding. C. Horizontal Edges (Rails) 1. Mill option structural composite lumber or hardwood lumber. D. Adhesives 1. Facing Adhesive: Type 1 - Waterproof. E. Inner-blocking For Mineral Core Fire Doors 1. Supply inner-blocking for all surface applied hardware, Through bolts not accepted. F. Machining For Rated Doors 1. Factory fit and machine doors for frame and finish hardware in accordance with hardware and NFPA 80 requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Apply appropriate fire labels. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Louvers 1. Non-Rated Metal Louvers: Equal to Air Louver model 80OA1. 2. rated Metal Louvers: Equal to Air Louver model 1900A1. B. Glazing Stops 1. Non-Rated: FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center .Renovations & Expansion a. Wood, of the same species/compatible with door species, with mitered comers. 2. Fire-Rated: a. Metal Vision Frames. 2.6 FACTORY FINISH A. Factory finish doors in accordance with NWWDA G-17 Finish System Description or AWI Division 1500-S-4 - Finish System Standards. Factory finish to be water based stain and ultraviolet (UV) cured polyurethane sealer to comply with EPA Title 5 guidelines for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions limitations. Finish must meet or exceed performance standards of TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. Color shall be a Clear finish as specified in section 2.3.13. B. Factory Finished doors to be installed just prior to substantial completion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate opening conditions. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and ready to receive this work. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fire-rated and non-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80, manufacturers' instructions and fire rated labeling requirements. B. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). D. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. E. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes using templates provided by hardware manufacturer. (Use threaded throughbolts for half surface hinges). F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. H. Install door louvers and light kits plumb and level. 1. Reseal or refinish any doors that required site alteration. 3.3 WARRANTY TOLERANCES A. Conform to NWWDA standards and testing methods for warp, cup, bow and telegraphing. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions Division 1. B. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.5 DOOR AND FRAME COMPONENTS SCHEDULES A. Refer to door and frame schedule. END OF SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY - A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior glass storefront systems. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads indicated without structural failure, deflection exceeding specified limit, support components transferring stresses to glazing, and glazing-to-glazing or glazing-to-support contact as determined by structural analysis. 1. Structural Loads: a. Wind Load: 123 mph. 2. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to 11175 of clear span when subjected to uniform load deflection test. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including the following: 1. Plans, elevations and sections. 2. Details of fittings and glazing. 3. Hardware quantities, locations and installation requirements. 4. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation registered in the State of Florida. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Metal Finishes: 6-inch- long sections of patch fittings, rails and other items. 2. Glass: 6 inches square, showing exposed-edge finish. D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. GLASS STOREFRONTS 084113-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with all- glass systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating all-glass systems without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of all-glass systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 3. Failure of operating components to function normally. B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. YKK AP America Inc. (YNS-50) 2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Company (IFG 5000) 3. Vistawall Architectural Products, Terrell, TX. (5000 Series) B. Basis of design: YKK YHS 50 FS with 35H Door, 2 1/2" face dimension and sizes shown on Drawings and reinforced to meet project design pressure requirements. 1. Provide a Florida Product Approval or Miami-Dade NOA certifying that the products and assemblies comply with the project location design requirements when used in combination with the specified Von Duprin exit door hardware. No Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Division 1, a minimum of 10 days prior to bid date. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications. B. Aluminum Members: ASTM B 221, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than , alloy 6063-T5 and comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire. F1 GLASS STOREFRONTS 0&1113 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Carbon Steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTm A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip. D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc-plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible, provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. F. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront framing system fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include subframes and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams. 1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive resilient elastometric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior. i di t d B. n ca e . Sidelight Channels: Match fitting-metal finish, unless otherwise C. Rails: 1. Material: Aluminum 2. Height: As indicated. 3. Style: Flat top, square profile. 4. Locations: As indicated. D. Accessory Fittings: Match patch fitting and rail metal and finish for the following: ' 1. Center-housing lock. E. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed. F. Weather Stripping: Sweep type. ICATION 2.4 FABR A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, rails, and accessories before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering. GLASS STOREFRONTS 084113 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller hearth) process and fabricate so, when installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite. 2. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating. Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. D. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Set units level and plumb. C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components. 0. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points and weather stripping. B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces. END OF SECTION 08450 GLASS STOREFRONTS 084113 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 087100 -- FINISH DOOR HARDWARE PARTI - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items that are specifically excluded from this section of the specification. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. Aluminum Doors and Frames C. Wood Doors and Frames 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or as may be required by actual conditions at building. B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, as required for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all responsibility for correct quantities. C. All hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction over this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict therewith in these specifications. D FIRE-RATED OPENINGS: . 1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with A.I.A. (NBFU) Pamphlet No. 80, NFPA Standards NO. 101, UBC 702 (1997) and UL10C. This requirement d ware takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only har that has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and doorframe labels. 2. Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide supplementary marking on door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped with fire exit hardware and provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". E. FASTENERS: ' 1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically, all exposed screws installation. 3. Insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished to match adjacent hardware. 4. Door closers and exit devices to be installed with closed head through bolts (sex bolts). 08710 Finish Hardware 03/10/111 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion F. HURRICANE OPENINGS 1. Provide hardware for hurricane openings in compliance with local jurisdiction. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by local authority for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have in their employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be available for consultation to the architect, owner and the general contractor at reasonable times during the course of work. - B. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering system and not creating any separate system himself: He shall submit the schedule for review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final approval. Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware, including the responsibility for furnishing correct quantities. C. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the architect and written approval received. D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing contractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate fitting, finishing hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work. E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the products specified. F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre-installation class as well as a post- installation walk-thru. This is to insure proper installation and provide for any adjustments or replacements of hardware as required. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to job; store in designated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer as the individual manufacturer's warranty permits: B. Overhead door closers shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years commencing on the Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of failure, the manufacture is to promptly repair or replace the defective with no additional cost to the Owner. 08710 Finish Hardware 03/10/112 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion ODUCTS PART 11- PR 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer. B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the following manufacturers. PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER SUBSTITUTE 1) Hinges Hager Stanley, Bommer 2) Locks & Latches Best Schlage 3) Cylinders, Keys, Keying Best None (No Substitution) 4) Exit Devices Von Duprin None (No Substitution) 5) Door Closers LCN None (No Substitution) 6) OH Stops/Holders Glynn Johnson Rixson 7) Push Button Access Schlage CO series None (No Substitution) 8) Magnetic Locks Locknetics Sentronics T i mco r 9) Wall Stops/Floor Ives Rockwood, .Stops, Flushbolts 10) Kick Plates Ives Rockwood, Quality 11) Threshold/Weather-strip National Guard Pemko, Zero 12) Silencers Ives Rockwood, Trimco 13) Key Cabinet Lund Key Control If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to C . be bid upon, permission must be requested from the architect seven (7) days prior to bidding. If substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum. 2.02 FINISH OF HARDWARE: A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D), Interior Hinges to be Satin Chrome (26D). S ti t b e a n o Door Closers to be Aluminum. Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D), Exit Devices Chrome (26D). Overhead Holders to be Satin Chrome (26D), Flat Goods to be Satin Chrome (26D) or Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum. 2.03 HINGES AND PIVOTS: A. Exterior butts shall be Stainless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be furnished with non-removable pins (NRP). B. Interior butts shall be as listed. C. Doors V or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt for each 2'6" in height or fraction thereof. Dutch door shall have two (2) butts per leaf. 2.04 KEYING: A. All locks and cylinders to be keyed to the owner's existing BEST system. B. Combinated to Owner's instructions. Lock manufacturer shall issue Bittings, directly to the city only. C. Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock and Six (6) each grand master, master keys, two (2) construction and two (2) permanent control keys. ' 08710 Finish Hardware 03110/113 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Hardware supplier to provide temporary cores during the construction phase. The city will change out the temporary cores for the permanent cores. All cores become the property of the city upon completion of the work. 2.05 LOCKSETS: A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in "35H" series, 15H Design as manufactured by BEST on New Construction MW series, 150 Design as manufactured by BEST only where scheduled. 1. Acceptable substitutions: SCHLAGE "L9000" series, 06C design 2.06 EXIT DEVICES: A. All devices shall be Von Duprin 98 Series in types and functions specified. All devices must be listed under "Panic Hardware" in accident equipment list of Underwriters Laboratories. All labeled doors with "Fire Exit Hardware" must have labels attached and be in strict accordance with Underwriters Laboratories. B. All exit devices shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 1,000,000 cycles must be provided. C. All surface strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a plate underneath to prevent movement. And shall be provided with a dead-latching feature to prevent latchbolt tampering. D. Vertical rob exit devices NOT recommended. Key removable mullions with rim exit devices preferred. 1. Acceptable substitutions: A. None (No Substitution) 2.07 DOOR CLOSERS: A. All closers shall be LCN 4011 or 4111 Series having non-ferrous covers, forged steel arms separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arm mounted on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. B. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided. C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL 10C. D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V-slot design to reduce possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have separate and 08710 Finish Hardware 03/10/114 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall be prop" located so as to effectively slow the swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop location to protect the door frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PRV) are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable substitutions: A. None (No Substitution) 1 2.08 TRIM AND PLATES: A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 8" high, mop plates to be 4" high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door. B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware schedule. 2.09 DOOR STOPS: A. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series are preferred, but where not practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or FS438 series. Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series. 2.10 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP: A. Thresholds and weather-strip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule. 2.11 DOOR SILENCERS: A. Furnish rubber door silencers equal to Ives SR64 for all new interior hollow metal frames, (2) per pair and (3) per single door frame. I PART III - EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with the Finish Hardware schedule. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. ' B. Contractor to provide a secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufactures have provided a pre- installation class. This is to insure proper installation of the specified products. ?'J 08710 Finish Hardware 03/101115 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturers instructions. Prior to turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any final adjustments to the finish hardware. 3.03 PROTECTION: A. Contractor shall protect the hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. 08710 Finish Hardware 03/10/116 1 r 1 I 1 0311012011 DOOR / HWSET INDEX FOR 109402 NORTH GREENWOOD REC CENTER F Door No HwSet Door No HwSet Door No HwSet 100 13 101 14 101A 02 101B 07 101E 02 103 .09 107 09 108 05 109A 07 109B 11 109C 01 110A 08 110B 03 111 06 112 10 113 08 115 12 116 04 117 04 1 tENOVATION 11 ' Hardware Group No. 01 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA MULLION STABILIZER 154 689 VON ' 1 1 EA EA MULLION PANIC HARDWARE KR9954 98DT 689 626 VON VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 2 EA ALARM KIT 98-ALK LX 628 VON 3 EA STD COMBINATED COR E 1C7-2 626 BES 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1 E72 -RP 626 BES 2 EA MTSE CYL, STRGHT CAM 1 E74- C4 - RP5 626 BES 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 _ 689 LCN ' 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A AL ZER 1 EA BALANCE FURNISHED UNDER SECTION 08 40 00 B/O 2 EA SWEEPS 339AA AL ZER BASIS IF DESIGN - YKK I Hardware Group No. 02 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr ' 3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98EO 626 VON 1 EA ALARM KIT 98-ALK LX 628 VON 1 EA STD COMBINATED CORE 1C7- 2 626 BES 1 EA MTSE CYL, STRGHT CAM 1 E74- C4 - RP5 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 CUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 2 EA THRESHOLD 65A EA SWEEPS 339AA AL AL ZER ZER ALARMED DOORS Hardware Group No. 03 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA STD COMBINATED CORE 1 C7- 2 626 BES ' 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L908OBDC 06A 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 CUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER ' 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A AL ZER ' 2 EA SWEEPS 339AA AL ZER f- I 1 Hardware Group No. 04 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1E72 -RP 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 CUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA. RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A _ AL ZER 2 EA SWEEPS 339AA AL ZER Hardware Group No. 05 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9827L-BE-LBR 996L-BE 626 VON 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW 630 IVE .2 E4 WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 2 EA MAGNETIC HOLD-OPEN SEM 1960 AL LCN 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER TIED TO RELEASE ON FIRE ALARM Hardware Group No. 06 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 6 EA HINGE 3PB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 (TOP) 626 IVE 1 EA STD COMBINATED CORE 1C7- 2 626 BES 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080BOC 06A 626 SCH 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 450S 630 GLY 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA METAL Z-ASTRAGAL BY DOOR SUPPLIER GRY B/O 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE Hardware Group No. 07 Provide each SGL door(s) with the followi ng: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98L-F 996L 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1E72 -RP 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 689 LCN" 1 EA KICK PLATE 840010" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 1 1 i ' Hardware Group No. 08 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STD COMBINATED CORE 1C7- 2 626 BES 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L907OBDC 06A 626 SCH 4041 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 689 LCN ' _ 2 EA KICK PLATES 840010" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER ' NOTE: ADD "H" HOLD OPEN ARM CLOSER ARM @ DR#110A Hardware Group No. 09 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE ' 1 EA STD COMBINATED CORE 1C7- 2 1 Fro OFFICE LOCK L9056BDC 06A 626 626 BES SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 840010" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 1885 BLK ZER ' Hardware Group No. 10 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET L9040 06A 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 840010" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 434 APKL 36 Hardware Group No. 11 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 06A 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER. 4041 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 840010" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 Fro WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER Hardware Group No. 12 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 3PB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STD COMBINATED CORE 1C7-2 626 BES 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L908OBDC 06A 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 13 8'X 10' DOORS Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9827EO 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9827NL 626 VON 2 EA ALARM KIT 98 ALK LX 628 VON 3 EA STD COMBINATED COR E 1C7-2 626 BES 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1E72-RP 626 BES 2 EA MTSE CYL, STRGHT CAM 1 E74- C4 - RP5 626 BES 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 32" X 1" LOW 630 IVE 2 EA ROD & LATCH GUARD RG-27 630 VON 1 SET SEALS 1885 BLK ZER 2 EA MEETING STILE SEAL 8193AA AL ZER 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A AL ZER 2 EA SWEEPS 339AA AL ZER ENGINEERING REPORT FOR 8'X 10' OPENING -ALARM DOORS Hardware Group No. 14 4 -LEAF DOOR Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 4 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA MULLION KR9954 689 VON 3 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98DT 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 4 EA ALARM KIT 98-ALK LX 628 VON 4 EA STD COMBINATED CORE 1C7-2 626 BES 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1 E72 -RP 626 BES 4 EA MTSE CYL, STRGHT CAM 1 E74- C4 - RP5 626 BES 4 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 CUSH 689 LCN 3 EA THRESHOLD 65A AL ZER 1 EA BALANCE FURNISHED UNDER SECTION 08 40 00 B/O 2 EA SWEEPS 339AA AL ZER TWO SINGLE DOORS WITH PAIR DOORS -ALARM ALL DOORS.- KEY ENTRY ONE DOOR 1 i t F North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Entrances and other doors. 2. Storefront construction. 3. Laminated glass. 4. Wire Glass. A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in exterior walls is 6.0 mm (0.23 inch). 2. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat-treated glass, are selected so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the following: a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind ' action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300. For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass. C. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass-framing members and glazing components. Base ' GLAZING 088000-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center , Renovations & Expansion engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and ' nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), ' material surfaces. 1.5 SUBMITTALS I A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. I B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. C. Product Data on Vanceva Laminated Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, color of interlayer, special handling or installation requirements. D. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products ' comply with specified requirements. 1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's ' permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance ' Manual specified in Division 1. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these ' publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual." 3. LSGA Publications: "LSGA Design Guide." 4. SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines" and TB-3001 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. ' 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' C. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below: 1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated. 2. Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated. ' GLAZING 088000 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion E. Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). !, 1.9 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturers Warranty on Laminated Glass: Submit written warranty signed by insulating glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those laminated glass units that deteriorate as defined in the "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. ' 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified 2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated below, and Quality q3 (glazing select). 1. Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide heat-treated glass by one of the following companies. 1. AFG Industries, Inc. GLAZING 088000 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Cardinal IG. 3. Ford Glass Industries. 4. Guardian Industries Corp. 5. LOF 6. PPG Industries, Inc. 7. Tempglass. 8. Viracon, Inc. I 2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT_GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller-hearth) process, at manufacturers option, except provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong marks. _ 2.4 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Uncoated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below. 1. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide heat-treated glass by one of the following companies. 1. AFG Industries, Inc. 2. Cardinal IG. 3. Saint-Gobain. 4. Falconer Glass Industries. 5. Glasstemp, Inc. 6. Guardian Industries Corp. 7. HGP Industries. 8. PPG Industries, Inc. 9. Tempglass. 10. Viracon, Inc. ' 2.5 WIRE GLASS A. 1/4°Wire glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q6 in, diamond mesh pattern. 2.6 LAMINATED GLASS A. Inner and outer lites uncoated, Clear, Float Glass: ASTM C 1172, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 tinted (gray) typical - but see drawings for Class 1 clear at some storefront doors, Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below. For all other laminate glass, each lite thickness is 1/4'. , 1. Kind LA. B Thickness of Plastic Interiayer. 0.060 inch. C. Color of Plastic Interlayer: Clear. GLAZING 088000 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Nominal Performance Characteristics of Laminated Units are as indicated below: 11 1. Visible Light Transmittance: Daylight 9001b 2. Summer Daytime U Value:.83 3. Winter Nighttime U -Value: 1.18 4. Shading Coefficient .89*4 5. Low Emissivity. E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide heat-treated glass by one of the following companies. 1. Southwall Technologies 2. Sully North America 3. Guardian 4. HGP - Tampa 1 Visible light Transmittance: [...... J. (minimum / maximum) .2 Solar Reflectance (Front surface): f ?• (minimum / maximum) .3 Solar Reflectance (Back Surface): (minimum / maximum) .4 Visible Reflectance (Front Surface): [?,?• (minimum / maximum) .5 Visible Reflectance (Back Surface): ??• (minimum / maximum) .6 Shading coefficient (SC): L___a (minimum). .7 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC or g-value): L__J.minimum .8 UV screening, up to 380 nm: [Greater than 99%]. 9 Specific gravity: .10 Thermal conductivity (U value): [,?• (minimum / maximum) .11 Coefficient of thermal expansion: [ .12 Emissivity (Front Surface): Low E. .13 Emissivity (Back Surface): Low E. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side- walking). 1 088000 - 5 GLAZING - North Greenwood Recreation Center ' Renovations & Expansion 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS ' A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness offsets at comers. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. 13. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing member Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to subst atesving glass immediately before glazing. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: 1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. 2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. GLAZING 088000-6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced f hi i n course o n t glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks h l b d f ee ea . or compatible sealant suitable F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: 1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. l ess H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, un otherwise required by glass manufacturer. 1. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled ?y for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000 - 7 f 1 1 1 1 U. SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS PART 1- GENERAL North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors. 1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and spandrel lites. 2. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation. 1.S SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions. 2. Mirror mastic. 3. Mirror hardware. B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of mirror product required, in the form indicated below: 1. Mirrors, 12 inches (300 mm) square, including edge treatment on 2 adjoining edges. MIRRORS 088300-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Mirror clips. 3. Mirror trim, 12 inches (300 mm) long. D. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror, signed by product manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed mirror glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in mirror installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under NGA's Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from one source for each type of minor indicated. C. Source Limitations for Mirror Glazing Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from one source for each type of accessory indicated. D. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations: 1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." E. F. 1.7 A. B. Safety Glazing Products: For mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces-and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation. MIRRORS 088300 - 2 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 r t North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace miners that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below: 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering mirrors that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mirrors by one of the following: 1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 2. Gardner Glass Products. 3. Gilded Mirrors, Inc. 4. Guardian Industries Corp. 5. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. 6. Lenoir Mirror Company. 7. Messer Industries, Inc. 8. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. 9. Sunshine Mirror. 10. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. 11. VVP America, Inc.; Binswanger Mirror Products. 12. Walker Glass Co., Ltd. 2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS A. Clear Glass Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror 1. Nominal Thickness: 1/8" minimum. B. Annealed Float Glass for Inner Lite of Laminated Mirrors: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-03; Class 1 (clear). 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. MIRRORS 088300 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for .setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirror; will be installed. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Gunther Mirror Mastics. b. Palmer Products Corporation. 2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch (9.5 and 22 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). 2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch (16 and 25 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.062 inch (1.57 MM). 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bottom Trim: 1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Standard "J" Channel. 2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Medium Gauge Aluminum Shallow Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar. 3) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Shallow Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar. b. Top Trim: 1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Deep "J" Channel. 2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Medium Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J" Moulding Upper Bar. 3) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar. 5. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/16 and 3/4 inch (7.9 and 19 mm) in height, respectively. 6. Top Trim: Formed with front leg with a height of 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) and back leg designed to fit into the pocket created by wall-mounted aluminum cleat. 7. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: MIRRORS 088300 - 4 - North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion a. Bottom Trim: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D638 FHA Type "J" Channel. b. Top Trim: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D 1638 Top Channel. C. Cleat: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D 1637M Mirror Mount System Cleat. B. Mirror Bottom Clips: Manufacturer's standard C. Minor Top Clips: Manufacturer's standard Plated Steel Hardware: Formed-steel shapes with plated finish indicated. 1. Profile: Manufacturer's standard 2. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard finish line D. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. E. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes. B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge. 1. Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. D. Laminated Safety Mirrors: Provide laminated mirrors fabricated to produce units complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LM, and the following: 1. Glass Lites: Outer lite of mirror glass with silver coating on second surface and inner lite of clear float glass. 2. Interlayer Material: Mirror manufacturer's standard 0.030-inch- (0.76-mm-) thick, polyvinyl-butyral interlayer with a proven record of showing no tendency to delaminate from, or cause damage to, silver coating. 3. Laminating Process: Laminate glass using laminator's standard heat-plus-pressure process to produce glass free from foreign substances, air or glass pockets, and other defects. 4. Seal edges of laminated units to comply with written requirements of interlayer manufacturer. E. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with pressure-sensitive adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections. Use adhesives and film backing compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer. i I MIRRORS 088300 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with mirror installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. For wall-mounted mirrors, install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. 1. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 2. For mirror hardware in the form of continuous J-channels at bottom, provide setting blocks 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, 2 slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) long. 3. For mirror hardware in the form of a continuous J-channel at bottom and continuous top trim at top, fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall. 4. For metal or plastic clips, place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges. 5. Where indicated, install mirror hardware in the form of J-channels that are fabricated in single lengths to fit and cover top and bottom edges of mirrors. 6. Where indicated, install bottom trim and top clips. Fabricate bottom trim in single lengths to fit and cover bottom edges of mirrors. Locate top clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. 7. Where indicated, install bottom and top clips symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. 8. Install mastic as follows: a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material. MIRRORS 088300 - 6 1 r i 1 r t 1 1 t 1 t r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturers written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. END OF SECTION 088300 MIRRORS 088300 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion SECTION 089000 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Glazed aluminum curtain wall, stick system installation. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that has the following capabilities based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project: B. Glazing is physically and thermally isolated from framing members. C. System is reglazable from the exterior. D. Wind Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, including the 2001 Standard Building Code. Design wind speed is 130 mph. System tested for large missile impact per Miami Dade protocol P201, P202, P203. 1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inches whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330. a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures. b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile of wind for relevant exposure category. E. Dead Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch clearance between members and top of fixed panels, glazing, or other fixed part immediately below. Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between members and operable windows and doors. F. Air Infiltration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with permanent resistance to air leakage through system of not more than 0.10 cfm/sq_ ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. G. Water Penetration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does not evidence water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of f GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 089000-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion inward acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 10 Ibf/sq. ft. H. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, that accommodates dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each product specified, including details of construction relative to materials, - dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of glazed aluminum curtain wall system including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Florida responsible for their preparation. D. Florida Product Approval or Miami-Dade Notice of Acceptance (NOA) for each exterior product certifying the assembly, and it's components, has been tested and proven to withstand, without failure, the pressures and loads produced by the design wind speed indicated on the drawings and the impact of wind borne missiles in compliance with the code requirements for the project location when installed according to the manufacturer's specifications and instructions accompanying the notice. E. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for components with factory-applied color finishes. F. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's standard sizes. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1. Joinery. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. G. Welder certificates indicating that welders comply with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article. 1. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of glazed aluminum curtain wall system with requirements based on comprehensive testing of manufacturer's current system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 089000 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of glazed aluminum curtain wall systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing glazed aluminum curtain wall systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for glazed aluminum curtain wall systems, including drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturers standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of glazed aluminum curtain wall system from one source and by a single manufacturer. Also - obtain sunshades and all miscellaneous break metal accessories and trim from the same manufacturer as the Aluminum Curtain wall Manufacturer. Curtain wall and Break metal shall match in finish, color, sheen, etc. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sight lines and relationships to one another and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, or in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architects approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance requirements. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-- Aluminum." 1. Engage welders who have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and who are currently certified for these processes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of a glazed aluminum curtain wall system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 089000 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. 3. Failure of system to meet performance requirements. 4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 5. Failure of operating components to function normally. 6. Water leakage. 7. Glazing breakage. C. Warranty Period: 5 year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. YKK AP America Inc. 2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Company 3. Vistawall Architectural Products, Terrell, TX. B. Basis of design: YKK YHC 300 OG Curtain Wall, 3" face dimension and sizes shown on Drawings and reinforced to meet project design pressure requirements. Note that the System may require internal steel at the taller openings if determined by a Certified Professional Engineer. The System shall be designed by the Certified Professional Engineer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10. B. Steel: Hot-rolled, complying with ASTM A 36 requirements and ASTM A 123, Grade 35, hot-dip galvanized coating requirements. C. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." Glazing methods comply with large missile impact test report. D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturers standard sealed-comer pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers; in hardness recommended by manufacturer. E. Glazing sealants and fillers as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." F. Framing system gaskets and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type. G. Sealants and joint fillers for joints within glazed aluminum curtain wall system as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 089000 - 4 1. North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Exterior Trim: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 666, Type 302, 304, or 316 requirements; with No. 4 finish; and in profiles indicated. B Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturers standard high-strength aluminum brackets . and reinforcements. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Finish exposed portions to match glazed aluminum curtain wall. 1. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where fasteners anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, provide reinforcement to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads finished to match framing members, unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts uirements TM A 153 r . eq complying with ASTM A 123 or AS E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer. F Entrance Door Frames: Provide tubular and channel frame entrance door frame assemblies, as . indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Reinforce as necessary to support required loads. G. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical lts b i d s or j- o . e-ro joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed t 1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for nonremoval. 2. Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of design indicated. a. Medium stile (31/2-inch nominal width). Note that heavy duty continuous exit devices should all be concealed. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer. 2.5 FABRICATION A General: Fabricate glazed aluminum curtain wall system according to Shop Drawings. Fabricate ¦ . will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to when assembled onents that om , , p c produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 089000 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing. C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. E. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced standard and Shop Drawings, unless otherwise indicated. Weld before finishing components. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. F. Glazing Pockets: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual." H. Metal Protection: Where, aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. Frame Units: Factory assemble frame units according to Shop Drawings to greatest extent possible. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Assemble components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform; directionally textured, polished finish. D. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of glazed aluminum curtain wall system. Do not proceed with installation until! unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or accommodations acceptable to Architect have been made. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 0890p0 - 6 1 1 3.2 t North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturers written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing glazed aluminum curtain wall system. Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure no movement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Provide means to drain water to the exterior to produce a permanently weatherproof system. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended -by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation-occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. D. Install framing members plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Anchorage: After system components are positioned, fix connections to building structure as indicated on Shop Drawings. - 1. Provide separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. G. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated. H. Install sealant according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install insulation materials in locations indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," unless otherwise indicated. J. Install firesating in locations indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," unless otherwise indicated. K. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain wall system to comply with the following maximum tolerances: ! 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet, 4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch; where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 2 inches, limit offset to 1/2 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane or location shown on Shop Drawings to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure glazed aluminum curtain wall system is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 089000 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING PART 7 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal lath and furring. 2. Portland cement plastering. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. t B. Product data consisting of manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each product, including data showing compliance with the requirements. C. Samples for verification purposes in units at least 12 inches square of each type of finish indicated, in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of suspension system components for suspended ceilings with other work supported by or penetrating through ceiling. B. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installation of plaster work, fabricate panels for each type of finish and application required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects of application as well as qualities of materials and erection. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mock-ups on site in location directed by Architect. 2. Erect 4-foot-by-4-foot-by-full-thickness mock-up in presence of Architect using materials, including lath and support system, indicated for final work. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects including color, texture, and workmanship to be expected in completed work. 4. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of plaster work. 5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed plaster work. a. When directed, demolish and remove mock-ups from Project site. w ,I PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer. B. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum lath flat to prevent deformation. C. Handle gypsum lath to prevent damage to edges, ends, or surfaces. Protect metal comer beads and trim from being bent or damaged.. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after application of plaster. B. Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), maintain continuous uniform temperature of not less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) nor more than 80 deg F (26 deg C) for not less than 1 week prior to beginning plaster application, during its application, and until plaster is dry but for not less than one week after application is complete. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat from contacting plaster near heat source. C. Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other harmful effects that might result from plastering. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Expanded Metal Lath: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO). b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co. d. Western Metal Lath Co. 2. Accessories: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. Keene Corp. d. MM Systems Corp. e. Plastic Components, Inc. f. United States Gypsum Co. g. Western Metal Lath Co. 2.2 LATH PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 1 1 t r 092400 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A Expanded Metal Lath: Fabricate expanded metal lath from uncoated or zinc-coated, (galvanized) steel sheet to produce lath complying with ASTM C 847 for type, configuration, and other characteristics indicated below, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath. 1. Diamond Mesh Lath: Comply with the following requirements: a. Configuration: Flat. 1) Weight: 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd. B. Lath Attachment Devices: Devices of material and type required by referenced standards and recommended by lath manufacturer for secure attachment of lath to framing members and of lath to lath. 1 - 1. Provide resilient clips for attachment of gypsum lath to steel at locations indicated. 2.3 PLASTER ACCESSORIES FOR PORTLAND CEMENT PIASTER A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of coats required. B. Metal Comer Reinforcement: Expanded large-mesh diamond mesh lath fabricated from zinc-alloy specially formed to reinforce external comers of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. C. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges and removable protective tape, of the following material: 1. Material: Zinc alloy. D. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below: 1. Material: Zinc alloy. 2. One-Piece Type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration, with expanded flanges. 2.4 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base Coat Cements: Type as indicated below: 1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II. B Finish Coat Cement: T e as indicated below: . yp 1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, white. C. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S, or special hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897. E. Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897 and as indicated below. 1. Manufactured or natural white sand. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion F. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant (AR) glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster. Drinkable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Internal Bonding Agent and Bonding Agent for Portland Cement Plaster over masonry and concrete: ASTM C 932: One component, water based, non-yellowing acrylic polymer emulsion; Acryl 60 Thoro System Products. 2.6 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for portland cement plaster base and finish coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated. B. Portland Cement Plaster Base Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and in parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements for each method of application and plaster base indicated.. Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain workability. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to following mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's directions but do not to exceed 2 lbs. per cu. ft. of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. Add bonding agent according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Three-Coat Work Over Metal Lath: Base coats as indicated below (Select ratio appropriate to conditions and practices in the St. Petersburg area). Total thickness 7/8": a. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand. b. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts sand. c. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand. d. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts sand. 3. Three-Coat Work Over Exterior Concrete Unit Masonry: Base coat as indicated below. Total thickness 5/8": a. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand. b. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts sand. 4. Two-Coat Work Over Interior Concrete Unit Masonry : Base coat as indicated below. Total thickness 3/8": a. Rough up painted surfaces and apply bonding agent prior to: b. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand C. Job-Mixed Portland Cement Plaster Finish Coats: Proportion materials for finish coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements: 1. 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand. 2. 1 part portland cement, 1 part masonry cement, 3 parts sand. 2.7 MIXING PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center " Renovations & Expansion A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATHING AND FURRING, GENERAL A. Portland Cement Plaster Lathing and Furring Installation Standard: Install lathing and furring materials indicated for portland cement plaster to comply with ASTM C 1063. B. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where - partitiontwall work abuts overhead structure, isolate the work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building structure. Install slip- or cushion-type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. 1. Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently, and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories. INSTALLATION OF STEEL STUD WALLIPARTITION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 3.2 A. General: Install components for steel stud wall/partition support systems to comply with directions of steel stud manufacturer for applications indicated and with the following: 1. For non-load (axial)-bearing stud systems, comply with ASTM C 754. B. Steel Stud Systems to Receive Metal Lath. Comply with requirements of MUSFA "Specifications " applicable to each installation condition and type of metal stud for Metal Lathing and Furring C. system indicated. Extend and attach partition support systems to structure above suspended ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. D. Extend partition support systems to finish ceilings and attach to ceiling suspension members, unless otherwise indicated. 1, 3.3 METAL LATHING A. Install expanded metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced lathing installation standards. 1. Over portions of masonry and concrete walls where roof flashing occurs under plaster. r 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES f A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at comers; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during plastering. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Accessories for Portland Cement Plaster. Provide the following types to comply with requirements indicated for location: 1. Comer Reinforcement: Install at external comers. 2. Corner Bead: Install at external comers. 3. Casing. Beads: Install at terminations of plaster work unless otherwise indicated. 4. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Architect. a. Where an expansion or control joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind plaster membrane. b. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. c. For Portland Cement. Plaster. Where, in surfaces of ceilings and walls, distances between and areas within control joints exceed, respectively, the following measurements: - 1) 12 feet in either direction and 144 sq. ft. 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Prepare monolithic surfaces for bonded base coats and use bonding compound or agent to comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards for conditioning of monolithic surfaces: B. Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 1/8 inch in 10'-0" from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10'-0" straightedge placed at any location on surface. C. Sequence plaster application with the installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the other. D. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster is not terminated at metal by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal before plaster sets and groove finish coat at the junctures with metal. E. Apply thicknesses and number of coats of plaster as indicated or as required by referenced standards. 3.6 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATION A. Portland Cement Plaster Application Standard: Apply portland cement plaster materials, compositions, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. B. Number of Coats: Apply portland cement plaster, of composition indicated, to comply with the following requirements: 1. Use three-coat work over the following plaster bases: a. Metal lath. b. Concrete unit masonry. c. Concrete, cast-in-place when surface complies with ASTM C 926 for plaster bonded direct to solid base. 2. Use two coat for the following plaster base: a. Interior unit masonry PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 6 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 t t North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3. Exterior Finish Coat Texture type will be knock-down finish to match existing. Prepare a minimum of 4 texture samples for Architects approval. C. Moist-cure portland cement plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including recommendations for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations." 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, point up, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to the substrate has failed. B. Sand smooth-troweled finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and arrises. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces that are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensure plaster work's being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY - A. This Section includes the following: - 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Exterior gypsum board panels for ceilings and soffits. 3. Proprietary Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard. 4. Tile backing panels. 5. Non-load-bearing steel framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from FM's "Approval Guide, Building Products.", UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.", GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. GYPSUM BOARD 092900-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturers written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS _ A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing Systems. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. C. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incur. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind. f. National Gypsum Company. g. Scafco Corporation, h, Unimast, Inc. I. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corp. C. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire. C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Hangers: As follows: 1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. 2. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel. a. Diameter. 114-inch b. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized. 3. Flat Hangers: Commercial-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized. a. Size: 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. - E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch a minimum 1/2-inch wide flange, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1 . Depth: 2-1/2 inches. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flange, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. G. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Fire Front 630 System. C. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING 1 1 1 1 F 11 A. Components, General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch at fire rated doors and 0.0179 inch at all other doors. 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches. C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch deep flanges. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire. E. Z-Shaped Furring: -With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. F. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1. Regular Type: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch as indicated on drawings. b. Long Edges: Tapered. C.. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch. b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to ft tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type panels of the same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. D. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 38, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: Ceiling surfaces. E. Proprietary Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard (provide on all gypsum board walls from finished floor to 8'-0" high): ASTM C 36, manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 J North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Wallboard. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels. C. Or approved equal. 3. Core: 5/8 inch, provide Type X where indicated 4. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.5 EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M: 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type. 2.6 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Location: At all locations where tile is mounted on stud walls. C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. C. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 21 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Comerbead: Use at outside comers. b. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside comers. C. LC Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion e. U-Bead: . J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. f. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated. g. Curved-Edge Comerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside comers. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. C. Expansion (Control) Joint: One piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated. C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by [one of] the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. C. MM Systems Corporation. d. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.8 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 4 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D lications: ound for Exterior A i J t C . pp n omp o 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT _ A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98. C. Tremco, Inc.; Trernco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 2.10 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder. As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION - 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Fumish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip- type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. C. For exterior soffits, install cross bracing and framing to resist wind uplift. D. Screw furring to wood framing. E. Wire-tie or clip fuming channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated. F. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion G. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3.5 A. INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt or [foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. For fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings: 1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.. Multilayer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Z-Furring Members: I 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior comers, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond comer, on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from comer and cut insulation to fit. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 -10 1 3.6 1 1 1 1 1 f t C 1 t-1- North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion H. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder. Install to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 1. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq, ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. K. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. GYPSUM BOARD 092900-11 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. M. Space fastener; in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 3.7 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. C. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layer; vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 1. Z-Furring Members: Apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. F. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. G. Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit board panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. H. Tile Backing Panels: GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 12 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile and at the interior face of all toilet room and janitors closet walls. Install with 114-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 2. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install standard gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels. 3. Where file backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturers written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. E. Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 092900 1 fn GYPSUM BOARD 092900 -13 1 1 [l t t 1 1 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY - A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 - Sections - Gypsum Board 2. Division 15 Sections - Mechanical 3. Division 16 Sections - Electrical C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. B. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. D. Recycled Content: Average percentage based on weight of component materials. Material recovered or diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre-consumer) or after consumer use (post-consumer). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 inch by 12-inch samples of each type, color, pattem, and texture. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 inch long Samples of each type, finish, and color. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling and suspension system. UL Acoustical Compliance: For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry Underwriter's Laboratory certification for AC (if applicable), CAC and NRC. E. F. 1.5 A. B. C 1.6 2. UL Suspension System Load Compliance: Manufacturer must certify that the metal suspension system is UL Classified to be load compliant per ASTM C635. For load compliance, each carton of main tees must carry Underwriter's Laboratory certification for load compliance. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. .3. Acoustical Ceiling System: Obtain each type of ceiling panel and suspension system component from a single manufacturer. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface- burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113.-2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. 1 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturers standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. [Refer to manufacturers' catalogs or product data to insert salient characteristics.] 23 WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC41 A. Products: 1. USG Interiors, Inc., product name: Radar Ceramic ClimaPlus, Item Number(s): 56644 B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type III, Form 2, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; and pattern as follows: 1. Pattern: CD. C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.84. - E. NRC: Not less than 0.55. F. CAC: Not less than 35. G. Recycled Content: Not less than 40%. H. Edge Detail: Square (SQ). 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. J. Size: [24 by 24 inches] K. No deviations 2.4 WASHABLE ACOUSTIC TILE CEILING APC #2 1. Ceramic and Mineral-Fiber composite Acoustical Panels for Ceiling in the following Rooms: a. Kitchen 110 b. USG Interiors, Inc., product name: Basis of design. Clean Room ClimaPlus 10M-100M Acoustical Ceiling Panels, 24" x 24 x 5/8", square edge, lay-in, white scrubbable vinyl- laminated surfaces, CAC of 35, NRC of 55 2.5 MATCH EXISTING ACOUSTIC TILE CEILING APC #3 1. Match existing 2'x4' Acoustical Panels for Ceiling in the following Rooms: a. See drawing A5.1 for hallway location. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion b. Products: Basis of design: Match existing as installed in hallway next to reception area. No deviations. 2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. b. Type: Postinstalled adhesive anchors. C. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. d. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. e. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy. 2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Nickel-Copper-Allay Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than [0.1064nch] [0.1354nch] diameter wire. E. [Hanger Rods] [Flat Hangers]: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/164nch diameter bolts. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - S North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in-place. 2.7 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC411 A. Products: 1. USG Interiors, Inc., Donn DXL suspension system. B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot- dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges. 2.8 A. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. Four-foot tees shall carry a minimum of 12 lbs., per lineal foot and also be rated intermediate duty. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 6. No deviations METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM Manufacturers: 1. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.9 1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 3. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners. ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Tremoo, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 13. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturers standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturers standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION - A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 1 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturers written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions, offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns, Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hanger;, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 5. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 096513 -.RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL r 1.7 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient wall base. - 2. Molding accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide resilient stair accessories with a critical radiant . flux classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 90 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1, 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 90 deg F. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fumish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full standard range. 2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1881. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Johnsonite. 3. Burke Flooring. B. Type (Material Requirement). TV (vinyl). C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous) or II (layered). D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe). E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. F. Height: 4 inches. G. Lengths. Coils in manufacturer's standard length. H. Outside Comers: Job formed. 1. Inside Comers: Job formed. J. Surface: Smooth. 2.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 098513 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 2. Johnsonite. 3. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 4. Roppe Corporation. 5. Stoler Industries. B. Material: Vinyl. C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 1 1 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturers written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Stair Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. Do not stretch wall base during installation. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Job-Formed Comers: 3.4 A. 3.5 A. 1. Outside Comers: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 096619 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient floor tile. B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles are specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Certification by tile manufacturer that products supplied for tile installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient floor tile indicated. D. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. ' B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floor tile with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. 1 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements of Division 1, 01310 Project Management and Coordination, Section 1.8 "Project Meetings". 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver tiles, sheet rolls, and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). B. Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by tile manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each class, wearing surface, color, pattern and size of resilient floor tile installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products by: 1. Approved Manufacturer Resilient Tile RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 2 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion a. Armstrong Commercial Floors r( b. Knight Quartz Flooring 2.2 RESILIENT TILE ' A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066, Composition 1 (nonasbestos formulated). Basis of Design: Armstrong Standard Excelon, 2.6mm. See drawings for layout pattern. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underiayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient ' floor tile products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur, with Installer present, to verify that r s substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with tile manufacture requirements and those specified in this Section. 1 i f B. ng: ollow Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by tile manufacturer. ' 2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturers installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to ' receive tile and sheet flooring. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. If- r RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before tile installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturers directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of tile installation included in Project. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in basket weave pattern with grain direction alternating between reversed in adjacent tiles. 2. Lay tiles in pattern with respect to location of colors, patterns, and sizes as indicated on Drawings. D. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished tile floor, install tile before these items are installed. E. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. F. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. H. Adhere tiles and sheet flooring to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed tile installation. 1. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. J. Hand roll tiles where required by tile manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing tile installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturers. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 4 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion ' 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor file manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop tile to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by file manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to tile surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and ' surface blemishes. a. Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to tile manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels ' over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. ' C. Clean tiles not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer. ' 1. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation prior to cleaning. 2. Reapply 3 coats of floor polish (each coat buffed) after cleaning. Final coat to be buffed to a gloss finish. END OF SECTION 096519 1 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 5 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 096710 - RESINOUS FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work described in this section includes surface preparation and installation of Silikal reactive ' resin industrial floor system. B. See drawings for locations and quantities. WORK - SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.02 RELATED A. Cast-in-place concrete (Section 033000) 1. See Paragraph 1.08 - Requirements for New Concrete. ' B. Painting (Section 099100) 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Silikal 62 SLF is a 4-6mm (3116"-1/4") thick troweled surfacing composite of Silikal 100% reactive binder resin and Silikal Fillers with specified Silikal primer and topcoat. B, The Silikal coating system shall cure completely and be available to normal operations in no more than 90 minutes at Temperatures as low as 0 °C. after application of the final coat. C. The finished Silikal floor coating system shall be uniform in color combinations, texture, and appearance. All edges that terminate at walls, floor discontinuities, and other embedded items shall be sharp, uniform, and cosmetically acceptable with no thick or ragged edges. The Contractor shall work out an acceptable masking technique to ensure the acceptable finish of all edges. D. See Paragraph 3.04 and/or 3.07 for number and thicknesses of each coat/layer in each system. E. All resins must be manufactured and tested under an 150 9001 registered quality system and ISO 14001 ecology management system. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Acceptable manufacturer. Silikal GmbH, Germany. B. Applicator Qualifications: ' 1. Pre-qualification requirements: Only approved applicators, licensed by Silikal shall be considered for qualification. In no case will Silikal permit the application of any of its materials by untrained, non-approved Contractor or personnel. 2. Each approved applicator shall have been qualified by the Manufacturer as knowledgeable in all phases of surface preparation. 3. Each approved applicator must have three (3) years experience of installing resinous flooring systems and submit a list of five projects/refernoes as a prequalification requirement At least one of the five projects/ references must be of equal size, quantity, 1 RESINOUS FLOORING 096710-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations $ Expansion and magnitude to this project as a prequalification requirement. Owner has the option to personally inspect the projectstreferences to accept or reject any of the Contractors prior to bid time as a prequalification requirement. C. Subcontractor Qualifications: 1. The only approved and specified subcontractors for this resurfacing work shall be for shot-blast cleaning of the concrete substrate. D. Acceptance Sample: 1. Representative sample of the specified flooring system shall be submitted to the Owner prior to the bidding phase of the project. All bidders shall inspect the "acceptance sample° before submitting their bids. 2. The installed flooring system shall be similar to the acceptance sample in thicknesses of respective filmlayers, color, texture, overall appearance and finish. E. Bond Testing: 1. Surface preparation efforts shall be evaluated by conducting Bond Tests at the site prior to application of the flooring system(s). 2. See paragraph 3.03 - B or consult with Material Manufacturer for specific procedure. F. Pre-Job Meeting 1. Owner requires a Pre-Job Meeting with representatives of Owner, Contractor/Applicator, and Material Manufacturer in attendance. The agenda shall include a review and clarification of this specification, application procedures, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria, and production schedules. Applicator is not authorized to proceed until this meeting is held or waived by Owner. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete B. ACI 302.1R-80 -Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction C. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) and (Food and Drug Administration (FDA) authorization) for incidental contact with foodstuffs. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Acceptance Sample: As required by owner, one foot square (1 ft. by 1 ft.) sample of the specified acrylic flooring system applied to hardboard or similar backing for rigidity and ease of handling. B. Manufacturer's Literature: Descriptive data and specific recommendations for surface preparation, mixing, and application of materials. C. Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each respective product to be used. D. Cleaning and Maintenance 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All material shall be delivered in original Manufacturer's sealed containers with all pertinent labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in dry protected area between 25° and 80° Fahrenheit. Keep out of direct sunlight. Protect from open flame; keep all containers grounded. RESINOUS FLOORING 096710 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Follow all Manufacturer's specific label instructions and prudent safety practices for storage and handling. 1.08 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Material, air, and surface temperatures shall be in the range of 32° to 85° Fahrenheit during application and cure, unless a special formulation is being used and Manufacturer has been consulted. B. Relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85 percent and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 degrees above the dew point. C. Conditions required of new concrete to be coated. 1. Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days at 70° F. The concrete must be fully cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to application of the coating system pending moisture testing. _ 2. Surface contaminants such as curing agents, membranes, or other bond breakers should not be used. 3. Concrete shall have a °rubbed" finish; float or darby finish the concrete (a hard steel trowel is neither necessary nor desirable). 4. Drains should be set to the concrete grade rather than raised to the finished grade of the topping. D. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 5 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period as determined by proper Calcium Chloride Testing. Concrete R/H must be 85% or less as measured by protimeter. Readings greater than 5 by the Calcium Chloride method or 85% by protimeter, may require a preliminary treatment with Silikal RE40. E. Foodstuffs are the responsibility of the Owner and shall have been removed from the area of application by the Owner or his representatives. F. Vapor barriers and/or suitable means shall have been installed beneath grade slabs to prevent vapor transmission. Consult technical dept. 1 1.09 WARRANTY A_ Silikal warrants that materials shipped to buyers are at the time of shipment substantially free ' from material defects and will perform substantially according to Silikal published literature if used strictly in accordance with Silikal's prescribed procedures and prior to expiration date. B. Silikal's liability with respect to this warranty is strictly limited to the value of the material purchased. C. Silikal has no responsibility for the application and processing of products and is under no circumstances liable to any third party whatsoever. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS I A. Silikal GmbH, Germany 7 RESINOUS FLOORING 096710 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Alternate products complying with the performance criteria detailed in Section 2.02.01, shall be approved by the Design Professional prior to bid date. All proposed alternates (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for approval by the Design Professional prior to bid date and must be made available to all bidders. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Silikal 62 SLF Self Leveling Flake Flooring 1. Moisture Vapor Treatment (if required) Silikal RE40 2. Saturating Primer/Silikal Coat: Silikal R41 with Additive 1 3. Patching/Sloping (if required) Silikal R17 Polymer Concrete 4. Coving (if required): Silikal HK20 with #10412 mesh dry silica sand. 5. Topping: Silikal R62 SL, consisting of Silikal R62 resin and Silikal F)ler 6. Topcoat(s): Silikal R71 re Colorless Silikal Topcoat Resin. 7. Silikal Flakes for broadcasting: Colors to be chosen by owner. 8. Aluminium Oxide (if required) 2.02.01 PRODUCT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Silikal RE40 1. Percentage Reactive Resin ......................................................................:....100% Percentage Solids ............................................................................... .............100% 2. Water Pressure Resistance (3 days at 72 psi) .................................... ......Passed 3. Resistance to Diffusion Against H20 .................................................0. 3g/m2 • day 4. Tensile Bond Strength .......................................................................... .......475 psi B. Silikal R41 With Additive 1 1. Percentage Reactive Resin ................................................................. ..........100% Percentage Solids ............................................................................... .............100% 2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): .......................................... less than 0.6 3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638) ...................................................... ...3,550 psi. 4. Tensile Modulus, psi X 10 to the 5th (ASTM D638): ......................................... 2.1 5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./in./deg. F (ASTM D696): .......... ... 0.000035 6. Electrical Resistivity (ASTM D257): Volume Resistance, ohm-cm: .............................................................. .............. 1015 Surface Resistance, ohm: ..................................................................... ............... 1012 7. Water Vapor Transmission (DIN 53122), g/cm-hr-mm Hg X 10-9: 1.4 C. Silikal R17 Polymer Concrete 1. Percentage of reactive resin ............................................................... ............100% 2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): .............................................. .......... 0.02 RESINOUS FLOORING 0967.10-4 Li 11 1 4 1 1 1 f- North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638) ........................................................1,200 psi. 4. Tensile Modulus, psi X 10 to the 5th (ASTM D638): ........................................... 1.2 5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./in./deg. F (ASTM D696) psi x1 0-6: .......... 18 6. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM C39) ......... ........................................7,800 psi. (ASTM C109) ................................................. ............................................9,200 psi. D. Silikal R62 SL Tonging 1. Percentage of reactive resin: ......................... ............................................... 100% Percentage of solids: ..................................... ................................................... 100% 2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): ........................................................ 0.04 3. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM C109): ..... ............................. 6,000-8,000 psi. (ASTM D695): ................................................ ............................................ 6,000 psi. 4. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638): .............. ................................. ......... 1,050 psi. 5. Tensile Modulus, psi (ASTM D638)* ............... ..................................... 720,000 psi. 6. Flexural Strength, psi (ASTM D790): ............. .... I ..................... - ........... 3,600 psi. 7. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./in./deg. F (ASTM D696): ............. 0.000019 8. Electrical Resistivity, (ASTM D257) Volume Resistance, ohm-cm: ................ 1014 9. Chemical Resistance, ASTM D543: Effect of weak acids: ...................................... ................................................... none Effect of strong acids: ....................................................................................... :slight Effect of alkalis: ............................................... .................................................... none Effect of salt solutions: .................................... .................................................... none Effect of oil, grease: ........................................ .................................................... none Effect of sunlight (UV radiation): ..................... .................................................... none E. Silikal R71 re Colorless To at Resin 1. Percentage Reactive Resin: ........................... ................................................ 100% Percentage Solids: .......................................... ....... ........................................... 100% 2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): .......................................................... 0.5 3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638) ............... .........................................3,555 psi. 4. Tensile Modulus, psi (ASTM D638): .............. ...................................... 210,000 psi. 5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (ASTM D696) in./in./deg. F: ................ 0.000035 6. Electrical Resistivity (ASTM D257): Volume Resistance, ohm-cm: ........................ ..................................................... 1015 Surface Resistance, ohm: ......................................................................... .......... 1012 7. Water Vapor Transmission (DIN 53122) g/cm-hr-mm Hg X 10-9: ...................... 1.43 8. Chemical Resistance, ASTM D543: Effect of weak acids: ....................................... ................... ............................none Effect of strong acids: .................................... ................................................... slight Effect of alkalis .............................................. .....................................................none Effect of salt solutions: ........................................................................................ none Effect of oil, grease: ....................................... ................................................... none Effect of sunlight (UV radiation): .................... .................................................. none 2.02.02 PRODUCT INSTALLATION 8t APPLICATION CRITERIA A. All Silikal Material Systems Excepting Moisture Vapor Treatment 1. Pot Life at 68° F.: ..................................................................... ....10-15 minutes I RESINOUS FLOORING 096710 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Cure Time at 68° F.: .............................................................................. 60 minutes 3. Recoat Time at 68° F .:..........:...........................................................60-90 minutes 2.03 MIXES A. Follow manufacturer's prescribed procedures and recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREWORK INSPECTION A. _ Examine all surfaces to be coated with Silikal material systems and report to the Owner and/or Engineer any conditions that will adversely affect the appearance or performance of these coating systems and that cannot be put into acceptable condition by the preparatory work specified in Paragraph 3.03. B. Do not proceed with application until the surface is acceptable or authorization to proceed is given by the Engineer. C. In the event that Applicator has employed all acceptable methods of surface preparation and cannot remedy adverse conditions that would lead to failure of the installation, Applicator shall withdraw from the contract and Owner will be financially responsible only for preparation efforts. 3.02 GENERAL A. Material storage area must be selected and approved by Applicator and Owner or his representative. B. Owner will furnish V Phase electricity and water for use by Applicator. C. If existing ventilation is inadequate, Applicator will provide sufficient ventilation to allow complete air exchange every five (5) minutes. D. Owner shall provide means for disposal of construction waste. E. Applicator will protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated with masking and/or covers. Owner's equipment shall be protected from dust, cleaning solutions, and flooring materials. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation - General 1. Concrete substrate must be clean and dry. Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter, paint overspray, and other dry surface accumulations and contamination by scraping, brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and/or compressed air blowdown. 2. New concrete: See 1.08 - C for requirements. 3. Surfaces that are heavily contaminated shall be cleaned with the appropriate degreaser, detergent, or other appropriate cleaner/surfactant followed by thoroughly rinsing with fresh water to remove the accumulation prior to mechanical cleaning efforts. Mechanical cleaning will not remove such deposits, but only drive them deeper. 4. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 5 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per RESINOUS FLOORING 096710 - 6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 24 hour period as determined by proper Calcium Chloride Testing and no more than 85% R/H as measured by Protimeter B. Bond Testing 1. The applicator shall evaluate all surface preparation by conducting bond tests at strategic locations. 2. Mix six (6) ounces of the primer to be used in the application with 5% by volume Silikal Powder Hardener. Add #10412 mesh, dry quartz sand until an easily trowelable mixture is obtained. Apply palmsized patties 1/8' to 1/4° thick. 3. After one (1) hour at (68° F.), patties must be cured tack-free and cooled to ambient temperature of concrete. Remove patties with hammer and chisel and examine fracture/delamination plane. Concrete with fractured aggregate must be attached to the entire underside of the patty. 4. If only laitance or a small amount of concrete is attached or if interface between patty and substrate is tacky, further substrate preparation is required. 5. If further surface preparation is required, bond tests shall be conducted again when this has been completed. 6. If no amount or kind of surface preparation produces satisfactory bond tests, the applicator shall report that to the Owner, Engineer, and Manufacturer. C. Mechanical Surface Preparation and Cleaning 1. All accessible concrete floor surfaces shall be mechanically blast cleaned using a mobile steel shot, dust recycling machine such as BLASTRAC®, or approved equivalent. All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings, hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes, and other similar surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a profile similar to 40 grit sandpaper and exposing the upper fascia of concrete aggregate. 2. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast cleaning machines shall be mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness, and profile using vertical disc scarifiers, starwheel scarifiers, needle guns, scabblers, or other suitably effective equipment. 3. After blasting, traces or accumulations of spent abrasive, laitance, removed toppings, and other debris shall be removed with brush or vacuum. 4. Conduct Bond Tests to check adequacy of surface preparation. See Paragraph 3.03 - B (Bond Testing). 5. Application of the respective specified material system(s) must be completed before any r water or other contamination of the surface occurs. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Application of Silikal 62 SLF flooring system consists of., 1. applying moisture vapor treatment (if required) 2. applying the primer, 3. applying coving (if required), 4. performing patching and sloping with polymer concrete (if required), 5. re-priming polymer concrete areas 6. applying the topping, broadcasting the Silikal Flakes. 7. applying the topcoat(s), Time for curing (45 - 60 minutes) shall be allowed between each coat. Thicknesses are specified below and/or in Paragraph 3.07. B. Open only the containers of component materials to be use in each specific application as I RESINOUS FLOORING 096710 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion needed. Refer to Manufacturer's data sheets for pot-life/temperature relationship to determine size of batches to mix and mix ratios for each respective coat of the system. C. Measure, add, and mix the Silikal BP-Powder Hardener into the respective resin components in the proportions recommended by the Material Manufacturer. Pot life is short, so mix only as much material at a time as can be easily and efficiently applied. 3.04.01 MOISTURE VAPOR TREATMENT (IF REQUIRED) A. Mix moisture vapor treatment products as recommended by manufacturer. . B. Pour out all resin onto the concrete surface and spread it with a squeegee. After a short operating time (appr. 10 minutes) the excess must be removed with the squeegee. The remaining resin can be rolled out with a lint free resin proof roller. Resin films as well as the building of puddles have to be avoided! The waiting time between the coats depends on the absorbency of the substrate and is normally between one and three hours. Before applying the second coat if required, the impregnation of the first coat into the substrate should be evident. C. If required, repeat the above process. During application of the treatment take care that there is no film building at the surface. The surface texture has to be maintained after every step. 3.04.02 PRIME COAT A. Mix primer components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Pour the mixture batches onto the floor surface and use a 9" or 18" wide, 1/2" - 3/4" thick- napped, solvent resistant paint roller to roll out the material at a rate of 100 sq. ft./ gal. to form a uniform, continuous film, ensuring that all crevices, cracks, other surface discontinuities have been saturated and coated. Use a paint brush to reach areas inaccessible to the roller. Work quickly and deliberately; the pot life is short (10 -15 minutes). Do not leave any "puddles"; roll out any such accumulations. C. Allow the primer coat to cure. D. If any of the concrete has absorbed all of the primer or if the concrete still has a dry look, reprime these areas before applying the next layer. 3.04.03 COVING A. . Surface Preparation 1. If concrete walls are to be painted prior to installation of cove base, the bottom portion of the walls shall remain uncoated to the height of the cove base to insure a proper bond to the concrete wall. 2. If walls are constructed of a non-compatible material or if a coating exists, a backer board of'/" cement board cut to the desired height of the cove base needs to be installed. The top of the backer board should be cut at a 45° angle to create a "beveled" edge. 3. If a backer board needs to be installed it shall be fastened using a high grade construction adhesive as well as counter sunk screws or concrete masonry anchors. B. System Description 1. Cove base shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and shall be: a) Application area requires prime coat according to 3.04.02 b) Trowel-On Cove Base consisting of a trowel applied radius/base mix with a RESINOUS FLOORING 096710-8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion termination strip installed at the top of the base. 2. Cove base will receive a broadcast and top coat consistent with flooring system. 3.04.04 PATCHING/SLOPING (IF REQUIRED) A. Mix polymer concrete components as recommended by the Material Manufacturer. B. Use mixture to repair any damaged concrete, or to slope any areas as needed. C. Once cured, material must be re-primed before next layer is applied. 1 3.04.05 TOPPING A. Size the batches, and mix according to Manufacturers instructions. The entire batch should be poured and spread at once, i.e., do not let material set in pail. B. Spread the topping material with a gauge rake set to a depth of 3/16". Lightly trowel to a C. uniform thickness of 3/16" as necessary. If necessary, roll with a porcupine roller to release trapped air. D.- Broadcast Silikal flakes into the fresh material before it begins to cure. Broadcast by hand, or use a backpack type blower or sand blast pot to achieve an even broadcast. The flakes must 'rain' down and not be thrown into the wet base coat. E. Allow the topping to cure. . F. Remove excess flakes by sweeping, "blow-down", and/or vacuuming. 3.04.06 TO P COAT A. Apply with clean rollers at a rate of 80 - 90 sq. ft./gal. in the same way as the Silikal Primer was applied as described in Paragraph 3.04.02. B. (If Required) Broadcast aluminium oxide, or other suitable material into wet topcoat resin; size and rate as determined by owner. C. Allow topcoat to cure. Floors without aluminium oxide broadcast may be lightly sanded if required. Vacuum all dust, paying particular attention to edges and corners. 3.04.07 SECOND TOP COAT A. Apply with clean rollers at a rate of 100 -125 sq. ft./gal. in the same way as the Silikal Primer was applied as described in Paragraph 3.04.02. B. Allow topcoat to cure. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL/INSPECTION A. Applicator shall request acceptance of surface preparation from the Engineer before application of the prime/seal coat. B. Applicator shall request acceptance of the prime coat from the Engineer before application of subsequent specified materials. RESINOUS FLOORING 096710 - 9- I - North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.06 CLEANING A. Applicator shall remove any material afters and other material that is not where it should be. Remove masking and covers taking care not to contaminate surrounding area. B. Applicator shall repair any damage that should arise from either the application or clean-up effort. 3.07 COATING SCHEDULE r A. Moisture vapor treatment shall be Silikal RE40 application rate shall be approximately 220 sq. ft per gallon (approx. 7 mils) B. Primer shall be Silikal R41 with Additive I Application rate shall be approx. 100 sq.ft. per gallon (approx. 16 mils), C. Patching/Sloping material shall be R17 - D. Flexible membrane shall be Silikal RV368 applied with a gauge rake set at 1/16" for a rate of 40 sq. ft. per batch. E. Coving shall be Silikal HK 20 per manufacturer's recommendations. F. Body coat shall be Silikal R62 SL, applied with a gauge rake set at 1/8° for a rate of 40 sq. ft. per batch. Flakes to be broadcast into the uncured topping. Broadcast the flakes at the rate of 0.15 - 0.25 pounds per sq. ft. G. Clear topcoat shall be Silikal R71 re ; apply at the rate of 80 - 90 sq. ft. per gallon for the first coat and 90 - 120 sq. ft. per gallon for the second application. 1 END OF SECTION 096710 1 1 RESINOUS FLOORING 096710-10 11 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions . and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes file carpeting, installation, and accessories. SUBMITTALS 1.3 A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance characteristics. C. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Show installation details at special conditions. D. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard size, showing full range of color, th b d f or e use e texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to Work. Submit the following: 1. 12-inch-square samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. 12-inch-long samples of each type exposed edge stripping and accessory item. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4 A. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Test Method: ASTM D 2859 a. Rating: Pass. B. Other requirements: Provide carpet identical to that for the following performance characteristics, per test methods indicated below. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Submit independent laboratory results for tests required, if requested by Architect. 1. Critical radiant flux ; Test Method ASTM E 648 a. Requirement: Class 1 2. Smoke density; Test Method ASTM E 662 TILE CARPETING 096813 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion a. Requirement: 450 or less. 3. Static Resistance; Test Method AATCC 134 a. Requirement: 3.7 or less kilovolts when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 70 . degrees F. 4. Tuft bind; Test Method ASTM D 1335 a. Requirement: 20 lb. average 5. ADA conformance a. Minimum static coefficient of friction of .60 C. Certificates 1. Manufacturer shall submit a letter certifying compliance with this specification. 2. Manufacturer shall submit a letter certifying that the flooring contractor is certified by the manufacturer to install their carpet D. Submit manufacturers recommended maintenance procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg C) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate Conditions: Moisture content shall not exceed 65 percent B. Substrate Conditions: pH of 10 or less when substrate wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper applied. C. Install carpet when the temperature is between 65 degrees F. and 95 degrees F. and the humidity is between 10 and 65 percent D. Install carpet when temperature of concrete slab is above 65 degrees F. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full width for each type of material equal to 5 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Basis of Design is indicated on Carpet Data Sheet at the end of this section. Subject to compliance with requirements, products by other manufacturers will be considered. To be considered, product data and sample book must be submitted to the Architect no later than 10 TILE CARPETING 096813-2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion f days prior to bid date. Architect will evaluate and issue results of evaluation by addenda. Only approved products are acceptable. 1 Carpet: See Data Sheets at the end of this Section. 2.2 ACCESSORIES -' A. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy-duty rubber of size and profile indicated; minimum 2-inch-wide anchorage flange; manufacturer's standard colors. B car et roduct recommended b e or similar Hot-melt adhesive ta i t S C . y p p p ng : emen eam manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. C. Carpet Adhesive: Water resistant and nonstaining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet; low volatile organic adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Patch holes and level high spots to a smooth surface. Seal powdery or porous surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Patch holes and cracks. In some locations existing floor slabs are uneven across control joints. Provide leveling material recommended by manufacturer. Provide enough material in a broad application to make change in level indiscernible. C. Vacuum clean substrate prior to installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in monolithic pattern in direction shown on drawings; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. B. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of each space. C. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. D. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. E. Install with pattern parallel to walls and borders. F. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming cement. G. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. 3.3 CLEANING TILE CARPETING 096813 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturers recommended cleaning agent. S. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 CARPET DATA SHEET A. Provide the following carpet, unless noted otherwise: 1. Manufacturer: Carpet tile by Shaw Contract Group 2. Pattern: Captivate 59554 3. Color. Lagoon 54400 4. Tile size: 24" x 24" END OF SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 099100 - PAINTING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following; 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and ironwork, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and s?. labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Acoustical wall panels. c. Toilet enclosures. d. Lockers. e. Unit kitchens. f. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. g. Light fixtures. h. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. i PAINTING 099100-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: & Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. PAINTING 099100 - 2 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch- square samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. c. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch-square samples of each color and material on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of natural- or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces. e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 44nch square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance' Article to D. Qualification Data: For firms a pec? ty demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. 1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required. 2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples. PAINTING 099100 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturers name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturers stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number.- 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. At the conclusion of the project and as a part of Project Closeout, submit a summary list of all paint products used on the project. List manufacturer, paint name, paint color, specific paint mix and location where additional quantities may be purchased. B. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with extra paint materials in the quantities indicated below: a. Exterior, Flat Acrylic Paint: One case of each color applied. b. Exterior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: One case of each color applied. c. Exterior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied. PAINTING 099100 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion d. Exterior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied. e. Interior, Flat Acrylic Paint One case of each color applied. f. Interior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: One case of each color applied. g. Interior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied. h. Interior, Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: ? gal. of each color required. 2. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. C. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses (no substitutions): 1. Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden). 2. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-:oat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturers product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturers proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturers material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturers color designations. D. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. PAINTING 099100-6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and t PAINTING 099100 - 6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated- remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturers written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used it mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturers written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors; surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in I PAINTING 099100 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. ' 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Hollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. PAINTING 099100 - 8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 6. Motors and mechanical equipment. 7. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 1. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or to ensure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects unsealed areas in first coat appears , due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, or other surface imperfections will not be iness ro , p holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, acceptable. ' K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even eel e oran arks b h l it , g p , rus m ar y, luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregu nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. L. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. e. Flexibility. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. I PAINTING 099100 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion I. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. 1. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide 'Wet Paint' signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Stucco and concrete,: Provide the following finish systems over exterior stucco and concrete : 1 Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, exterior, acrylic-latex primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 1) Glidden: Primer not required over this substrate. 2) PPG: PPG PERMA-CRETE® Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer 4-603 b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils. 1) Glidden: 6600 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Gloss Latex House & Trim Paint. 2) PPG: PPG Porter ACRI-SHEILD Exterior Acrylic Paint 649 Series PAINTING 099100-10 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry block units: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler. High-performance, latex-based, block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils. 1) Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler, Latex Interior-Exterior. 2) PPG: 6-7 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils . 1) Glidden: 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 2) PPG: PP6139 Porter pro-Master Interior Latex Wall & Trim Paint. B. Gypsum Board and Gypsum Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. At Vertical Surfaces: Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils . 1) Glidden: 5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer-Sealer. 2) PPG: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 2000 Interior Latex Primer/Sealer 867 b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils . 1) Glidden: 4100 Series PO-MAST Ultra Eggshell R 2000 Interiors Latexl Wall l& Trim Paint 6129 2) PPG: PPG Porter Series 2. At Overhead Horizontal Ceilings and Soffits: Flat, No Sheen, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous meta : 1. Full-Gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. PAINTING 099100-11 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1) Glidden: 5207 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, white. 2) PPG: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER 2000 Interior Latex Primer/Sealer 867 b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. 1) Glidden: 6900 Series Lifemaster Pro Hi-Performance Acrylic Coating. 2) PPG: PPG Porter PRO-MASTER Interior Latex Wall & Trim Paint 6139 Series D. Interior masonry units at toilet room: Provide the following finish systems: 1. Severe Environment (Semigloss Finish): One finish coat over an intermediate coat and a block filler. a. Block Filler: Acrylic or epoxy block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer as sufficient to fill pores. 1) PPG: 97-68X Series Aquapon Polyamide-Epoxy Block Filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 5.0 mils, unless otherwise indicated. 1) PPG: 97-1XXX Series Aquapon High Build Semi-Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Coating. c. Topcoat: Semigloss epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 5.0 mils, unless otherwise indicated. 1) PPG: 97-1XXX Series Aquapon High Build Semi-Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Coating. END OF SECTION 099100 PAINTING 099100 -12 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 101400 -SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY - A. This Section includes the following types of signs: _ 1. Plaque signs for room signage 2. Plaque signs for directional signage B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section 'Temporary Facilities" for temporary project identification signs. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. 3. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large- scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering layout. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. I SIGNAGE 101400-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture: a. Match existing signage as installed at the North Greenwood Recreation Center. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: f=irm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Match existing signage as installed at the North Greenwood Recreation Center 2.2 MATERIALS A. Match existing signage as installed at the North Greenwood Recreation Center. 2.3 PLAQUE SIGNS A. Plaque Signs: Match existing signage as installed at the North Greenwood Recreation Center. SIGNAGE 101400 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion B. Unframed Plaque Signs: Match existing signage as installed at the North Greenwood Recreation Center. C. Laminated Sign Plaques: Match existing signage as installed at the North Greenwood Recreation Center. D. Graphic Content and Style: Match existing signage as installed at the North Greenwood Recreation Center. E. For Directional Signs: Match existing signage as installed at the North Greenwood Recreation Center. F. For Permanent Room Signs: Match existing signage as installed at the North Greenwood Recreation Center. G. Provide changeable message signs where indicated in the Signage Schedule in this section. 2.4 FINISHES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards. Match existing North Greenwood Recreation Center signage colors. " PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. B. Wall-Mounted Plaque Signs: Attach plaque signs to wall surfaces by mechanical means using exposed fasteners into wall or into inserts as required by construction of wall. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION i A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 3.3 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE INTERIOR ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE 1 1 DOORI RM NO. SIGNAGE COPY REMARKS 101 Classroom ADA Type 102 Conference ADA Type 103 Office ADA Type - Changeable message 104 Office ADA Type "- Changeable message I SIGNAGE 101400 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 105 Office ADA Type - Changeable message 106 Office ADA Type -- Changeable message 107 Office ADA Type - Changeable message 108 Office ADA Type - Changeable message 109 Classroom ADA Type 110 Kitchen ADA Type 111 Storage ADA Type 112 Family Restroom Unisex Pictogram & ISA Symbol (International Symbol of Accessibility) 114 Office ADA Type - Changeable message Electrical ADA Type (locate next to door 109C) Mechanical ADA Type (locate next to door 109D) INTERIOR INFORMATIONAL SIGNAGE ROOM SIGNAGE COPY LOCATION/REMARKS NO. - 109 MAXIMUM OCCUPANT LOAD 137 5/8" high non-tactile letters (no Braille) - Verify PERSONS location in field by architect and owner 101 MAXIMUM OCCUPANT LOAD 57 5/8" high non-tactile letters (no Braille) - Verify PERSONS location in field by architect and owner 112 ISA symbol (International Symbol of Self adhesive vinyl mounted white sign on Accessibility) outside face of door EXTERIOR "PHILLIES SIGN ROOM NO. SIGNAGE COPY LOCATION/REMARKS NA ADA Restroom Verify location in field by architect and owner. With directional arrow 5/8" high non-tactile letters (no Braille). Unisex Pictogram and ISA Symbol (International Symbol of Accessibility) 112 Family Restroom 5/8" high non-tactile letters (no Braille) - located adjacent to door lobby side. Unisex Pictogram and ISA Symbol (International Symbol of Accessibility) END OF SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE 101400 - 4 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 102800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. _ 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Childcare accessories. 3. Underlavatory guards. 4. Warm-Air Dryers 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacture's warranty. B. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A, Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359- inch minimum nominal thickness. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (2180) hot-dip zinc coating. D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper- and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed, F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). G. Mirrors: Bright polished stainless steel. H. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). C. See Schedule on Drawings for Toilet Accessories not specified here. D. Mirror Unit: 1. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 2. Size: As indicated on Drawings. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 r 1 1 1 1 f] 1 4 1 1 CI North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.3 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Koala Corporation - KB 100 D. Diaper-Changing Station: - 1. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection strap. a. Engineered to support a minimum of 250-lb static load when opened. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall when closed. 3. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 4. Material and Finish: High-density polyethylene in manufacturer's standard color. 5. Liner Dispenser: Built in. 2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. TCI Products. 3. Truebro, Inc. D. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white. 1 2.5 WARM-AIR DRYERS A. Basis-of-Design Product Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product by Excel Dryer, Inc. listed on the Drawings: TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 1. Xlerator Model XI-C, Surface mounted, No Substitutions B. Electrical Requirements: Provide electrical power to each warm-air dryer per manufacturers specifications. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owners representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 102800 TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4 . 1 , North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY _ A. This Section includes the following: - 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance. Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the fallowing requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. Badger Fire Protection. 4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 5. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 7. JL Industries, Inc. 8. Kidde Fyrnetics. 9. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 10. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico. 11. Moon American. 12. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 13. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc. B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each indicated. 1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturers standard 3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container : UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 5-lb and 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. 2.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: a. Fire End & Croker Corporation. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. C. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc. f. Moon-American. g. Potter Roemer LLC. h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc. B. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet 1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet C. Surface Mounted Cabinet Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall; with no trim. Provide at tilt-up concrete walls. D. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. - E. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet. F. Door Style: Center glass panel with frame. G. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide manufacturers standard. I. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturers standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturers standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet. 3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face. 4. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. 5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. 6. Alarm: Manufacturers standard alarm that actuates when fire protection cabinet door is opened and that is powered by batteries. J. Finishes: 1. Stainless Steel: No. 2B. 1 2.6 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Manufacturers: 1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. 4. Badger Fire Protection. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 5. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 6, 7. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. JL Industries, Inc. I FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 8. Laarsen's Manufacturing Company. 9. Potter Roemer, Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 1. Color: Black. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with comers mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods. B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricators standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate- free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and for FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 4 r 1 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 1 1 F 1 1 1 B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: 1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. 2. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. Baked-Enamel Finish: immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. The general contractor shall coordinate with the fire extinguisher manufacturer proper wall thickness required for recessed cabinets. If wall thickness is not possible for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. 1 C. r D. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire- protection cabinet manufacturer. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 6 r 1 1 1 1 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This-Section includes the following: 1. Soil treatment with termiticide. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Service Life of Soil Treatment: Soil treatment by use of a termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For termiticide. 1. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products. B. Product Certificates: For termite control products, signed by product manufacturer. C. Qualification Data: For Installer of termite control products. D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered Label. TERMITE CONTROL 313116 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products through one source. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA- Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Termiticides: a. Aventis Environmental Science USA LP; Termidor. b. Bayer Corporation; Premise 75. C. Dow AgroSciences LLC; Dursban TC d. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Talstar e. Syngenta; Demon TC. 2.2 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label. TERMITE CONTROL 313116-2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. 1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. _ General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3 A. 3.4 APPLICATION, GENERAL General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 4. Masonry: Treat voids. 5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. TERMITE CONTROL 313116-3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground- supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 313116 TERMITE CONTROL 313116-4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 21 1300 - FIRE PROTECTION PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section 23 0512, ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: Provide the fire protection systems indicated on the drawings and within this specification section. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: B. Manufacturers Literature: Provide dimensional outline drawing, product data, and verification of UL/FM approval for all fire protection equipment and products. C. Piping Shop Drawings: Submit 1/8" scale piping shop drawings as prescribed in Section 23 0500 and as required by codes. Shop drawings shall include sprinkler piping cut lengths, offsets, fittings and devices, elevations, hanger locations, sprinkler head count by type, elevation sections and other installation information. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. Revised editions of the NFPA National Fire Codes (NFPA) as indicated in Section 23 0500. C. Editions of the NFPA National Fire Codes (NFPA), or the latest Revisions of these Codes as adopted by the authority having lawful jurisdiction, as follows: D. 1. NFPA -Fire Sprinkler System: The fire sprinkler protection systems installation, flushing and testing shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 13, 24, and 25 2. NFPA - Fire Hose: The fire extinguishing system fire hoses and hose nozzles shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 1962 and 1963. 3. NFPA - Standpipe and Hose System: Standpipe system shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 14 FIRE PROTECTION 211300-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion E. Pipe Thread Pattern: All threads shall be in accordance with local fire department specifications and NFPA 1963. F. UUFM Approval. All equipment, piping, fittings, valves, couplings, hangers and devices shall be approved by Underwriters' Laboratory (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) for use in fire protection service. G. Licensure: The fire protection systems shall be installed by a State of Florida Licensed Fire Protection Contractor. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. B. Single Manufacturer. All items of a similar type shall be by the same manufacturer. 2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Provide sprinkler heads of proper types, ratings, and spacing for the areas involved, as indicated on the Sprinkler Legend located on the drawings. Provide appropriate finishes compatible with space finishes being served. Acceptable manufacturers: Viking, Grinnell, Automatic Sprinkler, Central, Star, and Reliable. B. Spare Fire Sprinkler Head Cabinet: Provide sufficient spare sprinkler head cabinets to store the required quantities of sprinkler heads. Storage cabinets shall be red gloss, polyester-coated steel construction. Provide a minimum of six spare heads of each type and each different temperature rating installed; provide 2 installation tools or wrenches with each different type of sprinkler head. Cabinet shall have catch-lock and continuous piano hinge. Locate the spare sprinkler head cabinet as directed by the Owner's Representative. C. Sprinkler Cage Guard: Provide sprinkler head open-wire cage guard to protect the sprinkler heads. Cage wire shall be cadmium-plated steel. Install cage guard in mechanical rooms and electrical rooms and all area's with potential damage is likely. 2.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Underground Pipe and Fittings: 1. Provide cement lined ductile iron pipe, Class 52 conforming to ANSI/AVWVA C151/A21.51 for Tyton joint pipe or ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 for mechanical joint pipe. Acceptable Manufacturers: U.S. Pipe, American Pipe, McWane, or equivalent. 2. Fittings shall be push-on joint ductile iron fittings, 350 PSI, with field loc gaskets, or mechanical joint ductile iron fittings conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 and C111/A21.1I. 3. Provide concrete thrust blocks at all fittings, valves, and changes in direction. 4. Provide braces, bridle rods, or restraining systems typical of "MEGALUG" by EBBA, Inc., on all mechanical joint fittings and valves. FIRE PROTECTION 21 1300 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 5. Provide PVC water main pipe conformin9 to AWWA C900, Class 200 PSI, as manufactured _ by Johns Mansville, Certainteed, PWPipe or equivalent 6. All exterior site piping shall be buried with a standard, permanent, bright colored, continuous printed plastic tape and 14 gauge tracer wire. Tape shall be intended for direct burial service and buried directly above the service line. The tape shall be 6 inches by 4 mils thick minimum. Tape shall be printed with proper identification of the service located below. 7. All underground bolted joint accessories shall be cleaned and thoroughly coated with asphalt or other corrosion retarding material after installation in accordance with NFPA 13 and 24. B. Above Ground Pipe and Fittings: 1. Piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A136 or ASTM A53, and Schedule 10, ASTM A135. 2. Threadable thinwall black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A135, or ASTM 795, with a corrosion resistance rating (CRR) of 1.0 or greater as manufactured 1,y American Tube Company, Dyna-Thread-40 or equivalent 3. Fittings: a. Cast iron threaded fittings, ANSI B16.4 Class 125. b. Cast iron flanged fittings, ANSI B16.1 Class 125. C. Mechanical joint, grooved couplings, as manufactured by Victaulic or Anvil. All groove couplings and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. C. Hangers, Supports, and Sleeves: 1. Support piping with UL and FM approved hangers. Hangers and rods shall be galvanized. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: Grinnell, B-Line, Hilti. 3. Adjustable Clevis hanger: Grinnell Fig. 260. 4. Adjustable Swivel loop hanger. Grinnell Fig. 69. 5. Beam Clamp: Grinnell Fig. 92 and Grinnell Fig. 218. 6. Concrete Fasteners: Grinnell steel shell and expander plug. 7. Concrete Insert: Grinnell Fig. 152. 8. Riser Clamp: Grinnell Fig. 261. 9. Powder-driven inserts shall not be accepted. 10. Threaded rods shall be galvanized coated. All hangers shall be galvanized coated. D. Fire Stopping: 1. All pipes passing through rated floors or walls shall be sleeved and firestopped to an equivalent rating of the floor or wall assembly. Firestop materials shall meet ASTM E814 requirements. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: Hilti and 3M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install underground piping with a minimum of 3 feet of cover over the top of the pipe. Install service utility tape approximately 18 inches above the pipe. B. Hangers: All hanger spacing shall comply with the requirements of NFPA-13. r I FIRE PROTECTION 21 1300 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Sprinkler Head Location: Install sprinkler heads in the center of the ceiling tiles for suspended ceiling applications. D. Sprinkler Head Location: Sprinkler heads shall be installed no closer than 4 inches to any Ceiling grid or wall. E. Gauges: Provide gauges and gauge valves at the top of each standpipe, roof manifold, and on sprinkler risers. Gauge scale shall be 0-300 psi unless otherwise indicated. F. Flushing: The entire system shall be flushed with clean water to remove debris resulting from installation. Flush through a burlap bag to retain debris for examination. G. Prohibited: Do not paint the covers of concealed sprinklers. . H. Provide drain valves, pipes and test connections as required by NFPA-13. Pipe drain lines and test connections to the exterior of the building or as indicated on the drawings. Drain plugs shall be installed on trapped sections of piping 5 gallons or less. Auxiliary drain valves, % inch or larger and plugs shall be installed on trapped sections of pipe greater than 5 gallons. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTRUCTION PLATES A. General: Provide engraved instruction plates detailing emergency procedures at each system control panel and at each hazard area manual discharge station locations. Permanent nameplates shall be used in the control panel to identify control logic units, contactors and major circuits. 3.3 HYDROSTATIC TESTS A. General: Above ground and below ground piping systems shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psi pressure, or at 50 psi in excess of the maximum pressure, whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours. The test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the individual system or portion of the system being tested. The underground piping shall not have leakage exceeding the amounts specified in NFPA 24. Leakage quantities shall be determined by pumping at the specified test pressure from a calibrated container. Repair leaking joints and retest as necessary until all systems have been tested. Test the piping between the check valve in the fire department inlet pipe and the outside connection the same as the balance of the system. 3.4 SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT A. General: After the installation is complete, the system shall be inspected by factory trained personnel in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures. B. System Operation: Operate systems as required to demonstrate that the systems are operating in accordance with the design, including line pressure testing. Supply instruments required to read data. Adjust systems to operate at the required performance levels. Advise Architect 7 days prior to testing. Tabulate data and submit on 8-1/2 x 11-inch sheets with time, name of tester and the local authority having jurisdiction and witnessing the test, with one copy for each Technical Information Brochure. FIRE PROTECTION 21 1300 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 w North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.5 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER A. General; Provide to Owner's designated representatives a minimum of 2 hours on-site instructions in operation and maintenance of all fire protection systems and equipment. Furnish 6 sets of typed operating instructions. Written and signed acknowledgement of the instructions seminar shall be submitted prior to final acceptance. Submit in writing to the Owner an "Instruction in Operation Conference" notification of the mutually agreed upon time for the conference. At the end of the conference, 6 copies of an Instruction in Operation Conference Memo shall be signed by all parties and one copy shall be inserted in each Technical Information Brochure. 3.6 WATER QUALITY TEST A. Contractor shall request the Owner to provide a water quality test prior to construction to determine the probability or presence of Microbiology Influenced Corrosion (MIC), in the existing system. If it is found, there is a probability of or existence of MIC. The existing system affected by this renovation shall be flushed and treated for bacteria. END OF SECTION 21 1300 I FIRE PROTECTION 21 1300 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 22 1000 - PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, area part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1 - A. General: Provide domestic water piping, drainage waste and vent piping, and other plumbing piping and appurtenances as indicated. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. 23 0523, VALVES 4. 23 0519, PIPING SPECIALTIES 5. 23 2123, PUMPS 6. 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION 7. 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION 8. 22 4000, PLUMBING FIXTURES 9. 22 3300, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions or Sections of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Provide shop drawing and/or manufacturer's data sheet for the following items: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Dimensional outline drawing for all plumbing valves and products. b. Complete list of all piping materials to be used in this section including valves and method of connection for each piping system. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 221000-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Domestic Water System: All system components that come in contact with potable water systems shall be certified under ANSI/NSF Standards 60 and 61. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Application: The plumbing piping system shall only be of the materials indicated. Refer to Section 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS, and Section 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION, for material specifications. Insulation shall comply with ASTM E-84 requirements with aflame spread rating not exceeding 25 and with a smoke developed/fuel contributed rating not exceeding 50. B. Valves: All valves used in the plumbing piping shall be 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG as specified in Section 23 0523, VALVES. C. Manufacturer. Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. D. Dielectric Connections: Provide approved connections for dissimilar materials per 23 2114. 2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE A. Above Ground: 1. Piping 4 inches and smaller shall be copper tube, Type L or K, hard drawn. B. Underground: 1. Type K soft drawn copper tubing without joints shall be used up to 2 inch diameter 2. Threaded: Threaded fittings for galvanized pipe shall be galvanized. Rigid grooved couplings and fittings will be allowed for all above ground piping of galvanized steel 3. Copper Piping: Fittings on copper piping 4 inch and smaller shall be wrot solder joint fitting in accordance with ANSI 1316.22 and cast fittings per ANSI 616.18. 2.3 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Above Ground: 1. Brass pipe or tube, chrome plated, where exposed in finished areas. 2. Cast iron soil pipe, service weight, with no-hub couplings B. Below Ground: 1. Cast iron soil pipe, service weight, with no-hub couplings. 2.4 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING A. Copper 1. Copper a. Type DWV with soldered joints. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 221000 - 2 1.1 1 i 1 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.5 STORM WATER PIPING A. Above Ground: 1. Cast iron soil pipe, service weight, with no-hub couplings B. Below Ground: 1. Cast iron soil pipe, service weight, with no-hub couplings 2.61 THERMAL INSULATION A. General: All insulation, jackets and adhesives used shall comply with the requirements of ASTM E- 84 with a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke developed/fuel contributed rating of 50. Insulation on piping exposed in boiler moms, mechanical equipment rooms, air handling equipment rooms, etc. or exposed on the exterior of the building shall be cellular glass. Insulation for concealed piping shall be preformed pipe insulation as follows: 1. Domestic Hot Water a. Fiberglass b. Polymer Foam 2. Condensate Drain: a. Elastomeric b. Polymer Foam 3. Storm Water a. Fiberglass b. Elastomeric B. Thickness: The insulation thickness in inches shall be in accordance with the following table: TABLE - PIPI NG INSULATIO N THICKNESS Pipe Size, Inches Up to 1 1-1/4 to 2 2-1/2 to 4 5 to 6 8 & Up Hot Water 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 Condensate Drain 1/2 1/2 '/s 112 1/2 Storm Water ri /2 1 /2 1/2 1 /2 1/2* * (Or manufacturers minimum thic kness based on the Dipe size.) C. Exposed. For piping, other than domestic cold water, exposed to the outdoor air or in an unconditioned crawl space or cellar area, increase insulation thickness by 1/2 inch. 1 D. Underground: Piping underground which is indicated to be insulated shall have cellular glass insulation I ?y PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM ?21000 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center ' Renovations & Expansion 2.7 VALVES A. General: Refer to the requirements of Section 23 0523, VALVES, for the complete requirements of all valves indicated in this section. B. 4 inch and smaller. Valves 4 inch and smaller shall be full port valves with bronze or brass body and bronze trim, threaded or soldered connections. C. Butterfly and gate valves shall not be permitted on domestic water systems. No quarter turn stop valves shall be used. - D. Domestic hot water recirculation systems shall be controlled with ball typelor auto flow control valves. E. Underground: Valves underground shall be gate-type with cast iron body and bronze trim, flanged or welded connections, and non-rising stem with square wrench nut head. F. Valve Box: Valve boxes for underground valves shall be cast iron construction with sufficient extension sections to extend flush to finished grade. Provide a cast iron lid and collar, with the word "water"cast into the lid. Provide a steel 'T' handle valve operating wrench of sufficient length to operate the installed underground valve and provide a minimum 12 inches above finished grade; valve operating wrench shall be provided with a cast iron or steel socket compatible with the valve stem head. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Stockham, U.S. Pipe Metroseal, Kennedy 2.8 HANGERS A. Reference Section 23 0529 for Basic Hanger Materials and Spacing Requirements. B. Additional Plumbing Hanger Requirements: 1. Copper piping installed within metal stud walls shall be supported with manufactured isolators. Isolators shall be Pipe-Tytes or approved equivalents. 2. Non-insulated copper pipes installed on trapeze hangers shall have isolation clamps. B-Line "Vibra Cushion", 'Vibraclamp" or approved equivalent shall be provided. Wrapping the pipe with tape shall not be acceptable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Location of Vents: Vents shall be offset as required to penetrate roofs at least 3 feet from the edges of the building, and 15 feet from any supply air intake or operable window or door. B. Slope: Unless otherwise indicated, horizontal sanitary and storm piping 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be sloped at a minimum of 1/4 inch per linear foot; piping 3 inches and larger shall be sloped a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot. C. Vent Piping: Horizontal vent branches shall be kept above the highest fixture served by the vent branch in order to prevent the vent from being used as a waste line. Horizontal vent branches shall be sloped upward to prevent accumulating water or trapping. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 22 1000 - 4 1 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion D. Vent Connections: Vent piping connected to a horizontal pipe shall be taken from the centerline of the pipe. Vent piping shall rise at an angle not exceeding 45 degrees from vertical, to a point at least 5 inches above the flood rim of the highest attached fixture. E. Vent Flashing: Refer to architectural details and specifications for proper flashing requirements of vent piping through the roof. 3.2 INSULATION A. Horizontal Storm Water. Insulation shall begin at the base of the roof and overflow drain and include all horizontal piping and elbows at change of directions from the horizontal to the vertical B. Condensate Piping: Insulate condensate piping and waste lines from ice machines with a minimum of 1/2 inch thickness elastomeric insulation. C. Floor drains and traps: Insulate all floor drain bodies and traps receiving condensate with a minimum 1/2" elastomeric insulation. Insulation shall extend 10 feet horizontally from the P-trap of the drain. 1 3.3. TESTING A. Sanitary Piping: 1 _ Water Test: A water test shall be applied to the sanitary and storm drainage systems. If applied to the entire system, all openings in the piping shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening, and the system filled with water to point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged except the highest opening of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water. In testing successive sections at least the upper 10 feet of the next preceding section shall be tested, so that no joint or pipe (except the uppermost 10 feet of the system) shall be submitted to a test of less than a 10 foot head of water. The water test shall last for at least 30 minutes. The system shall not experience a drop in water level; if a loss of water is noticed, the system shall be repaired and the test resumed until all sections of the piping are watertight. 2. Pneumatic Air Test: An air test may be made by attaching an air compressor or testing apparatus to any opening and, after closing all other inlets and outlets to the system, forcing air into the system until there is a uniform gauge pressure of 5 psi. This pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a period of at least 30 minutes. If the test pressure drops, indicating a leak, the piping shall be repaired and the test resumed until all sections of the piping are air tight. B. Storm Water Piping: Sanitary piping test shall be used for storm water piping. C. Condensate Drain Piping: Sanitary piping test shall be used for condensate drain piping D. Domestic Water Piping: Pressure testing and sterilization shall be performed as described in Section 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS. I END OF SECTION 221000 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 22 1000 - 5 1 f 1 1 t k 1 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 22 3300 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section 23 0513, ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: Provide plumbing equipment including piping, valves, overflow drain pans, relief valves, fitting and appurtenances. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. 23 0523, VALVES 4. 23 0519, PIPING SPECIALTIES 5. 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION 6. 22 1000, PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 7. 22 4000, PLUMBING FIXTURES 8. 23 0593, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 2. Division 16, ELECTRICAL 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Provide shop drawings and manufacture's data sheets for all equipment. B. Drawings: Provide %." scale drawing for any equipment different from the basis of design to prove that equipment will fit the space with proper room for maintenance. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 3300 -.1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Florida Energy Code Requirements: The heat loss through the domestic hot water heater exterior jacket and unit operating efficiency shall meet the Florida Department of Community Affairs "Energy Efficiency Code for Building Construction", Current Edition. C. Industry Standards: Where compliance with an industry, society or association standard is specified or indicated, certification of such compliance shall be submitted with the shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER HEATERS A. Small-Capacity, Electric, Water Heaters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the - following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] Insert manufacturers name; product name or designations or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bradford White Corporation. - b. Lochinvar Corporation. C. Rheem Manufacturing Company. d. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. 3. Standard: UL 174. 4. Storage-Tank Construction: Corrosion-resistant metal[ or steel with corrosion-resistant coating]. a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings. 5. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances: a. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005 if tank has drain outlet. Provide hose-end drain valve in piping for domestic-water heaters without drain outlet. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." b. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.2. C. Jacket. Steel with enameled finish. d. Heating Element: One; electric, screw-in immersion type. e. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. f. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system. g. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 3300 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. Installation: Install all equipment where indicated, in accordance with manufacturers published installation instructions, with recommended clearances provided for service and maintenance. Equipment placement shall be essentially as shown on drawings: however, actual location shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to equipment actually approved for installation on this project B. Manufacture's Field Supervision and Start-up: Provide services of an authorized representative of the manufacturer who shall personally checkout complete installation; and assist in the start-up and test; and calibrate all unit controls and perform such adjustments as may be required to ' insure optimum performance and efficiency. th d i i it i ti b C. y an au or ze de on-s e nstruc on Field Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Prov representative of the manufacturer. Instruction shall be given to Owner's designated operating and service personnel and receipt of it shall be acknowledged in writing prior to request for final payment. 3.2 WATER HEATERS A. Valves: Provide isolation valves on both the incoming cold water and leaving hot water supply piping. B. Heat Trap: Provide heat trap in the hot water supply piping. C. Relief Valve Settings: Temperature setting shall be 210°F and the pressure setting shall be 125, psi unless otherwise indicated. D. Relief Valve Discharge: Pipe relief valve full size to the nearest floor drain unless otherwise indicated. The discharge from the relief valve shall not be trapped. E. Drain Pan: Pipe drain pan to the nearest floor drain unless otherwise indicated. The drain pan connection shall be no less than 1 inch in diameter or the diameter of the relief valve, whichever is larger. v m breaker ll b id d ith k C ld t l h F. . e prov e w a acuu er: o wa er supp y s a Vacuum Brea G. Thermal Expansion: Cold water supply shall be provided with a thermal expansion tank or thermal expansion valve (set 10 psi below relief valve setting). H. Thermometers: Provide thermometers on both hot water supply and return piping. 1 ilit lacement of the e ui ment te re P id i t f U i C ti . q p . rov e un ons o ac a p ons: n on onnec J. Floor Mounted Water Heaters: All floor mounted water heaters shall have their drain pan set on a 4 inch high housekeeping pad. Refer to paragraph entitled "HOUSEKEEPING PADS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS" in Section 23 0529. i END OF SECTION 22 3300 1 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 3300 - 3 i 1 t 1-1 1 1 1 1 i f 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: Provide plumbing fixtures, traps, tailpieces, trim, devices and appurtenances, equipment, and supports associated with plumbing fixtures as indicated. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. 22 1000, PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 4. 22 3300, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL' in Section 23 0500. Provide manufacturers product data sheets for all plumbing related products. B. Project Closeout 1. Provide copies of systems installation, operation and maintenance manuals to the owner. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. Barrier Free Access: Fixtures indicated to provide barrier free access shall be designed, manufactured and installed in accordance with ANSI 117.1-1986 and the °Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction" from the Florida Board of Building Codes and Standards, Department of Community Affairs, October 1997 Revision with amendments. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center ' Renovations & Expansion C. ASSE: Fixtures and devices shall comply with the standards of the American Society of Sanitary Engineers, where required. D. ADA: Fixtures, devices and installation clearances and heights shall comply with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act ADA). E. PDI: Fixtures and devices shall comply with the standards of the Plumbing and Drainage Institute, where required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 GENERAL A. -Manufacturer: Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. B. Material: Fixtures shall be white vitreous china unless otherwise indicated. Where enameled ' iron fixtures are specified, they shall be furnished with acid resisting enamel. C. Quality: Plumbing fixtures shall be "f=irst Quality" as defined and set forth in Commercial ' Standard CS77-28 as promulgated by the U.S. Department of Commerce. Fixture fittings shall comply with ANSI/ASTM Al 12.18.1 M - 1989. Plumbing trim for water closet bowls, tanks and urinals shall comply with ANSI/ASTM Al 12.19.5 -1990. D. Similar Character and Design: Fixtures and fittings of a similar type shall be from a single , manufacturer. E. Enameled Cast Iron Fixtures: Enameled cast iron fixtures shall comply with ANSI Al12.19.1M - 1986. F. Exposed Metal: Exposed metal shall be polished chromium on either brass or bronze, unless otherwise indicated. Supply valves shall have renewable seats and discs. Hot and cold water ' supply to fixtures shall be provided with stops. Provide P-trap with clean-out for each lavatory and sink except as indicated. G. Concealed Carriers: Provide a cast iron or steel concealed arm, floor-mounted carrier with cast iron feet and steel uprights to support all wall mounted lavatories, sinks, urinals, and water closets. Carriers shall comply with ANSI A112.6.1.M - 1979 and shall have adjustable support plates, alignment truss, and mounting fasteners. Floor mounted carriers shall withstand an applied vertical load of 250 pounds on the front of the fixture indefinitely without breaking or permanently deforming. Supports and carriers shall have adjustments capable of permitting field alignment to allow for actual site conditions. 2.2 CLEANOUTS AND CLEANOUT ACCESS COVERS A. Size: Clean-outs shall be at least the same nominal pipe size as the pipe to which they are connected, to a maximum of 6 inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated. B. Material: Clean-outs shall comply with ANSI Al 12.36.2M - 1983 and shall be water- and gas- ' tight cast iron construction with adjustable housing to accommodate finished floor or grade elevation. Clean-outs in waterproofed floors shall have a flashing flange and clamp device. Clean-outs shall have a countersunk internal bronze plug and scoriated nickel-bronze removable cover, wall clean-outs shall have polished stainless steel cover specifically manufactured for the ' wall finish at each location. Floor clean-outs for floors with finish coverings shall have the top recessed for tile or carpet, with a clean-out marker, manufactured for the finished floor material. PLUMBING FDCrURf5 22 4000 - 2 i ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Access Cover. Access covers for concealed wall clean-outs shall be nickel-bronze with scoriated hinged cover or round stainless steel cover with countersunk machine threaded center screw, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE FIXTURE MANUFACTURERS 1 1 1 1 1 A. Note: Refer to the contract documents for the "Basis of Design", for plumbing fixtures and accessories; substitutions shall be reviewed through the normal process as stated in the specifications. B. Plumbing Mures: Toto C. Faucets: T&S, American Standard, Kohler & Delta. D. Supplies: McGuire, Engineered Brass Company, Keeney, and Zum. E. P-Traps: McGuire, Engineered Brass Company, Keeney, and Zum. F. Stainless Steel Sinks: Just and Elkay G. Shower Valves: Symmons, Leonard, and Powers. H. Drains: Josam, Mifab, and Zum. 1. Cleanouts: Josam, Mifab, and Zum. ]. Flush Valves. Sloan,and Zurn K. Drinking Fountains: Elkay, and Halsey Taylor. L. Water Hammer Accessories: Sioux Chief & Precision Plumbing Products. M. Concealed Carriers: Josam, Mifab and Zum. N. Trap Primers: PPP, MIFAB, Sioux Chief. 1 1 fl? PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Piping: Plumbing piping to fixtures shall be secured to the wall framing system prior to installation of the wall surface material to assure a solid installation which will not move. Fixture piping which can be moved shall be removed and re-secured to the wall structure; replacement of the wall, finishes, trim, etc. shall be included at no cost to the Owner. B. Clearances: Install fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's data, with sufficient clearances to coordinate with accessories, specialties and equipment. G Mop Sinks: Unless otherwise indicated, mop sinks or basins shall be floor mounted and sealed watertight, at walls and seams. Provide stainless steel backsplash. PLUMBING FDfTURF3 22 4000 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.2 CLEAN-OUTS AND CLEAN-OUT ACCESS COVERS A. Exterior Clean-outs: Extend exterior clean-outs to finished grade. Provide a concrete pad 18 inches by 18 inches, 6 inches thick around clean-out; slope top down approximately 2 inches from the clean-out to edge of pad so that edge of pad is flush with finished grade. B. Locations: Clean-outs shall be provided at not more than 50 feet apart in horizontal drainage lines of 4 inch nominal diameter or smaller, and at not more than 75 feet apart for larger diameter pipe. Clean-outs shall be provided at each change of direction of 90 degrees or more. Clean-outs shall be provided in vertical sanitary and sform water piping, with the centerline not more than 18 inches above the finished floor level, at each floor with a horizontal offset or horizontal branch connection. 3.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. General: Install water hammer arresters on both hot and cold water piping in-accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Water hammer arresters shall be installed at each valve- operated plumbing fixture, or at the end of piping branches serving a battery of valve-operated fixtures. In addition, water hammer arresters shall be installed at each solenoid valve, at each remotely-operated valve, or at each quick-closing valve as defined by PDI WH-201, as close to the point of quick closure as possible. Provide access panels as required for servicing. 3.4 INSULATION OF BARRIER-FREE LAVATORY PIPING A. General: Insulate hot and cold water supplies and p-traps for barrier-free lavatories with pre- manufactured insulation kits. All joints shall be sealed and provided with a white finish. 3.s FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. General: Obtain mounting templates and dimensions prior to roughing-in plumbing connections. Mount fixture on carrier which is bolted to the building structure with through-bolts or pre-set inserts. Floor-mounted fixtures shall have supports, blocking or a non-shrink grout setting bed to prevent movement or flexing. Floor-mounted, wall mounted and countertop fixtures shall be sealed watertight with a flexible, non-permeable caulk or mastic. Provide stainless steel escutcheons at each water supply and waste piping penetration of a wall or cabinet; caulk each escutcheon. Adjust all fixtures level and plumb at proper mounting height. B. Rough-In: During rough-in, water and waste stub-outs shall be located to prevent gaps between the fixture and the finished wall, and to allow exposed pipe to be installed straight and plumb from the stub-out to the fixture. Continuously cover wall openings and open pipe ends to prevent construction debris from entering. C. Special Fixtures: For equipment to be connected later or under a separate contract, provide valved and capped water lines; provide floor drains, open site drains, or capped water connections as indicated or required. D. Fixture Connections: Provide valve cocks or stops in pressure piping to fixtures in lines 1/2 inch or smaller; provide gate valves in piping 3/4 inch and larger. Provide a water seal trap with each fixture including floor drains and floor sinks) whether indicated or not. Drains shall be sized as indicated or required but in no case less than 1-1/2 inch pipe size. PLUMBING FIXTURE'5 r-, 1 1 22 4000 - 4 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion E. Fixture Mounting Criteria: Plumbing fixtures shall comply with the following mounting criteria unless specifically dimensioned otherwise on the drawings: 1. Standard access fixtures: a. Wall hung water closet -15 inches from finish floor elevation to top of rim. b. Wall hung lavatory - 31 inches from finish floor elevation to top of rim. C. Urinal - 24 inches from finish floor elevation to the top of the rim. 1 Barrier-Free Fixtures: a. Water closet - 17 inches from finish floor elevation to rim of fixture. Flush valve or flush lever Iocatign shall be on the access side of the water closet. b. Lavatory - maximum 34 inches from finish floor elevation to top of rim. C. Urinal - maximum 17 inches from finish floor elevation to the top of the rim. d. Drinking fountain and water cooler - maximum 36 inches from finish floor elevation to spout outlet, minimum d inches water flow height measured vertically above the spout outlet, minimum 27 inches of clear space. between finish floor elevation to bottom of the apron. END OF SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion ' SECTION 23 0500 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Requirements of the Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract, Specifications, Drawings; and Addenda and Contrad Modifications (the Contract Documents), apply to the requirements of each Section of Division 23. B. Conflicts: Nothing contained in this Section shall be construed to conflict in any way with other ' provisions or requirements of the Contract documents. The intent is that this Section will take precedence. Where differences arise, the Architect shall decide which directions or instructions take precedence. _ 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: Unless an item is specifically mentioned as being provided by others, the requirements of Division 23 Contract Documents shall be completed. The systems, equipment, devices and accessories shall be installed, finished, tested and adjusted for continuous and proper operation. Any apparatus, material or device not shown on the Drawings but mentioned in these Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the project complete and operational in all respects, shall be furnished, delivered and installed without additional expense to the Owner. Include all materials, equipment, supervision, operation, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests necessary for complete and properly functioning systems. 1.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS 1 1 t A. Code Compliance: Refer to Division 1. As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated, comply with all rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances and laws of local, state and federal governments and the amendments and interpretation of such rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances and laws of local, state and federal governments by the authorities having lawful jurisdiction. B. ADA: Comply with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). C. Comply: With the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and other Codes and Standards as adopted by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction. D. Florida Building Code 2004: Conform in strict compliance to the Florida Building Code (FBC) and the amendments which are enforced by the local authority having jurisdiction. 1. Florida Building Code - Mechanical 2004 Edition 2. Florida Building Code - Plumbing 2004 Edition 3. Florida Building Code -- Fuel Gas 2004 Edition 4. Florida Building Code - Chapter 13 Florida Energy Efficiency for Building Construction 2004 Edition 5. Guidelines for Design and Construction of Hospital and Healthcare Facilities, American Institute of Architects, 2001 Edition. E. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION (NFPA) Standards 1. NFPA-13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2002 Revision BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 -1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion ' 2. NFPA-14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, 2003 Revision 3. NFPA-24, Standards forthe Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances, 2002 Revision 4. NFPA-70, National Electrical Code, 2002 Revision 5. NFPA-90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems, 2002 Revision 6. NFPA 90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems, 2002 Revision 7. NFPA-96, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Prevention of Commercial Cooking Operations, 2001 Revision {Subdivision 7-2.2 of NFPA 96 applies prospectively only. Existing installations are permitted to remain in place subject to the approval of the authority having jurisdiction.} 8. NFPA-101A, Guide to Alternative Approaches to Life Safety, 2001 Revision 9. NFPA-101 B, Standard on Means of Egress for Buildings and Structures, 2002 Revision , 10. NFPA-211, Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances, 2003 Revision 11. NFPA-1963, Standard for Fire Hose Connections, 1998 Revision F. Notification: Comply with all of the requirements of the Federal "Right-To-Know" Regulations and the Florida "Right-To-Know" Law and provide notification to all parties concerned as to the use of toxic substances. ' G. Owner Design Guidelines: Comply with all the requirements of the latest Owner MEP Engineering Design Guidelines and the latest Owner Architectural Construction Standards. ' 1.4 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Intent: The intent of the drawings and specifications is to establish minimum acceptable quality standards for materials, equipment and workmanship, and to provide operable mechanical systems complete in every respect. ' B. Equipment Placement: The drawings are diagrammatic, intended to show general arrangement, capacity and location of various components, equipment and devices. Each location shall be determined by reference to the general building plans and by actual measurements in the building as built. Reasonable changes in locations ordered by the Architect prior to the performance of the affected Work shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Drawing Scale: Due to the small scale of the drawings, and to unforeseen job conditions, all required ' offsets, transitions and fittings may not be shown but shall be provided at no additional cost. D. Conflict: In the event of a conflict, the Architect will render an interpretation in accordance with the 1 General Conditions. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Provide/Install: The word "provide" shall mean furnish, install, connect, test, complete, and leave i ready for operation. The word "install" where used in conjunction with equipment fumished by the Owner or under another contract shall mean mount, connect, complete, and leave ready for operation. 1 B. Concealed: The surface of insulated or non-insulated piping, ductwork or equipment is concealed from view when standing inside a finished room, such as inside a chase or above a ceiling. C. Exposed: The surface of insulated or non4nsulated piping, ductwork or equipment is seen from inside ' a finished room, such as inside an equipment or air handling unit room. 1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 - 2 1 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Protected: The surface of insulated or non-insulated piping, ductwork or equipment on the exterior of the building but protected from direct exposure to rain by an overhang, eave, in an unconditioned parking garage or building crawl space. E. Unprotected: The surface of insulated or non-insulated piping, ductwork or equipment on the exterior of the building and exposed to rain. F. Abbreviations: Abbreviations, when: not defined in the Contract Documents, shall be interpreted to mean the normal construction industry terminology, as determined by the Architect. Plural words shall be interpreted as singular and singular words shall be interpreted as pluraf where applicable for context of the Contract Documents. :L6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL." in this section. Include the following data: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit shop drawings for the following: (1) Each piping system _ (2) Ductwork systems as defined in Section 23 3113 (3) Coordination drawings 1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Production: Maintain one set of black or blue line on white project record "as-built" drawings at the site. At all times the set shall be accurate, clear, and complete, indicating the actual installation. Record drawings shall be updated weekly to record the present stage of progress. These drawings shall be available to the Architect at all times. Equipment schedules, control diagrams, sequences of operation shall also be updated. B. Completion: Prior to substantial completion, transfer onto an unmarked second set of drawings all changes, marked in colored pencil, and submit them to the Architect. Upon completion of all punch lists, transfer all "As-Built" conditions to the AutoCAD drawing files, package three (3) print sets of full size drawings and two (2) CDs of the AutoCAD drawing files with associated reference files and submit them to the Architect for review and approval. 1.8 SUBMITTAL A. General: The provisions of this section are supplemental to the requirements in Division 1, and only apply to the material and equipment covered in Division 23. B. Time: Submit manufacturer's literature, performance data and installation instructions covered in each Section of Division 23 under an individual letter of transmittal within 30 days after Notice to Proceed unless otherwise indicated. C. Submitter's Review: All items required for each section shall be reviewed before submittal. Submittal information for each item shall bear a review stamp of approval, indicating the name of the Contractor and Subcontractor (where applicable), the material suppliers, the initials of submitter and date checked. Responsibility for errors or omissions in submittals shall not be relieved by the Architect's BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion review of submittals. Responsibility for submittals cannot be subrogated to material suppliers by Contractors or Subcontractors. 1. Review of the submittal data, whether indicated with "APPROVED" or with review comments, does not constitute authorization for or acceptance of a change in the contract price. D. Architect's Review: The submittal data shall be reviewed only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and for general compliance with the Contract Documents. Any action indicated is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Reviews of submittal data review shall not include quantities; dimensions (which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site); fabrication processes; techniques of construction; and co-ordination of the submittal data with all other trades. Copies of the submittal data will be returned marked "ACCEPTED AS SUBMITTED" "ACCEPTED AS NOTED" "REVISED AS NOTED AND RESUBMIT""REJECTED REVISED AS NOTED AND RESUBMIT". E. Submittal Items: Submittal items shall be inserted in a Technical Information Brochure. Mark the appropriate specification section or drawing reference number in the right hand comer of each item. All typewritten pages shall be on the product or equipment manufacturer's printed letterhead. 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Where indicated, include the manufacturer's printed literature. Literature shall be clearly marked to indicate the item intended for use. 2. Performance Data: Provide performance data, wiring and control diagrams and scale drawings which show that proposed equipment will fit into allotted space (indicate areas required for service access, connections, etc.), and other data required for the Architect to determine that the equipment complies with the Contract Documents. Where noted, performance data shall be certified by the manufacturer at the design rating points. 3. Installation Instructions: Where requested, each product submittal shall include the manufacturer's installation instructions. Generic installation instructions are not acceptable. Instructions shall be the same as those included with the product when it is shipped from the factory. 4. Written Operating Instructions: Instructions shall be the manufacturer's written operating instructions for the specified product. If the instructions cover more than one model or type of product they shall be clearly marked to identify the instructions that cover the product delivered to the project Operating Instructions shall be submitted immediately after the product or equipment submittal has been returned from the Architect marked "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED". 5. Maintenance Instructions: Information shall be the manufacturer's printed instructions and parts lists for the equipment furnished. If the instructions cover more than one model or type of equipment they shall be marked to identify the instructions for the furnished product. Submit maintenance instructions immediately after the product or equipment submittal has been returned from the Architect marked "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED". F. Substitutions: General: Refer to Division 1. Substitutions may be considered for any product or equipment of a manufacturer. See paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURER" in this Section. Any product or equipment may be submitted for review; however, only one substitution per item will be considered. If a substituted product or equipment item is rejected, provide the specified product or equipment. a. Submittal shall include the name of the material or equipment to be substituted, equipment model numbers, drawings, catalog cuts, performance and test data and any other data or information necessary for the Architect to determine that the equipment meets the specification requirements. If the Architect accepts any proposed substitutions, such acceptance will be set forth in writing. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 - a f 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion b. Substituted equipment with all accessories installed or optional equipment where permitted and found acceptable, must conform to space requirements. Substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether accepted or not, shall be replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. If the substituted item affects the work of other trades, the Request for Substitution form shall include a list of the necessary modifications. 2. Deviations: The Request for Substitution form shall include a complete list of deviations from the scheduled item stating both the features and functions of the scheduled item and the comparable features and functions of the proposed substitution. a. Any deviation not indicated in writing will be assumed to be identical to the specified item even if it is shown otherwise on the submittal data. b. If a deviation not listed is found anytime after review and acceptance by the Architect and that deviation, in the opinion of the Architect, renders the substituted item as unacceptable, the item shall be removed and replaced by the scheduled item at no additional cost to the Owner. c. The Architect shall retain the right to specify modifications to the substituted item, correcting or adjusting for the deviation, if the Architect deems it to be in the best interest of the Owner. -3. Scheduled Item: A scheduled item is a product or item of equipment indicated in the Contract Documents by manufacturer's name and model number identifying a single item. The manufacturers trade name for a group of products that does not signify a single item including type, style, quality, performance, and sound rating shall not be classified as a scheduled item. Where more than one manufacturer and product model number are indicated, each shall be considered as a scheduled item. 4. Form: When a product or item of equipment is proposed as a substitution a "REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION" form shall be completed and submitted with the required data. A copy of the form is included after the end of this section. 5. Rejection: Substituted products or equipment will be rejected if, in the opinion of the Architect, the submittal does not meet any one of the following conditions or requirements: a. The submittal data is insufficient or not clearly identified. The Architect may or may not request additional information. b. The product or equipment will not fit the space available and still provide the manufacturers published service area requirements. c. The product or equipment submitted is not equivalent to or better than the specified item., Products or equipment of lesser quality may be considered provided an equitable financial rebate, satisfactory to the Architect, is to be returned to the Owner. d. The product or equipment submitted has less capacity, efficiency and safety provisions than the specified item. e. The product or equipment submitted does not have warranty, service and factory representation equivalent to that specified. f. The Owner prefer; not to accept the submitted product. e G. Technical Information Brochure: 1. Binder. Include binders with the first submittal for the Technical Information Brochure. Each binder shall be size 3 inch, hardcover, 3-ring type for 8-1/2" X 11" sheets. Provide correct designation on outside cover and on spine of each binder, i.e., MECHANICAL SUBMITTAL DATA, MECHANICAL OPERATION INSTRUCTION and MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. 2. Number: Submit not less than fire sets of binders for each of the three mechanical brochures indicated above. Each set shall consist of a minimum of two binders for submittal data and 1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion binder each for operating instructions and for maintenance instructions. Additional binders shall be submitted at the request of the Architect. One set of binders shall be retained by the Architect Three sets of binders shall be maintained for the Owner and the remaining set shall become the property of the Engineer. 3. Index. First sheet in each brochure shall be a photocopy of the "Division 23 Index" of the specifications. Second sheet shall list the firm name, address, phone number, superintendents name for the contractor and all major subcontractors and suppliers associated with the project. 4. Dividers: Provide reinforced separation sheets tabbed with the appropriate specifications Section reference number for each Section in which submittal data or operation and maintenance instructions is required. 5. Specifications: Insert a copy of the specifications for each Section and all addenda applicable to the Section between each of the Section dividers. 1.9 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. General: Provide detailed (minimum 1/4 inch per foot) scaled coordination drawings showing locations and positions of all architectural, structural, (FFBE) equipment, electrical, plumbing, fire protection and mechanical elements for all installations. Provide overlay drawings, prior to beginning work, indicating work in and above ceilings and in mechanical and electrical rooms with horizontal and vertical dimensions, to avoid interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions and other services. Accommodate-phasing and temporary conditions indicated on the contract drawings as necessary to complete the work without disruption to the Owner's use of the existing occupied areas of the building(s). B. Coordination of Space: Coordinate use of project space and sequence of installation of mechanical and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routings shown for pipes, ducts and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. In finished areas except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. Contractor shall provide background drawings showing partitions, ceiling heights, and structural framing locations and elevations, and existing obstructions. Contractor shall resolve major interferences at initial coordination meeting prior to production of coordination drawings. C. Precedence of Services: In event of conflicts and interferences involving location and layout of work, use the following priority to resolve interferences: 1. Structure has highest priority. 2. Walls systems. 3. Ceiling grid/light fixtures. 4. Gravity drainage lines. 5. Large pipe mains. 6. Ductwork/diffusers, registers and grilles. 7. Sprinkler heads. 8. Small piping and tubing/electrical conduit. 9. Access panels. D. Drawings shall be developed on AutoCAD Version 2000 (or later), and utilize AIA Standard layering conventions. At the completion of the project construction, the Contractor shall provide two (2) full- sized print sets and two (2) CDs of all drawing files with related reference files representing as-built installations for Architect review. Upon approval that the submitted information is complete, a similar submittal shall be provided to the Owner. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230500-6 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion E. Stamp Area: Leave 4 inch by 2-1/2 inch blank area near We block for Architect's shop drawing stamp. F. Reference Key: Indicate by cross-reference the Contract Drawings, notes, or Specification paragraph numbers where item(s) occur in the Contract Documents. G. Additional Requirements: See specific Sections for additional requirements. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S CHECKOUT A. Start-up and Checkout: At completion of installation and prior to performance verification, a factory- pained representative of the manufacturer shall provide start-up and checkout service. After the performance verification the manufacturers representative shall examine performance information and check the equipment in operation, and sign "Check-Out Memo" for the record. Submit a copy of Memo on each item of equipment where indicated in individual sections of these specifications for inclusion in each Technical Information Brochure. The "Check-W Memo" shall be included with the performance verification data. Do not request "Instruction in Operation Conference" or-request final inspection until Memos have been submitted and found acceptable. 1.11 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER A. General: Instructions to the Owner shall be by competent representatives of the manufacturers 1 involved, with time allowed for complete coverage of all operating procedures. Provide classroom instruction and field training in the design, operation and maintenance of the equipment and troubleshooting procedures. Explain the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar provisions of the systems. On the date of substantial completion, turn over the prime responsibility for operation of the mechanical equipment and systems to the Owner's operating personnel. B. Training Period: Unless otherwise indicated training periods shall encompass the following number of hours of classroom and hands-on instructions with a maximum period of 4 hours per day for either. Mixing classroom instructions and hands on training in the same day is unacceptable. .? a. Training periods: b. 6 hours Classroom c. 6 hours Hands-on C. Scheduling: Submit any remaining required items for checking at least one week before final inspection of building. When submittal items are found acceptable, notify Owner, in writing, that an "Instruction in Operation Conference" may proceed. Conference will be scheduled by the Owner. After the conference, copies of a memo certifying that the "Instruction in Operation Conference" and Completed Demonstration have been made will by signed by Owner and the instructors, and one copy will be inserted in each Technical Information Brochure. 1.12 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Division 1. 1.13 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS FOR ROOF-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 - 7 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. All roof-mounted devices, equipment and systems shall be constructed, designed and fastened to withstand wind loads of velocities up to 155 mph. Structural calculations for roof-mounted equipment shall be completed in accordance with Florida Building Code requirements and submitted by a structural engineer registered in the State of Florida. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Products: Manufacturer's names and product model numbers indicated on the drawings and in these specifications establish the type, style, quality, performance, and sound rating of the desired product. Listing of other manufacturers indicates that.their equivalent products would be acceptable if they meet the specification requirements, the specific use and installation shown on the drawings, including space and clearance requirements, and the energy consumption and efficiency of the specified product. The listing of additional manufacturers in no way indicates that the manufacturer can provide an acceptable product. B. Space Requirements: All manufactured products furnished on this project must have the required space and service areas indicated in the manufacturer's printed literature or shown on their shop drawing. When the manufacturer does not indicate the space required for servicing the equipment, the space shown on the drawings or as required by the Architect must be provided. 2.2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. General: Material and equipment used shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of similar items, and with a history of satisfactory use as judged by the Architect. B. Specified Equipment: Equipment shall be the capacity and types indicated or shall be equivalent in the opinion of the Architect. Material and equipment fumished and installed shall be new, recently manufactured, of standard first grade quality and designed for the specific purpose. Equipment and material furnished shall be the manufacturer's standard item of production unless specified or required to be modified to suit job conditions. Sizes, material, finish, dimensions and the capacities for the specified application shall be published in catalogs for national distribution. Ratings and capacities shall be certified by a recognized rating bureau. Products shall be complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. C. Compatibility: Material and equipment of one and the same kind, type or classification and used for identical or similar purposes shall be made by the same manufacturer. Where more than one choice is available, select the options which are compatible with other products already selected. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product selection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP A. General: The installation of materials and equipment shall be done in a neat, workmanlike and timely manner by an adequate number of craftsmen knowledgeable of the requirements of the Contract Documents. They shall be skilled in the methods and craftsmanship needed to produce a fimt-quality installation. Personnel who install materials and equipment shall be qualified by training and BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 - 8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion experience to perform their assigned tasks. All materials and equipment shall be installed per the manufacturers written requirements. B. Acceptable Workmanship: Acceptable workmanship is characterized by first-quality appearance and function which conforms to applicable standards of building system construction and exhibits a degree of quality and proficiency which is judged by the Architect as equivalent or better than that ordinarily produced by qualified industry tradesmen. C. Performance: Personnel shall not be used in the performance of the installation of material and equipment who, in the opinion of the Architect, are deemed to be careless or unqualified to perform the assigned tasks. Material and equipment installations not in compliance with the Contract Documents, or installed with substandard workmanship in the opinion of the Architect, shall be removed and reinstalled by qualified craftsmen at no change in the contract price. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION .1 A. General: Refer to Division 1. B. Emergency Contacts: Along with the operating and maintenance manual submittal, provide the Owner with a list of the names and emergency telephone and beeper numbers of individuals who can be contacted during working and non-working hours, including weekends, for assistance throughout the warranty period should leaks, equipment failure or other damage occur. Update the list throughout warranty to provide continuous availability of responsible parties to the Owner. If the Owner cannot contact the responsible party during an emergency situation, the Owner may effect emergency repairs through other means and may backcharge for the costs of repair material and labor incurred. C. Housekeeping: Keep interiors of duct and pipe systems clean and free from dirt, rubbish and foreign matter. Close open ends of piping and ductwork at all times throughout the installation. Install 30% efficient filter media over each return air grille and open return duct opening; change media regularly during construction when dirty to keep duct interiors clean. Prevent dust, debris and foreign material from entering the piping and ductwork. D. Equipment Protection: Protect fan motors, switches, equipment, fixtures, and other items from dirt, rubbish and foreign matter. Do not operate air-handling equipment if the building is not clean or if dust can enter the coils or the fan housings. E. Equipment Cleaning: Thoroughly clean equipment and entire piping systems internally upon completion of installation and immediately prior to final acceptance. Open dirt pockets and strainers, blow down each piping system and clean strainer screens of accumulated debris. Remove accumulated dirt, scale, oil and foreign substances. Thoroughly wipe clean internal surfaces of ductwork and air handling units prior to request for substantial completion. (See para. 3.2 above.) F. Building Cleanup: Remove debris, rubbish, leftover materials, tools and equipment from work areas and site. Clean tunnels and closed off spaces of packing boxes, wood frame members and other waste materials used in the installation. Final acceptance shall not be approved until site is cleaned. G. Fixture Cleanup: Remove temporary labels, stickers, etc., from fixtures and equipment. Do not remove permanent nameplates, equipment model numbers, ratings, etc. H. Filter Replacement Provide filters, with the same efficiency rating as required for the final installation, for the protection of the air moving equipment and ductwork continuously throughout the construction phase. Provide a new set of clean filters for the test and balance of the air side equipment. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 73 0500 - 9 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations A Expansion 1. Protection of Finished Installation: Where installation is required in areas previously finished by other trades, protect the area from marring, soiling or other damage. J. Air Handling Unit Operation During Construction Phase: Do not operate air handling equipment during building construction phase unless filter fabric is fastened to all duct systems' inlets and all specified and scheduled air filters are installed to minimize dirt entry into ductwork and air moving equipment. When running air handling units to dry out the building, control the building temperature to drop very slowly, and verify all HVAC insulation is completed and doors and windows are installed and closed, to prevent condensation of water from humid air on building interior surfaces, equipment, materials and ductwork. 3.3 CORRECTION OF WORK A. General: At no additional cost to the Owner, rectify discrepancies between the actual installation and contract documents when in the opinion of the T&B Agency or the Architect the discrepancies will affect system balance and performance. B. Drive Changes: Include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes, as well as balancing dampers, valves and fittings, and access panels to achieve proper system balance recommended by the T&B Agency. 3.4 COORDINATION AND ASSISTANCE A. General: Provide all labor, equipment, tools and material required to operate the equipment and systems necessary for the testing and balancing of the systems and for the adjustment, calibration or repair of all electric or pneumatic automated control devices and components. These services shall be available on each working day during the period of final testing and balancing. B. Drawings and Specifications: Provide to the T&B Agency a complete set of project record drawings and specifications and an approved copy of all HVAC shop drawings and equipment submittals. The T&B Agency shall be informed of all changes made to the system during construction, including applicable change orders. C. Coordination: Coordinate the work of all trades and equipment suppliers to complete the modifications recommended by the T&B Agency and accepted by the Architect. Cut or drill holes for the insertion of air measuring devices as directed for test purposes; repair to as-new condition, inserting plastic caps or covers to prevent air leakage. Repair or replace insulation and re-establish the integrity of the vapor retardant. 3.5 A. PREPARATIONS FOR PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION Verification: Prior to commencement of the balancing by the T&B Agency, the Contractor shall verify in writing: 1. That air filters have been replaced and are in clean condition. 2. That linkages between dampers and their actuators are secure, non-overloading and non- binding. 3. That ductwork specialties are in their normal operating positions. 4. That fans are operating at the correct rotation and specified RPM. 5. That ductwork has been pressure tested and accepted. 6. That strainers have been removed, cleaned and replaced, and that temporary construction strainers have been removed. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 - 10 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 7. That compression or expansion tanks have been inspected, are not air-bound or water-logged and are pre-charged, and that the piping systems have been completely vented and filled with water. 8. That air vents at coils and high points of the piping systems have been inspected and installed and operating freely. 9. That automatic valves, hand valves, and balancing valves have been placed in a fixed open position for full flow through all devices. 10. That linkages between valves and their actuators are secure, non-overloading and non-binding. 11. That pressures for hydronic reducing valves have been set 12. That operating temperatures have been set for chillers, regulating valves, etc. 13. That pumps are operating at the correct rotation and specified horsepower. 14. That piping has been pressure tested and accepted and piping systems have been cleaned, flushed, sterilized and refilled with chemicals and prescribed treated water and vented. 15. That operating temperatures have been set for boilers, regulating valves, etc. 16. That the operating safeties (thermal overloads, firestat/freezestats, smoke detectors, relief valves, etc.), are installed and fully functional. 17. That equipment has been lubricated and can be operated without damage. 18. That the systems are operational and complete. 19. That no latent residual work remains to be completed. 3.6 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Requirements: Do not store fiberglass insulation or any equipment within the building until it has been "dried in". If dry space is unavailable and the insulation and equipment must be installed or stored before the building is "dried in" and completely enclosed, provide polyethylene film cover for protection. B. Replacement of Damaged Stored Material and Equipment: Any material and equipment that has been wet or otherwise damaged prior to installation, in the opinion of the Architect, shall be replaced with new material regardless of the condition of the material and equipment at the time of installation. C. Repair of Damaged Installed Material and Equipment: After installation correct or repair dents, scratches and other visible blemishes. At the direction of Architect replace or repair to "as new" condition equipment which has been damaged during construction. D. During construction, all piping and ductwork system openings shall be capped with at least two layers of polyethylene film, fastened tightly in place with banding material or foil tape until connection of the continuation of such piping or ductwork is occurring. E. All air diffusers serving critical care areas shall be disinfected per owner infection control guidelines with a commercial germicide complying with EPA regulations utilizing per manufacturer use standards prior to building occupancy. 3.7 COORDINATION OF SERVICES A. General: Coordinate interruption of services to Owner-occupied areas in writing in advance with the Architect. Shutdown time and duration of services interruption shall be decided by the Owner. Provide shutoff valves at points of interconnection to minimize downtime. Procedures incidental to the outage shall be prepared in advance to minimize downtime. 3.8 CLEAN-UP BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 -11 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. General: Debris and rubbish shall not be disposed into the Owners containers. END OF SECTION 23 0500 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 -12 1 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r i 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION (Must be Submitted Prior to Bid) Project Name: Location: Date of Request: Name of Party Requesting Substitute: Reason for Substitution Request: Drawing Spec. Sect. No. Paragraph SMified Item Manu Model Proposed Substitute: Manufacturer and Model Number. Deviations from the Specified Item: (See paragraph entitled "Deviations".) Reason for Substitution: Changes to Other Systems to Permit Use of Proposed Substitute: (List changes. Submit drawings if required for clarity.) Technical Data to Support Request for Acceptance: (List ASTM or other standards designations, testing laboratory reports, experience records, etc.) Other Supporting Data: (Submit brochures, samples, drawings, etc.) BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 -13 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION (Continued) , Certification: In making request for substitution, the party whose authorized signature appears below, certifies that all of the following statements are correct and are accepted without exception: The proposed substitution has been personally investigated and is equal or superior. in all significant respects to the product specified for the specific applications required; The proposed substitution will be warranted under the same terms required for the specified product; Coordination aspects necessitated by the proposed substitution will be accomplished in a complete and proper fashion by the party signing this form without any additional cost to the Owner, and Claims against the Owner for additional costs related to the proposed substitution which subsequently become apparent after acceptance by the Architect are hereby waived. Credit: If this substitution is acceptable the following credit shall be given to the Owner, $ CERTIFICATION OF EQUIVALENT PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR EQUIVALENT PERFORMANCE The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by: Signature Title Typed Name: Company: Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide a legally binding signature will invalidate this request. 1 1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0500 - 14 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S. Expansion SECTION 23 0513 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS are part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. , General: Provide electric motors and related electric material and equipment required for all mechanical work. 1.3 RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 21 1300, FIRE PROTECTION 3. 22 3300, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 4. 23 8126, SPLIT PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 5. 23 3416, FANS 6. 23 7341, AIR FILTER 7. 23 0593, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 2. Division 16, ELECTRICAL 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following material and performance data: 1. Manufacturer Literature: a. Dimensional outline drawing showing the operating weights of the equipment with all connection locations and requirements. 2. Installation Instructions: a. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions including copies shipped with the equipment. 3. Maintenance Instructions: a. Manufacturer's printed maintenance instructions for equipment covered in this Section. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 23 0513 -1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. Comply: With the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and other Codes and . Standards as adopted by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction. 1. NFPA: NFPA-70, National Electrical Code, 2002 Revision. 2. NEMA: National Electric Manufacturers Association Standard MG-2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC MOTOR A. Manufacturers: Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. 1. General Electric 2. Westinghouse 3. Baldor Electric Co. 4. Emerson 5. Lincoln B. General: 1. Provide motors for continuous duty conditions in which they will be required to perform; i.e., general purpose, splash-proof, explosion proof, standard load, high torque, or any other special type as required by the equipment motor manufacturers recommendations. Unless otherwise indicated or required, motors shall be open drip-proof type. 2. Motors installed outdoors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type. 3. Motor enclosures shall be of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer for the specific application. 4. All motors shall be furnished for starting in accordance with electric utility company's requirements and shall be compatible with the motor starter and driven load. Motors shall not exceed full-rated nameplate load when operated at any point along the driven equipments characteristic performance curve. The motor service factor shall not be used to justify exceeding nameplate amperage. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 1/2 horsepower and less shall be single phase. Motors 3/4 horsepower and larger shall be 3 phase, squirrel-cage induction type. 6. Sound power levels for motors shall be no greater than the guidelines recommended by NEMA MG 1-12.49. A motor which, in the opinion of the Architect, generates excessive noise within the occupied area of the building shall be replaced with a quieter operating motor at no additional cost to the Owner. 7. Motors designated to operate with a variable frequency drive shall be approved by the manufacturer of the variable frequency drive equipment and the manufacturer of the motor to insure quiet and stable continuous operation over the entire speed range. 8. Verify the circuit voltage and phase being furnished to the motor. All motors shall be 1750 rpm unless noted otherwise. Motors shall operate with electrical input voltage variations of plus or minus 1 percent of nameplate rating or frequency variations of plus or minus 5 percent of nameplate rating. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 23 0513 - 2 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1 C. Design: Provide NEMA Design B for normal starting torque with Standard MG1-12.42 Class B insulation unless noted otherwise or required by the equipment on which the motor is being used, except that .motors for variable-speed service shall have Class F insulation. Motors shall be designed.for operation in 40 degree C. ambient at 1.15 service factor on sine wave power at the base voltage and frequency and shall have all copper windings. Motors shall meet or exceed the locked-rotor (starting) and breakdown (maximum) torques for the NEMA rating. Locked rotor current shall not exceed 6 times full-load current Motor current density and heating characteristics shall be such that the motor insulation will not fail if subjected to locked-rotor current for 20 seconds. D. Efficiency: Motors 1 horsepower and larger-shall be high efficiency design. Nominal efficiency of each motor shall be tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1-12.54.1 and shall be labelled on the motor nameplate in accordance with NEMA MG 1.12.54.2. High-efficiency motors shall be different from the manufacturer's standard product through the use of premium materials, design and improved manufacturing processes to reduce motor losses. E. Single Phase: Single phase motors for hard starting applications including air compressors and outdoor installations shall be capacitor starfrnduction run or capacitor starticapacitor run type designed for the application. Motors for fans and pumps located indoor may be split phase with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings and shall be selected for quiet operation. Motors 1/8 horsepower and below may be shaded pole type with permanently sealed bearings. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS A. Compliance: Motor starters included as an integral part of a factory pre-wired control panel shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment it serves. All motor starters shall comply with the requirements of Section titled "MOTOR CONTROLLER" in Division 16. ti B. Overload Protection: Unless otherwise indicated, all 3 phase motor starters shall be provided with thermal overload relays on each phase sized in accordance with the actual nameplate full load ampere rating. Single-phase motors shall be furnished with built-in thermal protection. C. Chiller Starter. The starter for the water chiller is specified in Section 23 6400, WATER CHILLER. 1 2.3 THERMOSTAT A. Provide electric remote wall mounted thermostat at the locations indicated. 1. 24V, Fully Programmable: Thermostat shall have automatic changeover, 7-day program with "AUTO-ON" fan and " AUTO-OFF" system switches. 2.4 FACTORY PRE-WIRED CONTROL PANEL ll b UL i t h A. e pmen s a Quality Assurance: Factory pre-wired control panels furnished with any equ Listed. B. Starter: Motor starters included in a factory pre-wired control panels shall comply with the " . paragraph included in this Section entitled "MOTOR STARTERS C. Disconnect: Each control panel shall be provided with a disconnecting means for each motor and control circuit controlled by the panel. Where more than one motor or control circuit is controlled each shall be provided with a fused disconnect or circuit breaker. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 23 0513 - 3 i1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Wiring: Factory pre wired control panels shall be provided with internal wiring to a single set of incoming lugs for a single point electrical power connection. E. Transformers: When control transformers are provided or other electrical voltages are required other than or in addition to the electrical power connection, provide fuse protection and disconnect switch. -PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Material and Equipment: Install material and equipment in accordance with details shown on the drawings, submittal drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 SCHEDULED HORSEPOWER A. Nominal Size: The horsepower scheduled or specified are those nominal sizes estimated to be required by the equipment when operating at specified duties and efficiencies. In the case-of - pumps and fans, these motors shall be non-overloading at any point of the performance curve. B. Minimum Size: Motor horsepowers shall not be reduced from the scheduled size regardless of the requirements of the selected or submitted equipment. C. Increased Size: If the actual motor horsepower for the equipment furnished is larger than the scheduled size indicated, the proper size feeder, breaker, starter, etc. shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Vibration. Motor vibration in any direction as measured at the bearing housings, when tested in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1-12.06, shall be within the following table: TABLE -VIBRATION LIMITS Speed (RPM) Max. Amplitude (Inch) 3000-4000 0.0010 1500-2990 0.0015 1000-1499 0.0020 999-& below 0.0025 1 If balance weights are added to the rotor, they shall be permanently secured by welding or riveting. Machine nuts, bolts and screws are prohibited. 3.3 THERMOSTAT A. Wall mounted thermostats shall be installed horizontally on a outlet box five feet above the floor unless otherwise indicated. B. Thermostats for exterior spaces or those shown on an exterior wall shall have insulated bases. All wiring shall be in conduit. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 23 0513 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.4 WIRING A. Power. All power wiring shall be installed according to the requirements of Division 16, ELECTRICAL. B. Interlock: Unless otherwise noted, all interlock wiring, such as remote line voltage thermostats, fan speed controllers, etc. shall be installed by the supplier of that equipment. Interlock wiring shall be installed according to the requirements of Division 16, ELECTRICAL. . C. Control: All control wiring exposed in mechanical equipment rooms, fan rooms, return air plenums, etc. shall be in conduit. Low voltage control wiring may be installed without conduit in return air plenums provided the cable is plenum rated and the installation is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. D. Remote Panel: If the pre-wired control panel is designed for remote mounting, the wiring from the factory pre-wired panel to the controlled equipment shall be installed according to the requirements of Division 16, ELECTRICAL. 3.5 WEATHER PROTECTION - A. Wiring: All electrical wiring exposed to the weather or in damp locations shall be enclosed in weatherproof fittings as required in Division 16, ELECTRICAL. t 1 r 1 B. Enclosures: Enclosures for electrical equipment shall be NEMA 3R unless indicated otherwise. C. Pitch Pockets: Refer to paragraph entitled "PITCH POCKETS" in Section 23 0529. END OF SECTION 23 0513 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 23 0513 - 5 r 1 f 1 r i 1 1 1 1 1 r F North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 0519 - PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. -General: Provide those piping specialties which are required for the piping systems specified in other sections of these specifications. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: - 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. 23 0523, VALVES 4. 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION 5. 22 1000, PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 6. 23 0593, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Catalog cut with picture of each of the following items: (1) Thermometers and thermometer wells. (2) Temperature/pressure test plugs. (3) Pressure gauges and gauge cocks including snubbers. (4) Each type of strainer including strainer material and mesh. (5) Pressure reducing valves. (6) Backflow Preventers. 2. Performance Data. a. For each pressure vessel listed, submit the manufacturer's National Board Report, Form U-1. PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 0519 -1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion b. The compression and expansion traverse for each type of expansion compensator. 3. Installation Instructions: a. Manufacturers printed installation instructions for the water totalizing meters including copies shipped with the equipment b. Manufacturers printed installation instructions for the expansion compensators including copies shipped with the equipment. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. . B. ASME: Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Unfired Pressure Vessels, shall govem the design, materials and methods of construction of all pressurized tanks. Air separators and expansion tanks shall be tested, stamped and registered with the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. C. Backflow Preventer. Backflow preventers shall comply with the following standards: 1. Double Check Valve: CSA B64.5, ASSE 1013-1988, and AWWA C-506. 2. Reduced Pressure: CSA B64.4, ASSE 1013-1988, and AWWA C-506. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. 2.2 THERMOMETERS A. Mercury in Glass Type: Fully adjustable to any angle, separable socket mounting, 12 inch long scale, graduated in degrees F., red mercury with range selected to read center scale at normal operating conditions unless otherwise indicated. Case shall be die cast aluminum with glass or plastic window. 1. Manufacturer and Model: Piping Insulated Uninsulated H.O.Trerice Co. A410 A410 Weiss 9VS6 9VS3-1 /2 Weksler AA5L-9 AA51--9 B. Separable Sockets: Provide for each thermometer in piping system. Thermowell sockets shall be brass or stainless steel with extension neck to suit thickness of insulation and finish and with 314 inch PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 0519 - 2 1 1 f I 1 Id North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion NPT. Portion of socket surrounding bulb shall not be more than 1/16 inch thick Sockets shall be filled with thermal conducting compound similar to General Electric No. G641. C. Test Wells: Brass or stainless steel with threaded plug or cap with chain, 1/2 inch NPT, and extension neck where necessary to extend above the insulation. 1. Manufacturer and Model: Pi in Insulated Uninsulated H.O.Trerice Co. ET6-A ET4-A Weiss 5550-19 5550-2 Weksler 1-3136 S3134 2.3 PRESSURE GAUGES A. General: Pressure gauge, 4-1/2 inch diameter with white lithograph background and black li d b p rass s graduations, cast aluminum black baked crystalline lacquer finish flange-less case an ring. r B. Bourdon tube: Tube shall be phosphor bronze, silver soldered to socket and tip. C. Socket: Socket shall be forged brass bottom outlet type. D. Movement: Stainless steel rotary type movement with delrin sector and bushings and micrometer type pointer, accurate to within 0.5 percent of full scale range. E. Range: Select range to read center scale at normal operating conditions unless otherwise indicated. F. Gauge Cocks: 1. Where Permanent Gauge is Installed: Brass, needle valve, round knurled handle, 1 /4 inch male x 1/4 inch female NPT. 2. Where Permanent Gauge is Not Installed: Brass gate or ball valve 1/4 inch female NPT. G. Snubber. Brass, 1/4 inch male x 1/4 inch female NPT. H. Manufacturer and Model: H.O.Trerice Co. 450B Weiss 4UGAN-1 Weksler BA141 2.4 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE A. General: Pressure reducing valves shall have a means of externally adjusting the outlet pressure. All internal parts subject to wear shall be replaceable without removing the valve from the piping. PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 0519 - 3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion Valves shall have an integral low inlet pressure check valve, and shall maintain outlet pressure with varying flow and inlet pressure. B. 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller. Valves shall be diaphragm actuated, self-contained, single seated, direct acting, spring loaded, with bronze body and stainless steel trim. C. 3 Inch and Larger Valves shall be external pilot operated, cast iron body, stainless steel trim, with bronze diaphragm and composition disc. D. Manufacturer. 1. Watts Regulator Company 2. McDonnell & Miller 3. Spirax/Sarco 2.5 TEMPERATURE REGULATING VALVES A. General: Valves shall be self-activating and automatically mix inlet hot and cold water to provide a tempered outlet. Valves shall be self-contained and shall not require external power. The outlet temperature set point shall be adjustable by a dial position in an external calibrated thermometer, and shall be regulated to within plus or minus 3 degrees F. of setpoint. B. Construction: Valves shall have a bronze body with stainless steel trim. C. Manufacturer 1. Watts Regulator Company 2. Aerco 3. Spence 4. Spirax/Sarco 5. T & S Brass and Bronze Works 2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. General: Backflow preventer assemblies shall be designed to meet the requirements of Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research: AWWA Standard C506. B. Limitations: The maximum working pressure shall be 150 psig at 110 degrees F. The total head loss through the backflow assembly shall not exceed 10 psig at rated flow. C. Construction Material: Backflow preventers up to 2 inches in size shall be constructed with a bronze body. Assemblies larger than 2 inches shall be galvanized steel or have a FDA-approved epoxy- coated cast iron body. D. Isolation Valves: Isolation valves shall be provided for all backflow preventers. Gate or full port ball valves with screwed ends shall be furnished for assemblies up to 2 inches and OS&Y gate valves with flanged ends for assemblies larger than 2 inches. OS&Y gate valves with flanged ends, provided with integral tamper switch assemblies, shall be provided for all backflow preventers in fire protection service. E. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: PIPING SPECIALTIES 230519-4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f n 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Atmospheric vacuum breaker shall be constructed of cast iron or brass body with plastic poppet float action as a check valve. The opening to atmosphere at a minimum pressure of 1 psig. All internal parts shall be corrosion resistant and shall be removable or replaceable without removing the unit from the line. The unit shall be suitable for temperatures up to 210 degrees F. 2. Manufacturer and Model: Cal-Val Company Clayton 29 Hersey Products, Inc. 288A Series Wilkins Division/Zum 30 Watts R ulator Co. 288A Febco Division/CBM - 710 or 715 F. Double Check Valve: 1. The double check valve assembly shall be constructed of corrosion resisting materials. It shall consist of two independently acting spring-loaded poppet check valves, two isolation valves and four test cocks. Ali internal parts shall be accessible without removing the valves from the line. 2. Manufacturer and Model: 3/4 to 2 inch 2-1/2 to 10 inches Cal-Val Company Clayton D-2 Clayton D Febco Division/CBM 805Y 805Y Watts R ulator Co. 007 709 Wilkins Division/turn 950 950 Hersey Products, Inc. FDC No. 2 G. Reduced Pressure: 1. The reduced pressure backflow preventer shall be a complete assembly consisting of two independently acting spring-loaded toggle lever check valves, an automatic pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves, two shut-off valves and four test cocks. The operation shall be completely automatic. All internal parts of the toggle lever check valves and pressure differential relief valve shall be removable and replaceable without removing the backf ow preventer assembly from the line. 2. Manufacturer and Model: 314 to 2 inch 1 2-1/2 to 10 inches Cal-Val Com an Febco Division/CBM Watts Regulator Co. PIPING SPECIALTIES 825Y 909 RP-2 825YD 909 RP-1 23 0519 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion Wilkins Division/Zum 975 975 Hersey Products, Inc. FDP II 6CM PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Installation: Install all piping specialties according to the manufacturers shop drawings and instructions. Provide dielectric isolating connectors when connecting copper or brass pipe or piping specialties to steel pipe or weldolets. B. Access: Install piping specialties with adequate clearance to permit easy operation and servicing. C. Strainer Blow Down: Provide blow down gate or ball valve on 1-1/2 inch and larger strainers (except refrigerant piping). Use valve not less than 1/2 strainer blow down outlet size. D. Strainer Location: Provide strainers at the inlet to each control valve, steam trap, pump and where otherwise indicated. 3.2 THERMOMETERS A. General: Install test wells, separable sockets, and thermometers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. In horizontal piping the installation shall be on the top of the pipe not greater than 45 degrees from horizontal. Locate and adjust mounting angle as required to permit easy reading of all thermometers associated with a single device from a single accessible point. B. Piping Systems: Install to permit accurate reading of actual conditions. Make allowance for unrestricted flow by installing sockets in oversized fitting for line sizes 2 inch and under. Sockets, wells and thermometer stems shall extend at least halfway into the pipe but shall not impinge on the opposite pipe wall. C. Duct Systems: Install the thermometer sensing element into the fully blended and developed profile of the airstream to give an accurate reading of actual conditions. D. Protection: Protect equipment from damage from time of receipt until final acceptance. Thoroughly dean thermometers, wells and sockets of all dirt and construction debris prior to final inspection. E. Condenser Water. Thermometer sockets and wells in condenser water piping system shall be stainless steel. 3.3 TEMPERATUREIPRESSURE TEST PORTS A. Location: Provide a temperature/pressure test port at the following locations: 1. Inlets and outlets of each water coil for a. b. Every fan coil unit c. And where otherwise indicated PIPING SPECIALTIES 230519-6 1 .11 n 1 i 1 1 M 1 1 1 Cl 1 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Test Kit Provide Owner with one companion test kit suitable for taking temperature and pressure readings with test ports. Provide to Architect written certification of delivery of test kit to Owner, certification shall be signed by Owner's authorized representative. 3.4 PRESSURE GAUGES A. General: Install pressure gauges, gauge valves, test plugs and snubbers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Locate and adjust to permit easy reading of all gauges associated with a single device from a single accessible point Provide compound gauges where operating conditions will produce pressures below atmospheric (i.e. open-loop system pump suction). B. Installation: Install to permit accurate reading and to permit easy access to gauge and gauge valve. Where mounting location does not permit rotation of the gauge for removal, install using a union type gauge valve. - C. Gauge Valve: Install using brass nipples of sufficient length to raise gauge valve clear of insulation and finish. D. Snubber or Glycerin Filled Gauge: Provide on all gauges at suction and discharge of all pumps and elsewhere as required to prevent pulsation and damage to gauge. E. Valve Only Locations: Provide gauge valves to permit temporary or permanent installation of gauges for pressure indication at the following locations: 3.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. General: Backflow preventers shall be installed according to the manufacturer's printed instructions. Where discharge from the vacuum breaker is likely to occur provisions shall be made to prevent any king of water damage. Backflow preventers shall be installed no higher than 6 feet above the finished floor. B. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: The bottom of the vacuum breaker body shall be a minimum of 6 inches above the flood rim of the fixture or appliance. When the vacuum breaker is used on an appliance with a hose connection the bottom of the vacuum breaker shall be installed a minimum of 6 inches above the highest point to which the hose outlet can reach. A water supply valve shall only be located in the supply side upstream of the vacuum breaker. C. Double Check Valve: The double check valve assembly shall be installed in a horizontal position. Vertical installation may be allowed if the flow of water is upward. D. Reduced Pressure: The reduced pressure backflow preventer shall be installed in a horizontal position unless otherwise indicated. Provision for drainage shall be provided. E. Relief Discharge: For backflow preventers installed inside the building, route the discharge from the relief port to an indirect waste assembly and pipe the discharge from the waste assembly to the nearest floor drain unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 23 0519 PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 0519 - 7 1 i North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 0523 - VALVES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: Provide those valves, cocks and specialties which are required for piping systems specified in other sections of these specifications. - 1 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. 23 0519, PIPING SPECIALTIES 4. 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION 5. 22 1000, PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Dimensional outline drawing of each valve listed in this section including sizes available and pressure limitations. b. Outline drawing of each calibrated balancing and flow-measuring valve including flow and pressure limitations. C. Outline drawing of each safety and pressure relief valve including discharge capacity and pressure limitations. 2. Installation Instructions: a. Manufacturers printed installation instructions for all valves including copies shipped with the valves. >r.. 1.5 VALVES AND COCKS A. Basic Requirements: Valves and cocks may not be indicated in every instance on the drawings, but whether or not shown, all valves, cocks and check valves necessary for the proper operation of the system shall be furnished and installed, Valves shall have rising stems except in locations where space is limited; in these locations non rising stem valves of equivalent material and pressure class VALVES 23 0523 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion will be accepted. Valves shall have the manufacturers name or trademark, recommended service pressure, and size indicated by raised letters cast on the valve body. 1.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. Pressure and Temperature Rating: Valves shall have a pressure and temperature rating equal to or exceeding the piping in which they are installed, except that valves shall be designed for a minimum steam working pressure (SWP) of 125 psi; water-oil-gas (WOG) pressure of 200 psi. C. Safety and Relief Valves: Safety and reliefivalves on un-fired pressure vessels shall be tested, labeled and installed in accordance with the ASME Boiler Code Section VIII, Un-fired Pressure Vessels, Section UG-126 Safety and Relief Valves. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. Model numbers or product type listed for one or more manufacturers are given to provide an example of the item required. B. Continuity: Valves of a similar type provided shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.2 GATE VALVES A. 2 inch and smaller: 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Rising bronze stem, bronze body, solid wedge disc, gland packed, threaded bonnet, threaded or soldered connection. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number: THREADED SOLDERED Crane 438 or 1700 17005 Milwaukee 148 1148 Stockham B-100 B-108 Nibco T-111 5-111 Powell 500 500 or 1821 B. 3-1/2 inch and larger: 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Bronze trim O.S.B Y, cast iron body, brass trim, brass seat, bolted bonnet, solid wedge disc, bronze outside screw and yoke, malleable iron handwheel, flanged connections, rising stem. L 1 1 1? L-j 1 1 F1 r 1 VALVES 23 0523 - 2 ?i 1 1 f t. North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Manufacturer and Model Number Crane 4651/2 Milwaukee F2885 Stockham G-623 Nibco F-617-0 Powell 1793 C 2-112 inch and larger. 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. All iron O.S.B Y., cast iron body, iron trim, iron seat, bolted bonnet, solid wedge disc, iron outside screw and yoke, malleable iron handwheel, flanged connections, rising stem. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number: Crane 475 1/2 Milwaukee F2891 Stockham G-624 Nibco F-017-0N Powell 1816 2.3 GLOBE AND ANGLE VALVES A. 2 inch and smaller: 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Bronze body, union or threaded bonnet, replaceable composition Teflon disc, rising stem, malleable iron or aluminum handwheel, threaded or soldered connection. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number: THREADED E SOLDERED Crane 108 1310 Stockham B-1 3-T B-14-T Nibco T-211-Y S-211 Y Powell -- 1823 B. 2-1/2 inch and larger. 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Cast iron body, bronze trim, replaceable bronze disc, rising stem, malleable iron handwheel, flanged connection, bolted bonnet. VALVES 23 0523 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Manufacturer and Model Number. Crane 351 Milwaukee F2981 Stockham G-512 Nibco F-718-B Powell 241 C. Angle globe: 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Bronze body, union or threaded bonnet, replaceable bronze disc, threaded connection, malleable iron or aluminum handwheel. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number. _ Crane 2 Milwaukee 504 Stockham B-216 Nibco T-311-Y 2.4 CHECK VALVES A. Bronze horizontal swing: 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Bronze body, replaceable Teflon disc, threaded cap, bronze trim, threaded or soldered connection. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number. Threaded Soldered Crane 37 1342 Milwaukee 509T 1509T Stockham B-320T --- Nibco T413 5-413 Powell 578 1825 B. Iron horizontal swing: 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Iron body, bolted cap, flanged connection, iron or bronze disc and trim. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number Disc and Trim VALVES 230523-4 1 1 r 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion Bronze Iron Crane 373 373 1/2 Milwaukee F-2974 F-2971 Stockham G-931 G-933 Nibco F-918-B F-91 8-N Powell 558 1259 C. Horizontal lift check 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Bronze body, threaded cap, replaceable bronze disc, threaded connection. 1 1 k-1-1;1 1, Manufacturer and Model Number Crane 20 Milwaukee 544 Stockham B-316 D. Wafer check valves: 125 psi SWP, 250 psi WOG. Wafer check type, cast iron body, replaceable aluminum bronze dual disc, Buna-N seat, complete with companion flanges and through-bolts, replaceable stainless steel spring, fully guided. Seat of valve must mate to metal flange; flange gaskets are not acceptable. 1 1 1 ?, 1. Manufacturer and Model Number. Centerline CLC Stockham WG-970 Nibco W920W Muller 71-AHB-3-H-0 BUTTERFLY VALVES i A. General: Valves shall be capable of bubble tight shut-off at pressure differentials of 150 psi. Valves in insulated piping shall have a minimum of 2 inch extended necks for insulation clearance. B. Operators: Valves 4 inch and smaller shall have steel lever latch-type actuator capable of infinite position (or minimum of 10 locking positions) and shall have adjustable memory stop. Valves 5 inch and larger shall have enclosed gear type actuator with chain wheel, hand wheel or crank type operating mechanisms, adjustable opening and closing memory stops, and position indicator. All valves 4 inch and larger located more than 7 feet above the floor or landing shall be provided with chain wheel and chain extending to within 12 inches above the floor or landing. Provide stem VALVES 23 0573 - 5 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion extensions (in addition to insulation clearance extension) as required to place operators in an easily accessible location free of interference with adjacent piping, equipment structure, etc. C. 2 inch and smaller. Cast bronze body, viton seals, full port, stainless steel trim. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number Threaded Solder Joint Milwaukee 13132-100 13132-350 D. 2 inch and larger: Threaded and tapped lug, cast iron ASTM A126-B or ductile iron ASTM A-395 Class 60-40-18 body, bronze ASTM B-62, aluminum bronze or nylon coated disc, 416 stainless steel or phosphate coated steel shaft, and EPDM seat designed to seal against the companion flanges. Stem seals shall consist of a primary seal between the spherical disc hub and the spherical seat hub. Wafer-type is not permitted. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number: Crane 44-BXZ Bra Series 34 Centerline Series LT De Zurik 66OLR-SB23 Nibco LD 2000 Milwaukee ML223-E 2.6 PLUG VALVES A. General: Semi-steel single-piece cast iron ASTM Al 26-B body, full port type, 90 degree turn from full open to tight shut-off, bolted cover or gland, teflon gasket, lubricated-type plug with sealant check valve, stainless steel spring to maintain pressure on head seal, dial indicator, pointer and memory stop. B. 2 inch and smaller. 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Threaded connection, square wrench-operated head, round port, full pipe area. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number. Resun D-125 Milliken 200M Walworth 1700 G 2-112 inch to 5 inch: 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Flanged connections, square wrench-operated head, round port, full pipe area. VALVES 230523-6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovabons & Expansion 1. Manufacturer and Model Number. Resun D-126 Milliken 201 M Walworth 1705F D. 6 inch and above: 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG. Flanged connections, enclosed worm gear operator, round port, full pipe area, hand wheel or chain-wheel and chain. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number. - Resun - D-451-WGA E. Eccentric plug: 175 psi cold water pressure. Cast iron ASTM A126-B body, 90 degree turn, bolted cover, self-adjusting stem seal, non-lubricated full pipe size eccentric tapered plug and welded nickel dial indicator, pointer and memory stop. 2 inch and smaller shall be threaded; 21/2 and larger seat , shall be flanged connected. 5 inch and smaller shall have wrench-operated head; 6 inch and larger shall have enclosed worm gear operator and handwheel or chain-wheel and chain. l Number d M d f o e acturer an 1. Manu Milliken Millcentric Series 600 J F. Chain-wheel and chain: Where plug valves 6 inch and larger are located more than 7 feet above the h i t l d c a n s ee floor or landing, provide a chain wheel on the gear operator with sufficient # 5/0 galvanize to extend to within 12 inches above the floor or landing. G. Double-end wrench and chain: Where plug valves 2 inch to 5 inch are located more than 7 feet above the floor or landing, provide a double-end wrench on the head with sufficient # 5/0 galvanized chain to extend within 12 inches above the floor or landing. H. Wrenches: Provide wrenches manufactured from cold-rolled steel, sized for the plug valve head. 1. Sealant: Plug sealant shall be approved by the valve manufacturer for the service, pressure and temperature. 2.7 BALL VALVES A. 2 inch and smaller. 150 psi SWP, 400 psi WOG. Standard port ball, bronze trim, cast bronze body, chromium-plated brass ball, bronze non-blowout stem, Teflon seat, double o-ring stem seals, zinc- coated steel handle with plastic coated hand grip, 90 degree operation from full open to tight shut-off. 1. Manufacturer and Model Number. Threaded Solder Joint VALVES 23 0523 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.8 FLOW BALANCING VALVES A. Circuit Setter Valve (constant flow system or uniewotherwise indicated): Provide a ball type circuit setter valve for flow balancing and flow measurement, with positive shutoff, and drain connection. Valve shall have bronze body and brass trim with meter port connections having EPT inserts, positive shut-off check valves, and threaded caps. Valves shall be provided with externally calibrated adjustment with a memory stop. 1. Manufacturer and Model: Bell S Gossett CB Series Taco CS Series Flowset AS Series B. Automatic Flow Control Valve (variable flow systems) : Provide automatic flow control valves with variable openings which respond to pressure, factory set to control the water flow over an operating pressure differential at least 10 times the minimum required for full flow conditions. Valves shall be tamper proof when installed, and shall have body pressure tappings with a set of pressure and temperature test ports. Valves shall have flanged or grooved ends or a union either integral or directly adjacent to permit replacement of the control element. The automatic flow controls shall be selected for the project by the manufacturer to provide flow rates matching the equipment requirements, including any increased or decreased flow rates that are indicated. The control range pressure differential shall not exceed 3 to 40 psi. 1. Manufacturer and Model: Autoflow, Inc. FV Series Griswold 3600 Series C. Calibration Meter. Provide one portable differential pressure gauge calibration meter kit of same manufacturer as valves. Kit shall be housed in a hand-carrying case and shall contain all devices required, including pressure gauges, 5 foot meter hoses with disconnect ends, positive shutoff valves, operating instructions, and flow versus pressure drop curves, to enable testing and balancing of each size and type of balancing valve installed. 2,9 VALVES SAFETY AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES 23 0523 - 8 1 Crane 9301 9321 Milwaukee BA-200 BA-250 Nibco T-585-70 S-585-70 Jamesbu 300 Stockham S214-BR-TT 5216-BR-T-S North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. General: ASME rated as shown on the drawings and/or required by applicable codes. Cast iron or brass body, non-adjustable pressure setting, all brass wetted internal parts, manual lift lever, gland seal to minimize leakage. B. Manufacturer. 1. Manning, Maxwell & Moore 2. Watts Regulator 3. Bell & Gossett Co. 4. O.C. Keckley PART 3 - EXECUTION r 3.1 GENERAL A. Installation: Install valves in horizontal piping with the valve stem in the vertiCal upright position. B. Access: Install valves to provide adequate clearance to permit easy operation of the valve hand wheel and permit servicing of the valve packing. G. Solder or Brazed Connections: Disassemble prior to installation in piping to prevent heat damage to the seat and seals. 3.2 VALVES A. Access: Install valves, balancing cocks and similar items in easily accessible locations. Provide access panels for all concealed valves. Where gate valves in sizes 2 to 4 inches are indicated on the drawings, butterfly valves which comply with these specifications may be furnished. Install butterfly valves between properly spaced flanges; fully open before mounting bolts are tightened in order to insure a balanced pressure on the seat and prevent distortion. Valve bolt-up method shall hold valve in place and bubble-tight when piping or equipment is disconnected from either side of the valve. r 3.3 SAFETY AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A. Piping: Install valves where specified or indicated. Discharge pipe shall spillover floor drain or service sink unless otherwise noted. Provide pressure expansion device for all valves set for 150 psig or greater. Cut discharge pipe from safety valve at a 45 degree angle. Pipe shall be schedule 40 black steel or type K copper, sized equal to or greater than the cross-sectional areas of the discharge port of all connected relief valves. r 3.4 DRAIN VALVES A. Location: Install drain valves at the base of all water piping risers (both supply and return) and at all low points in the piping system. Drain valves shall be fitted with hose connection end with cap unless otherwise indicated. r 3.5 BALL VALVES A. Installation: Ball valves may be installed in lieu of gate valves or butterfly valves. VALVES 23 0523 - 9 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.6 FLOW BALANCING VALVES A. Location: Provide flow balancing valves where indicated. The exact location shall be determined using field measurements relating to the specific piping arrangement and the manufacturers , recommendations. B. Manufacturer' Recommendation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations including valve orientation and increases or decreases in pipe size at points of installation, together with minimum recommended lengths of straight pipe before and after points of installation. C. Calibration Meter. At the conclusion of the system test and balance and prior to final completion the meter shall be turned over to, and shall become the property of, the Owner. 3.7 ISOLATION VALVES A. Piping: Install isolation/shut-off valves at all main risers and main branch takeoffs, to permit isolation of piping sections for drainage. B. Equipment: Install isolation/sfiut-off valves on each inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment to which water, air or steam is piped, to allow isolation, venting and drainage. Provide a flange or union between the valve and the equipment to permit disconnection, removal and service. 3.8 CHECK VALVES A. Coordination: Unless otherwise indicated, Y-pattem horizontal swing check valves shall be used in vertical lines; horizontal swing check valves shall be used with gate valves; horizontal lift check valves shall be used with globe, angle and ball valves; wafer check valves shall be used with butterfly valves and OS&Y valves. 3.9 PLUG VALVES A. Turnover. Prior to final completion, provide to the Owner one high pressure grease gun, hose, fittings, and one year's supply of sealant for each valve. Also, provide one wrench for each different type and size of head, for every 4 valves installed, with a minimum of 1 of each type. END OF SECTION 23 0523 VALVES 23 0523 - 10 ?i 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 L 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 0529 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, are part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: Materials listed herein are general mechanical materials to be used for Division 23 sections of the specifications unless noted otherwise. _ 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: This section relates to the requirements of all sections in Division 23. 1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall comply with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. Comply: With the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and other Codes and Standards as adopted by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction. C. ANSI: Color coding for piping systems shall comply with The American National Standards Institute, ANSI A13.1-1981, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems". D. NFPA: NFPA 704, Standard System for the Identification of the Fire Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response, 2001 Revision. E. Trench Safety Act: Excavation exceeding 5 feet in depth shall comply with OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926.650 Subpart P. 1.5 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Product data for pitch pockets or pipe seals through existing roofing. b. Access doors and panel data for each type of unit indicated. C. Piping system identification markers and tags including a representative sample of each type. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion , d. Each type of pipe hanger and supporting device, including but not limited to attachmentrnterface to structure. uirements and electrical re ratin e t bl d t i l di H t t q . g, yp , e a a nc u ng e. ea race ca f. Roof curbs, rails and equipment support, including mounting for wind loading per applicable code requirements. , g. Fan curbs for roof-mounted fans, air intake and relief vents. Installation Instructions: 2 . a. , Heat trace cable details and wiring diagrams including copies shipped with the ,.equipment. - b. Roof curbs, rails and equipment support c. Roof curbs for roof-mounted fans, air intake and relief vents including copies shipped with the units. 3. Operating Instructions: - a. Valve tag list framed under glass and mounted in the each mechanical equipment room. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Acceptance: Materials and equipment shall be products which will meet with the acceptance to the authority having jurisdiction. Where acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested and certified by Underwriters Laboratories or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested and certified. B. Material: Refer to the paragraph entitled "MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT" in Section 23 0500. 2.2 HOUSEKEEPING PADS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS I A. General: Pads and supports shall extend a minimum of 4 inches and a maximum of 8 inches beyond the base or supporting member in all direction. It is the intent not to have the pad extend under the entire piece of equipment unless that equipment is located on the exterior of the building on the 1 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 2 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion ground, or the weight of the pad is required for vibration control. Pads shall have 1/2 inch chamfered on all exposed edges and shall be poured and finished smooth and level to insure proper and continuous support for the bearing surfaces of the equipment, with no deviation in excess of 1/8 inch when tested with a 10-foot straight edge. B. Size: Coordinate length and width of pads and penetrations necessary for piping or conduit with the ' actual equipment approved for use on the project. Pad shall be 4' thick, unless noted otherwise. C. Concrete and Steel Requirements: All concrete and steel for housekeeping pads shall comply with the requirements of Division 3, CONCRETE. D. Housekeeping Pads: 1. Location: Provide concrete housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment where indicated and where located in rooms wherry water piping exists. Unless otherwise indicated housekeeping pads shall be reinforced with a minimum of two layers of 6 by 6 inch, 10/10 welded wire mesh with an 1-1/2 inch cover from the bottom and any exposed surface. Pads less than 18 inches wide shall be reinforced with a minimum of two #4 bars at 6 inches on centers both ways set 1-1/2 inches above the bottom of the pad. 2. Bonding: Housekeeping pads shall be bonded to the floor slab. If the equipment located on the pad must be anchored for support, the anchor bolts shall be anchored to the floor slab prior to the installation of the housekeeping pad. E. Equipment Bases: 1. Location: Provide concrete equipment bases where rotating equipment is internally isolated by the equipment manufacturer. The equipment bases shall be the same as housekeeping pads except the Type EVS-2 isolation pads shall be provided between the top of the base and the equipment. Refer to Section 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION, for recommended loading. 1 2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 1 1 1 1 A. Locations: Provide access doors and panels (access units) for access to concealed items which require service or maintenance or other reason for accessibility. B. Manufacturer. Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. 1. Milcor Division of Inland-Ryerson 2. Bilco 3. Nystrom 4. Ventfabrics TABLE - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Location Door/Panel Type Drywall Style DW Masonry or Tile Style M-Stainless Acoustical Tile Style AT Plaster Style K Fire-rated Walls Style Fire Rated (or as indicated below) BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Fire Rated Units: " 1. frame and door assembly, rating Frame and panel assembly shall bear a U.L. label reading, 1-1/2 hour (B), temperature rise 30 minutes 250 degrees F. maximum". 2. Shall have an automatic closing device and mechanism to release the latch bolt from the inside. 3. Manufacturer. , _ a. Boico, Style F b. Inryco/Milcor, Style VA C. Nystrom, Style APFR D. Non-Fire Rated Units: 1. Steel panels and frames. 2. Locks and latches shall be appropriate for the location and shall be cam-lock type latches, flush screwdriver operated locks or cylindrical locks. 3. Provide two keys for all doors. All doors shall be keyed the same. E. Other Requirements: _ 1. Doors and panels installed in glazed or ceramic tiled surfaces, in toilet rooms or in kitchens shall be stainless steel. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, finish shall be rust inhibitive prime coat. t F. Sizes: 1. Minimum size: 8 inch x 14 inch. 2. Sizes of each unit shall be individually selected to allow the recommended and required service, maintenance and accessibility functions to be accomplished. These functions shall include, for example, valve removal, damper linkage resetting, control adjustment, lubrication, repair, replacement and similar tasks necessary and recommended for the concealed item. 3. No size smaller than 16 inch x 24 inch shall be allowed when a person must pass through the access opening. Access panels for heating equipment shall be minimum 22 inch x 36 inch as required by code. 2.4 PAINTING AND MARKING 1 A. Prohibited Material: The use of red lead or any lead-based component in primer or paint is prohibited. B. Marking: Refer also to sections describing identification of mechanical systems. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. General: Comply with ANSI A13.1-1994, "Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems" and OSHA requirements, or as otherwise indicated. B. Manufacturer 1. Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. Model numbers or i product type listed for one or more manufacturers are given to provide an example of the item required. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Markers: Legends or arrows painted with stencils are not acceptable. Markers must have approved color coded background, proper color of legend in relation to background color and flow arrow indicator. Markers higher than 12 feet above the floor shall have minimum 2 inch letters. Markers shall comply with the following table: TABLE - IDENTIFICATION MARKER SIZES 1 1 t P, 1 f O.D. of Pipe or Covering Length of Color Field Size of Letters % to 1-1/4 inch 8 inches 112 inch 1-1/2 to 2 inches 8 inches 3/4 inch 2-1/2 to 6 inches 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Above 6 inches 1 12 inches 2 inches 1. Manufacturer: a. Pipes 3/4 inch through 5 inch O.D.:-Seton, Setmark Type SNA. b. Pipes 6 inch O.D. and Greater: Seton, Setmark Type STR. D. Bands: Color coded in minimum widths of 2-1/4 inch for pipe through 12 inch O.D. and 4 inch for pipe 14 inch O.D. and greater. 1. Manufacturer. a. Brady, B-500 Vinyl Cloth, B-350 PermaCode or B-946 Outdoor Film. E. Valve Tags: Each tag shall designate appropriate service and valve number. Secure attach with meter seals, 4-ply 0.018 copper smooth wire, brass "S" hooks, or brass jack chain to allow easy reading. All valve tags used on a project shall be the same type and manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer. Provide either of the following types: a. Brass Type: Minimum 19 gauge polished brass; 1-1/2 inch min. diameter. Seton, Style 250-BL. b. Aluminum Color Coded Type: Anodized aluminum; 2 inch min. diameter. Seton, Style 2070. C. Aluminum Alloy Type: 16 Gauge sheet aluminum: Depressed type letters filled with black enamel. Face and periphery of satin finish shall be free from bums and scratches. Seton, Type 4. d. Fiber Glass Type: 1/16 inch thick glass fiber reinforced resin. 2 inch x 2 inch size of 2-1/2 inch x 9 inch size as necessary to identify item. Brady, Series No. 2297. F. Equipment Labels: Provide either of the following types: BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 5 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Plastic Type: Outdoor grade acrylic plastic to withstand weather, abrasion, grease, acid, chemical and other corrosive conditions; 1/16 inch min. thickness. Sized 3/4 inch x 2-1/2 inch, 1 inch x 2-1/2 inch, 1 inch x 3 inch or 1-1/2 inch x 4 inch as necessary to identify item. a. Manufacturer. (1) Seton, Setonite. 2. Aluminum Type: Engraved, flexible, 0.020 inch thick aluminum. Sized 3/4 inch x 2-1/2 inch, 1 inch x 3 inch, 1-1/2 inch x 4 inch or 3 inch x 6 inch-as necessary to identify item. a. Manufacturer. (1) Seton, No. 06505. 2.6 A. B. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTING DEVICES General: Pipe hangers and supporting devices shall comply with the requirements of this section unless specifically indicated otherwise in other sections of this division. Material: Pipe supporting devices apply to all piping unless modified in subsequent sections (i.e., vibration isolation) or detailed on the drawings. 1. Pipe hangers for copper pipe shall be PVC coated steel or copper, clevis type. 2. Hangers for all other types of piping shall be galvanized steel clevis type or split ring. Pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical adjustment after erection of the piping. Hanger rods shall be galvanized. 3. Vertical piping riser clamp supports shall be constructed of steel with rounded ears and two or four holes for clamping bolts. Riser clamps shall be galvanized steel, except that riser clamps for copper and brass piping riser clamps shall have PVC coating finish or copper. 4. Manufacturer: (1) Empire (2) Grinnell/Anvil (3) Tolco C. D. Beam Clamp: Beam clamps may be used when supporting piping from steel structures. Inserts: Concrete inserts shall be placed in forms prior to the time that concrete is poured. E. Tamp-ins: Lead tamp-ins may be used when installed in a concrete or masonry wall or other vertical surface to support a vertical hanger. Lead tamp-ins will not be permitted to support hangers from the underside of a concrete slab. F. Drilled-in Anchors: Steel anchor set in existing or new concrete by drilling and the use of an expansion device is permitted. The anchor shall be provided with a NPT threaded rod connection. G. Trapeze: For parallel runs of above ground suspended piping, trapeze-type hanger may be used. Provide permanent, non-conductive wrapping between copper pipe and steel trapeze hangers. H. Prohibited Type: Powder set type fasteners or inserts shall not be used. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 6 1 i North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.7 FLOOR, WALL OR CEILING PLATES OR ESCUTCHEONS A. General: Shall be chrome-plated brass. Escutcheons for extended sleeves shall be of the type designed for that purpose. Solid escutcheons shall be used up to 2 inches, split ring escutcheons will be allowed for sizes 2-1/2 inches and above. 1 B. Manufacturer. ' 1. Guarantee Specialty Mfg_ Co. 2. American Sanitary Mfg. Co. 3. Benton & Caldwell ' C. Location: Provide escutcheons or fabricated plates or collars at each location where pipe or duct passes through a finished surface. Escutcheons for flush sleeves shall be equivalent to Benton & Caldwell No. 3A chromium plated brass; for sleeves extending above floor shall be equivalent to Benton & Caldwell No. 36 chrome plated brass. Collars or plates for ducts and large diameter_ insulated pipe shall be fabricated of 18 gage galvanized sheet steel, secured to structure and neatly fitted around duct or pipe. i 2.8 PITCH POCKET A. General: Pitch pockets for all pipes, except sanitary plumbing pipe, which pass through roof or other surfaces exposed to the weather shall be made of copper, lead or galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. B. Compliance: Pitch pockets shall comply with the requirements of Division 7, THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION. C. Compliance: Pipes, conduits, guy wire anchors, etc. which penetrate an existing roof membrane shall have the membrane protected by a Pate Pipe Seal, or similar product. Any product used shall require approval by the Architect. 1 2.9 SLEEVE it A. Pipe Sleeves: Except where indicated otherwise, pipe sleeves shall be as follows: 1. Sleeves installed in walls subject to hydrostatic (water) pressures shall be modular mechanical type consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause the rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened to provide a watertight seal. a. - Manufacturer (1) Thunderline Corp., Link-Seal Type WS. 2. When there is piping existing, and fire rated walls are to be erected, Proset fire rated split wall system pipe sleeves, or an NFPA/UL listed pipe sleeve shall be used. B. Walls and Partitions: BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 7 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Sleeves (Above Grade): Sleeves shall be mild steel pipe sleeves built into wall, partition or beam, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch minimum between covering and sleeve. Penetrations of fire rated partitions shall have mild steel sleeves. 2. Sleeves Installed in Exterior Walls (Below Grade): Schedule 40 steel hot dipped galvanized after fabrication or cast iron. Fabricate the sleeve with 1/4 inch x 3 inch center flange (water stop) around the outside. C. Floors (Above Grade): Sleeves shall be Schedule 10 galvanized steel. When copper or steel piping penetrates concrete slabs, Proset System for fire-rated and water pipe installations may be used. D. Duct Sleeves: Sleeves or openings sized for mechanical ducts and covering shall be minimum 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel framed construction in roof, wall, or partitions. -2.10 FIREISMOKE RATED FLOOR, PARTITION OR WALL PENETRATION SEALANT A. General: Provide UL listed fire or fire/smoke barrier product, putty, or caulking materials, used either singularly or in combination, which comply with the requirements of the authority having lawful jurisdiction. The specific penetration assembly shall be tested and approved by UL, and shall have a UL system number for the specific application (insulated or non-insulated piping, cable bundles, nonmetallic piping, etc.) B. Manufacturer. 1. 3M Corporation 2. Metacaulk 3. Hilti 2.11 V-BELT DRIVE A. General: Each motor driven piece of equipment not direct connected shall be provided with a WWI: drive. Belts shall be of correct cross section to fit properly in sheave grooves and shall be carefully matched for each drive. Sheaves shall be cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on shafts and secured with keys of proper size. Drive rating shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for service but shall be at least 1.5 times the nameplate rating of motor. B. Fan Belt Drives: Fixed pitch sheaves shall be provided. Sheave-to-sheave centerline distances shall not exceed 3 times the sum of the sheave diameters, and shall not be less than the diameter of the larger sheave. C. Belt and Coupling Guards: Each belt drive shall be equipped with an OSHA approved guard. Guards shall be constructed of #12 U.S. standard gage 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen, or equivalent, welded to one inch steel angle frames, and shall enclose all belts and sheaves. Tops and bottoms of guards shall be of substantial sheet metal or not less than #18 U.S. standard gage. Braces or supports must not "bridge" sound and vibration isolators. Guards shall allow adequate provision for movement of motor required to adjust belt tension. Provide means for oiling, use of tachometers, and other maintenance and testing operations with guard in place. D. Direct Driven Equipment: Direct-drive motor driven equipment shall have coupling guards in accordance with OSHA Regulations. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 8 1 11 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion BEAR 2.12 INGS A. General: Under normal loading conditions per NEMA MG1-14.45, bearings shall be 100,000-hour rated unless otherwise specified. Bearings shall be AFBMA Standard sizes. B. Re-greasable: Bearings shall be re-greasable-type unless otherwise indicated as sealed-type non-re- greasable. C. Housing. Bearing housings shall have long, tight running fits or rotating shields to protect against foreign mater entering the bearings and leakage of grease out of the bearing cavity. Housings for re- greasable bearings shall have a capped grease inlet fitting, grease relief plug on the opposite side of the inlet, and a grease reservoir in the cast inner cap. D. Extended Lines: Provide extended lubrication lines and fittings to an accessible-location for all bearings concealed by equipment housing, belt guards, etc. E. Factory Lubrication: Bearings shall be provided with grease from the manufacturer. Grease shall be premium moisture resistant containing rust inhibitors and suitable for operation in temperatures from 50 to 250 degrees F. 2.13 HEAT TRACE CABLE f A. Components. Self-regulating heat trace cable system shall consist of two 16 AWG tinned-copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature all along its length, allowing the heater to be crossed over itself without overheating. The cable shall be used directly on steel or plastic pipe and shall be cut to length in the field. The heat cable shall be covered by a radiation cross-linked modified polyolefrn dielectric jacket. B. Electrical: The heat trace cable shall operate on line voltages as indicated without the use of transformers. Power connection, end seal, splice and tee kits components shall be supplied by the manufacturer and applied in the field. C. Output sizing: The heat trace cable shall be sized according to the following table: TABLE - HEAT TRACE CABLE Cable Output Rating, Watts/Lineal Foot at 50 deg. F. Ambient Pipe Insulation Thickness Pipe Size 1 inch 2 inch 2 inches or less 3 watts 3 watts 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch 5 watts 3 watts D. Control: The heat trace system shall be controlled by a bulb sensing thermostat set to energize the cable at 35 degrees F. and de-energize the cable at 40 degrees F. either directly or through an appropriate contactor. E. Manufacturer and Product: 1. Raychem, XL-Trace BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 9 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.14 FAN, RELIEF AND INTAKE CURB A. Construction: Prefabricated fan, relief and intake curbs, unless otherwise indicated, shall be , constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel with continuous welded seams, 3 inch cant, factory installed wood nailer and insulated with 1-1/2 inch thickness 3 pound density rigid fiberglass insulation. Curb height shall be a minimum 8 inches above the finished roof surface unless otherwise indicated or required. B. Insulated Roofs: Roof curbs on insulated roofs shall have a raised cant the same height as the insulation thickness. C. Manufacturer. _ 1. Thycurb, Thybar Corporation 2. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 3. Penn Ventilator 4. Greenheck 2.15 AUXILIARY DRIP PAN A. Construction: The drip pan shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel with 112/ inch double fold edge and shall extend a minimum of 3 inch outside the unit dimension with comers soldered to prevent leakage and shall have a 3/4 inch drain connection (where required) at the low point designed so it will not trap any liquid in the pan. B. Moisture Sensor Where a drain connection is not indicated provide a moisture sensor or float switch at the law point of the drip pan. Float switch shall be rated at 10 amp 115/230 VAC with normally closed (N.C.) contact. 1. Manufacturer: a. Beckett Pump Corporation PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Concrete Bases and Structural Steel: Concrete bases and structural steel to support equipment and piping installed under each specification section of this division and not specifically shown on the structural or architectural plans shall be furnished. 3.2 HOUSEKEEPING PADS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORT A. Housekeeping Pads: Provide reinforced concrete housekeeping pads where indicated and for all floor mounted equipment located in rooms where water piping exist Pads shall be 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated. Ground mounted equipment shall have an 8 inch high reinfonced concrete housekeeping pad unless otherwise indicated. The pad shall extend a minimum of 5 inches above finish grade. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERL 1-S AND METHODS 23 0529 - 10 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Equipment Bases: Equipment bases shall be 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated or required. Bases for air handling equipment shall be high enough to provide the required trap seal and insulation for the condensate drain. C. Isolated Concrete Bases: Unless otherwise indicated isolated concrete bases shall be a minimum of 6 inches and shall weigh at least 2-1/2 times the weight of the rotating assembly. D. Inertia Bases: Inertia bases shall be installed according to the requirements stated in Section 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION. _ 3.3 EQUIPMENT ACCESS A. Access Doors and Panels: - 1. Locations: Provide access units at the following locations: a. Where additionally specified in other sections of this Division 23 and where specifically indicated on the drawings. b. Where not specifically indicated on the drawings but where the work to be provided will require accessibility for purposes as described or as recommended by the manufacturer of the concealed item. ' C. At all locations where concealed equipment, fixtures, devices and similar items require accessibility for service, inspection, maintenance, repair, replacement and where such concealed item would not otherwise be accessible for such functions without the provision of an appropriately sized access unit. `2. Coordination of Determination of Locations: Coordinate the work as related to the determination of where access units are to be located. B. Rejection of Work: Access units which are not provided, furnished or installed in compliance with this Division shall be removed, replaced and/or relocated at the direction of the Architect. ' 3.4 AUXILIARY DRIP PAN A. Support: Each drip pan shall be supported from the structure above and not from the unit it serves or the ceiling below. B. Drain Connection: Provide 112 inch drain connection, where indicated, at the low point shall discharge at a visible location above the nearest sink or lavatory unless otherwise shown on the drawings; pan location and/or site shall not interfere with ability to maintain the unit or replace the air filters. C. Moisture Sensor. The moisture sensor or float switch shall shut the unit down on the detection of moisture in the Auxiliary Drip Pan. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 -11 1-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 3.5 PAINTING A. General: Paint all exposed piping, insulation, equipment, structural bases, racks, in equipment rooms and on roof, furnished under Division 23 of these specifications. All exposed metal surfaces shall be given one prime coat and two finish coats. All insulated surfaces shall be given one coat of glue sizing (omit this step if factory applied finish is suitable to receive prime coat), one prime coat and one finish coat. Factory painted or finished items do not require field painting but shall require "touch- up" with matching paint or finish where scratched. Follow manufacturers recommendations on ambient conditions for painting, coat thickness, and drying time between coats. B. Ancillary Items: Pipe hangers, saddles, supports, riser clamps and accessories shall be painted to match their piping. C. Inaccessible Items: Equipment not completely accessible for painting when set in place shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted before installation and suitably protected. D. Concealed Items: Concealed piping need not be painted. E. Metal Surfaces: Use a scraper or wire brush to remove rust and roughen metal surfaces prior to painting. After wire brushing, wash surfaces to remove particulates, apply primer coat after surface is dry but not more than 48 hours after wire brushing. F. Colors: Colors for piping systems and equipment which are required to be painted shall be as indicated in the following table: TABLE - PIPING PAINTING SCHEDULE Class Paint Color F - Fire Protection Equipment Red D - Dangerous Material Yellow (or Orange) S - Safe Material Green (or the achromatic colors White, Black, Gray or Aluminum) P - Protective Material Bright Blue V -Valuable Material Deep Purple 3.6 A. IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT General: Apply after completion of insulation, painting and cleaning work so that final identification is not disfigured. 1. Coordinate with composition and operating temperatures of surface for permanent adhesion of markers and labels to surface. 2. Locate marking and banding to facilitate ease of visual tracking. (For example, mark and band parallel runs of pipe and duct which are side-by-side at the same general place.) Labels on vertical piping and ductwork shall be 7 foot above the floor. 3. Pipes less than 3/4 inch diameter may be identified with tags similar to those specified for valves. 4. Adhere or affix all identification items permanently except where removal may be necessary for maintenance or service. Where labels or arrows are used, overlap the label ends 2 inches with matching color bands completely encircling the pipe. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 12 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 5. Apply labels on the bottom lower quarters of overhead pipe. Pipe within 24 inches of a wall f l does not require a label on the quarter facing the wall. B. Markers and Bands: Provide on piping as follows: 1. Pipe Concealed in Otherwise Inaccessible Locations (e.g., Chases, non-accessible ceilings): No identification required, except at access doors. 2. Pipe Concealed in Accessible Locations (e.g., Ceiling Plenums): Markers every 30 feet of pipe length. Bands every 15 feet of pipe length. 3. Pipe Exposed in Equipment Rooms: Markers and bands every 15 feet of pipe length fbf pipe ' through 12 inch O.D. and every 30 feet for pipe 14 inch O.D. and greater. 4. Exterior Pipe, Exposed: Markers and bands every 40 feet of pipe length. 5. Exterior Pipe, Underground: Place a color-coded 6 inch wide, 0.004 inch thick polyethylene printed identification tape directly above all underground piping systems. The tapes shall be located approximately 12 inches below finish grade. Each tape shall be continuously printed with the words "CAUTION" in large bold lettering, and with the type of service piping also ' indicated. C. Valve Tags: Valve tags shall be installed on the following items: 1. All control valves (except those valves associated with direct control of flow to air handling apparatus whereby the valve may be identified by reference to the item of equipment it serves). 2. All fire protection system valves located in mains and branches (except those valves in fire ' hose cabinets). 3. Valves installed under this division of the specifications except check valves, drain valves, gauge valves, and manual air vent valves. 4. Small piping (other than domestic water) where markers are impractical. ' 5. Small but critical equipment items on which it is impractical to install labels. D. Valve Tag List: Prior to substantial completion, provide a complete list of all valves having tags. Frame under glass and mount in the mechanical equipment room at a location acceptable to the ' Architect. Indicate the following: 1. Valve size. 2. Valve location. 3. Valve type. 4. Service application. 5. Valve manufacturer and model number. 6. Pressure class and allowable working pressure. 7. Safety warnings. 8. Sequencing information. 9. Seasonal operating position (normally open/normally closed). E. Labels: Provide labels of proper size on mechanical system equipment including but not limited to, ' pumps, chillers, tanks, major piping components such as air separators, air handling equipment, fans, control panels, terminal units, flow stations, reheat coils and similar items. Provide labels on access panels indicating the item accessible through the panel. Equipment labels shall be mechanically ' fastened with machine screws or rivets, adhesive securing is not acceptable. F. Identification: Coordinate colors and finishes with pipe identification markers. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 -13 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center . Renovations & Expansion 3.7 HANGERS AND INSERTS A. General: Refer also to other sections which may describe additional. requirements for hanging and supporting. B. Location: Provide and properly locate hangers to adequately support piping and equipment. Arrange hangers to permit expansion and contraction. Do not hang piping from fire or smoke walls. Provide pipe hangers at each valve, strainer, and other piping accessory, and at each change of direction. C. Size: The size of hanger for non-insulated pipes shall be suitable for pipe size to be supported. For insulated piping, the size of the hanger shall be suitable for the pipe size, plus the insulation and an insulation shield. Refer to Section 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION, for insulation shield requirements. D. Protection: Isolation of copper pipe from steel trapeze hangers shall consist of wrapping pipe and 1 inch each side of contact surface with not less than two layers of adhesive type plastic dielectric insulating tape. E. Spacing: Locate pipe supports as indicated in the following table unless noted otherwise in other sections of the specifications or on the drawings: TABLE - HORIZONTAL PIPE HANGER SCHEDUL9 Material Pipe Size Hanger Spacing Under 1 inch 6 foot centers Steel Pipe 1 to 2 inches 8 foot centers 2-1/2 to 4 inches 10 foot centers 5 inches and larger 12 foot centers Copper Tubing up to 1-1/4 6 foot centers 1-1/2 and above 10 foot centers Cast Iron Pipe All 5 foot centers 1. Vertical Pipe: Vertical piping shall be supported at the base of each vertical riser, and at intervals not exceeding those indicated in the following table: F' L I 1 1 1 l TABLE - VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORT SCHEDULE Material Pipe Size Support Spacing Steel Pipe All Every other story (30 foot centers max) Copper Tubing up to 1-1/4 4 foot centers 1-1/2 and above Every story BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 14 t i 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion Cast Iron Pipe All Every story (15 foot centers maximum) Hanger Rods: The size of the hanger rods shall be according to the following table. The rod sizes are based on the maximum hanger spacing indicated in the table above. Pipe Size Minimum Hanger Rod Size, Inches Inches Cast Iron Copper or Steel Up to 6 3/8 3/8 .8 1/2 1/2 10 1/2 5/8 12 1/2 3/4 14 3/4" 3/4 15 5/8 - 16 7/8' 7/8 18 7/$• 1 20 1• 1 24 1-1/4" 1-1/4 Indicates mechanical joint, ductile iron pipe. ...'' G. Pipe Guides: Provide pipe alignment guides to guide expanding pipe to move free)Y from anchor points in expansion joints, loops or bends. 1 3.8 PITCH POCKET ' A. General: Pitch pockets shall be installed according to the requirements of Division 7, THERMAL AN D MOISTURE PROTECTION. B. Pipe Seals: Pitch pockets or pipe seals for any item that penetrate an existing roof membrane shall be installed according the manufacturers instructions. The installation shall be acceptable to the Architect. ' 3.9 SLEEVES A. General: Lay out work and set sleeves in new or existing construction for a minimum of cutting, drilling and patching. Sleeves not used during construction shall be sealed using grout. Unused ' penetrations or sleeves through fire and smoke rated partitions shall be sealed to prevent passage of fire and smoke using an Underwriters Laboratories approved method rated at least equal to the partition being penetrated; method utilized must show proof of UL approval. ' B. Placement: Extend sleeves through walls, partitions and ceilings to finished surface. Extend sleeves 1/4 inch above finished concrete floors and 1 inch above slab in chases. Sleeves, installed above finished ceilings, for fire/smoke rated wall assemblies shall extend 1 inch beyond each face of wall. ' Sleeves shall be set before floor is poured, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch between covering and sleeve. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 -15 North Greenwood Recreation Center , Renovations & Expansion C. Size: Size sleeves to permit clearance for pipe movement and proper grading of pipes. Sleeves for ' insulated pipe shall be sized to clear insulation. D. Sealing of Sleeves: 1. Sleeves Below Grade: Caulk annular space between pipe and sleeve using oakum and poured lead both sides minimum one inch deep to make wall penetration water tight or use mechanical ' link-seal. 2. _ Sleeves Above Grade Through Non-rated Surface: Openings around pipes, duct, etc., passing through sleeves shall be draft free and vermin-proof. , E. Fire and Fire/Smoke Penetrations: Protect all penetrations of rated partitions with a listed assembly for each particular rating and building material partition. Comply with the manufacturers instructions for installation of the partition penetration protection assembly. ' F. Water Tight: Sleeves in walls and/or slabs subject to hydrostatic pressures shall be watertight. 3.10 ESCUTCHEONS A. General: Provide escutcheons (for 1/4 or 1 inch projecting sleeves as required) at each point where ' pipe passes through a finished surface. . 3.11 V-BELT DRIVE A. Sheaves: To provide the properly sized sheave, V-belt drive fans shall be initially provided with variable pitch sheaves. Upon completion of system balancing by the T&B Agency, the adjustable pitch sheaves shall be replaced with fixed sheaves and belts of the size and type specified by the T&B Agency. Tag the adjustable sheaves, turn over to the Owner, and receive written receipt from the Owner accepting these sheaves. 8. Vibration of Air Handling Equipment and Fan Units: Field vibration levels will not be acceptable for air handling equipment and fans driven by motors 5 hp or greater, if the maximum vibration velocity or displacement measurement exceeds the following values (when measurements are taken at the bearing supports using a vibration analyzer with the filter set at the operating fan speed): BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 -16 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion TABLE - MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE FAN VIBRATION Fan Speed (RPM) Maximum Vibration Level 800 or less 5 mils (0.127 mm) max. displacement 801 and greater 0.20 in/sec. (5 mm/s) max. velocity ' 3.12 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL d h i l i i A. ng an ca p p an General: Provide as necessary to accomplish excavation and backfilling for mec equipment. Perform in accordance with applicable State and Local codes and with other applicable ' sections or divisions. See identification tape requirement indicated above. - B. Excavation: Excavate to a minimum necessary depth. Provide an even surface to ensure a solid, continuous bearing surface. If cut is too deep, backfill with clean earth and hand tamp. Form ' depressions at joints to receive collars and couplings. C. Backfill: Backfill shall be with clean earth, able to pass through a No. 10 sieve, free from rocks and debris. Hand tamp backfill in 6 inch layers until 18 inches has been deposited over the buried pipe or conduit, then tamp with a mechanical vibrating tamper in maximum 8 inch layers to a 90 percent - compaction. TITION OR WALL PENETRATIONS 3.13 FIREISMOKE RATED FLOOR, PAR A. Fire and Fire/Smoke Penetrations: Protect all penetrations of rated partitions with a listed assembly for each particular rating and building material partition. Comply with the manufacturers instructions for installation of the partition penetration protection assembly. HEAT TRACE CABLE 3.14 A. General: Install the heat trace cable along the pipe only after piping has been successfully pressure tested. Secure the cable to piping with cable ties or fiberglass tape. B. Insulation: All piping, fittings, valves and equipment (such as pump volutes) which are protected by heating cables shall have cables covered by insulation. Sanitary traps and other nomlally uninsulated piping, shall be insulated with 1-1/2 inch thick fiberglass with vapor barrier, extend insulation 1 foot into heated space or 1 foot beyond the area where water normally stands in the pipe. Insulation shall ' be the outside diameter for the pipe; oversized insulation is not allowed. " C. piping on the outside of the thermal insulation. Labels Labels: Apply labels indicating "electric traced shall conform to the requirements specified elsewhere in this section. ' D. Testing: After installation and before and after installing the thermal insulation, test heat cable using a 1000 VDC megger. Minimum insulation resistance should be 20 to 1000 megohms, regardless of length. If the heat trace cable fails this test, replace the pipe insulation and those sections of heat ' cable which failed and retest until all sections pass the megger test. Submit the results of the final tests to the Architect, including the date, names of participants, ambient conditions, and megger readings. 1 WIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 -17 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3,15 EQUIPMENT CURB AND MOUNTING RAILS A. Structural Support: Each equipment curb or mounting rail shall be fully supported by the roof structure. Changes in roof mounted equipment may require a change in the structural support Any discrepancies shall be reported to the Architect prior to the purchase and installation of the equipment curb or mounting rails. B. Installation: Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for installation. The top of each curb shall be level, with the pitch built into the curb where roof slopes 1/4 of an inch per foot or more. The installation and flashing of the roof curbs shall comply with the requirements of Division 7, THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION. Each equipment curb or mounting support shall be provided with a watertight counter flashing. 316 FAN, RELIEF AND INTAKE CURB A. General: The top of each curb shall be level, with the pitch built into the curb where roof slopes 1 /4 of - an inch per foot or more. Exterior curb dimensions shall be coordinated with the counterflashing of the installed equipment B. Installation: The installation and flashing of the roof curbs shall comply with the requirements of Division 7, THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION. END OF SECTION 23 0529 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0529 - 18 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 0593 - PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION y. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section 23 0513, ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope: Verify the performance of the systems of Division 23 by testing and balancing procedures described in this section. B. General: The existence of a test and balance agency (herein referred to as the T&B Agency) shall not relieve responsibility for the complete operation of the mechanical systems as indicated. C. Definition of Terms: 1. "Contractor" shall refer to the General Contractor. 2. "Owner" shall refer to or their designated representative. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 0519, PIPING SPECIALTIES 3. 22 3300, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 4. 23 8126, SPLIT PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 5. 23 3416, FANS 6. 23 3713, AIR DISTRIBUTION 7. 23 7341, AIR FILTER 8. 23 3300, DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATE 2. Division 16, ELECTRICAL 1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall comply with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. 1.5 TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY PERFORMANCE VERIFICA7I0N 23 0593 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. General: Performance verification shall be performed by an independent T&B Agency. B. Certification: The T&B Agency shall be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). C. References: The T&B Agency shall have been in business continuously for the previous 3 years and shall specialize in and be limited to testing and balancing HVAC systems. The T&B Agency shall submit references of five previously successfully completed projects of similar size, type, scope, and complexity. D. Supervision: Field work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a full-time employee of the T&B Agency. The final test reports shall be certified and sealed by the supervisor and signed by the employees performing the work. e Approval: The T&B Agency shall not be affiliated with the construction contractors, equipment manufacturers, sales vendors, or design engineering firms. All test and balancing work shall be scheduled. by the Contractor in corporation with the T&B Agency and at the direction of the Owner. The T&B Agency shall report to the Architect in writing anytime the scheduled services cannot be preformed as schedule or as required. The Contractor shall be responsible for the operation of all equipment during the test and balance process. F. Reporting: The T&B Agency shall function as an authorized inspection agency responsible to the Owner, and shall list all items which are installed incorrectly, require correction or completion, or which have not been installed in accordance with the contract documents. Prior to beginning system balancing, submit to the Architect for the Owner's review, written procedures to be followed for the testing and balancing work. 1.6 AGENCY APPROVAL A. Name and Qualifications: Submit the name and qualifications of the proposed T&B Agency to the Architect for acceptance within thirty (30) days of Notice to Proceed. If the proposed agency is not submitted within the stated time the Architect shall select the T&B Agency and deduct the cost of their services from the Contract Amount. 1.7 INSTRUMENTATION A. General: All test and balance equipment and instruments shall be furnished by the T&B Agency and shall have been calibrated to the tolerances required in balancing standards within six (6) months of use on this work. A list of equipment and instruments shall be submitted to the Architect for the Owner's review prior to commencing test and balancing operations and shall include manufacturer, serial number and certification of last calibration date and method of calibration including test references. Instruments without calibration adjustment capability shall be accompanied with. manufacturer's certification of accuracy. Instruments shall have maximum field measuring accuracy, shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer, and shall have minimum scale and maximum subdivisions with ranges for the values being measured. 1.8 WORK INCLUDED A. General: The T&B Agency shall provide all labor, supervision, professional services, tools, test equipment and instruments (except as otherwise indicated) to perform work of this section; including but not limited to: PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 23 0593 - 2 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Review the automatic temperature control and air terminal unit specifications for their effects on the testing and balancing procedures for the air systems. 2. Where conditions may exist in the system design or construction which may adversely affect system performance, identify the conditions and submit recommended corrections in writing for consideration by the Architect. 3. During construction, review shop drawings relevant to performance verification to confirm that the required piping, ductwork and equipment, and their respective specialties and accessories ' such as gauges, valves, dampers, access doors, etc., are properly selected, sized and located to permit proper and complete testing and balancing. 4. Perform a minimum of 4 hours of site inspections at a maximum of 2 hours per visit during construction and prior to the scheduled start of the test and balance work to become familiar with the project, equipment locations, and to verify compliance with documents. After each inspection submit a written report to the Architect indicating the area covered and the results of the inspection. ?. 5. When included in the project check the operation of the fuel oil transfer pump, the hydraulic , liquid level gauge, and the setting of the fuel storage tank indicating and alarm switches in the remote dial level indicator. 6. Submit the Equipment Test and Systems Balance Report for review and acceptance. fi. Furnish specifications for properly-sized fixed sheaves and belts on fan systems after proper RPM has been established. 8. Test for sound and vibration levels. 9. Test and report pressure differentials between the sampling and return ports of all duct smoke detectors. 1 1.9 GUARANTY A. General: The T&B Agency shall include a warranty period of ninety (90) days after acceptance of test and balance work. During the warranty period, the Owner may request a re-check or re-setting of any system component requiring testing and balancing. The T&B Agency shall provide technicians, instruments, and tools to assist the Owner in conducting any test required. A guarantee, such as the AABC National Project Certification Performance Guarantee, shall also be provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 REPORT I i-f A. Records: Recorded test data shall be at the final balanced condition for each system, and shall be arranged by system using the appropriate designation as established on the Contract Documents. 6 copies of the typewritten, signed, bound and indexed final report shall be submitted to the Architect for the. Owner's review prior to request for substantial completion inspection. The substantial completion inspection shall not be scheduled until the final report has been received and is acceptable to the Owner. Report format shall be similar to forms approved for use by SMACNA or AABC. B. Measurements: Where actual measurements recorded for the final balance show deviations of more than 10 percent from the design, the T&B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations for corrective action to the Architect. C. Deficiency: Where recorded data can be reasonably interpreted to be inaccurate, inconsistent or erroneous, the Owner may request additional testing and balancing. The T&B Agency shall perform retesting and re-balancing at no additional cost. D. Vibration: Where, in the opinion of the T&B Agency, there is excessive vibration, movement or noise from any piece of equipment, ductwork, pipes, etc., the T&B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations for corrective action to the Architect. PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 23 0593 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion E. Records: Recorded test data shall be at the final balanced condition for each system, and shall be arranged by system using the appropriate designation as established on the Contract Documents. 6 copies of the typewritten, signed, bound and indexed final report shall be submitted to the Owner review prior to request for substantial completion inspection. The substantial completion inspection shall not be scheduled until the final report has been received and is acceptable to the Owner. Report format shall be similar to forms approved far use by SMACNA or AABC. F. Measurements: Where actual measurements recorded for the final balance show deviations of more than 10 percent from the design, the T&B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations for corrective action to the Owner. G. Deficiency: Where recorded data can be reasonably interpreted to be inaccurate, inconsistent or erroneous, the Owner may request additional testing and balancing. The T&B Agency shall perform retesting and re-balancing at no additional cost. H. Vibration: Where, in the opinion of the T&B Agency, there is excessive vibration, movement or noise from any piece of equipment, ductwork, pipes, etc., the T&B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations for corrective action to the Owner. 1. J. Controls: The T&B Agency shall verify that each controller and the devices it controls, such as control salves, motorized dampers, etc., operates in the exact sequence required. Test Data: Include the following data in the Systems Test and Balance Report for all items included in the project: Motors: a. Manufacturer b. Model and serial number c. Rated amperage and voltage d. Rated horsepower e. Rated RPM f. Measured amperage and voltage g. Calculated brake-horsepower h. Measured RPM L Sheave size, type and manufacturer j. Bearing model numbers 2. Fans: a. Manufacturer b. Model or Serial number, type of fan, number of blades, wheel diameter c. Rated CFM, measured CFM d. Rated RPM, measured RPM e. Design inlet and outlet total and external static pressures f. Actual inlet and outlet total and external static pressures g. Pulley sizes, types and manufacturers h. Belt size and quantity (V-belt drive only) i. Bearing model numbers j. Inlet vane position k. Shaft diameter 3. Air Systems (including inlets and outlets : PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 23 0593 - 4 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion a. Grille or diffuser reference number, manufacturer and type b. Grille or diffuser location c. Design and measured velocity d. Design and measured CFM e. Effective area factor and size, and diffuser flow coefficients f. Terminal Unit CFM g. Tabulation of design and measured cfm for each inlet or outlet h. A summarization by system to compare design data to actual 4. Air Handling Units and Fan Coil Units: d air flow rates D i d measure es gn an a. b. Design and measured airside static pressure drops across each coil and across the entire unit - C. Design and measured airside cooling coil entering and leaving dry and wet bulb temperatures d. Design and measured airside heating coil entering and leaving dry bulb temperatures K. Other Report Requirements: Where systems have equipment or components which are not covered by the above, the Final Test and Balance Report shall include the following design and measured data as applicable: 1. All duct inlet and outlet areas. 2. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes. 3. Outside, return, mixed and supply air conditions. 4. All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressure differentials at appropriate locations. 5. All speeds. 6. All voltage and ampere ranges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Load Conditions: All testing and balancing of systems shall be performed with maximum attainable load. Testing and balancing of all air handling systems shall be accomplished with ceiling tiles in place and enclosing partitions, windows and doors erected. B. Observation: Observe all equipment and exposed piping for noise, movement or vibrations under normal operating conditions and report unacceptable operation to the Architect and the Owner. C. Observation: Observe all equipment and exposed piping for noise, movement or vibrations under normal operating conditions and report unacceptable operation to the Owner. D. Measuring Stations: Where measuring stations are installed, each is to be read and recorded in hydronic systems, permanent devices such as flow tubes with manometers, annular ring systems, venturi tubes with portable meters, etc, must be used for final measurements after they are completed and calibrated. E. Balancing/Test Results: Where flow, pressure or balancing meters are provided by the manufacturer of a specific device, (i.e. flow control valves), the T&B Agency shall verify meter operation and calibrate the device with the manufacturer's meter prior to turnover to the Owner. F. Adjusting: Testing and balancing is an iterative process and the T&B Agency may have to perform preliminary adjustments, readjustments and final adjustments as necessary to properly tune the systems. This is a integral part of the balancing procedure and must be anticipated; all adjustments, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 23 0593 - 5 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion spot-checking required by the Owner and other re-verification shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Adjusting: Testing and balancing is an iterative process and the T&B Agency may have to perform preliminary adjustments, readjustments and final adjustments as necessary to properly tune the systems. This is a integral part of the balancing procedure and must be anticipated; all adjustments, spot-checking required by the Owner and other re-verification shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 AIR SYSTEMS A. General: The testing and balancing shall include, but is not limited to, the following requirements: 1. Adjust fan speeds to deliver the required cfm and static pressure, and record rpm and full load amperes. Replace drives as required; increasing static pressure by dampering at the fan is not permitted. 2. Traverse main supply ducts with pitot tube to verify design cfm. Artificially load air filters by partially blanking to produce the equipment or air pressure drops through dirty filters. Mark position of balancing devices. 3. Verify the quantity of outside air and return air when the system is operating in the maximum cooling and full heating modes. Check all controls which regulate flow or pressure for calibration, verify damper positioning and modulation, and flowrate with minimum and maximum outside air. 4. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10 percent of design requirements, and adjust to minimize drafts and noise in all areas. 5. Observe all equipment and exposed ductwork for noise, movement or vibration under normal operating conditions and report to the Architect. 6. Verify the operation of the following exhaust systems, adjusting the fan speed as required to deliver the specified cfm and static pressure, and record the RPM and full load amperes: B. Diagrams: On the single-line diagram, indicate the measured flow rates and pressure drops across each component, such as coils, filters, air flow monitoring stations, sound attenuators, louvers, fans, etc. in order of physical arrangement. C. Air Distribution: Adjust air distribution devices to distribute design air quantities. Should the temperature in any area vary more than 2 degrees from the zone thermostat setpoint, notify Architect and obtain approval to re-balance devices to air quantities other than those indicated so that air temperature in the entire zone will be as even as possible regardless of design air quantities. After obtaining approval, perform necessary re-balancing. 3.3 EXHAUST SYSTEM AIRFLOWS A. Air Flow: Verify the exhaust system provides design quantities of air flow rates while operating. 3.4 SYSTEM MEASUREMENT A. General: Measurements shall be taken to obtain accurate and consistent readings; i.e. sufficiently downstream from changes in direction, regions of turbulence, or flow convergence. B. Repeatability: Take sufficient readings which when averaged will result in a repeatability error not to exceed 5 percent. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until two consecutive identical values are obtained. Readings shall be taken with the eye at the level of the indicated value to PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 23 0593 - 6 1 1 1 I- .1 f r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion prevent parallax. Insert pulsation dampeners to eliminate error involved in estimating the median of fluctuating readings. C. Report Availability: One copy of the final Test and Balance Report shall be made available at the project site for the substantial completion survey. This final report shall be typewritten and submitted to the Architect prior to the substantial completion survey with sufficient time for review, comment, correction of report, additional testing as necessary, follow-up review, and acceptance signature by the Architect. The Test and Balance Report shall include differential pressure testing of each duct smoke detector, verifying that each reading falls within the manufacturers acceptable tolerance. END OF SECTION 23 0593 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION Z3 0593 - 7 1 f 1 1 1 r 1 1- I 1 11 t North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 0700 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS area part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: Provide thermal Insulation as indicated. Materials such as fasteners and retainers not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation shall be provided. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 0519, PIPING SPECIALTIES 3. 22 1000, PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 4. 23 2300, REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEM 5. 23 7341, AIR FILTERS 6. 23 3113, DUCTWORK B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 1.4 SUBMITTAL A: General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Provide data on all types of insulation, jacketing, sealer and adhesive required by this section of these specifications, with indication of each material and its intended application. 2. Performance Data: a. Provide thermal performance, density and vapor permeance for each type of insulation, finish, cover, facing or jacket specified in this section. b. Unless otherwise stated, insulation types and thicknesses specified are based on insulating materials having a W value (BTU per hour per square foot per degree temperature difference) per inch of thickness as indicated. THERMAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion c. Vapor permeance is based on vapor retardant materials having water vapor transmission rates in perms (grains of vapor per hour per square foot per inch of mercury vapor pressure differential). d. Alternate materials shall be approved on the basis of thicknesses providing equivalent heat transfer or vapor transmission rates. 3. Installation Instructions: a. Provide copy of manufacturer's printed installation instructions for all insulation materials including copies shipped with the material. 1 5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS . A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish " " in Code Compliance quality, workmanship and installation shall comply with the paragraph entitled Section 23 0500. B. Comply: Nth the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and other Codes and Standards as adopted by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction. C. NFPA: All materials and adhesives used shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, 2002 Revision, as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings throughout their operating temperature range. All insulation, jackets, facings and adhesives used to adhere the jacket or facing to the insulation, including fittings and butt strips, shall have a non-combustible fire and smoke hazard rating and label as tested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, 2000 Revision and UL-723 not exceeding flame spread value of 25 and smoke developed/fuel contributed value of 50. Accessories such as mastics, cements, tapes and cloth for fittings shall have the same ratings. D. ASHRAE: Insulation thermal conductance values and insulation thicknesses shall comply with the requirements of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) Standard 90.1-1989. E. Florida Energy Code: Insulation thermal conductance values and insulation thickness shall comply with the Florida Energy Efficiency Code for Building Construction, 2001 edition. F. Industry Standards: Where compliance with an industry, society or association standard is specified or indicated, certification of such compliance shall be included in the submittal. G. Packaging Information: All products or their shipping cartons shall bear the Underwriter's Label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above criteria. Every package or container of insulation, jacketing, facing, cement, adhesive, or coating delivered to the project site must have a manufacturer's stamp or label attached, giving the brand and a description of the material. All vapor retardants shall be labeled, indicating the thickness, product nomenclature and manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Materials: The insulation materials and installation procedures shall be as indicated in this section and must be approved by the insulation product manufacturer for each particular application. The actual products to be used must comply with the insulation material for the specific application as indicated in other sections of these specifications. THERMAL INSULATION 73 0700 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion B. Applicability: Products and manufacturers listed may not all be applicable. Use only those products and manufacturers which are indicated as being applicable to a specific insulation condition. Insulating materials shall be resilient and moisture-resistant so that the insulating properties will not be affected by rough handling, water damage and similar construction hazards. All adhesives, sealers and vapor retardant coatings shall be compatible with the materials to which they are applied, and shall not corrode, soften or attack such materials when wet or dry. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Manufacturers which are listed are those manufacturers who may make one or more of the insulation products required. Listing of a manufacturer does not mean the manufacturer is approved for all applicable insulation conditions. Manufacturers must comply with the requirements of each insulation condition to be acceptable for the application. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. 2.3 POLYMER CLOSED-CELL FOAM - A. General: Flexible foam-type expanded closed-cell preformed (tube) or sheet as applicable. Maximum K value of 0.255 at 75 degrees F., and zero water absorption and water-vapor transmission. Allowable temperature applications from -110 degrees F. to 210 degrees F. when installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Do not install in return air plenums. 1. Pipe Insulation: Slip-on or pre-slit, pre-glued. a. Manufacturer: (1) IMCOA (2) MOMACO 2.4 ELASTOMERIC CLOSED-CELL FOAM A. General: Flexible foam-type expanded closed-oell preformed (tube), roll or sheetas applicable. Nitrile, rubber based, closed cell structure. Maximum K value of 0.27 at 75 degrees F., and maximum water vapor transmission of 0.02 perm. Allowable temperature applications from -40 degrees F. to 220 degrees F. when installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Do not install in return air plenums. Pipe Insulation: Preformed elastomeric. a. Manufacturer: (1) Armstrong AP Armaflex m, (2) Rubatex B. Adhesive: For joints and seams in foam insulation. I a. Manufacturer and Product: Rubatex R-373 Insulation Adhesive THERMAL INSULATION Z3 0700 - 3 r " North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion Armstrong 520 Adhesive C. Finishing Coating: For weather protection of foam insulations. a. Manufacturer and Product: Rubatex 374 coating Armstrong WB Armaflex Finish 2.5' FIBERGLASS INSULATION - A. General: Inorganicfibrous glass. B. Board. Faced rigid or semi-rigid form. Stiffness of 800 El unless otherwise indicated. 1. Duct insulation external: Fiberglass semi-rigid board. Composed of resin bonded glass fibers faced with a foil scrim-kraft (FSK) reinforced laminate of aluminum foil and kraft bonded to provide a metallic surface finish vapor retardant; alternate vapor retardant facing (if specifically indicated) is an all service jacket (ASJ) of high intensity white bleached, chemically treated kraft paper reinforced with fiberglass yam mesh and laminated to aluminum foil with fire-retardant adhesive to impart a clean, white appearance. Conductivity (K) of not less than 0.23 at 75 degrees F. Provide in thickness of 1-1/2 inches unless otherwise indicated. Provide with minimum density of 3-pcf unless 6-pcf is specifically indicated. a. Manufacturer and Product: Certainteed Industrial Insulation Board - Type IB-300 (or B-600) Schuller 800 Series Spin-Glas - Type 814 (or 817) Owens-Corning 700 Series Industrial Insulation Board - Type 703 (or type 705) 2. Equipment insulation: Rigid, minimum 6-pcf density fiberglass with factory-applied laminated foil vapor retardant Kraft- reinforced with a glass fiber scrim. The board shall be minimum 1-1/2 inch thick with a K-value of 0.22 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature, maximum vapor transmission of 0.02 perm and be able to operate from -20 to 450 degrees F. If insulation having a higher K-value is used, the thickness shall be increased proportionally to achieve the specified K rating. Boards shall have a minimum dimension of 10 inch and a maximum dimension of 48 inch, a. Manufacturer and Product: Schuller Number 814 Spin-Glass Owens-Coming 705 C. Blanket: Flexible form; faced, unfaced or coated as indicated. 1 1 THERMAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 4 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Duct insulation, external: Composed of flexible blanket of glass fiber factory laminated to a reinforced foil kraft (FRK) vapor retardant with a minimum 2 inch taping and stapling flange on one edge. Suitable for operation at temperatures from 40 degrees F. to 250 degrees F. thermal conductivity of 0.31 at 75 degrees F. Minimum density of 0.75 pcf. Provide 2 inch thickness unless otherwise indicated in Section 23 3113. 2. Finish Fabric, General Purpose: Nylon membrane. For use generally with fiberglass duct insulations at joints or seams or as indicated. Apply using Foster GPM 35-00 or equivalent. a. Manufacturer: (1) Armstrong (2) CertainTeed (3) _ Childers Products Co. (4) Knauf (5) Schuller (6) Owens-Coming (7) Pittsburgh Coming D. Preformed: Jacketed or unjacketed as indicated, one-piece or half-sectional. 1. Pipe insulation, preformed jacketed fiberglass: Jacketed with factory-applied kraft reinforced foil all-service vapor retardant jacket suitable for use in systems with temperatures from -60 to 350 degrees R The jacketing shall have a white finish suitable for painting without sizing. Jacket closure system of factory-applied double pressure-sensitive adhesive on longitudinal joints; self- sealing butt strips at circumferential joints which provide closure and positive vapor retardant seal without hard rubbing or the application of heat. Thermal conductivity (K) of 0.24 at 100 degrees F. and vapor transmission of 0.02 perms. a. Manufacturer and Product: Owens-Coming Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II Schuller Micro-Lok with APT Plus jacket CertainTeed 500 Snap-On 2. Pipe insulation, preformed unjacketed fiberglass: Suitable for field jacketing. Thermal conductivity (K) of 0.23 at 100 degrees F. a. Manufacturer and Product: Owens-Coming Fiberglas No-Wrap Schuller Micro-Lok 2.6 INSULATION MASTICS AND ADHESIVE A. Mastic: Low-odor, fire and vapor retardant mastic with permeance not exceeding 0.08 perms in accordance with ASTM E96. For use where indicated or otherwise applicable. Coating shall be non- flammable in both dry and wet states. 1. Manufacturer and Product THERMAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion Foster GPM 35-00 Childers Chil-Perm CP-30 Low-Odor 2. Adhesive: For adhering fiberglass blanket and board insulations to metal substrate such as ductwork. -a. Manufacturer and Product: Insulcoustic I-C 201 Foster 85-20 2.7 INSULATION JACKETS AND COVERS A. Jacket, Pipe, Aluminum: Aluminum jacketing, 0.016 inches thick, Type 3003 alloy, H-14 temper, circumferentially corrugated, with a continuously laminated moisture retardant of one mil polyethylene film and a protective layer of 40 lb. virgin kraft paper. Longitudinal jacket seams shall be provided with modified continuous Pittsburgh Z-lock located on the bottom half of the pipe to shed water. 1. Manufacturer and Product Childers Products Co. Corrolon General Aluminum Supply Co. (Gasco) Insul-coustic Alcorjac B. Pipe Fitting Covers, Aluminum: Aluminum fitting covers, 0.020 inches minimum thickness, type 3003 alloy, H-14 temper prefabricated fitting covers with baked epoxy moisture retardant for pipe sizes through 24". Field fabricate fitting covers for pipe sizes larger than 24 inch using 0.020 inches thick aluminum roll jacketing with laminated polyethylene/kraft moisture retardant. 1. Manufacturer and Products: Childers Products I Ell-Jars, Gore Ell-Jacs, Tee-Jack, End-Caps, and Flange Jacs 2.8 RELATED PRODUCTS A. Wire: Dead soft, 16-gauge, stainless steel. B. Straps: Stainless steel T-304 (18-8) soft annealed with deburred edge with stainless steel wing seals. 1. Manufacturer and Product: Childers Products Febstraps THERMAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 6 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion G Screws: Aluminum pan head type "A" slotted #8 by 1/2 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Field Forming, Fitting and Finishing: Where preformed insulation products are available they shall be used. Provide field formed, fitted and finished insulation systems only if such application is more practical and acceptable to the Architect B. Terms: For an explanation of the terms used to describe the installation of the various types of insulation products refer to paragraph entitled "DEFINITIONS" in Section 23 0500. C. Pre-installation: 1. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all trades and verify that all work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Insulation on pipe fittings, valves and pipe joints shall not be installed before the piping is tested and approved. Do not apply insulation adhesives, materials or finishes until the building is adequately dosed in and the item to be insulated has been completely installed, tested and proved tight and suitable for insulation. 3. Remove all foreign material, clean and surfaces before applying insulation. D. Penetrations: All insulation shall be continuous through walls, floors and ceiling openings, except at fire dampers. Pipe insulation through fire rated partitions shall be cellular foamglass type only, with the ends sealed; fiberglass and foam insulation through rated partitions is prohibited. Where piping and ducts pass through partitions (walls or floors), the openings in the construction around the piping and ducts shall be packed with fire-stop material to provide an effective retardant against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as shown in the detail drawings or as shown in a current Underwriter's Laboratory "Building Materials Directory". Submit a copy of the intended system to the authority having jurisdiction for their review and acceptance. E. Vapor Retardant Continuity: A continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal shall be provided over insulation on cold surfaces where vapor retardant jackets, facings, or coatings are required. Anchors, hangers and other projections shall be insulated and vapor-sealed to prevent condensation. All openings and punctures shall be sealed with a vapor retardant compound. The edges of vapor retardant insulation at valve stems, instrument wells, gauge connections, unions and other raw edges shall be sealed to prevent moisture from penetrating the insulation by sealing on all open ends. F. Workmanship. Insulation materials shall be installed in a workmanlike manner with smooth and even surfaces, with jackets drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all longitudinal and end laps. Jacket and facing laps, joint strips and insulation ends, and straight runs of piping at not more than 21 foot intervals shall be secured and sealed with fire-retardant vapor retardant adhesive. Scrap pieces of insulation shall not be used where a full-length section will fit. All surface finishes shall be extended to protect all interfacing surfaces, ends and raw edges of insulation. Insulation on strainers shall be installed to facilitate cleaning of the strainer. Do not insulate unions, but terminate insulation at both ends neatly with a 45 degree bevel. G. Hot Equipment Hanger Insulation: On all hot piping and equipment, hangers and supports maybe attached to piping or equipment before insulation is applied, except where roller hangers are required. H. Cold Equipment Insulation: THERMAL. INSULATION 230700-7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Hangers and Supports: Insulation and jackets shall be neatly finished at pipe and dud hangers, clamps, anchors, and other supports which are in contact with the pipe or duct. Insulation shall consist of rigid pipe or duct insulation of equal thickness to the adjoining insulation, and shall be provided with a vapor retardant seal. The length of insulation shall be sufficient to prevent condensation but not be less than 9 inches. 2. Pipe Shields: For cold piping, hangers and supports shall be installed on the outside of the insulation and the insulation shall be protected by a galvanized metal shield. Shield shall extend halfway up both sides of the pipe insulation cover and shall provide support over the bottom 120 degree are of the insulation. If the hanger is too large to provide this support a metal liner shall be provided. The shield shall be fastened with pipe straps at each end. The insulation shields shall comply with the following table: TABLE - PIPE INSULATION SHIELDS Pipe Size, Inches Metal Gauge Length, Inches 1/2 to 1-1/2 18 12 2 to 4 16 12 6 16 18 8 to 12 14 24 14 & above 12 24 Note: This table is based on an insulation with a minimum of 4 psi compressive strength and a maximum of a 10 foot span between hangers. Any modifications must be submitted for acceptance. 3. Trapeze Hangers for Glass Fiber Insulation: Piping insulated with glass fiber insulation and supported on trapeze hangers shall have a 6 inch long paraffin coated hard maple curved block between the saddle and the piping. The block shall be encased in the insulation exterior jacket or vapor barrier. I. Valves, Cocks and Specialties: Insulate as for the related piping system in which they are located unless otherwise indicated. 1. Piping: Insulation thicknesses for piping are given for insulation installed at the locations indicated. Thicknesses are based on the various conditions of temperature, usage and environment which are typically encountered. K. Insulation Over Nameplates: Cleanouts, nameplates, ASME labels and manholes shall not be insulated, and the insulation on surrounding surfaces shall be neatly beveled off at such openings. L. Factory Pre4nsulated Components: Where equipment and other system components are specified in other sections to have factory installed insulation, no additional insulation is required unless additional non-factory4nstalled insulation is specifically described. M. Minimum Thicknesses: Insulation thicknesses which are indicated are minimum thicknesses. The same insulation material may be provided in greater thickness as an aid to installation and handling procedures or due to material availability and procurement considerations, as long as the additional thickness does not reduce critical clearances from other piping, walls, etc. and does not increase the thermal conductance. THERMAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion N. Bands and Fasteners: Metal bands used on pipe insulation shall be 3/4" wide made from brass or aluminum. Bands.shall be spaced to hold the ends and center of each section at a maximum spacing of 18 inches on centers. Bands shall not be visible on exposed work Mechanical fasteners shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Projecting points and sharp edges of fasteners shall not extend outside the insulation facing; clip off projecting points and provide plastic caps or cement cover finish. 3.2 GLASS FIBER PIPING INSULATION A. Interior, Concealed: Insulate with glass fiber insulation with all-purpose jacket Elbows, joints, valves, and all like items shall be insulated using closely mitered insulation and wrapped with glass fabric secured with 20-gauge noncorrosive wire finished with a smoothing coat of insulating cement and - - mastic or insulated and jacketed using factory-made pre-molded pipe fitting covers. Install all ftems in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Interior, Exposed: Provide as specified for "Interior, Concealed", except where field-fabricated fitting covers are used. Additionally finish with open weave 20x10 mesh glass fabric adhered between two flood coats of white lagging adhesive, overlapping the adjacent pipe insulation 2" and smoothed to a neat uniform finish without noticeable ridges or exposed fabric. Finish materials shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Interior, Exposed, Special Locations: Provide same as "Interior, Exposed" with the additional requirement that the final coat of mastic for the insulation finish shall be gloved and finished to accept painting. D. Exterior, Protected. Provide the same insulation system as "Interior, Concealed" except thicknesses as specified. Cover finish with aluminum jacketing and fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with screws and secure jacketing with straps containing a high-temperature sealant. E. Exterior, Unprotected: Provide the same as for "Exterior, Protected". F. Underground: Not acceptable. 3.3 DUCT SYSTEMS A. General: Air handling unit casings downstream of cooling coils shall be insulated. Insulate supply and return air ducts for heating and air conditioning systems from supply fan discharge to room outlets on all systems. Outside air ducts shall be externally insulated. B. Interior, Concealed, External Insulation: Insulate with fiberglass blanket wrap applied over clean, dry sheet metal ductwork installed to allow maximum fullness at comers (avoid excessive compression). Adhere duct insulation to metal and provide continuity of vapor retardant in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Finish joints and seams with finish fabric and mastic, applied by trowel, to provide a smooth, seamless and vapor-retardant finish. Where duct width exceeds 24 inches, the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of the duct using mechanical fasteners spaced 1 foot on center to prevent sagging of the insulation. Fasteners shall be solid base and attached to ductwork by spot welding or perforated base and secured to ductwork with adhesive. t Self-adhesive or double-sided tape is not allowed. G Interior, Exposed, Round: Insulate with same insulation system as for "Interior, Concealed". An acceptable alternate is preformed jacketed fiberglass pipe insulation of the same internal size as the round ductwork, with performance criteria and installation as specified herein. THERMAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Interior, Exposed, Rectangular. Insulate with semi-rigid fiberglass board. Adhere to ductwork with adhesive. Finish joints and seams with finish fabric and mastic, applied by trowel, to provide a smooth, seamless and vapor-retardant finish. E. Exterior, Protected: Similar to "Interior, Exposed, Round or Rectangular". F. Exterior, Unprotected: Similar to "Exterior, Protected", but in addition finish with two 1/4 inch thick coats of heavy-duty weatherproof mastic, to be applied by spray or trowel, with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats installed in accordance with the mastic manufacturers written recommendations. 3.4 A. B. DUCT SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT General: Insulate as follows unless detailed to a greater extent elsewhere. Fire damper and Fire/Smoke Damper External Surfaces: 1. Externally Insulated Duct Locations: Extend duct insulation and vapor barrier up face of fire damper to damper sleeve retaining angles. Seal insulation edges with 4 inch minimum width duct tape. 2.. Internally Insulated Duct Locations: Provide additional external insulation from a point on the duct 12 inches from the fire damper to the fire damper and on the face of the fire damper to the fire damper sleeve. Seal insulation edges with 4 inch minimum width duct tape. C. Duct Accessories: Where ducts will be insulated, make provisions for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices. A metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness and of suitable size to which insulation may be attached and finished shall be mounted on the duct. 3.5 COLD EQUIPMENT AND RELATED COMPONENTS A. Condensate Drain Piping From Cooling Equipment: 1. Interior; and Exterior, Protected: Insulate with preformed elastomeric pipe insulation secured with adhesive and finished with a white finish coating. 2. Exterior, Unprotected: None required. B. Flexible Pipe Connectors for Vibration Isolation: Insulate with elastomeric insulation. Secure the insulation with adhesive applied to a clean surface and finish with white finish coating. 3.6 HOT EQUIPMENT AND RELATED COMPONENTS A. General: Insulate exterior surfaces of hot equipment (converters, air separators, etc.) with calcium silicate insulation of equivalent thickness as required for piping of that same size and operating temperature, unless otherwise indicated. B. Clothes Dryer Vent Duct Insulate with 1-1/2 inch thick fiberglass piping insulation to prevent internal moisture condensation. The insulation shall extend from the back of the dryer up to the inlet of the induced draft fan on the roof. THERMAL INSULATION 23 0700 -10 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.7 REMOVABLE INSULATION A. Equipment Insulation Covering: The covering on parts of equipment which must be opened for inspection, cleaning and repair shall be constructed to be removed and replaced without damage. Covers shall be installed as complete units or in sections and shall have metal fastenings and all necessary support frames and members. Equipment to be covered shall be in insulated boxes of thicknesses specified; the boxes shall be held and drawn together by bolts. Insulation shall be protected by means of metal bands around each section formed to provide a vapor-sealed telescopic fit at the joints between the sections. S. Cut,' score or miter insulation to fit the contour of the equipment and secure with 1/2 inch x 0.015 inch galvanized steel bands or 14-gauge galvanized wire on 12 inch centers. Weld pins or stick clips with washers may be used for flat surfaces when spaced 18 inch apart. Joints shall be staggered where possible, and voids shall be filled with insulating cement. One of the following finishes shall be - provided: 1. Apply 1 inch galvanized wire mesh over the entire surface and finish with two coats of insulating cement troweled to a hard, smooth finish, with a minimum coat thickness of 1/8 inch per coat; 2. Apply a smoothing coat of insulating cement. When dry, apply a coating of lagging adhesive, and imbed a layer of open weave 20x10 glass cloth, overlapping all seams of 2 inch and finish - with a second coat of same adhesive, with a minimum coating thickness of 1/4 inch; 3. Insulation with factory-applied Universal Glass Cloth vapor retardant needs no additional finish. Joints in factory-applied facing shall be covered with 4 inch wide strips of the same material and cemented in place. 4. Provide 0 016 inch aluminum fabricated covers. 3.8 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS -- A. General: Provide insulation of any portion of a system or piece of equipment not previously discussed where ambient operating conditions will allow condensation to occur or whose surface temperature exceeds 115 degrees F. Insulation materials and method shall be as directed by the Architect. B. Final Inspection: At final inspection the finished surfaces of all exposed insulation shall be clean and without stains or blemishes. Repair and clean the insulation surfaces and, if necessary to obtain a new appearance, shall coat discolored surfaces with off-white latex water-base semi-gloss paint or lagging adhesive, without an additional change to the Owner. END OF SECTION 23 0700 s 1 1 f THERMAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 11 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 2114 - PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: Provide and install pipe and fittings as indicated and including all offsets, fittings, sleeves - - and similar items required but not necessarily indicated due to drawing scale for complete and operable systems. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 15 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 0523, VALVES 3. 23 0519, PIPING SPECIALTIES 4. 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION 5. 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION 6. 22 1000, PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 7. 22 3300, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Provide shop drawing and/or manufacturer's data sheet for the following items: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Complete design and construction data for dielectric unions and flanges. b. Complete design and construction data for no-hub couplings. C. Complete design and construction data for grooved mechanical fittings and couplings for steel piping systems. d. Manufacturers data on piping and fittings used, with an indication of each specific application. PIPE AND ffMNGS 232114-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 2. Performance Data: a. Submit a copy of the Welding Procedure Specification with the Procedure Qualification Record and certificates of the welders and welding operators required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 3. Installation Data: a. -Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for no-hub couplings. b. Manufacturers printed instructions for the installation of grooved mechanical fittings and couplings for steel pipe. c. UL approval number, installation materials, and procedures for pipe penetrations of fire- rated walls and floor. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the applicable standards and codes listed in paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. Quality and Weight: The quality and weight of materials shall comply with requirements and specifications of the appropriate standards of the American Society of Testing and Materials, American National Standards Institute, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, and the American Welding Society. C. Piping System: All pressurized piping systems shall conform to ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. D. Welder Certification: Welders shall be tested and certified within the last 2 years by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or recognized testing agency acceptable to the Architect. Competent certified welders shall perform all welding operations. Each welder shall possess a stamp to identify his work and shall stamp each weld. A copy of the certification shall be available at the job site for each welder. E. Welding Installation: Welding shall be in accordance with the welding procedures and requirements set forth in 'Welding of Pipe Joints" of the "Code for Pressure Piping" in the American Welding Society Welding handbook. Pipe welding shall comply with the provisions of the latest revision of the applicable code, whether ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, ANSI Code for Pressure Piping, or state or local requirements as may supersede these codes. Boiler Piping: Boiler external piping shall comply with the provisions of the latest revision of ANSI Code for Pressure Piping, Section I, B31.1 Power Piping; Section I of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Code; Section IV, Heating Boilers; and Section VIII, Pressure Vessels as applicable to this project. G. Brazing: Brazing of copper tubing shall be in accordance with the standards of the American Welding Society, the Copper Development Association Copper Tube Handbook instructions on brazing, and ASME Boiler code Section IX. H. Soldering: Soldering of copper tubing shall be done in accordance with the Copper Development Association, Copper Tube Handbook instructions on Joining and Forming Copper Tube, Soldered Joints. PIPE AND FITTINGS 23 2114 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion I. FMRC: No-hub couplings shall be in compliance with Factory Mutual Research Corporation Standard 1680-89. 1. PVC-DWV: The use of PVC-DWV piping shall be permitted only if written approval is obtained from the local authority having jurisdiction. The written approval shall be included with the submittal of the manufacturer's literature. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Application: This section covers the material and installation of various pipe and fittings which may be indicated in other sections of these specifications for use in a specific piping-system. Pipe and fittings specified in this section may not be substituted in piping systems for the specific pipe and fitting materials indicated in those individual sections of these specifications. B. Fittings: Fittings shall be at a minimum the same gauge as the connected piping, and shall be compatible with the piping material (i.e., galvanized fittings on galvanized pipe.) The use of field- fabricated fittings is prohibited. C. Lead Content: Pipe, fittings or any other piping device which includes any lead in the alloy shall not be used in any potable water system. D. Connection of Different Pipe Materials: Where different types of above ground pipe material or li ith ng w an different weights or schedules of pipe are joined, provide a stainless steel coup elastomeric gasket for the connection. The coupling shall incorporate a full-length shield of 304 stainless steel, with bolts manufactured of 304 stainless steel which tighten the shield around the gasket to provide a solid connection. 1. Manufacturer and Model: l h ith t i l t 0 ee s ear ess s w s a n a. Femco: Lowflex Series 2000 for 4 inch or smaller, Series 100 rings for up to 10 inches. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Copper Press Fittings: Vega or Ridge Tool Company 2.3 MATERIAL A. Press Fittings: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME I B16.18 or ASME B16.22. 0-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. 2.4 STEEL PIPING A. Pipe: Black steel pipe shall be seamless or electric resistance weld for pipe sizes 2 inch and above, conforming to ASTM A 54 Grade A below 2 inch, continuous weld conforming to ASTM A 53-89a Type B, ASTM A 106 Grade B. Galvanized pipe shall conform to ASTM A 53-89x. Unless otherwise noted, black and galvanized steel pipe smaller than 12 inches shall be schedule 40 and pipe 12 inches and larger shall be standard schedule. The ASTM number shall be marked on each length of pipe B. Fittings: PIPE AND FnMNGS 23 2114 - 3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Threaded Fittings: Malleable iron 150 lb. or 300 lb. class conforming to ASTM A-47 and ANSI B16.3, or cast iron 125 lb. or 250 lb. class conforming to ASTM A-234 and ANSI B16.4. Threads shall conform to ANSI 131.20.1, standard pattern. 2. Pipe Nipples: Provide nipples of same material and weight as pipe used, except provide schedule 80 nipples when length of unthreaded part of nipple is less than 1-1/2 inch. Threads shall comply with ANSI B1.20.1. Nipples shall not be threaded full-length (no close nipples). 3. Welded Fittings: Forged, seamless, black steel, long radius, conforming to ANSI B16.11 for socket-type welds and ANSI B16.9 for butt-type welds. Weldolet fittings may be used in lieu of forged tees where branch connections are not larger than three-quarters the size of main pipe, except on piping 2 inch and smaller, where forged fittings shall be used exclusively. Mitred elbows, tees and reducers are prohibited. 4. Unions: Unions shall be malleable iron or steel with ground joint on -piping 1-1/2 inch and smaller, flanges shall be used on sizes 2 inch and. larger. Unions shall conform to ANSI B16.39 with ANSI B1.20.1 threads and shall have hexagonal ball-and-socket joints with bronze metal- to-metal seating surfaces, female ends, and a seat ring pressed into the headpiece so it cannot be forced out. - 5. Couplings: All couplings shall be taper tapped. Couplings shipped with pipe are not acceptable. 6. Flanges: Forged carbon steel, welding neck type or lap joint conforming to ANSI B16.5_ Flanges shall have raised face and gaskets with bolt spacing for the required pressure classification. Gasket material shall be ring-type, 1/16 inch thick compressed heat-resistant fiber or neoprene; gasket shall not contain any asbestos. Flange bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 hex bolts, with ANSI B18.2 hex nuts. Black steel flanges shall have black steel bolts and nuts; galvanized steel flanges shall have galvanized steel bolts and nuts. 7. Grooved Mechanical Fittings and Couplings: Mechanical pipe couplings for steel pipe shall be self-centering and shall engage and lock in place the grooved or shouldered pipe and pipe fitting ends in a positive watertight couple. Mechanical couplings shall have a central cavity pressure- responsive housing fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron castings in accordance with ASTM A47, or ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536: where pipe is galvanized, couplings shall be galvanized. Mechanical fittings shall be malleable or ductile iron conforming as specified above, or shall be manufactured for fabricated steel complying to ASTM A53 orASTM A106. Couplings shall have two or more nuts with electroplated oval type ASTM A183 bolts, locking pins, toggles, or lugs as required to secure grooved pipe and fittings. Housing clamps shall hold in place a composition water-sealing gasket designed to allow internal water pressures serve to increase the watertightness of the seal. Gaskets shall be neoprene or BPDM and suitable for use to 230 degrees F. Rigid couplings shall be used for rigid joints, otherwise use flexible-type couplings. a. Manufacturer. (1) Vctaulic Company of America (2) Anvil Gruvlok (3) Central Sprink, Inc. 2.5 COPPER ALLOY PIPING A. Pressure Pipe: Copper piping shall be annealed seamless hard tempertype "K", "L" as indicated and shall comply with ASTM B-88. Copper is allowed for pipe sizes up to and including 4 inch diameter. The name or trademark of the manufacturer and the type of pipe shall be permanently marked on each section of pipe at intervals not exceeding 4-1/2 feet. B. Refrigerant Piping: Refrigerant piping shall be seamless annealed copper tubing complying with ASTM B280. PIPE AND FITTINGS 23 2114 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion C. Drainage Pipe: Non-pressure piping shall be copper type DWV, hard temper and conform to ASTM B306. D. Fittings: 1. General: Fittings used in copper alloy piping shall be streamlined pattern, wrought or cast brass conforming to ANSI B16.22 or wrought bronze conforming to ANSI B16.15. 2. Flare Fitting: Flare fittings shall be used on soft copper tubing, and shall comply with ANSI B16.26. 3. Union: Unions in 2 inch and smaller copper alloy piping shall be brass or bronze, ground joint for solder connection with hexagonal ball-and-socket joints, bronze metal-to-metal seating surfaces, female ends, and a brass seat ring pressed into the headpiece so it cannot be forced out. 4. Flanges: Flanges shall be used in copper alloy piping larger than 2 inch, and shall comply with ANSI B16.24. Flanges shall have raised face and gaskets drilled for the pressure-(class 150 or 300 lb.) as required. Gasket material shall be ring-type, 1116 inch thick compressed heat- resistant fiber or neoprene; gasket shall not contain any asbestos. Flange bolts shall be brass and conform to ASTM A307 hex bolts, with ANSI B18.2 brass hex nuts. 5. Dielectric Isolator: Dielectric couplings shall be rated for at least 150 percent of the maximum working pressure of the piping system and at least 50 degree F. higher than the maximum operating temperature of the piping system in which they are installed. Couplings shall be electroplated steel or brass with inert and non-corrosive thermoplastic lining, or bronze fittings. a. Union: Provide dielectric insulating unions in piping 2 inch and smaller with threaded or solder joint connections. b. Flanges: Flanged dielectric insulating sets shall be used for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. Flanged insulation sets shall have phenolic retainer, nitrile rubber seal element, polyethylene sleeves and double washer. C. Manufacturer: (1) Epco (2) Watts (3) Eclipse (4) Grinnell (5) Vctaulic E. Drainage Fitting: Fittings for copper DVW shall be cast bronze or wrought copper solder joint DWV drainage fittings complying with ANSI B.16.23 and 8.16.29. 2.6 CAST IRON PIPING 1 1 A. General: Cast iron pipe and fittings shall be sound, truly cylindrical, smooth, with interior and exterior surfaces concentric, free from cracks, sand holes and other defects, and in uniform thickness of grade specified.. Cast iron soil pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM A-74 and ANSI A21.1. Cast iron pressurized piping shall be class 150 or 250 as indicated or required and conform to ANSI A21.20. B. Fittings and Joints: 1. General: Provide fittings of same weight and manufacture as the pipe in which it is installed. 2. Flanges: Flanges in classes 25.125, and 250 shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.1. 3. Bell and Spigot: Joints shall be bell and spigot, with hub specifically cast to receive a push-0n compression type neoprene gasket; spigot end shall be without a bead. PIPE AND FITTINGS 23 2114 - S North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 4. No-Hub: Joints shall be "No-hub type coupling consisting of a 24 gauge 304 stainless steel compression clamp with gasket guides, 304 stainless steel screw clamp, and matching full neoprene gasket that interlocks with the housing. Fittings shag conform to CISPI Standard 310 unless noted otherwise. Maximum size allowable is 15 inches. a. Manufacturer. (1) Clamp-AII, Inc., Clamp-All 125 (2) Husky, Inc., Orangeshield HD 4000 (3) Mission Rubber Company, HeavyWeight 5. Threaded Drainage Pipe Fitting: Fittings shall be cast-iron, recessed, and in accordance with - ANSI 816.12. - 2.7 SPECIAL PIPE MATERIALS A A. PVC: Type PVC-DWV pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D2665-85, NSF Seal of Approval, , solvent-cement joint. B. PVC: Schedule 40, 80 or 120 PVC piping shall conform to ASTM D1785, socket fittings shall conform to ASTM D2466; threaded fittings shall conform to schedule 80, ASTM D2464. C. Plastic to Metal Transitions: Plastic and metal pipe shall be joined by flanges or unions specifically manufactured for the purpose. 2.8 JOINT FILLER MATERIALS A. Solder. Solder containing lead shall not be used in potable water piping; only 95% tin - 5% antimony (95/5) or silver brazing (no substitutions) are acceptable for solder joints in potable water piping. 95/5 and 50/50 tin-lead solder shall conform to ASTM B32. B. Brazing: Brazing (silver solder) material shall conform to AWS A5.8, classification BAg 1. C. Welding: All electrodes shall conform to AWS Standards E-6010, E-7010, E-7018 or E-8018-B2, C2, or C3 as applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Installation: Pipe and fittings shall be installed as specified in this section unless specific installation instructions are provided in the individual sections covering the piping system. Install each run with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes where indicated using reducing fittings. Align piping at connections within 1/16 inch misalignment tolerance. B. Routing and Placement Piping shall be run without traps or pockets and pitched a minimum 1 inch in 40 feet in the direction of flow, unless indicated or required to be pitched steeper. Grade piping so that air in the mains and risers will be carried up and discharged at venting points. Coordinate PIPE AND FITTINGS 23 2114 - 6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion installation with structural and architectural features, and with other piping, equipment and the work of other trades. All piping shall be installed as close to the structure overhead as possible. C. Prohibited Installation: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, elevator equipment rooms or other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Do not run piping over electrical panels. Where pipe joints or valves in water lines occur within two feet in horizontal directions from electrical panels or equipment, provide drip pans, if allowed by the local authority, sized to afford protection. Pans shall be 20-gauge galvanized steel with edges turned up 2-1/2 inches on all sides, reinforced with galvanized steel angles or by rolling edges over 1/4-inch diameter steel wire. Provide a drain with 314-inch flange arid pipe to nearest floor drain, and support the pan assemblies as required to prevent sagging or swaying. D. Interior Piping: Interior piping shall be run parallel to the walls and ceilings; avoid diagonal runs. Provide a minimum 6 inch clearance between walls and horizontal piping. - E. Exterior Piping: Exterior piping (above and below grade) shall essentially be routed and located as indicated on the drawings; however, actual placement shall be verified by confirming exact location of structures and other utilities in the field and by careful layout prior to execution of the work. F. Insulated Piping: Pipe requiring insulation shall be installed with sufficient clearances to permit proper application of insulation. G. PVC Pipe: PVC piping, fittings and other PVC materials shall not be installed in air conditioning plenums or equipment rooms used as air conditioning plenums. H. Cast Iron Pipe: Unless otherwise indicated, install 3 inch and larger horizontal storm and waste piping with 1/8 inch per foot slope; piping 2-1/2 inch and smaller shall be installed at a slope of 114 inch per ' foot. Run horizontal vent lines to a minimum grade back to stacks and vertical vent lines as direct as possible. I. Drains: Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4 inch ball valve, and short 3/4 inch threaded nipple with hose end and cap. J. Tool Marks: Copper, brass and chromed, polished or painted piping, fittings and connections to fixtures shall not show tool marks. Replace damaged piping and fittings. K. Potable Water Solder Joints: Samples of solder in potable water piping may be taken from completed joints and tested for lead. If tests indicate lead, the joints will be condemned and all fittings, valves - and pipe ends shall be replaced with new materials where such joints occur at no cost to the Owner. 3.2 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION A. Provision for Expansion: Piping shall be installed with provisions for expansion both horizontally and vertically in all long runs including runouts from risers. Expansion loops and/or expansion elbows I shall be provided for expansion and contraction where required and where shown on the drawings. B. Cold-Springing of Pipe: Cold-spring hot piping systems to reduce the amount of thermal expansion of the piping. C Pipe Anchors: Provide pipe anchors as indicated or as required to eliminate excessive piping movement in thermal and pressure piping systems. 33 INSTALLATION, COPPER TUBING PIPE AND FITRNGS 23 2114 - 7 1 - North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. Press Connections: Copper press fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer. 3.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING A. Cover and Excavation: Refer to paragraph. entitled "EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL' in Section 23 0529. Minimum cover for exterior underground piping is three feet over insulation or pipe unless otherwise indicated. See paragraph entitled "PROTECTION" in this section for uninsulated underground piping protection. B. Thrust Blocks: Provide properly sized and placed thrust blocks at all fittings in water and fire mains pressure pipe at every change indirection or where required. Thrust blocks shall bear on and against undisturbed or properly compacted soil. Provide temporary thrust blocking for testing at piping end points and other points as required. C. Water and Sewer Separation: Underground water piping and building sewer shall be separated with undisturbed or compacted earth at least 10 feet horizontally if installed at the same level or lower than the sewer. Where potable water piping is closer than 10 feet to a sewer line, place the bottom of the water pipe at least 18 inches above the top of the sewer or the sewer shall be encased in a concrete envelope as required. D. Identification Tape: Place a color-coded 6 inch wide, 0.004 inch thick polyethylene printed plastic identification tape directly above all underground piping systems at approximately 12 inch below finished grade. Tapes shall be continuously printed with "CAUTION" in large bold letters, and the type of service piping shall be indicated on the second printed line. E. Prefabricated Underground Piping: Adhere strictly to manufacturer's recommendations for installation including sealing of insulation jacketing, anchoring, thrust blocking and expansion. Manufacturer shall include all provisions for system to accommodate all expansion and contraction, including size and location of all thrust blocks, anchors expansion loops and expansion elbows and bends. Provide complete manufacturer's shop drawings and stress calculations. 3.s JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS A. General: Align all pipe before joints are made. Joints and connections shall be air, gas and watertight. B. Steel Pipe Joints: All pipe joints up to 1-1A inch shall be threaded; joints in pipe 1-1/2 inch and 2 inch may be socket-type welded or threaded; pipe 2-1/2 inch and larger shall be. butt fusion welded. C. Welded Joints: All welds shall be first quality metal, thoroughly fused to the base metal at all points, free of cracks, oxidation, blow holes and nonmetallic inclusions. The welder shall leave his indelible identifying mark on the piping adjacent to each weld. D. Testing of Welded Joints: The Architect may at his own discretion visually spot check welding work anytime. The Architect may also employ an outside testing agency to analyze, using whatever means available, any of the welded joints for imperfections. All welded joints found by inspection or testing to have imperfections shall be repaired as directed by the Architect. E. Threaded Joints: Use ANSI B2.1 threaded joints in piping with a minimum wall thickness of Standard Schedule pipe. Assemble the joint wrench-tight, applying force on the end of the fitting into which the PIPE AND FITTINGS 23 2114 - 8 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion pipe is being joined. If a seam fails during cutting or threading, that portion of pipe shall be discarded. Threaded joints shall have a minimum of 3 threads engaged and a maximum of 3 threads exposed. F. Solder Joints: Solder joints shall be used on pipe 2-1/2 inches and smaller. Unless otherwise noted the following solder material shall be used: 1. For operating pressures up to 125 psig, 95/5 solder. 2. For operating pressures above 125 psig, silver brazing alloy. G. Brazed Joints for Domestic Water and Refrigerant Piping: Piping" 3 inches and larger, and as otherwise indicated, shall be brazed. Remove stems, seats and packing of valves and accessible internal parts at piping specialties before brazing. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing with an inert gas (i.e., nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent the formation of scale. Heat joints to a uniform - temperature and form a liquid-tight circumferential joint seal. - 1. Brazed Joints for Medical Gas: See Specification Section 15485 for method. H. Dissimilar Metals: Dielectric unions or flanges shall be provided at all junctions of copper or brass pipe or fittings and ferrous material to prevent electrolysis and galvanic corrosion. Where copper or brass tubing or fittings are anchored, supported, or may come in contact with ferrous piping system ' materials, isolate the two materials with a non-conducting neoprene spacer. I. Flanges: Connect pipe`flanges to pipe ends in accordance with ASME B31.1.0 Code for Pressure Piping; clean flange faces and install gaskets. Using a torque wrench, tighten flange to the torque specified by the manufacturer of the flange to provide uniform compression of gaskets. J. Cut-Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Steel Pipe: Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the pipe coupling manufacturer's recommendations. Piping shall be cut-grooved, except where indicated. : Pipe wall thickness shall be a minimum of Standard Schedule. Before the assembly of couplings, lightly coat the pipe ends and the outside of gaskets with cup grease or graphite paste to facilitate installation. Tighten bolts or lugs to the proper torque as directed by the manufacturer to provide a watertight joint. K. No-Hub: Insert ends the full depth of the gasket. Slide the coupling housing over the gasket, and tighten the clamp to the torque recommended by the joint manufacturer. When special torque wrenches are provided for a joining system, joints shall only be made with these wrenches. Provide one spare special torque wrench to the Owner prior to final acceptance. No-hub fittings shall not be used on underground piping or for pipe sizes larger than 10 inches. L. Bell and Spigot Joints: Neoprene gasket shall be inserted in the hub and the spigot shall be pulled into the gasket with a tool made for this purpose. Lubricant as recommended by the gasket manufacturer r,. shall be used on the spigot to ensure proper seating. M. Plastic Pipe: Pipe and fittings to be joined by solvent cement shall be wiped clean with a cloth moistened with acetone or methylethyl ketone, in accordance with ASTM D2855. Apply joint compound to the male threads of screwed fittings. Provide horizontal and vertical support spacing in compliance with the manufacturer's requirements and local codes. 1 N. Rated Penetrations: Provide UL-approved method of sealing fire- and fire/smoke rated wall and floor penetrations. Submit method proposed prior to installation. o. Underground Piping: Underground piping connections for different types of piping material shall be limited to grooved coupling, dresser coupling, matching flanges, or mechanical joint with retaining nods. s` PIPE AND RMNG5 23 2114 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.6 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections between equipment and piping system in this section of the specifications with unions, flange joints or other fittings which permit equipment to be disconnected and removed for maintenance. Connections to equipment shall be made in accordance with details on the drawings and the equipment manufacturers installation instructions. Final connections to equipment shall be made with unions for pipe sizes 2 inch and under and with flanges for pipe sizes over 2 inch. B. Locations: Provide unions or flanges where indicated, and in the following locations even if not indicated: 1. In long runs of straight piping for water and other non-gaseous services at 60-foot intervals to permit convenient disassembly for alterations and repairs. 2. In bypasses around equipment. 3. In connections to pumps, steam traps and other in-line equipment requiring disconnection for repairs and replacement, located between the isolation valve and the equipment. 4. Within 3 inches of each threaded valve and each piece of equipment not having unions or flanges attached. C. Pump Connections: Where the suction or discharge of any pump unit is smaller than the pipe size noted on the drawings, reducing elbows or fittings shall be provided at the pump connections only. D. Coil Connections: Where coil piping connections are smaller than the distribution piping size shown on the drawings, the reduction in size shall be provided as close to the coil as possible. All valves, strainers, unions, flanges, balancing valves, etc. shall be full distribution pipe size except for control valves. 3.7 PIPE SIZE REDUCTIONS AND ENLARGEMENTS A. Prohibited Fittings: Screwed bushings are prohibited, except where available space prevents use of ' reducing couplings. B. No-Hub Clamps: No-hub clamps with bushings shall not be used for pipe size reduction. Cast iron fittings are required. C. Reducing Couplings: Eccentric reducing couplings shall be installed throughout steam and water piping to prevent air or water pockets occurring due to a change in pipe size. Eccentric couplings on steam shall bring the pipes flush on the bottom; eccentric couplings on water lines shall bring the pipes flush on top except as otherwise specified or indicated. Concentric reducing couplings in horizontal water circulating piping may be utilized if a manual air vent on the larger pipe adjacent to the reducer is installed. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Underground Coating: Paint all uninsulated piping underground except cast or ductile iron or PVC with two coats of asphaltic paint Manual wiping is not acceptable. B. Protective Wrap: Wrap pipe that touches metal or is exposed to masonry with a layer of 6 mil polyethylene film or 15 lb. felt. C. Pipe Embedded in Concrete: Spirally wrap all pipe lines embedded in concrete with two layers of 30 lb. felt PIPE AND FrMNGS 232114-10 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Thread Protection: Coat all exposed threads on galvanized steel pipe after assembly with two coats of zinc chromate. Remove pipe thread lubricants prior to applying paint. r 3.9 FLUSHING AND CLEANING A. Preparation ffor Testing: Before final testing, flush piping systems with clean water to remove debris. Disconnect all coils and heat exchangers from the system before flushing. Flush all coils and heat exchangers separately to assure that debris does not become lodged in them. Provide temporary valves and drains as required to accomplish flushing. B. Final Flushing: After flushing, thoroughly clean each piping system with appropriate cleanser to remove oil, grease, lacquer, etc. Thoroughly flush-each liquid system with clean water after cleaning. C. Chemical cleaning: After the piping is installed, add an aqueous solution of trisodium phosphate in a proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of waiter in the system. After filling with this solution, the system shall be allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely. All strainers shall be removed, cleaned and replaced, and the system shall be refilled with fresh water. The Architect shall be given notice of this cleaning operation. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the - cleaning operation has not been properly performed, the above procedure shall be repeated. After cleaning system, it shall be tested by litmus paper and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (pH a 7.5). If the system is still acidic, the trisodium phosphate cleaning shall be repeated. D. Sterilization of Potable Water Systems: After the final testing for leaks, all new potable water lines shall be thoroughly flushed to remove foreign material. Before placing the systems in service, sterilize the new water lines in accordance with the following procedure: 1. Through a 3/4 inch hose connection, pump sufficient sodium hypochlonte to produce a free available chlorine residual of not less than 50 parts per million (PPM). 2. Proceed downstream from the point of chlorine application, opening all faucets and taps until chlorine is detected. Close faucets and taps when chlorine is evident. 3. When chlorinated water has been brought to every faucet and tap with a minimum concentration of 50 PPM chlorine, retain this water in the system for at least 24 hours. At the end of the retention period, no less than 50 PPM of chlorine shall be present at the extreme end of the system. 4. Open all faucets and taps and flush all new lines until the chlorine residual in the water is less than 1.0 PPM. Obtain representative water samples from the system for analysis by the local health department or a bacteriological laboratory recognized and acceptable to the Architect. 5. If all samples tested for coliform organisms are negative, a letter and laboratory reports shall be submitted by the organization certifying successful completion of the sterilization. Submit all test reports to the Architect. If any samples tested indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the entire sterilization procedure shall be repeated until every coliform test is proved negative. 3.10 PRESSURE TESTING A. Pressure Test: Prior to insulating and concealing the piping system, apply a water pressure test to all 1 parts of each system before equipment is connected. Use a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psig or 150 percent of system operating pressure whichever is greater. Test system for a period not less than four hours. There shall be no leaks at any point in the system at this pressure. B. Concealed Work: Leave concealed work uncovered until required tests have been completed, but if necessary, make tests on portions of the work and those portions of the work may be concealed after being inspected and found free of leaks. Make repairs to defects that are discovered as a result of PIPE AND FITTINGS 23 2114-11 11 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion inspections or tests with new materials; caulking of screwed joints, cracks or holes will not be accepted. Repeat tests after defects have been eliminated. C. Field Testing: Complete all field testing prior to insulating, wrapping or backfilling. END OF SECTION 23 2114 PIPE AND FITTINGS 232114-12 1 t f 1 L? l 1 1 t North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 2300 - REGRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General. Provide refrigerant piping systems, complete in all respects, between the system components and connected equipment. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. 23 0523, VALVES 4. 23 0519, PIPING SPECIALTIES 5. 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION 6. 23 8126, SPLIT PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 7. 23 0593, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Dimensional outline drawing showing the location of all equipment piping and electrical connections. b. Complete list of piping materials to be used in this section including valves, specialties, pipe material, pipe insulation, pipe sizes and method of connection for each refrigeration piping system. 2. Installation Instructions: a. Manufacturers printed installation instructions for refrigeration piping equipment including copies shipped with the equipment. b. Layout of refrigerant piping with reference elevations, pipe sizes, refrigerant velocity and pressure drops between various equipment connections. REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEM 23 2300-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. ANSI: All materials and installation shall conform to ANSI 831.5, Code for Refrigerant piping, ANSI/ASH RAE Standard 15-94, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration", ASME/ANSI B31.5-1987 (Refrigeration Piping), and ANSI/SAE J513-77, Refrigerant Tube Fittings. C. ASME: Provide safety relief valves in conformance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII Division I. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - L1 GENERAL A. Application: The refrigeration piping system shall be of the material indicated. See Section 23 2114, I PIPE AND FITTINGS for material specifications. B. Pipe: Refrigerant system piping shall be refrigerant grade, dehydrated and sealed, seamless, uniformly dead soft anneal to 1-3/8 inch O.D. or hard temper annealed, type K copper tubing conforming to ASTM B280. C. Fittings: Refrigerant grade, wrought copper, long radius, brazed joint type. D. Brazing: Silver brazing alloy and non-corrosive flux, designed for silver brazing. 2.2 CHARGING VALVES I A. Quick Couplers: Schrader type designed for use with quick coupler hose fittings and provided with individual cap. 2.3 SPECIALTIES I A. Removable Core Filter-Drier. Provide a removable core filter-drier in liquid line with a full size valved bypass. Provide shut-off valves to isolate the filter drier. 1 13. Sight Glass: Provide a moisture indicating sight glass in the liquid line downstream from the filter-drier. Install the sight glass in vertical line if possible and a sufficient distance downstream from any valve to eliminate visual disturbance in the glass. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Pipe Size: Refrigerant pipe sizes indicated are nominal. Provide sizes not less than sizes indicated and in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide change in sizes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and Architect's acceptance. Piping shall maintain a minimum velocity of 500 fpm in horizontal lines and 1000 fpm in vertical risers for proper oil return. Provide double suction risers with oil trap or accumulator and hot gas risers as may be necessary. REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEM 23 23OD-2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Specialties: Refrigerant valves, dryers, expansion valves, and similar items shall be provided with each system. Refrigerant charging valves not furnished by the manufacturer shall be field installed to enable charging and checking the system. 3.2 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS A. General: All joints and connections shall be permanently refrigerant tight. Arrange piping generally as,, shown allowing for service access. Refrigerant lines shall be run as direct as possible with a minimum number of joints. Provide sleeves through floors, walls or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation. Sleeves shall be sealed airtight after installation of piping and insulation. - B. Brazed Joints: Refer to Section 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS. All joints shall be brazed unien otherwise indicated. C. Scale Prevention: Keep pipe system full of inert gas to prevent scale formation while brazing. D. Hangers and supports: Refer to paragraph entitled "HANGERS AND SUPPORTS" in Section 23 0529. Isolate copper tubing from contact with dissimilar metals. 3.3 EVACUATION AND CHARGING A. General: Non-factory charged equipment and piping systems shall be evacuated and charged as follows: Charge the system with dry nitrogen to a minimum of 1-1/2 times the working pressure, but not less than 30 psig and leak test all joints including factory piping within the units. Repair all leaks by disassembling and remaking the joint. After all leaks are corrected, evacuate the system to an absolute pressure of 0.2 inches of mercury. System shall hold this vacuum for 4 hours with no noticeable rise in pressure. After the vacuum test, break vacuum twice, flushing with dry nitrogen each time and re-evacuate for a minimum of 2 hours each time. Charge the system in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation and accepted refrigeration practice. 3.4 OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Charging Connection: Provide a refrigerant charging connection in the liquid line upstream from the filter-drier. B. Installation: Keep piping free from traps unless otherwise indicated. Install vertical pipe plumb. Pitch horizontal piping only where slope is desirable to prevent liquid refrigerant or oil from traveling toward the compressor inlet. C. Valve Locations: Provide shut-off valves at inlet and outlet to all condensers, receivers and evaporators to permit isolation for service. Use angle valves to minimize pressure drop. Use globe valves only when angle valves are impractical. Valves in copper tubing 7/8 inch or smaller shall be mounted independent of tubing supports or fastenings. D. Solenoid Valves: Provide solenoid valves in upright position in horizontal lines, unless their design allows installation in vertical pipe. E. Piping Loop: Where compressor does not have pump down control and the evaporator coil does not have bottom suction header connections and is located above the compressor, then loop the suction line to top level of coil to prevent liquid slugging. REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEM 23 2300-3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion F. Expansion Valve Operation: To prevent erratic operation of thermal expansion valve, provide a suction line trap next to evaporator coil suction outlet with a pilot thermostatic expansion valve, a pilot operated main expansion valve, and expansion valve bulb located between coil and trap. Provide only in suction lines which are level leaving coil outlet or which rise on leaving coil outlet. Trap is not required when evaporator coil outlet suction line drops to compressor or suction header immediately after expansion valve bulb. G. Insulation: Insulate refrigerant suction line with 3/4 inch elastomeric preformed pipe insulation, unless otherwise noted, in accordance with Section 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION. H. Piping: Install interconnecting piping between equipment in parallel with equal pressure drops to minimize pressure differentials or imbalance. END OF SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEM 23 2300-0 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 3113 - DUCTWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: Provide complete duct systems as indicated. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 15 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION 3. 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION 4. 23 7313, AIR HANDLING UNIT 5. 23 3416, FANS 6. 23 3713, AIR DISTRIBUTION 7. 23 7341, AIR FILTERS 8. 23 3300, DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 9. 23 0593, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Complete set of published data on factory prefabricated duct construction material including sheet metal gauges, with indication of each material, method of construction, support method, and its intended application and design pressure limitation. b. Material to be used for internal acoustical duct liner including surface film, mastic and installation. C. Complete set of published data on duct sealant, mastic, and gasket material to be used, including its intended application. 2. Performance Data: a. Operating pressure for each duct system. DUC rWORK 233113-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion b. Velocity limitations for internal acoustical liner. 3. Installation Instructions: a. Manufacturers printed instructions for the installation of prefabricated ductwork including copies shipped with the material. b. Manufacturers printed instructions for the installation of the intemal acoustical- liner. B. Shop Drawings: I. Refer to the paragraph entitled "SHOP DRAWINGS FOR DUCT SYSTEMS" in Section 23 0500. Provide detailed shop drawings for the following systems: a. All duct systems including kitchen range hood exhaust. 1.5 A. TERMINOLOGY Dimensions: All ductwork dimensions are nominal free clearance internal dimensions which do not include insulation thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Finish: Where ductwork is exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, stains and discolorations, and other defects including those which would impair painting. Sheet metal in exposed locations shall be mill-phosphatized unless otherwise indicated. 1.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. SMACNA: Use material, weight, thickness, gauge, reinforcing, seams and joints, suspension, workmanship and construction and installation methods as outlined in the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible Second Edition with Addendum, 1997. Manufactured round or oval ductwork shall comply with the manufacturer's published recommendations and installation instructions. Where dud gauge and reinforcement is specified for rectangular ducts, the following nominal metal thicknesses shall be used: TABLE - METAL THICKN ESS - D ECIMAL INCHE S Metal Gauge 26 124 22 1 20 11 16 14 112 Galvanized .0217 .0276 .0336 .0396 .0516 .0635 .0785 .1084 Aluminum .0320 .0400 .0500 .0630 .0800 .0900 .1000 .1250 Stainless .0178 .0235 .0293 .0355 .0480 .0595 .0751 .1054 B. Comply: With the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and other Codes and Standards as adopted by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction. C. HVAC Duct Leakage Standard: Duct leakage test methods, apparatus, and reporting shall comply with the requirements of the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, First Edition, (1985), and as otherwise indicated. F V 11 1 L DUCrMRK 23 3113 - 2 1 i' 1 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion D. NFPA: The duct system, fittings, sealants and accessories shall comply to NFPA 90A requiring a flame spread rating of not over 25 and a smoke developed/fuel contributed rating no higher than 50. E. Kitchen Hood Ducts: Ductwork shall also comply with the requirements of NFPA-96, 2001 Revision. F. Underwriters' Laboratories Rating: All flexible fiberglass duct shall be listed Class 1 by the UL-181 standards rating. G. AWS: All welded ductwork shall be installed in conformance to American Welding Society AWS D9- 84. H. ASTM: Unless otherwise specified, American Society for Testing and Materials specifications applicable are: Material Type ASTM Number Galvanized Steel A525 Stainless Steel 302,304 A480 Cold Rolled Steel - A366 Aluminum 3003 H-14 8209 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturer: A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "Manufacturer' in Section 23 0500. 2.2 GENERAL A. Special Gauges and Construction: 1. Gauges: Gauges indicated in this section are for galvanized steel. Where gauges are indicated for a material other than galvanized steel, provide the indicated gauge. 2. Flat Oval Duct: Shall be used only on positive pressure systems. 2.3 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. Material: Prime quality 48 inch wide resquare tight coat cold-rolled hot-dipped galvanized steel capable of double seaming without fracture. Conform to the requirements of ASTM A-525 and ASTM- G90 for a minimum galvanizing coat of 1.25 ounces per square foot total for both sides. B. Square and Rectangular Duct Connections: Manufactured air duct connections with gasket tape, integral mastic sealer and bolted connections maybe used for transverse joints. 1. Manufacturer. 1- DUCINVORK 1 a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Engel Industries C. Nexus 23 3113 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion d. Ward e. Lockformer C. Round and Oval Ducts: Manufactured round and oval ducts may be used provided they comply with the manufacture's published standards. 1. Manufacturer a. United-McGill b. Semco C. Lind-dab d. Monroe Metal e. Autoduct _ f. Don Park, Inc. 2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Insulated flexible ducts, Fiberglass: Flexible ducts shall be factory fabricated and pre-insulated with a minimum of one inch thick one pound density fiberglass. The minimum R-value of the insulation shall be 4.2. Ducts installed in un-insulated, un-conditioned spaces shall have a minimum R-value of 8.0. The fiberglass shall be protected by a non-combustible, minimum 2.5 mil thick mylar, vinyl, polyethylene, or polyester vapor barrier. The inner wall shall be of fiberglass reinforced or trilaminate material laminated to a corrosion resistant steel wire helix to provide a durable, airtight layer between the fiberglass insulation and the air stream. The flexible duct shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of UL 181 and UL listed as a Class 1 flexible air duct connector. The operating range shall be up 200 degrees F. and a working pressure of 6 inches positive and 4 inches negative. 1. Manufacturer a. Thermaflex b. Owens-Coming C. CertainTeed d. Flexmaster e. ATCO f. Hart & Cooley B. Un-insulated flexible ducts, galvanized steel: Flexible ductwork shall be manufactured of all-metal one-ply hot-dipped galvanized steel, closely corrugated for strength and flexibility, with seams interlocked, folded flat, and knurled to insure tightness. 1. Manufacturer and Type: Clevaform Type GS 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK 23 3113 - 4 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. Support materials: Angles and other structural shapes used in connection with galvanized steel sheets shall be zinc gated steel. Hanger rods shall be minimum 3/8 inch diameter, hot-rolled mild steel. Rivets, screws, and other accessories shall be made of the same materials as the duct or casing. Minimum screw size shall be No. 8 and minimum rivet diameter shall be 5/32 inch. B. Sealant/Mastic: Low-odor, oil-resistant, non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene-based cement, applicable for fabrication or installation, shall be used as compounded specifically for sealing fitting components or longitudinal seams in ductwork. Oil- or asphalt-based caulking compounds are not acceptable. 1. . Manufacturer a. Childers b. B. Fuller/Foster C. United McGill d. 3M C. Gaskets: Gasket material shall be soft elastomer butyl or neoprene rubber formed for the specific application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 GENERAL. 1 1 1 1 1 1 i A. Criteria: All duct systems shall be furnished and installed free of noise, chatter, vibration, breathing and pulsation under all conditions of operation. Remove, replace or reinforce to correct adverse conditions. Fiberglass duct is not allowed on the project unless specifically indicated as acceptable. B. Field Conditions: If field conditions are determined to exist which would limit the guarantee of air delivery or system performance, submit notice in writing to the Architect. Prior to ductwork fabrication, verify dimensions at the site, making field measurements and drawings necessary for fabrication and erection. Take precautions to avoid space interferences with beams, columns, joists, pipes, lights, conduit, other ducts, equipment, etc. Make necessary revisions to routing where any spatial or coordination conflicts appear, at no additional cost to the Owner or change in the contract price. C. Preparation for Installation: Ductwork shall be shop-fabricated in lengths sufficient to minimize the number of joints, and shall be preassembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field-assembly of the system. Space duct joints to avoid cutting when installing branch takeoffs, outlet collars, etc. Disassemble ductwork only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling; match- mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation. Install concrete inserts for support of the. ductwork in coordination with the fomnwork to avoid delays. D. Installation: Property support and align ductwork accurately at connections within 1/8 inch misalignment tolerance. Ducts shall be free of sags and bulges. Hang ductwork below concrete floors or roof deck with hangers set prior to pouring concrete, or from self drilling screw anchors. Gun powder set anchors are not permitted. Locate duct runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, avoiding diagonal runs wherever possible. Parallel runs of horizontal ducts shall be grouped together on trapeze or strap hangers. Hold ducts as close to the structure above as possible. Maintain a minimum 6 inch clearance between walls and duct or duct exterior insulation for inspection. E. Duct Cleaning: All recirculating air systems shall be installed to comply with Duct Cleanliness Level C of the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines 2000. Continuously cap open ends of ductwork to prevent entry of dust, debris and foreign material throughout the installation. Where the DUCTWORK 23 3113 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion ' interior of ductwork has been exposed to dust or debris clean the interior of the entire ductwork system from the point of debris entry to the duct termination. F. Duct Penetrations: Where it is necessary that ducts be divided due to pipes or other obstructions which must pass through these ducts, provide air-stream deflectors in the duct and increase the duct size to maintain equivalent area around the deflectors. Such changes shall be in accordance with standard SMACNA details and shall be shown on As-Built Drawings. G. Interior Duct Painting: Interior of ductwork visible through registers, grilles, or diffusers shall be painted flat black. H. Prohibited Duct Locations: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults, or into electrical rooms or elevator equipment spaces unless the ductwork is dedicated to serving that space. Do not install ductwork over elevator equipment, electrical distribution panels or motor control stations. ' 1. Balancing Devices: Due to clarity of the drawings, not all duct balancing dampers may be indicated. However, provide each duct branch and each duct takeoff with a balancing damper to assure correct balance and quiet distribution of indicated air quantities. J. Equipment Connections: Provide and install all duct connections to air handling units and fans and provide flexible connections, elbows and bends which minimize noise and pressure drop. Provide ' and install all necessary blank-off sailing plates or transitions required to facilitate installation. Provide flexible connections between ductwork and all rotating or vibrating equipment K. Coordination: Coordinate dimensions at interfaces of dissimilar type of ductwork and at interfaces of ' ductwork with equipment so that proper overlaps, interfaces, etc., of insulation and continuity of vapor barriers are maintained. Where ducts of two dissimilar metals meet, the joints shall be installed such that the metals do not contact each other. L. Terminal Unit Connection: Connect low pressure ductwork to terminal units (fan terminal units, variable volume boxes, etc.) with flexible duct unless otherwise indicated. Comply with the requirements of paragraph entitled "FLEXIBLE DUCT EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS" in Section 23 3300. M. Exterior Insulated Duct: Provide a seamless insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices with a metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness and suitably sized to.which insulation may be finished. 3.2 SHEET METAL DUCTS A. Construction: Provide comer closures. Longitudinal seams and transverse joints shall be flat and smooth inside. Make slip joints in direction of air flow. Longitudinal joints shall be Pittsburgh lock or double comer seam. Button punch snaplock construction is not acceptable. All welds shall be continuous and corrosion-resistant. Sealant shall be applied over the continuous length of every seam. B. Fittings: Fabricate offsets, turns and elbows with centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times diameter when possible. No mitered offsets will be allowed. C. Round/Oval: Use manufactured ductwork where round or flat oval is indicated. Where round or oval low pressure ductwork is designated to have internal acoustical/thermal liner, provide factory- fabricated double-wall ductwork. 1 DUCTWORK 23 3113 - 6 , North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Acoustical Liner. Unless otherwise indicated, (shown by hidden line on duct plan) duct dimensions are clear interior dimensions, not including thicknesses of internal acoustical liner. Internal duct liner shall be cut to assure overlapped and compressed longitudinal comer joints. The liner shall be secured in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. E. Vapor Retardant: Where exterior-insulated ductwork connects to ductwork without exterior insulation, the exterior insulation shall overlap the connecting duct a minimum of 4 inches. The vapor retardant on the exterior insulation shall be sealed to the exposed metal duct. r 3.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Installation: dicated and shall be full i i th th l y erw se n un ess o 1. Flexible duct shall be a maximum of 6 feet in leng extended to smooth out internal corrugations, and shall be installed without kinks, compression or obstructions so that pressure drop is minimized. Install with a maximum equivalent of two 90 degree bends. No bend shall be made with centerline radius of less than one duct diameter for fiberglass ductwork, or four and one-half diameters for metal ductwork No additional flexible duct shall be provided for future relocation unless otherwise indicated; cut and remove excess length. _ 2. Flexible duct shall be supported at ends and at each 90 degree bend. Maximum permissible sag is 1/2 inch per foot of spacing between supports. 3. Hanger and saddle material in contact with the flexible duct shall be of sufficient width to prevent any restriction of the internal diameter of the duct when the weight of the supported section rests on the hanger or saddle material. In no case will the material contacting the flexible duct be less than 1 inch wide. Hanger shall be used in conjunction with a sheet metal saddle formed to cover one-half the circumference of the outside diameter of the flexible duct and shall be rolled to fit neatly around the lower half of the ducts outer circumference. 4. Factory installed suspension systems integral to the flexible duct are an acceptable alternative hanging method when manufacturers recommended procedures are followed. 5. To prevent tearing of vapor retardant on fiberglass duct, do not support entire weight of flexible duct on any one hanger during installation. Avoid contact of flexible duct with sharp edges of hanger material. Damage to vapor retardant may be repaired with vapor sealant tape. If internal core is penetrated, replace flexible duct 6. Connect flexible ductwork to collars on rigid ductwork and terminal devices with locking clamps and adhesive. Stainless steel ductwork shall be secured with stainless steel bands and clamps only. 7. Terminal devices connected to flexible duct shalt be supported independently of the flexible duct. 1 1 3.4 SUPPLY, RETURN, INTAKE, EXHAUST AND RELIEF DUCTWORK A. General Air Moving Systems: Ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized sheet metal unless ' otherwise indicated and shall comply with SMACNA Pressure Classification. B. Minimum Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated all ductwork shall comply with the following minimum pressure requirements: f- 1. 3 inch w.g. Pressure: DUC TWOItK 23 3113 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion a. From the supply fan discharge to a terminal unit inlet. 2. 2 inch w.g. Pressure: a. From the supply fan discharge to a room supply air device. b. From the return air inlet device to the inlet of the return fan or air handling fan return connection. 3. 1 inch w.g. Pressure: a. " From the discharge side of a terminal unit to the room supply air device. b. From the room exhaust device to the inlet of the roof exhaust fan. 4. All supply, return and outside air ducts shall be externally insulated unless specifically indicated to be internally insulated, extending from fan, throughout system, to all outlets. Unless otherwise indicated, external insulation shall be minimum 2 inch thick fiberglass duct wrap where concealed and 1-1/2 inch thick duct board where exposed; finish as specified. G Toilet exhaust, general exhaust: Ductwork shall not have internal insulation, and does not have to be externally insulated unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 CHANGES IN SHAPE OR DIMENSION A. Criteria: Where duct size or shape is altered to effect a change in area, the following shall apply: 1. Do not exceed a slope of 1 inch in 7 inches for transitions with increasing area. 2. Do not exceed a slope of 1 inch in 4 inches for transitions with decreasing area; 1 inch in 7 inches is preferable and should be used wherever possible. 3. Transition angles shall not exceed 30 degrees at inlet connections to coils or other equipment, nor 15 degrees at outlet connections. 3.6 MATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS FOR SEALING DUCTS A. Liquid Sealant: Use only for slip type joints where sealant is to fill space between overlapping pieces of metal. Do not use where metal clearances exceed 1/16 inch. B. Mastics: Use in lieu of liquid sealant as a filler, in grooves and between flanges. C. Tape: Tape is not allowed to seal sheet metal ducts. D. Combination of mastic and embedded fabric: Use mastic/mesh/mastic layers as a sealant where pressure equals or exceeds 3 inch w.g. and where any space between metal surfaces at transverse joints, longitudinal seams or duct wall penetrations exceeds 1/16 inch, E. Surface preparation: Surfaces to receive sealant should be free from oil, dust, dirt, rust, moisture, ice crystals and other substances that inhibit or prevent bonding. Use solvent and apply a face primer if necessary to obtain a clean surface for adhesion. DUCTWORK 23 3113 - 8 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1 F. System Preparation: Remove all dirt and foreign material from the entire duct system and clean diffusers, registers and grilles before operating fans. 3.7 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. General: All supply and return ductwork including outdoor air intakes shall be provided with access doors to permit periodic cleaning of the inside surfaces. Refer to paragraph entitled "DUCT ACCESS DOORS" in Section 23 3300. B. Location: Duct access doors shall be located such that they may be accessed by a person standing on a ladder. Access doors located above a ceiling shall not be more than 42 inches above the ceiling unless a work platform is provided. The access doors may be located on the sides or bottom of the ductwork and shall be available in each straight run and not more than 30 feet on centers. All elements of the duct system shall be available for cleaning without passing the cleaning equipment through duct turning vanes- C. Size: The width of the access door shall be a minimum of 1 inch less than the width of the duct. The length of the access door shall be a minimum of 12 inches up to a width of 12 inches, a minimum of 18 inches up to a width of 18 inches, and a minimum or 24 inches up to a width of 24 inches. Duct access door for duct cleaning purposed need not be larger than 24 inches by 24 inches. 3.8 LEAKAGE TESTING - A. General: 1. Test the following duct systems: a. All supply ducts which are (1) which are connected to an air moving device (air handling unit, exhaust fan, supply fan or similar air moving equipment) and (2) which convey 1000 cfm or greater through their largest portion. ' 2. Duct systems shall be constructed so that leakage does not exceed 5.0 percent of the air quantity handled by the respective fans for systems to 3 inch w.g., and 1.0 percent of the total air quantity handled by fans in systems exceeding 3 inch w.g. 3. Leakage shall be measured during leakage test at a test pressure which is equal to the pressure rating of the duct system. B. Test Procedure: 1. Test at the time of duct installation, prior to installation of any field-applied insulation and prior to any concealment in chases or similar enclosures. 2. Duct entry and outlet openings shall be capped or sealed prior to pressurizing the duct. The seal shall be of adequate strength and thickness to withstand the test pressures. 3. Use a fan having a minimum capacity of 300 cfm or 10 percent of the particular duct system design capacity, whichever is greater and which is capable of producing a static pressure equal to the duct test pressure. 4. Test fan shall be connected to a flow measuring assembly consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight section with appropriately located pressure taps. Orifice assembly shall be calibrated with its own calibration curve. Pressures shall be measured with U- tube manometers and corresponding flow rates shall be obtained from the orifice performance curve. 5. Connect test fan and orifice flow measuring assembly to the duct to be tested with a section of flexible duct. 6. Test for audible leaks as follows: ?f DUCTMM 23 3113 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion a. Close off and seal all openings in the duct section to be tested. b. Start the blower with its control damper partially closed. C. Gradually open the control damper until the duct pressure reaches the designed duct operating pressure. d. Survey-all joints for audible leaks. Mark each leak and repair after shutting down blower. Do not apply a retest until sealing has been repaired and allowed to set. 7. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the remaining leakage should be measured with the orifice section of the test apparatus as follows: a. Start blower and open damper until the pressure in duct reaches the designed duct operating pressure. b. When partial sections (such as supply section, return section, etc.) of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage. 8. ConL%& any duct leaks which are detected either audibly or by touch regardless of whether leakage through duct system is less than allowable test leakage. 3.9 SPECIAL DUCT SYSTEMS A. Exterior Ductwork: 1. Support all exterior ductwork with angle iron bracing secured to roof or associated construction, maintaining watertight integrity of the building envelope and roofing system. All ductwork and ductwork support penetrations shall also be provided to maintain watertight integrity of the building envelope and roof. Flash and counterflash all ducts where they pierce the building envelope. 2. All exterior ductwork shall be weatherproof including connections at air conditioning units and building penetration points. 3. Externally insulated ducts located outside of buildings shall be insulated with minimum 2 inch thick fiberglass duct board and sealed prior to being insulated as though they were inside. Metal surfaces of ducts located on the exterior of buildings shall receive exterior duct sealant forming a positive air and watertight seal, bonding to the metal involved, remaining flexible with metal movement and having a service temperature range of -30 to 175 degree F. If exposed to direct sunlight, the sealant shall also be ultraviolet and ozone resistant or shall, after curing, be painted with a compatible coating that provides such resistance. The term sealant herein is not limited to adhesives or mastics but includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips. END OF SECTION 23 3113 DUCTWORK 233113-10 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 3300 - DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS area part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General:. Provide necessary duct system accessories to assure balanced, quiet and draftless _ distribution and conveyance, with minimum of turbulence, noise and pressure drop for supply, return, exhaust and ventilation systems indicated. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION 3. 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION 4. 23 3713, AIR DISTRIBUTION 5. 23 3113, DUCTWORK 6. 23 0593, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Dimensional outline drawing of the following products: (1) Flexible duct connection. (2) Splitter damper. (3) Turning vanes. (4) Air extractors. (5) Manual volume dampers- (6) Backdraft dampers. (7) Fire dampers. (8) Sound attenuators (Silencers)- DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 23 3300 - 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion b. Dimensional outline drawing of all equipment called for in the carbon monoxide tailpipe exhaust removal system. c. Acoustical lagging materials for metal lath including plaster and aggregate type, mixing ratio, compressive strength and weight when dry, fasteners, duct sealant, and ductwork reinforcement and additional supports. 2. Performance Data: a. Sound attenuator operating pressure and velocity limitations. b. Design noise criteria and calculations. C. Sound attenuator airside pressure loss, dynamic insertion losses, regenerated sound levels, performance certification, performance test method, and materials of construction. d. Fan curve indicating performance at design conditions for the carbon monoxide tailpipe exhaust removal system. Installation Instructions: a. Manufacturers printed installation instructions for each of the products listed including copies shipped with the equipment. b. Manufacturers printed instructions for the installation of the carbon monoxide tailpipe exhaust removal system. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the applicable standards and codes listed in paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. SMACNA: Use material, weight, thickness, gauge, reinforcement, seams and joints, suspension, workmanship, construction and installation methods as outlined in the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible, Second Edition, 1995, or in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. NFPA: The duct fittings, accessories and sealants shall comply to the requirements with NFPA 90A, 2002 Revisions, requiring a flame spread rating of not over 25 and a smoke developed/fuel contributed rating no higher than 50. D. AWS: All welding of fittings and accessories to ductwork shall conform to American Welding Society AWS D9-84. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. Model numbers or ' product type listed for manufacturers are given to provide an example of the item required. DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 233300-2 1 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.2 GENERAL A. Clear Dimensions: Ductwork dimensions indicated which may affect items of this section are nominal free clearance internal dimensions, not including interior insulation thickness, if any. ' S. Gauges: Gauges indicated in this section are for galvanized steel. Where. gauges are specifically indicated for a sheet metal material other than galvanized steel, provide the indicated gauge. 2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT EQUIPMENT CONNECTION A. Flexible Duct Connections: Duct Connector shall be a waterproof neoprene-coated polymer fabric ' specifically manufactured to provide an airtight flexible connection between ductwork and rotating or vibrating equipment Minimum tear and tensile strength shalt be 125 and 300 pounds respectively. ' 1. Manufacturer: - a. Ductmate Proflex Vinyl ' b. Durodyne C. Ventfabrics 2.4 SPUTTERS A. General: Provide splitters for adjustment of air volume to the respective branches where indicated, constructed of the same material and at least the same gauge as the duct, but not less than twenty- two gauge. Use in duct systems to 2 inches w.g. only. Splitters shall be rigidly attached to pivot rod and operating linkage; install on raised insulated base when used in internally insulated ductwork. Splitter blades shall be formed in two thicknesses of metal with a rounded edge to air flow. i B. Manufacturers: 1. Ventlock 2. Ruskin 3. Metalaire 2.5 TURNING VANES ' A. General. Turning vanes shall be completely flutter-proof; permanently fixed type aluminum, steel with acid/solvent chemical corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. Turning vanes shall be minimum 24 gauge for single thickness and 26 gauge for double thickness and airfoil vanes. Turning vanes shall be securely fastened to a runner, vane edges shall project airflow parallel to duct sides. ' Airfoil-type turning vanes shall be constructed of galvanized steel or aluminum with a sound- attenuating fiberglass inner liner and open protective metal facing. ' B. Manufacturer and Type: 1. Barber-Coleman, Airtums 2. Dura-Dyne, VR 3. Mart & Cooley DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 23 3300 - 3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center ' Renovations & Expansion 2.6 EXTRACTORS ' A. General: Extractors shall deflect, proportion and direct the indicated air quantities to the branch duct ' and/or to the registers, grilles or other outlets without causing objectionable noise or pressure drop. B. Adjustable Multivaned: Multivaned with vanes on 1 inch centers where required to have shutoff ' capability or unless otherwise indicated;, adjustable gang-operated and synchronized to remain parallel to flow regardless of extractor angle. 1. Minimum .040 thick aluminum, steel with acid/solvent chemical corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. C. Actuator. Provided with manual actuator devices for adjusting and securing the position of these ' deflectors; these devices shall allow adjustment of the deflectors from outside the ductwork without puncturing or penetrating ductwork or its vapor barrier. Provide remote actuator assembly where required. D. Manufacturer and Type: , 1. Titus, Model AG-45 or AG-225 Volume Extractor ' 2. Waterloo, Type DTM or DT2M Extractor 3. Anemostat, DTB or DTA 4. Young Regulator, 890 or 890A , 2.7 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. General: These dampers are other than those specified as being integral with a register, diffuser or other air outlet or inlet B. Criteria: Volume dampers shall meet the following criteria: 1. For ducts up to 10 inches in duct depth or 100 square inches in area, use single blade dampers of minimum 20 gauge. 2. Opposed blade type multi-blade dampers shall be a minimum 4 inch deep and fabricated of minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel blades with a welded 16 gauge galvanized steel channel frame; sheet metal screws shall not be used in the construction of any damper. Blades shall ride in bronze bushings on 3/8 inch steel shafts suitable for motor operation. Damper blades ' shall be operated by a common linkage, with a 6 inch maximum blade width, and shall be formed with double 90 degree bends to ensure positive air lock and maximum strength. Blades shall be felt-tipped to ensure tight closure and noiseless operation, and shall be capable of opening to a full 90 degrees; damper linkage shall incorporate a positive 90 degree opening , stop. 3. Dampers shall be made of galvanized steel, stainless steel, steel with acid/solvent chemical resistant coating, or steel sprayed or dipped aluminum rust resistant finish as required to match ' the attached duct material; stiffened and fabricated to prevent vibration and flutter. 4. Provide a hand quadrant stand-off bracket so that the damper can be adjusted from outside the completed ductwork without puncturing or otherwise penetrating the duct insulation or its vapor ' retardant barrier. 5. Dampers shall be fully adjustable and with locking device and damper position indicator. The damper and damper frame may be fabricated in one section to 48 inch in width and 90 inch in height; larger sizes shall be made in sections with mullions. ' 6. Pressure drop through the damper shall not exceed 0.03 inches w_g_ at 1000 fpm velocity based on the damper face area. The damper shall have full shutoff capability, with leakage rates less ' DUCTWORK SPBC7ALTIFS 23 3300 - 4 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion ' than 10 cFm/square ft of damper face area at 4 inches w.g. Airfoil opposed blade dampers shall be provided if the velocity through a fully opened damper exceeds the manufacturer's printed maximum velocity limit. 7. Manufacturer a. Air Balance, Inc. ' b. Greenheck C. Nailor d. Penn - e. Ruskin f. Young Regulator Co. ' 2.8 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS P 1 7 A. General: Backdraft dampers shall be the multi-blade, weighted type with counter-balanced blades. Damper frame shall be aluminum or galvanized steel suitable for flange and gasket connection to ductwork. Blade edges shall have vinyl or polyurethane foam gasketing with ball bearings. B. Manufacturer. 1. Air Balance 2. Louvers & Dampers 3. Ruskin 2.9 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. General: 1. Doors shall be factory prefabricated double wall, 24 gauge galvanized steel. Access doors shall be able to withstand the same test pressures without deformation, vibration or leakage as the ductwork and casings in which they are installed. 2. Access door minimum size shall be as large as is compatible with the duct size but in no case less than the following (provide larger sizes if necessary to permit proper access operation): Maximum Duct Dimensions Access Door Size 11" and less 10" x 12" 12" through 16" 12" x 16" 17" and over 16" x 24" 3. Personnel walk-in access doors in air handling unit casings shall be a maximum 54 inch high by 20 inch wide. B. Latches: Doors shall be provided with adjustable tension catches and shall be gasketed around their perimeters with felt or soft rubber gasketing attached to the doors with cement and countersunk rivets for an airtight seal. Access doors less than 24 inch in height shall have a continuous piano hinge (or two 1 inch by 1 inch butt hinges where concealed) and one panel latch: access doors in casings and DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 233300-S North Greenwood Recreation Center i Renovations & Expansion ducts 24 inch in height and over shall have two heavy butt hinges and two pairs of lever--type latches , operable from both sides of the door, installed to open against air pressure. Access doors shall be fastened with spring clips which release in the event of sudden negative pressure, such as created when a damper closes, to prevent duct implosion. C. Indicators: Where access doors are concealed in hung ceiling, provide indicator buttons in the ceiling immediately below the access door. ' D. Vision Panels: Where indicated, provide plexiglass vision panels of minimum 0.125 inch thickness for access doors to 10 inch high, or 0.25 inch thick plexiglass for larger access doors. Where required, provide and install vision panels in casing access doors made of transparent wired glass. E. Combination Access/Relief Doors: Panels shall have pressure-sensitive release latches, set to the pressure rating of the duct unless otherwise indicated, with a chain securing the relief door to the ' mounting frame. F. Insulated: Insulated access doors shall have a minimum 1 inch rigid 3-pound density fiberglass board I between the inner and outer panels. G. Fire-Rated: Fire-rated access doors shall be required in all grease-laden exhaust ducts as required for cleaning. I H. Manufacturer. 1. Ventfabrics, Inc., Ventlok 2. Ruskin 3. United Sheet Metal ' 2.10 FIRE DAMPERS A. General: 1. Fire dampers shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 555 (e edition - '. 1999) and bear the UL test label with a 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating for penetrations in 1- hour and 2-hour rated partitions, and a 3-hour fire protection rating for penetrations in 3-hour rated partitions. Dampers shall be tested under dynamic load. ' 2. Dampers shall be selected so that the free air space is not less than the connected duct free area. B. Manufacturer. 1. Prefco 2. Ruskin Mfg. Co. ' 3. Greenheck 4. Nailor Industries 5. Penn ' C. Fire Dampers: The damper casing shall be galvanized steel (in gauges required by the manufacturer's UL listing). Interlocking damper blade assembly shall be unaffected by corrosion or high heat. Unless otherwise indicated, damper blade assembly shall be curtain-type located out of the airstream; where ' multi-blade dampers are used (typically only at grilles and registers) they shall be spring-driven airfoil blades with a maximum pressure drop of 0.1 inch w.g. at 2500 fpm air velocity. Mechanical parts DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 23 3300 - 6 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion shall have bronze non-corrosive pins. Fire dampers shall close automatically and remain tightly closed by a catch mechanism upon the operation of a fusible link rated at 165 degree F. unless otherwise indicated. Provide factory furnished duct installation sleeve of minimum 16 gauge for dampers up to 36 inch wide x 24 inch high and 14 gauge for larger sizes. 2.11 FIRE AND COMBINATION FIREISMOKE DAMPERS A. General: 1. Fire and combiation firetsmoke dampers shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 555 (61h edition -1999) and bear the UL test label with a 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating for penetrations in 1 hour and 2 hour rated partitions, and a 3 hour fire protection rating _ for penetrations in 3 hour rated partitions. Dampers shall be tested under dynamic load. 2. Smoke control dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers and their operators shall comply with UL Standard 555S (41' edition -1999), and be listed for airflow in either direction to permit use in an engineered smoke evacuation system and to permit installation with the actuator outside the chases. 3. Dampers shall be selected so that the free air space is not less than the connected duct free area. B. Manufacturer. 1. Prefco 2. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 3. Greenheck 4. Nailor Industries 5. Penn ?. C. Fire Dampers: The damper casing shall be galvanized steel (in gauges required by the manufacturer's UL listing). Interlocking damper blade assembly shall be unaffected by corrosion or high heat. Unless otherwise indicated, damper blade assembly shall be curtain-type located out of the airstream; where multi-blade dampers are used (typically only at grilles and registers) they shall be spring-driven airfoil blades with a maximum pressure drop of 0.1 inch w.g. at 2500 fpm air velocity. Mechanical parts shall have bronze non-corrosive pins. Fire dampers shall close automatically and remain tightly closed by a catch mechanism upon the operation a fusible link rated at 165 degree F unless otherwise indicated. Provide factory furnished duct installation sleeve of minimum 16 gauge for dampers up to 36 inch wide x 24 inch high and 14 gauge for larger sizes. D. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: Dampers shall comply with the requirements for fire dampers listed above. Damper actuator shall be spring-return fail-safe, linked to the damper for normally- closed operation upon loss of control signal, and able to close the damper at pressures encountered in normal operation, including airstream loading effects on the blades. Damper blade assembly shall be airfoil type with a maximum pressure drop of 0.1 inch w.g. at 2500 fpm air velocity. Damper air leakage rate shall not exceed the requirements of Class I with a maximum of 4 cfm per square foot at 1 inch w.g. pressure. Damper actuator shall be mounted out of the air stream, and actuator and mounting bracket shall not extend beyond the height of the damper frame. Provide damper with fusible link set to initiate closing at 212 degree F. duct temperature. Damper actuator shall be able to be remotely closed and remotely reset Damper actuator shall be operated by 24 volt ac or control air pneumatic pressure. 2.12 LOUVERS A. General: Louvers shall comply with the requirements of Section 10200, "LOUVERS AND VENTS". DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 23 3300 - 7 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Free Area: Unless otherwise noted or a specific size is indicated the maximum velocity through the free area of each louver shall be as follows: 1. Air intakes: 600 feet per minute. 2. Air exhaust: 1000 feet per minute. C. Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin ?. 2. Greenheck 3. Kreuger - 4. Louvers & Dampers 5. Penn - - 2.13 SOUND ATTENUATORS I A. General: Provide sound attenuators of the size and type as scheduled on the drawings. B. Outer Casing: Minimum of 22 gauge galvanized steel with seams lockformed and mastic filled or continuously welded. C. Interior Baffles: Minimum of 24 gauge galvanized perforated steel. D. Filler Material: Inorganic mineral glass fiber of a density sufficient to obtain the specified acoustic performance and packed at not less than five percent compression to prevent the formation of voids due to vibration or settling. The material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof. If sound attenuatoos are indicated to be packless type, the filler material shall be omitted. E. Performance: Acoustic and aerodynamic performance shall be tested and certified in accordance with ASTM E477-84 Standard Method of Testing Duct Liner Material and Prefabricated Silencers for Acoustical and Airflow Performance. Airflow pressure drops shall be tested in accordance with AMCA Standards. The performance indicated is not a band-by-band listing of the attenuator scheduled, but reflects actual minimum attenuation (in decibels) for the indicated octave bands at the design conditions. F. Manufacturer. 1. Rink Division of Krueger/Phillips Industries 2. Commercial Acoustics 3. Transonics 4. Industrial Noise Control, Inc. 5. United McGill Corporation 2.14 AIRFLOW STRAIGHTENERS I A. General: Airflow straighteners shall be constructed of 3/4 inch honeycomb parallel cell orientation in 1 inch depths, with a slip-in frame to permit removal for cleaning. For air velocities to 2500 fpm, the airflow straightener cells shall be manufactured from aluminum; for air velocities in excess of 2500 fpm the cells shall be galvanized steel or stainless steel B. Manufacturer DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 23 3300 - 8 rj North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1. Titus 2. Barber-Colman PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL. A. Transitions: Provide and install transitions where required for final connection to any duct fitting, accessory, device or duct-mounted equipment. B. Special System: All accessories installed in poly-vinyl-steel ductwork shall have acid/solvent chemical corrosion resistant coating. C. Location and Use of Dampers: Install a volume damper at each duct branch, as far as possible upstream from air inlets or outlets, to attenuate noise transmission caused by damper throttling. Where the necessary pressure drop across a single volume damper becomes excessive and cannot be reduced through the use of splitter dampers or extractors and creates objectionable noise in the opinion of the Architect, an orifice plate shall be installed. The orifice plate shall be sized to provide - sufficient pressure drop to allow the volume damper to control the air flow without any objectionable noise transmission. Use splitter dampers, extractors or orifice plates only where manual volume dampers will not accomplish the intended balancing, or where indicated. The use of splitter dampers, extractors or orifice plates shall not eliminate the need for specified or required manual dampers. D. Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors: Install duct mounted smoke detectors where indicated in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 3.2 TURNING VANES 1 A. General: Install turning vanes for all short-radius elbows where the centerline radius is less than 1-1/2 times the duct width, and all square comer bends with a transition angle greater than 30 degrees. Install vanes in sections or use tie rods to limit the unbraced vane length. Tuning vanes shall be single-wall type for ducts with a vane runner length less than 18 inch and air velocity less than 2500 ' fpm; duct systems with longer runner lengths or higher air velocities shall use double-wall vanes. Airfoil-type vanes shall be used wherever the duct static pressure exceeds 2 inches w.g. If the duct size changes in a mitred elbow, the vanes shall be fitted with a trailing edge extension. 3.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. General: Provide and install an access door in the ductwork for each fire, smoke, fire/smoke and motorized damper, in-line duct heater and coil; permanent test ports; and every 15' or change in direction for cleaning and for access for observation or maintenance as necessary. B. Grease-Laden Ducts: Fire-rated access doors in grease-laden ductwork shall be located 1 inch above the bottom of horizontal ducts; a minimum of 3 feet from any 45 degree or greater turn or elbow; at each grease trap location; and 3 feet above each floor or platform to the bottom of the door in vertical ?. ducts. C. Sound Attenuator. Provide an 18 inch by 18 inch access door in the inlet transition to each sound attenuator for inspection and cleaning. 3.4 FIRE DAMPER DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 23 3300 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. General; Fire damper assemblies shall be sealed for air leakage prior to installation. Sealing of holes in the comers of the frame shall be done with fire retardant mastic. B. Access: Provide access doors at each fire damper with door size and location which will facilitate replacing fusible links and resetting the damper. The access door shall be insulated when installed in insulated ductwork. Exterior duct insulation around the insulated access door shall be sealed to provide a continuous vapor barrier. , C. Damper Location and Type: Fire dampers shall be installed to provide a positive barrier to the passage of air when in a dosed position, and shall be installed to be self-supporting in case ofduct destruction due to heat. 'Care must be exercised that the frame is set so that the closing devices on fire does not bind. All fire dampers shall be secured by retaining angles which are fastened to the damper sleeve in the wall or floor which they penetrate, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install-curtain type fire dampers in ducts where indicated on drawings at locations other than grilles and registers. 2. Install multi-blade type fire damper behind registers and grilles where the stackhead penetrates a fire rated partition. 3.5 FIRE, SMOKE AND COMBINATION FIREISMOKE DAMPER _ I A. General: Fire damper assemblies shall be sealed for air leakage prior to installation. Sealing of holes in the comers of the frame shall be done with fire retardant mastic. I B. Access: Provide access doors at each fire damper and combination fire/smoke damper, on the same side of the partition as the actuator, with door size and location which will facilitate replacing fusible links and resetting the damper. The access door shall be insulated when installed in insulated ductwork. Exterior duct insulation around the insulated access door shall be sealed to provide a continuous vapor barrier. C. Damper Location and Type: Fire and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be installed to provide a positive barrier to the passage of air when in a closed position, and shall be installed to be self- supporting in case of duct destruction due to heat. Care must be exercised that the frame is set so that the closing devices on fire, smoke and combination dampers do not bind. All dampers shall be secured by retaining angles fastened to the sleeve in the wall or floor which they penetrate. The entire outside perimeter of the duct penetration and each angle shall be caulked with a mastic which has a flame spread rating of not exceeding 25 and a smoke developed/fuel contributed rating not exceeding 50. Smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be installed with allowances for the actuator and access to the actuator. 1. Install curtain type fire dampers in ducts where indicated on drawings at locations other than grilles and registers. 2. Install multi-blade type fire damper behind registers and grilles where the stackhead penetrates a fire rated partition. D. Fire/Smoke Damper Operation: Provide all interconnection wiring, tubing, relays, etc. to operate the fire/smoke dampers such that when each air handling unit is shut down (power to the fan motor is disconnected) the dampers associated with that air handling unitwill close; whenever the fan motor is energized the associated fire/smoke dampers will open. 3.6 TEST OPENINGS DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 23 3300 -10 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. General: Furnish and install capped test openings for test equipment (pitot tubes, etc.) on the entering and leaving sides of air handling units, duct mounted coils and other airside equipment. Locate these test openings in each main supply duct at the downstream end of the straightest run of the main before the first take-off. Form test ports by drilling as many evenly-spaced 7/16 inch holes in the duct as will fit on maximum 8 inch centers, lined up perpendicular to the airflow. Holes shall be sealed with replaceable plastic plugs, and shall be made accessible through exterior insulation for future balancing. 3.7 SOUND ATTENUATOR A. General: Refer to manufacturer's instructions and the requirement of Section 23 3113, DUCTWORK, for installation and supporting requirements. B. Multiple Attenuators: Where multiple sound attenuators are assembled into attenuator banks, the individual attenuators shall be securely fastened together using galvanized steel bands, straps, welded structural angles, as recommended by the manufacturer. All joints between the assembled atenuators shall be sealed to prevent air leakage. C. Duct Transitions: Coordinate with sizes of ducts to be connected to attenuators. Provide duct transitions to match sizes of attenuators and/orattenuator banks if different from the connecting duct size. D. Installation: The installation of each sound attenuator shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions. The installation shall provide for the lowest pressure drop through each attenuator. 3.8 FITTINGS AND TRANSITIONS A. Divided Flow Fittings: All divided flow fittings shall be fumished as separate fittings; tap covers welded into spiral duct sections are not acceptable. All tees, crosses and laterals up to and including 12 inch diameter shall have a minimum 3/8 inch radius rounded entrance into the tap, produced by machining, press forming or hand-grinding smooth and free of projections, weld build-up, burrs or irregularities. All round duct tees and crosses shall be the spun conical converging type for branch entrances, with a raised bead on the throat of the fitting to assure a tight positive connection. Lateral and Y-type fittings shall be constructed so that airstream converge or diverge at angles of 45 degrees or less. r B. Construction: All welded fittings shall have continuous welds along all seams. C. Flexible Duct Connectors: Provide spin-in type connector fitting with balancing damper at all connections between rigid sheet metal duct and flexible duct at the upstream end of the flexible duct. D. Branch Takeoffs: Unless indicated otherwise, branch takeoff connections shall be made with 45 degree laterals or 45 degree elbows. Where 90 degree branches are shown, provide conical tees or "shoe" fittings at a 45 degree entry, with a lockable quadrant damper. E. Elbows: Elbows shall be die-stamped or multiple-gore construction with seam circumferential joints unless shown as mitred square elbows with turning vanes, except elbows 8 inch in diameter or less shall be die-stamped. All offsets in excess of 30 degrees shall have radius fittings with a minimum 1.5 ratio; provide turning vanes in all elbows and bends as specified herein. END OF SECTION 23 3300 Y DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 23 3300 - 11 1 1 i F 1 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 3416 - FANS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section 23 0513, ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, are a part of this Section. 1.2 _ SUMMARY A. Generate Provide fans as specified herein and of size, type, capacity, and electrical characteristics indicated. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION 3, 23 3113, DUCTWORK 4. 23 3300, DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 5. 23 0593, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 2, Division 26, ELECTRICAL 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Dimensional outline drawing for each of the specified fans including operating weight. b. Dimensional drawing of roof curbs. 2. Performance Data: t a. Fan brake horsepower (bHP) for each fan at scheduled static pressure including drive losses. b. Actual motor horsepower, voltage and phase for each fan. C. Fan curve for each fan indicating flow, static (or total) pressure developed, efficiency, and fan speed at the design pointFan sound power levels for each fan at operating conditions. FANS 23 3416 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion d. Vibration isolators for each fan located inside the building. 3. Installation Instructions: a. Manufacturers printed instructions for the installation of each type of fan including copies shipped with the equipment. 4. Maintenance Instructions: a. Manufacturers printed instructions for the maintenance of each type of fan provided. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS - A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. Comply: With the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and other Codes and Standards as adopted by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction. C. Certification: AMCA certified as to both sound and performance ratings, and in compliance with the requirements of ARI Standard 670-90. D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. F. NFPA 90A, Installation for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2002 Revision. F. NFPA 91, Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and Vapor Removal of Conveying, 1999 Revision. G. NFPA 96, Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment, 2001 Revision. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. 1. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Company 2. Greenheck Fan and Ventilator Corp. 3. Loren Cook Company 4. Penn Ventilator Company 5. Aerovent 2.2 GENERAL A. Roof Curb: All roof mounted supply and/or exhaust fans shall be mounted on a roof curb. Refer to paragraph entitled "ROOF CURB AND EQUIPMENT MOUNTING SUPPORTS" in Section 23 0529. FANS 23 3416 - 2 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion " B. Bird Screen: Provide removable bird screens, 112 mesh, 16 gauge aluminum or brass wire on each - fan unless otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Backdraft Damper. Provide gravity-actuated louvered backdraft damper for each fan unless a motorized control damper is noted on the drawings. Damper blades shall be aluminum construction, with felt on the trailing edges to assure a tight closing seal. D. Vibration Isolation: Isolate the entire rotating assembly and motor of each fan to prevent the transmission of vibration into the structure. E. Fan Access: The hood covering the fan motor and drive shall be hinged to provide access and shall be equipped with an approved locking device to fasten hood in open and closed positions. F. Fan Motor Refer to paragraph entitled "ELECTRIC MOTOR" in Section 23 0513. A disconnect switch inside the fan housing is not a requirement. Unless specifically indicated otherwise air handling unit fan motors shall be selected as follows: 1. Less than 5 HP; 135 percent of bHP 2. 5 Hp through 25 HP; 125 percent of bHP 3. Greater than 25 HP 115 percent of bHP G. V-Belt Drive: Refer to paragraph entitled "V-BELT DRIVE" in Section 23 0529 for requirements for all belt driven fans. H. Speed Control: Provide a solid-state speed controller for each direct drive motor. Speed controller shall enable full modulation of motor between 40-100°x6 of nameplate capacity for fan balancing. 2.3 ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST A. Centrifugal Type: 1. Fan Hood, Housing, and Base: Weatherproof and constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. 2. Fan Wheel: Backward curved; non-overloading; aluminum; air foil blade type; statically and dynamically balanced; keyed and locked to shaft. 3. Drive Assembly: Motor and drive assembly shall be located out of exhaust air stream, cushioned mounted on multidirectional neoprene vibration isolators and positively ventilated. Supported by a structural frame independent of hood, housing, and curb base. See the fan schedule on the drawing for drive type. 2.4 SIDEWALL EXHAUST A. Propeller Type: 1. Fan Hood, Housing, and Base: Weatherproof and constructed of aluminum. Motor and drive: supported by a structural frame independent of hood, housing, and mounting frame. 2. Fan Wheel: Propeller, non-overloading, aluminum, air foil blade type, statically and dynamically ?. balanced. Wheels: Keyed and locked to shaft 3. Drive Assembly: Motor and drive assembly located out of exhaust air stream, cushioned mounted on multi-directional neoprene vibration isolators and positively ventilated. Direct or belt drive type as indicated. FANS 23 3416 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.5 IN-LINE A. Centrifugal Type: 1. Housing: Fan housing including longitudinal, traverse, and diagonal stiffeners, motor mounts, bearing and drive supports shall be constructed of steel. Housing, including all bracing, stiffeners and motor mounting assembly shall be factory finished with a baked on alkyd enamel finish over a corrosion resistant primer. Provide a removable panel in bottom or side of housing for complete access to motor and fan. 2. Fan: Shall be centrifugal type and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Fan Motor. Permanently lubricated shaded pole motor mounted on resilient isolators to minimize vibration and noise. 4. Discharge Damper: Mounted in throat of fan discharge. -5. Drive Assembly: Drive shall be direct or v-belt type as indicated. 6. Speed Control: Solid state speed controller for speed reduction to 40 percent Mounted on housing or as otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT AND MOUNTING A. Installation: Fan location shall be as indicated, however, actual placement shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the equipment approved for actual installation. Mount fan and backdraft damper in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Roof Mounted: Verify the location of the roof curb with the structural drawings. Coordinate the installation with the requirements of Division 7, THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION. 3.2 SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL A. Reference: Referto paragraph entitled "FLEXIBLE DUCT EQUIPMENT CONNECTION in Section 23 ¦ 3300, for airside duct connections and to Section 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION, for vibration hangers. 1. In-line Fan: a. Provide inlet and outlet flexible duct connections. Each fan shall be hung using four EVH- 1 equipment hangers. 2. Curb Mounted Units: a. Connect inlet ducts to roof curb inlet flanges using flexible duct connectors. Support ductwork so that the connectors are not in tension and are aligned with ductwork. 3.3 INDUSTRIAL CENTRIFUGAL BLOWER A. Equipment Support: Unless indicated otherwise fans and motor drive located on suspended slab above grade shall be supported on inertia bases. Fans and drives located on a slab on grade in the interior of the building shall be supported on isolated concrete bases. Fans shall be anchored to the bases using leveling bolts and grouted with non-shrink grout Motors drives shall be mounted on slide rails to provide for belt adjustment Refer to paragraph entitled "HOUSEKEEPING PADS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS" in Section 23 0529. FANS 23 3416 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r r r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.4 OPERATING CONTROLS A. Control Interlock: Interlock the exhaust fans with their associated air handling units such that when the air handling unit is de-energized for any reason the exhaust fans are also de-energized; when the air handling unit starts, the associated exhaust fans shall also start. - 3.5 TEST AND BALANCE A. Checkout: Operate all fans, adjust drive speeds to achieve design air flow, and perform other requirements as indicated in Section 23 0593, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION. 3.6 SPARE PARTS A. Belts: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 1 spare set of belts for each belt driven unit. END OF SECTION 23 3416 FANS 23 3416 - 5 1 1 N 1 fl 1 11 1 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center .Renovations S Expansion SECTION 23 3713 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A, _ General: Provide air distribution devices as indicated. 13 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS _ 2. 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION 3. 23 8219, FAN COIL UNIT 4. 23 3113, DUCTWORK 5. 23 3300, DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 6. 23 0593, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 2. Division 9, FINISHES 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Photograph or rendering of each device. b. Cut sheets showing the pressure drop, throw and noise levels at various air flows for each air distribution device. C. Color samples factory-applied to the same substrate as the finished product. 2. ' Performance Data: a. Static and total pressure drop, face velocity, throw and noise level.for each of the air distribution devices at the air flows indicated. AIR DISTRIBUTION T3 3713 -1 North Greenwood Reemation Center Renovations & Expansion 3. Installation Instructions: a. Manufacturer's printed instructions for the installation of each type of air distribution device including copies shipped with each air distribution device. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. Comply: With the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and other Codes and Standards as adopted by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction. C. Air Diffusion Council (ADC): Laboratories used for testing the air flow performance of devices shall be approved by ADC. D. ASHRAE: Standard 70-72, Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. E. NFPA 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2002 Revision. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer. Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. 2.2 GENERAL I A. Devices: Provide air distribution devices as indicated. All air distribution devices provided shall be the product of a single manufacturer unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Acoustical: Noise produced at each diffuser, register, grille or other air distribution device shall not exceed a noise criteria level of NC 35 based on sound pressure levels in db re 20 micropascals unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate air distribution devices, sound attenuation measures and equipment provided to insure that the design acoustical constraints are not exceeded by the system, assuming room absorption of 10 db re 1 pW. C. Pressure Drop: Pressure drop across any air distribution device shall not exceed 0.10 inches of water gauge total pressure unless otherwise indicated. D. Material: All devices shall be constructed of extruded aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Air distribution devices installed in fire rated ceiling, floor/ceiling assembly, or rated wall shall be constructed of steel. Devices installed on hard surfaces (drywall or plaster ceilings or walls) shall have a neoprene gasket along each edge to provide an airtight seal. E. Finish: Each air distribution device shall have a factory applied baked enamel finish. Ceiling devices shall be finished in white and sidewall devices shall be finished in aluminum unless otherwise indicated. AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3713 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion F. Integral Components: All dampers, blank-off baffles and other companion devices which form an integral part of an air distribution device shall be factory-made. G. Mounting Screws: Mounting screws which are visible on the face of grilles, diffusers or registers shall be furnished with the device and shall be finished at the factory to match the finish on the device on which they are used. H. Manufacturer. 1. Titus - 2. ' Metalaire 3. Price 2.3 CEILING AIR DISTRIBUTION - A. Round and Rectangular Devices: Devices indicated to be connected with flexible duct shall have a round neck or shall be provided with a factory supplied rectangle-to-round adapter, diffusers with metal duct connections may have round, square, or rectangular neck. Supply diffusers shall be furnished with a volume damper and adjustable equalizing grid unless otherwise noted; the volume damper shall be adjustable without removing the core. 1. - Lay-in Ceiling Grid: Provide lay-in devices which are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module. 2. Surface Mounted; Lay-in Grid Ceiling: Provide air distribution devices with border styles which are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems. B. Linear Devices: Linear ceiling diffusers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum and shall have factory provided plenums with interior insulation, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Lay-in Ceiling Grid: Provide lay-in linear diffusers which are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module. Where multiple slots are required the surface between the slots shall match in color and be on the same plane as the ceiling support grid. Provide mid or outboard slots and center cross notch where indicated. Return air linear diffusers shall be provided without pattern controllers. 2. Surface Mounted: Linear diffusers installed in drywall or plaster ceilings shall be finished in aluminum enamel unless otherwise indicated. Provide linear diffusers with border styles as indicated 2.4 SIDEWALL AIR DISTRIBUTION A. Rectangular Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, supply, return and exhaust grilles and registers shall be extruded aluminum construction. All supply device blades shall be individually adjustable. Devices shall have an opposed blade damper, adjustable from the front of the device. B. Linear Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, sidewall linear supply and return air devices shall be extruded aluminum construction; furnish complete with frame and border as indicated. 2.5 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATOR A. Provide cable operated volume damper for duct branch air balancing at all inaccessible ceiling anus or where duct placement limits proper access for damper adjustment. System shall be complete with low leakage butterfly damper, steel cable, rack and pinion type damper operator and concealed operator housing via 3' diameter ceiling plate. AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3713 - 3 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Manufacturer. 1. Bowden 2. Young Regulator PART 3 - EXECUTION -3.1 GENERAL A. Coordination: Coordinate the location of air distribution devices and reflected ceiling drawings with respect to placement and alignment to prevent conflict with lighting fixtures, fire protection sprinklers and smoke detectors. All rectangular ceiling devices shall be installed with their lines parallel and perpendicular to the building tines and aligned with the ceiling. Surface mounted devices shall be secured to and supported by metal duct branches or drops. Devices shall be supported by separate hangers whereJlexible duct connections are indicated. B. Location: Install air distribution devices where Indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The location of ceiling supply, return and exhaust air devices as shown on the architectural reflected ceiling drawings shall take precedence over any other location shown. C. Exposed Duct and Device Interiors: Duct interiors, air distribution device interiors and blank-offs shall be painted with flat black enamel to eliminate light reflectance from the inside of the duct system. D. Support All ducts connected to air distribution devices shall be supported independently of the ceiling. Verify the ceiling grid type being furnished. Lay-in devices shall be supported from the structure above if the suspended ceiling grid is not designed to carry the weight of the device. E. Surface Mounted Devices; Lay-In Ceiling: Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules. Install square and parallel with the ceiling grid members and aligned vertically with the ceiling tile. The ceiling tile shall not be used to support any device. Installation. Mount to the duct system flanges using screws provided by the device manufacturer, sealing the device to the duct system to prevent air leakage. Align adjustable blades to provide distribution without draft, pressure drop exceeding indicated value, or noise exceeding indicated values. 3.2 EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Diffuser. Duct mounted supply diffusers shall be provided with a collar of sufficient length to have the closed combination damper and equalizing grid, where required, flush with the interior surface of the duct. B. Sidewall Device: Duct mounted sidewall devices shall be provided with a collar of sufficient depth to allow the open opposed blade damper to be flush with the interior surface of the duct. The length and height of the collar shall be equal to or greater than the exterior border dimension of the device. 3.3 EXPOSED FAN COIL UNITS A. Supply Device: Unless otherwise indicated, supply air grilles for exposed fan coil units, whether furnished by the fan coil unit manufacturer'or not, shall comply with the requirements for sidewall supply air devices, including the setting of blade deflection. The grille shall be sized to match the fan coil discharge opening without any type of adapter. r AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3713 - 4 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.4 INSULATION A. General: The exterior of all supply devices shall be insulated with a minimum of 3/4 inch elastomeric or 1 inch fiberglass blanket with vapor seal. The external insulation shall overlap any internal insulation a minimum distance of 4 inches. The vapor seal shall extend to the edge of the device. The overlap end shall seal against the duct and the exterior duct insulation vapor seal. END OF SECTION 23 3713 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3713 - S 1 1 1 r 1 1 n 1 1 1 1 1 1 r t North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 23 8126 - SPLIT PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS and Section 23 0513, ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, are a part of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: Provide factory catalog rated split package air conditioning equipment as specified herein and of the type, size, and capacity indicated. 1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION 3. 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION 4. 23 2300, REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEM 5. 23 3713, AIR DISTRIBUTION 6. 23 7341, AIR FILTERS 7. 23 3113, DUCTWORK 8. 23 3300, DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 2. Division 26, ELECTRICAL 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following performance data for each combination of factory rated split package air conditioning equipment at the scheduled operating condition: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Unit weight and dimensional outline drawing for each type of split package fan and coil unit indicating the type and size of the air filter and supply and return grille or duct connections and the size and weight of the outside condensing unit. 2. Performance Data: a. Provide the following information for each size of split package air conditioning unit indicated: (1) Heating and cooling capacity where required. (2) Air entering and leaving conditions. SPLIT PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 238126-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion .(3) Airflow and airside pressure loss at design conditions. (4) Motor horsepower (or watts), voltage and phase. (5) DX coil descriptions, rows and fins per inch. (6) Electric coil face velocity, fpm and watts per square foot. (7) Octave band sound power ratings for each fan -unit at specified airflow. 3. Installation Instructions: a. Manufacturer's printed instructions for the installation of each type of fan and coil-unit _ and matching air-cooled condensing unit including copies shipped with the equipment b. Auxiliary drip pan design for concealed units and exposed units in critical locations. 4. Maintenance Instructions: a. Manufacturer's printed instructions for the maintenance of each type of unit. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. B. Certification: Unit capacities shall be rated in accordance with ANSI/ARI Standard 210/240. Unit shall be sound tested and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 350-86. d PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. 1. Manufacturer a. Trane b. American Standard c. Aaon B. Single Manufacturer All split system units shall be by a single manufacturer. 2.2 AIR HANDLING FAN AND COIL UNIT A. General: I 1. Casing: Galvanized steel; designed for service access; insulated intemally with foil-faced fiberglass insulation; discharge duct collar and/or return air duct collar where indicated. The casing shall an enamel finish. All cabinet openings shall be provided with airtight seals. 2. Fan Assembly: Statically and dynamically balanced at factory; centrifugal forward-curved double width; wheels and housing corrosion resistant. SPLIT PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 238126-2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3. Motor and Drive: High efficiency; permanent split capacitor unless specifically noted otherwise; inherent thermal overload protection; permanently lubricated sleeve bearings; direct drive; resilient mount in such a manner that external isolation will not be necessary; detachable motor cord; 3 speed controller with "OFF" position; voltage and phase as indicated in the schedule or as required by the circuit wiring shown on the electrical drawings; motor input shall not exceed the power input indicated. 4. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel or thermoplastic; primary pan extending under full length and width of cooling coil; secondary pan under control valve and isolation valves and all uninsulated piping connections. 5. Filter: Frame shall be an integral part of fan coil unit; suitable for standard size filter, removable throwaway type unless otherwise indicated. 6. Exposed Cabinet Finish: Cabinet and/or access panel shall be phosphatized and finished with baked-on enamel or heat fused epoxy coating. Either finish shall be suitable for additional painting if required under Section 09900, PAINTING. 7. Sound Power Rating: Each fan coil unit shall meet or be less than the sound power rating indicated. B V ti l U fl . er ca p ow: 1. Concealed with Front Access: Enclosed fan; front filter access; flush wall mounted hinged access door, duct collar supply connection; duct collar return connection as shown on the drawing or indicated in the schedule. a. Standard: Cabinet shall be installed on a return air plenum as shown. 2. Exposed Cabinet: Recessed or semi-recessed; enclosed fan; front filter access; discharge and return grille unless indicated otherwise in the schedule. 2.3 DX COOLING COIL A. Casing: 16 gauge or heavier galvanized steel; A-frame design with access panel for service access; aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Factory pressure and leak tested. Coil can be rotated to suit airflow. 2.4 ELECTRIC HEATING COIL A. General: The coil shall meet all NEC requirements; protected by high-limit thermal cut-out with automatic reset and manual-reset additional high-limit cut-out; open coil type; fan interlock; air flow switch; mounted, fused, wired and enclosed at the factory with through-panel disconnect switch; UL listed; voltage and phase as indicated. B. Performance: Provide complete heating coil assemblies designed to be installed inside the air handling fan and coil unit cabinet of capacity and characteristics indicated. C. Coordinative Requirements: Coils shall be an integral component of the unit assembly and shall be factory installed and coordinated to function with the unit as described. 2.5 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT A. General: Unit shall be factory assembled and shall be weatherproofed. Units shall include a compressor, plate fin condenser coil, fans and motors, controls and holding charge of HCFC-22 refrigerant SPLIT PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 238126-3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Casing: Unit casing shall be constructed of 18 gauge zinc coated galvanized steel. Exterior surfaces shall be phosphatized and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish. Units shall have removable top and side panels for access to all major components and controls. C. Single Compressor. Units as indicated shall have single direct drive hermetic reciprocating or scroll compressor with oil pump, single refrigeration circuit with integral subcooling. A refrigeration filter drier, liquid line and suction gas line service valves and gauge port shall be provided. Motors shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of nameplate voltage. Crankcase heater (where required by the Manufacturer if the refrigerant tube length exceeds 50 feet) temperature and current-sensitive motor overloads shall be included. D. Condenser Coil: Coil shall be internally finned or smooth bore copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum plate fins. Coil shall be factory pressure and leak tested. Metal grilles shall be provided for coil physical protection. E. Condenser Fan and Motors: Condenser fan shall be direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced propeller type with aluminum blades steel hub. Fan shall be used in draw-through vertical discharge position. Fan motor shall be either permanently lubricated totally enclosed or open construction with ball or sleeve bearings and shall have built-in current and thermal overload protection. F. Controls: Condensing units shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls anct contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Control wiring shall be 24-volt and shall include fusing and control transformer. Units shall be provided with anti-short-cycle solid state timer shall be provided to prevent compressor operation for a fixed amount of time after shutdown. G. Warranty: The compressor shall be provided with a 5 year extended warranty. The warranty period shall commence upon the date of substantial completion. 2.6 FILTER A. Filter Material: Dacron or fibrous glass multi-ply fiber; 3 graduated density plies; galvanized steel, aluminum or fiberboard frame; minimum efficiency, 25 percent NBS atmospheric dust spot test. Manufacturer and Model Number a. Continental Conoply Type LD b. American Air Filter 5700 2.7 TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. Space temperature shall be controlled through the central control panel. Space temperature sensors shall be provided. Set point adjustments shall occur remotely. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT A Location: Equipment shall be located essentially as shown on drawings; however, actual placement of the unit shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the units accepted for actual installation. SPLIT PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 23 81264 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.2 SUPPORT A. General: All air handling fan and coil units shall be supported independently of ductwork or piping. 1. Horizontal: Horizontal unit shall be supported from the structure by 4 hanger rods. Unit or panel shall not be supported from the ceiling system unless specifically noted and detailed on the drawings. 2. Vertical: Vertical unit shall be supported on the return or supply air plenum with type EVS-2 .- pads. Refer to Section 23 0548, VIBRATION ISOLATION. 1 1 1 r 1 f 1 1 1 3.3 DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Supply and Return: Ducts shall be connected with flexible connectors. Refer to paragraph entitled "FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS" in Section 23 3300. 3.4 CONDENSING UNIT SUPPORT A. Ground Mounted Condensing Unit: Units shown on the ground shall be installed on a concrete housekeeping pad. Refer to the paragraph entitled "HOUSEKEEPING PADS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORT in Section 23 0529. 3.5 AUXILIARY DRIP PAN A. General: Where indicated or required by the authority having jurisdiction, horizontal concealed split package air handling units located above the ceiling or above critical equipment shall be provided with an auxiliary drip pan. Refer to the paragraph entitled "AUXILIARY DRIP PAN" in Section 23 0529. 1. Provide 1/2 inch drain connection at the lowest point; connection shall have copper drain line and discharge at a visible location above the nearest sink or lavatory unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 PIPING 2. Provide moisture sensor at the lowest point to shut off the unit if moisture is detected. A. General: Properly connect all refrigerant piping; allow adequate space for all service and operational clearances necessary; provide trap in condensate drain from the primary and secondary drain pans; slope condensate drain down toward the discharge at location indicated. 3.7 CORROSION PROTECTION COATING A. Corrosion Protection Coating: Provide corrosion coating for the following parts of the mechanical equipment where indicated. Refer to the paragraphs entitled "CORROSION PROTECTION COATING" in Section 23 0529. 1. Condenser Coil END OF SECTION 23 8126 SPLIT PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 238126-5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 23 0500, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section 23 0513, ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, are a part of this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY - " A. General: Provide labor, services, material and related items necessary to complete the installation of packaged air conditioning unit shown on the drawings or specified herein. 1.03 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 23 which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. 23 0529, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. 23 2114, PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. 23 0523, VALVES 4. 23 0519, PIPING SPECIALTIES 5. 23 0700, THERMAL INSULATION 6. 233113, DUCTWORK 7. 23 3300, DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES 8. 23 0593, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to the requirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 1, ALTERNATES 2. Division 16, ELECTRICAL 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 23 0500. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: 2. Performance Data: a. Provide the following information for each type and size of packaged air conditioning unit: (1) Sensible and total cooling capacities at the indicated design conditions. (2) Total heating capacity at indicated design conditions. (3) Airflow and airside pressure loss at design operating conditions. (4) Motor horsepower (or Watts), voltage and phase Installation Instructions: b. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each type of packaged air conditioning unit indicated, including copies shipped with the equipment. 3. Maintenance Instructions: Packaged Air Conditioning Unit 23 8130-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion a. Manufacturers printed maintenance instructions for each type of packaged air conditioning unit indicated. 1.06 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 23 0500. Comply: With the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and other Codes and Standards as adopted by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction. B. NFPA: Insulation and adhesive shall meet the flame spread and smoke generation requirementh . of NFPA-90A, 1993 Revision. C. ASHRAE: Packaged units shall be designed to conform to ASHRAE 15-92. D. UL and CSA: Units shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified as a total package. E. NRCA: Roof curbs where indicated shall be designed to conform to NRCA Standards. F. ARI: Capacities shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210/240-89 or ARI Standard 360- 86. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 23 0500. All products of a similar type shall be provided by the same manufacturer. 2.02 OUTDOOR PACKAGED EQUIPMENT A. General: The packaged equipment shall be specifically manufactured for outdoor applications. Capacity and energy efficiency shall not be less than indicated: The air entering the condenser shall be 115 degrees F. unless otherwise indicated. Each unit shall be factory assembled and factory tested. B. Cabinet: The cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gauge galvanized steel. The interior of the evaporator airside is to be thermally insulated with 2 inch thick, 1-1/2 pound density fiberglass with solid inner wall. Design of the cabinet shall allow access to compressor and all electrical connections. Asphalt or epoxy coating shall prevent water from reaching steel on the interior of the base bottom. Cabinet parts shall be cleaned and coated with zinc-phosphate or another suitable preparation, then painted with a baked enamel finish. All exterior hardware (nuts, bolts, screws, washers) shall be stainless steel. The roof of the cabinet shall be sloped to gutters to prevent rainwater from running down the sides of the unit. C. Fans and Motors: Condenser Fans: The condenser air fans shall be steel propeller type, dynamically balanced and direct-driven by a fan motor with pre-lubricated sealed ball bearings and built-in thermal overload protection. The condenser air discharge shall be provided with a vinyl coated or galvanized steel fan guard. Packaged Air Conditioning Unit 23 8130-2 CJ 1 i i] 1 t t 1 1 Cl 1 1 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2. Evaporator Fan: The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced centrifugal blower and shall be made of galvanized steel. Blower wheel shall be mounted on a solid steel shaft supported by sealed ball bearings or regreasable-type with lubrication lines extended to the outside of the cabinet Blower motors shall have pre-lubricated sealed ball bearings. The fan assembly shall be completely isolated from vibration. D. Compressors: Type: Hermetic reciprocating or scroll compressor or serviceable semi-hermetic compressor shall have crankcase heater and equipped with internal overheat-overload protection. Semi- hermetic compressor shall be equipped with isolation valves and oil pressure failure protection. 2. Mounting: Compressors shall be provided with neoprene isolators and internal spring mounting on independent dedicated rails for vibration isolation. E. Coils: The condenser and evaporator coils shall be aluminum plate-finned formed on multiple rows of seamless copper tubing arranged in a staggered tube configuration and leak-tested to 300 psig. Exterior coils shall be protected by coil guards of galvanized or vinyl coated steel. F. Condensate Drain Pan: The insulated condensate drain pan shall be stainless steel coated with corrosion-resistant elastomeric-based material. The insulation shall be a minimum of 1 inch thick fiberglass. Threaded pipe connections shall be provided on one side only and the pan shall slope toward the connection to prevent standing water. G. Outdoor Air Intake: The outdoor air intake opening shall be covered by a rain hood with a 1/2" galvanized wire mesh bird screen. The bottom of the intake shall be a minimum of 36 inches above the surrounding surface. H. Refrigerant Components: Included in the HCFC-22 refrigerant circuit shall be a condenser fan cycling head pressure control, accumulator, filter-drier, high pressure safety control (manual- reset), low pressure safety control/loss of charge protector (auto-reset), dual gauge connections for high and low pressure readings, sight glass-moisture indicator, and thermal-expansion valve. The expansion valve shall have adjustable superheat and distributors to meter the refrigerant evenly to the evaporator refrigerant circuits. Provide Schrader-type valve assembly with threaded cap for both liquid and suction lines to permit field-testing and recharging. Controls and Safeties: 1. General: Intemally wired controls shall include the compressor anti-short cycle timer, fan, blower and compressor motor contactors or starters mounted in a gasketed sheet metal control panel. The control circuit shall include a 24-volt transformer and low voltage terminal board. 2. Cooling Control: Cooling shall be controlled by a factory-installed ambient thermostat The compressor shall start on demand when the outside air temperature is above 25 degrees F. 3. Blower Operation: Blower operation shall be continuous. Leaving air temperature will be maintained by unloading the compressor. 4. Power Supply Safeties: Phase loss and low voltage safety monitor automatically stops the unit whenever a phase is lost, or when voltage level drops too low. Restart is automatic, with time delay when proper power supply conditions are restored. Packaged Air Conditioning Unit 23 8130-3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 5. Firestat: Provide a firestat in the return air to the unit to de-energize the unit when the temperature rises to above 145 degrees F. J. Power Wiring: The unit shall be provided with factory-installed branch circuiting for a single point of termination requiring only one field connection for power wiring. Blower fans, compressor motor, and condenser fan circuits shall be individually fused. 2.03 COOLING UNIT A. General: Each unit shall comply with the requirements for OUTDOOR PACKAGE EQUIPMENT as indicated above. Manufacturer. - a. Trane Company b. America standard c. Aaon B. Electric Heating Coil: Provide a factory-installed nickel-chrome electric heating coil. The coil shall be the open wire type. The installation shall include all internal wiring and branch circuit fusing. The coil shall have a minimum of 2 stages of control with airflow cutout switch and manual-reset high-temperature cutout C. Filter Section: The filter section shall provide for 2-inch thick pre-filters and 12 inch final filters installed in filter rack. The filters shall be accessible through an insulated and gasketed access door in the side of the unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Placement: The location shall be as shown; however, actual placement shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the equipment accepted for actual installation on the project in order to avoid conflict with the structure and the access to or location of other equipment. B. Clearance. Layout and carefully install units with sufficient clearances to permit proper maintenance. The space required shall be as recommended by the manufacturer including the space required for removal of the coils for maintenance. The outdoor intake shall be a minimum of 10 feet horizontal distance from any exhaust discharge or plumbing vent. C. Outdoor Air Intake Hood: The bottom of the outdoor air intake hood shall be located a minimum or 36 inches above the surrounding surfaces and a minimum of 10 foot horizontal distance from an exhaust outlet or plumbing vent. D. Coordination: Coordinate with ductwork, electrical connections and controls for a neat workmanlike installation and clear access for set-up and maintenance of unit. E. Replacement Stock Contractor shall provide one replacement heat pump unit for each resident unit type, mint in box and stored as directed by the Owner. 3.02 WARRANTY Packaged Air Conditioning Unit 238130-4 f North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion A. Extended Warranty: Each compressor shall be provided with a 5-year extended warranty. The warranty period shall commence upon the date of substantial completion. END OF SECTION U 1 t [l 1 1 11 1 r Packaged Air Conditioning Unit 238130-5 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion SECTION-260080 - TESTS AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary r Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. . 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Time: Perform verification work as required to show that the System is operating correctly in accordance with contract documents and manufacturers literature. All verification shall be done - after 3-day full operational period. B. Submission: Submit check out memos and completed testing results of all systems, cable, equipment, devices, etc., for acceptance prior to being energized or utilized. r 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance: Testing shall comply to the following standards; 1. NEMA 2. ASTM 3. NEfA 4. ANSI C2 5. ICEA 6. NFPA r PART 2 - TESTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT r A. Instruments: Supply all instruments required to read and record data. Calibration date shall be submitted on test reports. All instruments shall be certified per NETA standards. B. Adjustments: Adjust system to operate at the required performance levels and within all tolerances as required by NETA Standards. 2.2 APPLICATIONS A. Switchboards, Panelboards and Mechanical Equipment Feeders: After feeders are in place, but before being connected to devices and equipment, test for shorts, opens, and for intentional and unintentional grounds. B. Ratings 800 Volts or Less: Cables 600 volts or less in size #1/0 AWG and larger shall be meggered using an industry approved "megger" with 500 internal generating voltage. Readings shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer, for acceptance prior to energizing same. Submit 5 copies of tabulated megger test values for all cables. TEST AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 260080-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.3 GROUNDS A. Electrode Ground: The resistance of electrodes (main service) shall not exceed 10 ohms and shall be measured by The Contractor before equipment is placed in operation. Testing shall be performed on all grounding electrode installations. Testing shall be 3 point method in accordance with IEEE Standard 81. Submit all ground test readings to the Engineer in tabulated format at substantial completion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Cable Test Report: Submit Cable Test Report in Triplicate. _ B. Check Out Memos: Complete all information on forms at the end of this specification, project information, and certificate of completed demonstration memo. Submit data for examination and acceptance prior to final inspection request. C. Tabulated Data: Submit data on 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets with names of the personnel who performed the test. D. Final: Submit accepted memos before a request for final inspection. 3.2 QUANTITIES A. Quantity Submit 5 copies of the check out memo on each major item of equipment. Insert accepted memos in each brochure with the performance verification information and submittal data. END OF SECTION 260080 TEST AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 260080 - 2 1 TABULATED DATA North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion VOLTAGE AND AMPERAGE READINGS: SWITCHGEAR OR PANELBOARD: FULL LOAD AMPERAGE READINGS: ENGINEERS REPRESENTATIVE CONTRACTORS REPRESENTATIVE DATE TIME PHASE A. B. C. N. FULL LOAD VOLTAGE READINGS: DATE TIME PHASE A TO N B TO N CTON NO LOAD VOLTAGE READINGS DATE TIME PHASE A TO N BTON CTON ATOB ATOC BTOC ATOB ATOC BTOC North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A Basic Requirements: The Drawings and general-provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. General Provisions: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make ready for use complete electrical systems as specified herein and shown on the drawings. C. Provide and Install: The word "provide" where used on the Drawings or in the Specifications shall mean "fumish, install, mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready for operation". The word 'Install" where used on the Drawings or in the Specifications shall mean "mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready for operation". Perform work required by, and in accordance with, the Contract Documents. D. Installation: Provide and place in satisfactory condition, ready for proper operation, raceways, wires, cables, and other material needed for all complete electrical systems required by the Contract Documents. Additional raceways and wiring shall be provided to complete the installation of the specific equipment provided. Include auxiliaries and accessories for complete and properly operating systems. Provide electrical systems and accessories to comply with the ' NEC, state and local codes and ordinances. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical systems be suitable in every way for the use intended. Material and work which is incidental to the work of this Contract shall be provided at no additional cost to the Contract. E. Field Connections: Provide field connections to remote equipment and control panels, provided under other Divisions of these Specifications. Provide raceway, wire, and interconnections between equipment, transmitters, local indicators, and receivers. Install field connections to "packaged" equipment provided under other Divisions of these Specifications. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. General: Provide labor, materials, permits, inspections and re-inspection fees, tools, equipment, transportation, insurance, temporary protection, temporary power and lighting, supervision and incidental items essential for proper installation and operation of the Electrical systems indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide materials not specifically mentioned or indicated but which are usually provided or are essential for proper installation and operation of the Electrical systems indicated in the contract documents. B. Notices: Give notices, file Plans, pay fees, and obtain permits and approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Include all fees in the Bid Price. 1.3 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A. General: The Drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show exact locations of Raceway runs, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc. The locations of equipment, appliances, fixtures, Raceways, outlets, boxes and similar devices shown on the Drawings are BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion approximate only. Exact locations shall be determined and coordinated in the field. The right is reserved to change, without additional cost, the location of any outlet within the same room or general area before it is permanently installed. Obtain all information relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Architect. B. Discrepancies: Notify the Architect of any discrepancies found during construction of the project. The Architect will provide written instructions as to how to proceed with that portion of work If a conflict exists between the Contract Documents and an applicable code or standard, the most stringent requirement shall apply. C. Wiring: Each three-phase circuit shall be run in a separate Raceway unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise accepted by the Architect, Raceway shall not be installed exposed.- Where circuits are shown as "home-runs" all necessary fittings, supports, and boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. D. Layout: Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details. Connections to equipment shall be made as required, and in accordance with the accepted shop and manufacturer's setting drawings. E. Coordination: Coordinate final equipment locations with drawings or other disciplines. Layout before installation so that all trades may install equipment in available space.- Provide coordination as required for installation in a neat and workmanlike manner. 1.4 EQUIPMENT SIZE AND HANDLING A. Coordination: Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. If necessary, ship the equipment in sections of specific sizes to permit the passing through the necessary areas within the structure. B. Handling: Equipment shall be kept upright at all times. When equipment has to be tilted for ease of passage through restricted areas during transportation, the manufacturer shall be required to brace the equipment suitably, to insure that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment. 1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Production: The Contractor shall provide two (2) sets of black or blue line on white drawings to maintain and submit record "As-Built Documents". Label each sheet of the Record Document set with "Project Record Documents' with company name of the installing contractor in stamped or printed letters. One set shall be maintained at the site and at all times be accurate, clear, and complete. These drawings shall be available at all times to the Architect's field representatives. B. Recording: Record information concurrent with construction progress. Make entries within 24 hours upon receipt of information. The "As-Built" drawings shall accurately reflect installed electrical work specified or shown on the Contract Documents. C. Completion: At the completion of the Work, transfer changes with a colored pencil onto the second set and submit to the Architect. The "As-Built" drawings shall be made available to the Architect to make the substantial completion punch list. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS _2 1 2B05D0 1 1 1 r F L-j 1 1 t North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion D. Final: Upon Contractor's completion of the Engineers final punch list, transfer all 'As-Built" conditions and all requirements by the Engineer to a reproducible set of drawings and CAD files. Submit drawings and CAD disks for review and acceptance. The Contractor shall provide updated disks which include final As-Built conditions. 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS A. Abbreviations: The following abbreviations or initials may be used: A/C Air Conditioning AC Alternating Current ABV-CLG Above Ceiling ADA Americans with Disabilities Act AF Ampere Frame AFF Above Finished Floor AFG Above Finished Grade AHU Air Handler Unit AIC Amps Interrupting Capacity AL Aluminum AMP Ampere ANSI American National Standards Institute ASA American Standards Association AT Ampere Trip ATS Automatic Transfer Switch AUX Auxiliary AWG American Wire Gauge BC Bare Copper BIL Basic Impulse Level BMS Building Management System BRKR or BKR Breaker CAB Cabinet C Conduit or Raceway CB Circuit Breaker CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers CCTV Closed Circuit Television CKT Circuit CLEC Clock Equipment Cabinet CLG Ceiling CO Conduit or Raceway Only COAX Coaxial Cable COND Conductor CONN Connection CPU Central Processing Unit CRT Cathode Ray Terminal (Video display terminal) CT Current Transformer CU Copper CW Cold Water DC Direct Current DDC Direct Digital Control DEG Degree DISC Disconnect DO Draw Out BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1 I? DN Down DPST Double Pole Single Throw EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing EO Electrically Operated EOL End of Line Resistor EWC Electric Water Cooler FAAP Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel FCU Fan Coil Unit FLA Full Load Amperes FM Factory Mutual GF Ground Fault GFCI Ground Fault Circuits Interrupter GND Ground HOA Hand-Off-Automatic HORIZ Horizontal HP Horsepower IC Intercom ICU Intensive Care Unit IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IES Illuminating Engineering Society ' IMC Intermediate Metallic Raceway IN Inches IT Instantaneous Trip IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association JR Junction Box KCMIL Thousand Circular Mills KV Kilovolt KVA Kilo-Volt-Amps KW Kilowatts LBS Pounds LED Light Emitting Diode LT Light LTD Long Time Delay LTT Long Time Trip LTG Lighting MAX Maximum MCB Main Circuit Breaker MCC Motor Control Center MCP Motor Circuit Protector MIC Microphone MIN Minimum MLO Main Lugs Only MTD Mounted MTG Mounting MUX Multiplex (Transponder) Panel MVA Mega Volt Amps N Neutral NC Normally Closed NEC National Electrical Code NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NIC Not in Contract BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 260500 - 4 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion NF Non Fused NL Non Linear NO Number or Normally Open # Number 0 OL Phase Overload OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration P Pale PB Pullbox ' PIV Post Indicator Valve PNL Panel PR PWR Pair Power PF - Power Factor - PRI Primary PT Potential Transformer PVC Polyvinylchloride REF Refrigerator RGC or GRC Rigid Galvanized Raceway RMS Root-Mean-Square RPM Revolutions Per Minute RECPT Receptacle ' SCA Short Circuit Amps SD Smoke Detector SEC Secondary S/N Solid Neutral SPKR Speaker SPST Single Pole Single Throw SST Solid State Trip ST STD Short Time Trip Short Time Delay SW Switch SWG R Switchgear ' SWBD Switchboard TEL Telephone TTB Telephone Terminal Board TTC Telephone Terminal Cabinet TVEC Television Equipment Cabinet TYP Typical UL Underwriters Laboratories UON Unless Otherwise Noted V Volt VFD Variable Frequency Drive ' VSD W Variable Speed Drive Wire WP Weatherproof XFMR Transformer BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.7 CODES, FEES, AND STANDARDS A. Application: The codes, standards and practices listed herein generally apply to the entire project and specification sections. Other codes, standards or practices that are more specific will be referenced within a particular specification. B. Requirements: All materials and types of construction covered in the specifications will be - required to meet or exceed applicable standards of manufacturer, testing, performance, and installation according to the requirements of UL, ANSI, NEMA, IEEE, and NEC referenced documents where indicated and the manufacturers recommended practices. Requirements indicated on the contract documents that exceed but are not contrary to goveming codes shall be followed. - C. Compliance and Certification: The installation shall comply with the governing state and local codes or ordinances.. The completed electrical installation shall be inspected and certified by applicable agencies that it is in compliance with codes. D. Applicability: The codes and standards and practices listed herein, and their respective dates are furnished as the minimum latest requirements. 1. State of Florida 2. Pinellas County 3. City of St. Petersburg E. Utility Company: Comply with latest utility company regulations. F. State Statutes: Florida Statutes 1. 4A3, The State Fire Prevention Code 2. 4A47, The Uniform Fire Safety Standards for Elevators. G. Building Code. Standard Building Code (2007). H. Standards: American Society of Mechanical Engineers 1. ASME-A17.1 Elevator Code, plus Interpretations to Date. Florida Americans with Disabilities Accessibility Implementation Act (October 1, 1993) as described in Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction, Department of Community Affairs (October 1997). J. Manuals: Accessibility Requirements Manual Florida Department of Community Affairs. K Labels: Materials and equipment shall be new and free of defects, and shall be U.L listed, bear the U.L. label or be labeled or listed with an approved, nationally recognized Electrical Testing Agency. Where no labeling or listing service is available or desired for certain types of equipment, test data shall be submitted to validate that equipment meets or exceeds available standards. L. NFPA: Latest edition of the following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards: NFPA-13 Installation Of Sprinkler Systems. NFPA-20 Installation Of Centrifugal Fire Pumps. NFPA-37 Installation And Use Of Stationary Combustion Engines And Gas Turbines. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 6 North Greenwood Recreation..0oter Renovations & Expansion NFPA-54 National Fuel Gas Code. NFPA-70 National Electrical Code. NFPA-72 Installation, Maintenance And Use Of Fire Alarm Systems. NFPA-90A Installation of Air Conditioning And Ventilation Systems. NFPA-101 NFPA-780 Life Safety Code. Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection System. 1 1.8 INVESTIGATION OF SITE A. Site Renovation: Verify and coordinate existing site raceways and pipes at any excavation on ' site. Provide hand-digging and required rerouting in areas of existing Raceways and pipes within bid price. 1 1.9 SUPERVISION OF THE WORK A. Supervision: Provide one field superintendent who has had a minimum of four (4) years previous successful experience on projects of comparable sizes, type and complexity. The Superintendent shall be present at all times when work is being performed. At least one member of the Electrical Contracting Firm shall hold a State Master Certificate of Competency. 1,11 COORDINATION A. General: Compare drawings and specifications with those of other trades and report any discrepancies between them to the Architect. Obtain from the Architect written instructions to ' make the necessary changes in any of the affected work. Work shall be installed in cooperation with other Trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, Trades shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect ' B. Provide all required coordination and supervision where work connects to or is affected by work of others, and comply with all requirements affecting this Division. Work required under other divisions, specifications or drawings to be performed by this Division shall be coordinated with the Contractor and such work performed at no additional cost to Owner including but not limited to electrical work required for. 1. Door hardware 2. Roll-up doors 3. Signage 4. Elevators 5. Sliding or automatic doors 6. Mechanical Division of the Specifications 7. Landscape Architect drawings 8. Lifts 9. Laundry equipment 10. Concession Equipment 11. Interior design drawings 12. Millwork design drawings and shop drawings BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Contractor shall carefully coordinate all electrical work included in theatrical lighting, systems, audio visual drawings and provide all labor and material required to perform required work. D. Obtain set of Contract Documents from Owner's Authorized Representative or Contractor for all areas of work noted above and include all electrical work in bid whether included in Division 26 Contract Documents or not. E. Secure approved shop drawings from all required disciplines and verify final electrical characteristics before roughing power feeds to any equipment. When electrical data on approved shop drawings differs from that shown or called for in Constriction Documents, make adjustments to the wiring, disconnects, and branch circuit protection to match that required for the equipment installed. F. Damage from interference caused by inadequate coordination shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. _ G. Adjustments: Locations of raceway and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the work with interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact routing and location of systems prior to fabrication or installation. H. Priorities: Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. For .example, plumbing drains shall normally have the right of way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right of way over lines whose elevations can be changed. Modifications: Offsets and changes of direction in raceway systems shall be made to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. Provide elbows, boxes, etc., as required to allow offsets and changes to suit job conditions. Replacement: Work shall be installed in a way to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of other system components provided under this Contract requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. Raceway shall be arranged in a manner to clear the openings of swinging overhead access doors as well as ceiling tiles. K. Layout: The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to show general runs and locations of raceway and equipment, and not necessarily showing required offsets, details and accessories and equipment to be connected. Work shall be accurately laid out with other Trades to avoid conflicts and to obtain a neat and workmanlike installation, which will afford maximum accessibility for operation, maintenance and headroom. L. Contract Conflicts: Where discrepancies exist in the Scope of Work as to what Trade provides items such as starters, disconnects, flow switches, etc. such conflicts shall be coordinated between the divisions involved. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all work shall be provided complete as one bid price. M. Drawing Conflicts: Where drawing details, plans or specification requirements are in conflict and where sizes of the same item run are shown to be different within the contract documents, the most stringent requirement shall be included in the Contract. Systems and equipment called for in the specification or as shown on the drawings shall be provided as if it was required by both the drawings and specifications. Prior to ordering or installation of any portion of work, which appears to be in conflict, such work shall be brought to Architects attention for direction as to what is to be provided. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 8 ' North.Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1 N. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate the exact required location of floor outlets, floor ducts, floor stub-ups, etc, with Owner's Authorized Representative and Designer (and receive their approval) prior to rough-in. Locations indicated in Contract Documents are only approximate locations. 0. The Contract Documents describe specific sizes of switches, breakers, fuses, Raceways, conductors, motor starters and other items of wiring equipment These sizes are based on specific items of pannier consuming equipment (heaters, lights, motors for fans, compressors, ' pumps, etc.). Coordinate the requirements of each load with each load's respective circuitry shown and with -each load's requirements as-noted on its nameplate data and manufacturer's published electrical criteria. Adjust circuit breaker, fuse, Raceway, and conductor sizes to meet ' the actual requirements of the equipment being provided and installed and change from single point to multiple points of connection (or vice versa) to meet equipment requirements. Changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. P. Wofldng Clearances: Minimum working clearances about electrical equipment shall be as referenced in the applicable edition NEC Article 110, and shall include equipment installed in ceiling spaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Specified Method: Where several brand names, make or manufacturers are listed as acceptable each shall be regarded as equally acceptable, based on the design selection but each must meet all specification requirements. Where a manufacturer's model number is listed, this model shall set the standard of quality and performance required. Where no brand name is specified, the source and quality shall be subject to Engineer's review and acceptance. Where ' manufacturers are listed, one of the listed manufacturers shall be submitted for acceptance. No substitutions are permitted. B. Certification: When a product is specified to be in accordance with a trade association or ' government standard requested by the Engineer, Contractor shall provide a certificate that the product complies with the referenced standard. Upon request of Engineer, Contractor shall ' submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance. C. Basis of Bid: Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the manufacturers, materials, and equipment described in the Contract Documents. ' D. Space Requirements: Equipment or optional equipment shall conform to established space requirements within the project. Equipment which does not meet space requirements, shall be replaced -at no additional expense to the Contract. Modifications of related systems shall be ' made at no additional expense to the Contract. Submit modifications to the Architect/Engineer for acceptance. 1 2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. General: Shop drawings shall be submitted for every item listed within the Submittals section each individual specification section. One copy shall be submitted to the engineer prior to ordering equipment Refer to Basis of approval paragraph. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 9 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Responsibility: It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide material in accordance with the plans and specifications. Material not provided in accordance with the plans and specifications shall be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense. C. Official Record: The shop drawing submittal shall become the official record of the materials to be installed. If materials are installed which do not correspond to the record submittal they shall be removed from the project without any additional cost or delays in construction completion. D.- Information: The shop drawing record submittal shall include the following information to the extent applicable to the particular item; 1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number. - 2. Standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM, ICF_,4, IEEE, ISA, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA, UL, ' or other organizations, including the type, size, or other designation. 3. Dimensioned plan, sections, and elevations showing means for mounting, Raceway. connections, and grounding, and showing layout of components. ' 4. Materials and finish specifications, including paints. 5. List of components including manufacturer's names and catalog numbers. 6. Internal wiring diagram indicating connections to components and the terminals for external connections. -7. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation, operation, and maintenance. 8. Manufacturer's recommended list of spare parts. 9. Provide 112' = V-0" enlarged electrical room layout drawings for all electrical rooms. All equipment shall be indicated at actual size of equipment being provided. All dimensions and required working clearances shall be shown. E. Preparation: Prior to' submittal, shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy and contract requirements. Shop drawings shall bear the date checked and shall be accompanied by a statement that the shop drawings have been examined for conformity to Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list discrepancies with the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be returned to Contractor unreviewed. F. Basis of Review. Approval is only for general conformance with the design concept of the ' project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Contractor is responsible for quantities, dimensions, fabrication processes, and construction techniques. , G. Responsibility: The responsibility that dimensions are confirmed and correlated with proper coordination of other trades shall be included as part of the Contract Documents. The responsibility and the. necessity of providing materials and workmanship required by the , Specifications and Drawings which may not be indicated on the shop drawings shall be included as part of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for any delays in job progress occurring directly or indirectly from late submissions or re-submissions of shop drawings, ' product data, or samples. H. Ordering Equipment: No material shall be ordered or shop work started until the Engineers has officially received the shop drawings record submittal and has formally released the Contractor for submittal requirements. 1. Brochure Requirements: Submit Technical Information Brochures at the start of construction or ' no later than 30 days after Award of the Contract Each brochure shall consist of an adequately sized, hardcover, 3-ring binder for 8-1/2" X 11" sheets. Provide correct designation on outside BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-10 1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 1 cover and on end of brochure. When one binder is not enough to adequately catalog all data, an additional binder shall be submitted. J. Brochure Contents: First sheet in the brochure shall be a photocopy of the Electrical Index ' pages in these specifications. Second sheet shall be a list of Project Addresses for this project. Third sheet shall list Project Information. Provide reinforced separation sheets tabbed with the appropriate specification reference number and typed index for each section in the Electrical Schedule. Technical Information consisting of marked catalog sheets or shop drawings shall be inserted in the brochure in proper order on all items specified and shown on drawings. At the end of the brochure, provide and insert a copy of the specifications for this Division and all addenda applicable to this Division. ' K. Contractor's Review. Review the brochures before submitting to the Engineer. No request for payment shall be considered until the brochure has been reviewed, stamped and submitted for review. ' L. _ Cost: Submit cost breakdown on work in the Technical Information Brochures. The cost of material and labor for each item shall be indicated. The cost of fittings and incidentals are not ' required. M. Title Drawings: Title drawings to include identification of project and names of Architect- Engineer, Engineer, Contractors, and/or supplier, data, number sequentially and indicate in general; 1. Fabrication and Erection dimensions. 2. Arrangements and sectional views. ' .3. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections with other work 4. Kinds of materials and finishes. 5. Descriptive names of equipment. 6. Modifications and options to standard equipment required by the contract. 7. Leave blank area, size approximately 4 by 2-1/2 inches, near title block (for Engineer's stamp imprint). ' 8. In order to facilitate review of shop drawings, they shall be noted, indicating by cross- reference the contract drawings, notes, and specification paragraph numbers where items occur in the contract documents. 9. See specific sections of specifications for further requirements. N. Technical Data: Submit technical data verifying that the item submitted complies with the requirements of the specifications. Technical data shall include manufacturer's name and ' model number, dimensions, weights, electrical characteristics, and clearances required. Indicate optional equipment and changes from the standard item as called for in the specifications. Provide drawings, or diagrams, dimensioned and in correct scale, covering ' equipment, showing arrangement of components and overall coordination: 0. Same Manufacturer: In general, relays, contactors, starters, motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards, dry type transformers, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, manual motor starter switches, etc., shall be supplied and manufactured by the same manufacturer. This requirement shall apply to same type of electrical components specified in other Divisions. ' 2.3 EQUIPMENT MATERIALS, AND SUPPORTS ?x BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-11 North Greenwood Recrwdon Center Renovations & Expansion A. General: Each item of equipment or material shall be manufactured by a company regularly engaged in the manufacturer of the type and size of equipment, shall be suitable for the environment in which it is to be installed, shall be approved for its purpose, environment, and application, and shall bear the UL label. B. Installation Requirements: Each item of equipment or material shall be installed in accordance with instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer, however, the methods shall not be less stringent than specified herein. C. Required Accessories: Provide all devices and materials, such as expansion bolts, foundation bolts, screws, channels, angles, and other attaching means, required to fasten enclosures, raceways, and other electrical equipment and materials to be mounted on structures which are existing or new. - ' D. Protection: Electrical equipment shall at all times during construction be adequately protected against mechanical injury or damage by the elements. Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. If apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost or time extension to the Contract. If apparatus has been subject to possible injury, it shall be thoroughly cleaned, dried out and put through tests as directed by the Manufacturer and Engineer, or shall be replaced, if directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Contract. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT A. General: Electrical items shall be identified as specified in the Contract Documents. Such identification shall be in addition to the manufacturer's nameplates and shall serve to identify the item's function and the equipment or system, which it serves or controls. Refer to Identification Section of the specifications for additional information. 2.5 CONCRETE PADS A. General: Provide reinforced concrete pads for floor mounted electrical equipment. Unless otherwise noted, pads shall be nominal four (4) inches high and shall exceed dimensions of equipment being set on them, including future sections, by six (6) inches on all sides, except when equipment is flush against a wall, then the side or sides against the wall shall be flush with the equipment. Chamfer top edges 1/2". Trowel surfaces smooth. Reinforce pads with #5 reinforcing bars at 24" centers each way, unless specifically detailed on drawings. 2.6 SURFACE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. General: Surface mounted fixtures, outlets, cabinets, panels, etc. shall have a factory-applied finish or shall be painted as accepted by Engineer. Raceways and fittings, where allowed to be installed surface mounted, shall be painted to match the finish on which it was installed. Paint shall be in accordance with other applicable sections of these specifications. 2.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 i 1 260500-12 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1 A. Core Drilling: The Contractor shall be responsible for core drilling as required for work under this section, but in no case shall the Contractor cut into or weld onto any structural element of the project without the written approval of the Architect. B. Cutting and Patching: Cutting, rough patching and finish patching shall be provided as specified in the contract documents. Cutting and patching shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Upon completion, the patched area shall match adjacent surfaces. C. Openings and Sleeves: Locate openings required for work performed under this section. Provide sleeves, guards or other accepted methods to allow passage of items installed under this section. D. Roof Penetration: Provide roofer with pitch pans, fittings, etc., required for electrical items which penetrate the roof. Roof penetrations are to be waterproofed in such a manner that roofing guarantees are fully in force. Roof penetrations shall be coordinated with other Trades to ensure that roof warranty is not invalidated. 2.8 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS A. Sleeves: Provide sleeves for Raceways penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate necessary slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured. Watertight sleeves shall be line seal type WS. Fire rated partition sleeves shall be mild steel. Size shall be one standard diameter larger than pipe being installed or of a larger diameter to below 1/4" minimum clearance. B. Forms: Provide boxed out forms for Raceway penetrations only where allowed by the Architect. Fill opening after Raceway installation, with equivalent material. ' 2.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. General: Thoroughly instruct the Owner's Representative, to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and Engineer, in the proper operation of all systems and equipment provided. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, via the Architect, as to whom the instructions are to be given in the operation of the systems and the period of time in which they are to be given. The Architect shall be completely satisfied that the Owner's Representative has been thoroughly and completely instructed in the proper operation of all systems and equipment before final payment is made. If the Architect determines that complete and thorough instructions have not been given by the Contractor to the Owner's Representative, then the Contractor shall be directed by ' the Architect to provide whatever instructions are necessary until the intent of this paragraph of the Specification has been complied with. B. Submittals: Submit to the Architect for approval five (5) typed sets, bound neatly in loose-leaf binders, of instructions for the installation, operation, care and maintenance of equipment and systems, including. instructions for the ordering and stocking of spare parts for equipment installed under this contract. The lists shall include part number and suggested suppliers. Each ' set shall also include an itemized list of component parts that should be kept on hand and where such parts can be purchased. C. Information Requirements: Information shall indicate possible problems with equipment and ' suggested corrective action. The manuals shall be indexed for each type of equipment. Each section shall be clearly divided from the other sections. A sub index for each section shall also be provided. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-13 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. ' Instructions: The instructions shall contain information deemed necessary by the Architect and include but not limited to the following: 1. Introduction: a. Explanation of Manual and its use. b. Summary description of the Electrical Systems. C. Purpose of systems. 2. System: a. Detailed description of all systems. b. Illustrations, schematics, block diagrams, catalog cuts and other exhibits. 3. Operations: a. Complete detailed, step by step, sequential description of all phases of operation for all portions of the systems, including start up, shutdown and balancing. Include posted instruction charts. 4. Maintenance: a. Parts list and part numbers. b. Maintenance and replacement charts and the Manufacturer's recommendations for preventive maintenance. C. Trouble shooting charts for systems and components. d. Instructions for testing each type of part. e. Recommended list of on-hand spare parts. f. Complete calibration instructions for all parts and entire systems. g. General and miscellaneous maintenance notes. 5. Manufacturer's Literature: a. Complete listing for all parts. b. Names, addresses and telephone numbers. C. Care and operation. d. All pertinent brochures, illustrations, drawings, cuts, bulletins, technical data, certified performance charts and other literature with the model actually furnished to be clearly and conspicuously identified. e. Internal wiring diagrams and Engineering data sheets for all items and/or equipment furnished under each Contract. f. Guarantee and warranty data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP A. General: The installation of materials and equipment shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike and timely manner by an adequate number of craftsmen knowledgeable of the requirements of the Contact Documents. They shall be skilled in the methods and craftsmanship needed to produce a quality level of workmanship. Personnel who install materials and equipment shall be qualified by training and experience to perform their assigned tasks. B. Acceptable Workmanship: Acceptable workmanship is characterized by first-quality appearance and function, conforming to applicable standards of building system construction, and exhibiting a high degree of quality and proficiency which is judged by the Architect as equivalent or better than that ordinarily produced by qualified industry tradesmen. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-14 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1 C. Performance: Personnel shall not be used in the performance of the installation of material and equipment who, in the opinion of the Architect, are deemed to be careless or unqualified to perform the assigned tasks. Material and equipment installations not in compliance with the Contract Documents, or installed with substandard workmanship and not acceptable to the ' Architect, shall be removed and reinstalled by qualified craftsmen, at no change in the contract price. 1 3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP A. Protection and Restoration: Suitably protect equipment provided under this Division during construction. Restore damaged surfaces and items to "like new" condition before a request for substantial completion inspection. B. Handling: Materials shall be properly protected and Raceway openings shall be temporarily closed by the Contractor to prevent obstnaction and damage. Post notice prohibiting the use of systems provided under this Contract, prior to completion of work and acceptance of systems by the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall take precautions to protect his materials from damage and theft. C. Safeguards: The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain proper safety guards for the prevention of accidents that might be caused by the workmanship, materials, equipment or systems provided under this contract. D. Cleanup: Keep the job site free from debris and rubbish. Remove debris and rubbish from the site and leave premises in clean condition on a daily basis. 3.3 SYSTEMS GUARANTEE A. General: Provide a one-year guarantee. This guarantee shall be by the Contractor to the Owner for any defective workmanship or material, which has been provided under this Contract at no cost to the Owner for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion of the System. The guarantee shall include lamps, for ninety days after date of Substantial Completion of the System. Explain the provisions of guarantee to the Owner at the "Demonstration of Completed System". 3.4 FINAL OBSERVATION A. General: Work shall be completed, and forms and other information shall be submitted for acceptance one week prior to the request for final observation of the installation. 3.5 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Comply with special requirements imposed at site by Owner. This may include badging of employees, prohibition of smoking, special working hours, or special working conditions. END OF SECTION 260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-16 North Greenwood Recreation Center . Renovations & Expansion CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETED DEMONSTRATION MEMO Note to Contractor. Do not submit this form at the time Technical Information Brochure is submitted. Submit five copies of information listed below for checking at least one week before scheduled completion of the building. After information has been accepted and inserted in each brochure, give the Owner a Demonstration of the Completed Electrical Systems and have the Owner sign five copies of this form. Provide one signed copy for each brochure. After this has been done, a written request for a final inspec- tion of the System shall be made. Re: (Name of Project) (Division Number and Name) This memo is for the information of all concemed that the Owner has been given a Demonstration of the Completed Electrical Systems on the work covered under this Division. This conference consisted of the system operation, a tour on which all major items of equipment were pointed out, and the following items were given to the Owner, (a) Owner's copy of Technical Information Brochure containing approved submittal sheets on all items, including the following; (To be inserted in the Technical Information Brochure after the correct tab). (1 Maintenance Information published by manufacturer on equipment items. (2) Printed Warranties by manufacturers on equipment items. (3) Performance verification information as recorded by the Contractor. (4) Check-out Memo on equipment by manufacturer's representative. (5) Written operating instructions on any specialized items. (B) Explanation of the one-year guarantee on the system. (b) "As-Built" conditions as described in the record drawing specifications. (c) A demonstration of the System in Operation and of the maintenance procedures which shall be re- quired. (Name of General Contractor) By: (Authorized Signature, Title & Date) (Name of SubContractor) By: (Authorized Signature, Title Date) Brochure, Instruction, Prints, Demonstration & Instruction in Operation Received: (Name of Owner) By: (Authorized Signature, Title, Date) cc: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Sub Contractor and General Contractor (List names as stated in cc: above) BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 260500 -16 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 260519 - WIRES AND CABLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply -to work specified of this section. 1.2 WIRES AND CABLES A. Description: Provide a complete and continuous system of conductors as specified herein. All conductors shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of wire systems and fittings of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in the USA. B. Compliance: Materials shall comply with the following standards as they apply to the different wire types specified herein. 1. UL: a. 44 - Rubber insulated wire and cables. b. 83 - Thermoplastic insulated wires. C. 486-A-80 - Wire connectors and soldering lugs for use with copper. d. 486E - Splicing wire connectors e. 493 - Thermoplastic insulated underground feeder and branch circuit cables. 2. N FPA: a. 70 NEC 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit product data on all different types of conductors specified. 1.5 FLEXIBLE WIRING SYSTEMS A. General: Provide a flexible wiring system used to supply power to lighting fixtures, poke-thru power outlets and wall receptacles as shown on the contract documents. B. Description: The prefabricated system shall be complete with all 120 and 4 wire power getaway boxes, fixture adapters, jumper cable sets, wall switch boxes, wall power boxes, poke-thru power outlets etc. WIRES AND CABLES 260519-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Compliance: The system and its components shall comply with the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall be U.L. listed or labeled for intended use on this project and UL listed and labeled for use in return air plenum and rated to make and break under rated load. All work and materials shall comply with the National Electrical Code and applicable state and local building codes. D. Final Condition: The system shall be of construction such that when installation is complete all system components shall be metal enclosed, in a locked mode and shall comprise a fully grounded system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Conductors: Branch circuit and feeder conductors for electric power shall be copper type. Utilize THHN/THWN insulation for branch circuits and THWN/XHHW insulation for feeders, unless specifically noted otherwise. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. No aluminum wiring shall be permitted. All wire shall be sized as shown on the drawings. If no size is shown, wire shall be #12 AWG, except that branch "homeruns" over 50 ft. in length shall be #10 AWG for 120/208V circuits. Wire in vicinityof heat-producing equipment shall be type XHHW insulation. All wiring shall be manufactured in the USA and of 98 percent resistivity. #14 AWG minimum size conductors shall be used for fire alarm system. B. Taps and Splices: All copper taps and splices in #8 AWG or smaller wire shall be fastened together by means of "wirenut' connectors (Ideal or accepted substitution). All taps and splices in wire larger than #8 AWG shall be made with compression type connectors and taped to provide insulation equal to wire. All taps and splices in manholes or in ground pull box shall be made with compression type connectors and covered with Raychem heavywall cable sleeves (type CTE or WCS) with type "S" sealant coating. Provide sleeve kits as per manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Color Coding, General: All power feeders, grounding conductors and branch circuits #6 AWG and smaller shall be installed with color-coded wire with the same color used for a system throughout the building. Conductors above #6 AWG shall either be fully color-coded or shall have black insulation and be similarly color-coded with tape in all junction boxes and panels in accordance with NEC 310-12. Tape shall cover the conductor insulation within the box or panel in such a manner so as to allow standard markings to be readily observed. D. Colors. Unless otherwise accepted, color-code shall be as indicated in the Identification section of the specifications. All switchlegs, other voltage system wiring, control and interlock wiring shall be color-coded other than those listed in the Identification Section of these specifications. E. Submittals: Submit cut sheets on-all major types of wires and cables including splicing tape, and terminating/splicing lugs or connectors and cable sleeves. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. General: Branch circuit and feeder conductors shall be manufactured by one of the following: General Cable Co., Anaconda, or Southwire. WIRES AND CABLES 1 260519 - 2 1 f 1-l 1 1 1 w North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. General: All wiring shall be installed in conduit (power, low voltage and control wiring), unless otherwise indicated or specified under other Sections of this specification. All wiring shall be installed per the latest edition of the NEC. B. Connections: Conductors #10 and #12 AWG shall be connected with pre-insulated spring connectors incased in a steel shell and rated at not less than 105 degrees C. A minimum of 3/8 inch skirt shall cover the bare wires. The connector shall meet with UL approval for fixture and pressure work, and shall be "Scotch Lok" Type Y, R and B electrical spring connectors as manufactured by the 3M Company or approved equal. _ C. Connector Manufacturers: Lugs and wire connectors shall be one of the following: Bumdy Corporation, Thomas & Betts, Co., Appleton or ILSCO. D. Equipment Installations: Neatly form, train and tie the cables in panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches and equipment assemblies. END OF SECTION 260519 WIRES AND CABLES 260519 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations R Expansion WIRES AND CABLES 260519 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING 1 PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary I Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODES - A. General: Provide a grounding electrode system, as described in NEC 250, as specified herein and as indicated on plans. B. Ground Field / Ground Rods:The ground field shall consist of three 20 ft long vertically driven ground rods arranged in a triangular pattern spaced 20 feet apart. Additional ground rods shall be added as necessary to achieve the desired resistance. C. Main Metallic Water Pipe: The building's main metallic underground water piping shall be utilized as a grounding electrode, provided the metal pipe is installed in direct contact with the earth for a minimum of 10 feet. Bond the main metallic water service within 5 ft. of the entrance of the water pipe into the building. D. Building Steel: The building steel shall be utilized as a grounding electrode, provided the steel is in direct contact with the earth or is otherwise effectively grounded. 1 Ii- E. Resistance: Grounding electrode resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms. Overall resistance of the entire grounding electrode system shall not exceed 5 ohms. Provide additional grounding electrodes as required to meet this value. Refer to Section 260080 for testing requirements. 1.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR A. Grounding Electrode Conductor: A main grounding electrode conductor, bare copper, sized per NEC, shall be run in PVC conduit from main service equipment to the grounding electrodes. This conductor shall also be bonded to the following: 1. Telecommunications service ground within 20' of the electrical service 2. Lightning protection system. 3. Gas and other interior metal piping - refer to NEC. 1.4 SEPARATELY DERIVED GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Description: Provide a separately derived grounding system where indicated herein and as required by the National Electrical Code. Bond neutral and ground busses together. B. Services: Provide a separately derived grounding system for all building electrical services and step-down transformers. GROUNDING 260526-1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Multiple Buildings: Multiple buildings fed from the same electrical service shall be provided with separate grounding electrode systems, as required by the NEC and specked herein. 1.5 BONDING AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Description of System: In general, all electrical equipment (metallic conduit, motor frames, panelboards, etc.) shall be bonded together with a green insulated copper system grounding conductor in accordance with specific rules of Article 250 of the NEC Equipment grounding conductors through the raceway system shall be continuous from main switch ground bus to panel ground bar of each panelboard, and from papel grounding bar of each panelboard to branch circuit equipment and devices. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: All raceways shall have an insulated copper system ground conductor run throughout the entire length of circuit installed within conduit in strict accordance with NEC. Grounding conductor shall be included in total conduit till when determining conduit sizes, even though not included or shown on drawings. C. RedundanrGrounding: In general all branch circuits shall be provided with a redundant grounding system through the use of grounding conductors and metallic conduit. D. Bonding: In addition to connections to grounding electrodes, the main service ground shall be bonded to the lightning protection system and other underground metal piping. E. Bushings: Provide insulated grounding bushings on all metallic feeder conduits terminated within panelboards, switchboards or enclosed overcurrent devices. Provide insulated grounding bushings on all branch circuit conduits where concentric knockouts are used. F. Connection to Other Systems: Provide all required grounding and bonding connections as specified herein and as required by the National Electrical Code. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit product data on ground rods, ground wire, ground connectors, ground bars, and data on exothermic welds. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance: The entire ground system shall meet or exreed the minimum requirements NEC 250 and IEEE Std. 142 (green book). GROUNDING 260526 - 2 I North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING ELECTRODE AND BONDING CONDUCTORS A. General: Except as specified in C below, provide UL and NEC approved types of copper with THWN, THHN, or XHHW with green insulation or green tape on black insulation the entire length of conductor not in conduit. B. Size: Grounding electrode conductors shall be sized as specified herein and on the drawings, but in no case shall be smaller than required by NEC 250. C. Insulation: Conductors above ground shall be insulated, conductors run below grade shall be bare. 2.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Provide copperclad steel, 5/8 inch diameter by 20 feet long vertically driven ground rods. Use of multiple 10 feet sectional ground rods is acceptable. 2-3- CONNECTIONS A. Bonding: One piece mechanical lugs or wire terminals, properly sized and approved by the local authority having jurisdiction shall be used to bond ground wires together or to junction boxes and panel cabinets. B. Underground: All connections and bonds made underground and to building steel shall be exothermic weld type-connections. 1 2.4 INSPECTION WELLS A. Location: Provide inspection wells for all ground rods covered by concrete, paving, or other permanent materials that prevent access to ground rods. B. Description: Inspection well shall be provided with circular, flush traffic rated, grade mounted, twist lock traffic cover with the word "ground" (or similar) on the cover. Inspection test well shall allow clear access to the ground rod and exothermic weld connection of conductor to ground rod. Clearly mark ground rod locations on as-built drawings. 2.5 GROUND BAR A. Location: Provide a ground bar connected to the main service ground via a #4/0 grounding conductor in all electrical rooms with step-down transformers and in all communications rooms, or rooms with telephone distribution equipment or network electronics equipment. B. Description: Ground bar shall be 12" x 2" x %." (minimum) copper bus mounted to wall 24" AFF via insulated standoffs. All connections to ground bar shall be made via approved mechanical connections. GROUNDING 260526 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Interconnection. In addition to the main service ground, all ground bars shall be interconnected to each other via #4/0 insulated grounding conductor. Each ground bar shall also be bonded to local metallic water piping and building steel via #6 insulated grounding conductor. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.11 EXTERIOR A. Connection: The main grounding electrode conductor shall be exothermically welded to ground rods and other main system electrodes. 3.2 INTERIOR A. Installation: Equipment grounding conductors shall be installed as follows: 1. Where installed in metal conduit, both conductor and conduit shall be bonded at each end. 2. Have connections accessible for inspection and made with approved solderless connectors brazed (or bolted) to the equipment or structure to be grounded. 3. Shall in NO case be a current carrying conductor. 4. Have green insulation, except that grounding electrode conductors may be bare. B. Water Meter: Provide properly sized bonding shunt around water meter and/or dielectric unions in the water pipe. C. Bushings: Bond all grounding bushings to the equipment ground bus of the panel or switchboard, or overcurrent device in which it is located. Bond shall be made via an insulated bonding conductor of same size as equipment ground conductor run in the circuit. 3.3 TESTING A. Testing: Provide testing as required in other sections of this specification, including but not limited to sections 260080 and 260500. B. Reports: Submit impedance test reports for all separately derived services to the E=ngineer prior to project completion. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Preparation: All contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before connections are made, to ensure good metal to metal contact. END OF SECTION 260526 GROUNDING 260526 - 4 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 260533 - OUTLET BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. General: Outlet boxes shall be of such form and dimensions as to be adapted to the specific use and location, type of device or fixtures to be used, and number and size of conductors and arrangement, size and number of conduits connecting thereto. B. Ceiling Size: Ceiling outlet boxes shall be 4 inch octagonal or 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inches deep or larger as required for number and size of conductors and arrangement, size and number of conduits terminating at them. C. Wall Size, Switch, wall receptacle, telephone and other wall outlet boxes in drywall shall be 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inches deep. For exposed masonry, provide one piece 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inches deep wall boxes with appropriate 4 inches square cut We wall covers Steel City, series #52-C-49/52- C-52 or accepted substitution. For furred-out block walls, provide 4 inch square box with required extension for block depth and required extension for drywall depth. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of conduit systems and fittings of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in the USA. B. Compliance: Materials shall comply with the following standards as they,apply to the different raceway types specified herein. 1. UL-50 & UL-514 2. NEC 70 1 1.4 FLOOR OUTLETS A. General. Provide floor outlet boxes as shown on the plans. Installation shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and shall be complete with service fittings as indicated. Equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 1.5 SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLETS A. Location: Locate special purpose outlets as indicated on the drawings for the equipment served. Location and type of outlets shall be coordinated with appropriate trades involved. The securing of complete information for proper electrical roughing-in shall be included as work required under this section of specifications. OUTLET BOXES 260533-1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 1.6 SUBMITTALS A.. Submittals: Submit product data on all different types of outlet boxes and associated trim/plaster rings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE BOXES A. General: Provide standard galvanized one-piece steel outlet boxes at all concealed outlets for electric lights, switches, convenience receptacles, telephone outlets, etc. Acceptable manufacturers shall be T&B, Steel City, Raco. Surface outlet boxes and conduit bodies shall be the heavy cast aluminum or iron with external raised hubs - Appleton, Crouse Hinds or Steel City or accepted substitution. Trim rings shall also be of one piece construction. 2.2 FLOOR OUTLET BOXES A. Standards: Outlets in slab on grade shall conform to Federal Specifications No. WC-526b, Type 1, with threaded conduit hubs. B. Carpet Locations: In carpeted areas, Lexan carpet flanges shall be installed to protect carpet edges where flush floor boxes are installed. C. Construction: All assemblies shall be designed and installed to maintain grounding continuity, fireproofing and watertight integrity. Connections to boxes in slabs on grade shall be made tight or sealed to prevent entrance of moisture. D. Accessories: Box trim, service fittings and accessories shall be as required to provide a complete installation. E. Special Consideration: Flush caps removed to provide service fittings shall be turned over to the Owner. Approved manufacturer is Walkerduct. F. Manufacturer. Approved manufacturer is Walker, Raco, Steel City or Hubbell. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES A. Installation: All flush outlets shall be mounted so that covers and plates shall finish flush with. finished surfaces without the use of shims, mats or other devices not submitted or accepted for the purpose. Add-a-Depth ring or switch box extension rings (Steel City #SBEX) are not acceptable. Plates shall not support wiring devices. Gang switches with common plate where two or more are indicated in the same location. Wall-mounted devices of different systems (switches, thermostats, etc.) shall be coordinated for symmetry when located near each other on the same wall. Outlets on each side of walls shall have separate boxes. Through-wall type boxes shall not be permitted. Back-to-back mounting shall not be permitted. Trim rings shall be extended to within 1/8 inch of finish wall surface. B. Stud Walls: Outlet boxes mounted in metal stud walls, shall be support ed to studs with 2 screws inside of outlet box to a horizontal stud brace between vertical studs. OUTLET BOXES 260533 - 2 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Blank Covers: All outlet boxes that do not receive devices in this contract are to have blank plates installed matching wiring device plates. 11 3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHT A. Mounting Height: Height of wall outlets to center or bottom of box above finished floor shall be as follows, unless specifically noted otherwise. Verify all heights with the architectural plans and shop drawings for installation. The following dimensions are a guide only. Specific heights required by governing institutions and laws shall apply. 11 Switches & Dimmers Receptacles Branch Panelboards Telephone & Data Outlets 4 foot 0 inches to centerline 1 foot 6 inches to centerline 6 foot 6 inches top of panel trim 1 foot 6 inches to centerline i 1. 1 I r i 1 1 1 B. Counter Tops: Bottoms of outlets above counter tops or base cabinets shall be minimum 2 inches above counter top or backsplash, whichever is highest Outlets may be raised so that bottom rests on top of concrete block course, but all outlets above counters in same area shall be at same height it is .the responsibility of this Contractor to secure cabinet drawings and coordinate outlet locations in relation to all cabinets as shown on Architectural plans, prior to rough-in, regardless of height shown on documents. C. Wall Outlets: Height of wall-mounted fixtures shall be as shown on the drawings or as required by Architectural plans and conditions. Fixture outlet boxes shall be equipped with fixture studs when supporting fixtures. 3.3 FLOOR OUTLET BOXES A. Adjustment: Where floor or fill depth is 3 inches or more, adjustable boxes with maximum vertical and angular adjustment for after concrete pour shall be used. After pour is complete, boxes shall be set and readjusted to provide a smooth surface conforming to the elevation and slope of the surrounding finished floor. END OF SECTION 260533 OUTLET BOXES 260533 - 3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 12 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide all supports, hangers and inserts required to mount conduit, pullboxes and other equipment provided under this Division. B. Support: All items shall be supported from the structural portion of the building. Supports and hangers shall be of a type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories. Wire shall not be used as a support. Boxes and conduit shall not be supported or fastened to ceiling suspension wires or to ceiling channels. Do not install any devices supported by ceiling tiles. C. Installation: The Contractor shall lay out and provide his work in advance of the laying of floors or walls, and shall provide all sleeves that may be required for openings through floors, walls, etc. Where plans call for conduit to be run exposed, provide all inserts and clamps for the supporting of conduit. D. Systems: Provide conduit system of empty raceways including terminal cabinets, backboards and outlets as described and specified herein. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE n 1 r A. Qualifications: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of conduit systems and fittings of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in the USA. B. Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for. Install with aluminum fittings only, when specified. C. Compliance: Materials shall comply with the latest edition of the following standards as they apply to the different raceway types specified herein; 1. ANSI: a. ANSI C80_1: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) b. ANSI C80.3: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 2. UL: 1 1 a. UL 1: Flexible Metal Conduit b. UL 6: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) C. UL 360: Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit d. UL 514: Fittings for Metal Conduit e. UL 651: Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC) RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260539-1 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion f. UL 797: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) g. UL 886: Fittings for Hazardous Locations h. UL 1242: Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 3. NEMA: & NEMA TC2: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC) b. NEMA TC& Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNMC) C. NEMA TC8: Utility Duct Type E1345 d. NEMA RN1: Plastic Coated Metal Conduit e. NEMA VE-1: Ladder Cable Tray _ f. NEMA 8A, 86, 8C, & 12A: Spine Cable Tray 4. Federal Specifications: a. WW-C-581: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) b. WW-C-563: Electrical Metallic Conduit (EMT) c. WW-C-566- Flebble Steel Conduit d. WW-C-581 E: Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) e. WC-1094A: Nonmetallic Rigid Conduit (PVC) f. WC-582A Conduit, Raceway, Metal and Fittings; surface 5. ASTM: a. ASTM-F-512: Utility duct type EB-35 b. ASTM-A525 & ASTM-386: Tray manufacturers 1.4 SUBMITTALS A, Products: Submit manufacturer's product data, including technical information on each type of raceway system; 1. Conduit - Metal 2. Conduit fittings 3. Plastic (PVC) solvent 4. Black mastic coating for conduit 5. Insulating and grounding bushings for conduit 6. Galvanizing and protective coatings for conduit B. Compliance: Product data shall show compliance with this section of the specifications, including U.L. label, manufacturer and manufacturers written installation instructions. 1.5 CONDUIT A. General: Provide a complete and continuous system of raceways to maintain a protected path for wires and cables to distribute electric power, and low voltage systems throughout the project, utilizing U.L. listed and labeled materials. B. Accessories: Provide conduit accessories of types, sizes, and materials, as specified herein complying with manufacturers published product information, which match and mate conduit and tubing. RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260539 - 2 1 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Interior Minimum Size: Minimum conduit size for light and power systems shall be 3/4 inch conductoor all power and lighting circuitry homeruns from panelboard to outlet box at first power consuming devices. The remainder of circuitry may be in 1/2 inch conduit, if it contains no more than 4 conductors per conduit (excluding the equipment grounding conductor), and phase conductors no larger than #12 AWG. Switchlegs may be % inch conduit unless otherwise noted on drawings. D. Site Underground Conduit: Unless otherwise noted, minimum underground raceways shall be 1 inch conduit. Homeruns from the branch circuit overcurrent device, through any control devices to the first exterior junction box or consumption device shall be 1 inch minimum. E. System Conduit: Provide end bushings on all conduits. F. Pull-Strings: Provide pull strings in all empty raceways. Pull strings shall be nylon and shall be impervious to moisture. Pull strings installed in one inch and smaller conduits shall have a tensile strength of not less than 30 lbs. Pull strings installed in conduits larger than 1 inch shall a tensile strength not less than 200 lbs. G. Conduit Bends: The use of NEC Table 346.10 Exception is not allowed. 1.6 LOCATIONS A. Materials Above Grade: The following conduit types are to be installed above grade where specifically noted herein; 1. Electrical metallic tubing (thin wall) 2. Flexible metal conduit 3. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit 4. Galvanized rigid steel conduit B. Materials Below Grade: The following conduit types are to be installed below grade where specifically noted herein; 1. Rigid galvanized conduit (heavy wall) 2. Schedule 40 PVC C. Materials on Roofs: The following conduit types are to be installed on roofs where specifically noted herein; 1 1-1 1 1 t 1. Rigid steel conduit PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING A. Fittings: Steel fittings shall be fitted with nonremovable insulated throats, and male threaded ends provided with a locknut. B. Locknuts: Provide locknuts for securing conduit to enclosures with sharp edges for digging into metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening. RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260539 - 3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.2 BUSHINGS A. Bushings: Bushings shall be provided on all terminations, mounted on the ends of all EM-r connectors 1-1/4 inches and larger and within all equipment. B. Construction: Bushings shall have a flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth insides to prevent damage to cable insulation. - C. Insulating Ring: Mold a phenolic insulating ring into sizes 1-1/4 inches and larger. D. Grounding: Provide a screw type grounding terminal on all sizes. - 2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT A. Conduit: Conduit ends shall have precision cut hiLtorque threads. One end of the conduit shall have a coupling and the other shall be covered with a color-coded plastic thread protector. Conduit shall be manufactured in 10 foot lengths. B. Fittings: Fittings shall be cut groove steel. Cast fittings are not acceptable. 2.4 FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT A. Conduit and Standards: A continuous length, spirally wound steel strip, zinc-coated, each convolution interlocked with following convolution into a helixform. Product shall meet Federal Specification WW- C-566 and UL 1242. B. Fittings: Provide conduit fittings for use with flexible steel conduit of the threadless hinged clamp type, and a male threaded end provided with a locknut. 2.5 1. Straight terminal connectors shall be one piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit. 2. 45 and 90 degree terminal angle connectors shall be 2 piece body, with removable upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit. LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT A. Conduit: Plastic jacketed (PVC) liquid-tight flexible steel conduit with copper bonding conductor, and steel material galvanized inside and outside. B. Fittings: Provide cadmium plated, malleable iron fittings with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings with insulated throat. 2.6 HEAVY WALL PVC CONDUIT (SCHEDULE 40) A. Conduit: Schedule 40, 90 degrees C. UL rated, PVC conduit shall be composed of High Impact PVC (polyvinyl chloride C-2000 Compound), and shall conform to industry standards, and be UL listed in accordance with Article 347 of National Electrical Code for underground and exposed use. Materials must have tensile strength of 55 PSI, at 70 degrees F., flexural strength of 11,000 psi, compression strength of 8600 psi. Manufacturer shall have five years extruding PVC experience. RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260539 - 4 1 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.7 SUPPORTING DEVICES A Hangers: Hangers shall be made of durable materials suitable for the application involved. Where excessive corrosive conditions-are encountered, hanger assemblies shall be protected after fabrication by galvanizing, or approved suitable preservative methods. B. Materials: Insert anchors shall be installed on concrete or brick construction, with hex head machine screws. Recessed head screws shall be used in wood construction. An electric or hand drill shall be used for drilling holes for all inserts in concrete or similar construction. Installed inserts, brick, shall be near center of brick, not near edge or in joint. Drilled and tapped, and round head machine screws shall be used where steel members occur. All screws, bolts, washers, etc., used for supporting conduit or outlets shall be fabricated from rust-resisting metal, or accepted substitution. Gunpowder set anchors are not permitted. C. Exterior: Supporting devices for exterior use shall be 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted on drawings. D. PVC Coated Conduit: Supporting devices for PVC coated conduit shall be as manufactured by the PVC coated conduit manufacturer and shall match in color and appearance. 2.8 TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARDS A. Terminal Boards: Telephone Boards shall be 8 foot high and of the width shown unless otherwise noted. Terminal boards shall be 3/4 inch A/C grade exterior plywood painted light gray with fire resistant paint. B. Grounding: Each terminal board shall be provided with a #3/0 AWG bare copper conductor installed in 3/4 inch PVC conduit to the building service ground. Service ground attachment shall be made with an approved lug. Provide 6 foot excess ground conductor length at terminal board for connection to equipment. C. Terminal Board Conduits: Conduits at Terminal board locations shall be neatly racked on a Kindorf Type rack secured to wall above and below terminal boards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUITS A. Provide as a minimum 3/4 inch conduit from each of the following device locations to cable tray or corridor ceiling cavity when cable tray is not available. Provide insulated bushings at ends of all conduits. 1. Telephone 4. Security 2. DDC 3. Data I B. All fire alarm wiring shall be run in conduit. i C. Provide plenum-rated cable for all systems conductors. RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260539 - 5 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 TELEPHONE COMPANY COORDINATION I A. Telephone Company. The Contractor shall notify the Telephone Company when the conduit system is being installed. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with the Telephone Company as required. CABLE N COMPANY COORDINATION A. Cable Television Company. The Contractor shall notify the Cable Television Company when the conduit system is being installed. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with the Cable Television Company as required. IDENTIFICATION OF BOXES " A. Tags: During installation of pull strings all pull strings shall be marked with vinyl tags indicating where - the opposite end may be found. BLANK PLATES A. Plates: Unless otherwise noted all outlet boxes shall receive blank plates matching the finish of plates on electrical devices in the same room. " RACEWAY INSTALLATION ' A, Support All raceways shall be run in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be properly supported and in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC_ Supporting conduit and boxes with wire is not acceptable. Exposed raceways where allowed, shall be supported with clamp fasteners with toggle bolt on hollow walls, and with lead expansion shields on masonry. All conduits shall be securely fastened in place with at least one support per eight foot section. Support within one foot of changes in direction. All required hangers, supports and fastenings shall be provided at each elbow and at no more than one foot from the end of each straight run terminating at a box or cabinet. The use of perforated iron for supporting conduits shall not be permitted. The required strength of the supporting equipment and size and type of anchors shall be based on the combined weight of conduit, hanger and cables. Horizontal and vertical conduit runs may be supported by one-hole malleable straps, clamp- backs, or other accepted devices with suitable bolts, expansion shields (where needed) or beam- clamps for mounting to building structure or special brackets. B. Hanger Installation: Where 2 or more conduits 1 inch or larger run parallel trapeze hangers may be used consisting of concrete inserts, threaded solid rods, washers, nuts and galvanized "V angle iron, or Unistrut cross members. These conduits shall be individually fastened to the cross member of every other trapeze hanger with galvanized cast one hole straps, clamp backs, bolted with proper size cadmium machine bolts, washers and nuts. If adjustable trapeze hangers are used to support groups of parallel conduits, U-bolt type clamps shall be used at the end of a conduit run and at each elbow. f asten J-bolts, or approved clamps, shall be installed on each third intermediate trapeze hanger to each conduit. C. Sealant: Provide a closed cell silicone foam sealant rated to provide a rating equal to the wall, ceding, or floor assembly rating. Provide seals for the exterior of conduit penetrations consisting of a cast-in- place sleeve with a compressible rubber gasket between the conduit and the sleeve. Provide seals for the interior of the conduit penetrations consisting of gland type sealing bushing or closed cell silicone foam. Provide duct seal inside an appropriate seal-off fitting to seal the interior of the conduit system from water seepage or hazardous gases. RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260539 - 6 1 i 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Routing: Conduits shall be run parallel to building walls wherever possible, exposed or concealed as specified, and shall be grouped in workmanlike fashion. Crisscrossing of conduits shall be minimized. E. Location: All raceways except those from surface-mounted switches, outlet boxes or panels shall be run concealed from view. Surface mounted devices and equipment shall be specifically noted on the contract drawings. It is the intent that all raceways shall be run concealed unless specifically noted. F. Protection: All raceway runs, whether terminated in boxes or not, shall be capped during the course of construction until wires are pulled in and covers are in place. No conductors shall be pulled into raceways until the raceway system is complete. G. Coordination: All raceways shall be kept clear of mechanical equipment and plumbing fixtures to facilitate future repair or replacement of said fixtures without disturbing wiring. Except where it is necessary for control purposes, all raceways shall tie kept away from items producing heat. H. Masonry Installation: All raceway runs in masonry shall be installed at the same time as the masonry so that no face cutting is required, except to accommodate boxes. 1. Arrangement: All raceways shall be run connecting outlet to circuits generally as shown on the drawings. Provide circuit connection arrangement shown. Actual final arrangement shall be in accordance with the record drawings section as specked herein. J. Grounding: All branch circuit and feeder raceways shall have a copper system ground conductor within the conduit throughout the entire length of the circuit. All conduits shall be electrically continuous to establish redundant grounding. 1. Branch circuit raceways shall have an insulated equipment grounding conductor installed within the conduit raceway system. 2. Grounding conductor shall be included in total conduit fill determining conduit s¢es, even though not shown on drawings. 3. Grounding conductors run with feeders may be bare. K. Empty Raceways: Raceways which do not have conductors provided under this Division of the specifications shall be left with an acceptable nylon pullcord in raceway. L. Manufacturer. Rigid Metallic Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, Flexible Steel Conduit, Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit, and PVC Conduit shall be manufactured within the United States, and each shall be as manufactured by one manufacturer. M. Roof Installation: Conduit installations on roofs shall be kept to a bare minimum. Conduit shall be supported above roof at least 6 inches using approved conduit supporting devices. Supports shall be fastened to roof using roofing adhesive as specified in other sections of this specification. N. Firewall Installation: Provide pullboxes, junction boxes, fire barrier at fire rated walls etc., as required by NEC Article 300 where required. 0. Dissimilar Metals: Avoid the use of dissimilar metals to reduce the possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling. RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260539 - 7 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion P. Sealoff Fittings: Provide conduit sealoffs wherever the raceway system enters a hazardous or wet area or areas of drastic temperature change such as coolers, freezers, etc. as required. 0. Identification: Provide appropriate identification as required by codes and as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the methods specified herein. R. Conduit: Conduits shall be anchored down to prevent floating while pouring in concrete. 3.7 SITE UNDERGROUND CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. General: All underground raceways (with exception of raceways installed under floor slab) shall be installed in accordance with Section 300-5 of the NEC except that the minimum cover for any conduit or duct bank shall be two feet, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 3.9 B. Stubs: Spare conduit stubs shall be capped and accurately dimensioned on as-built drawings. C. Separation: All conduit run underground, or stubbed above floor shall be separated with plastic interlocking spacers manufactured specifically for this purpose, or shall be strapped to IGndorf channel supported by conduit driven into ground or tied to steel. D. Coating: Rigid metallic conduit installed underground shall be coated with waterproofing black mastic before installation, and all joints shall. be recoated after installation. RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT A. Locknuts: Rigid steel box connections shall be made with double locknuts and bushings. Turn down on threads to solidly connect raceway to box or enclosure. B. Bushings: Grounded insulated bushings shall be used on all rigid steel conduits terminating in panels, wire gutters, or cabinets. Bushing shall be impact resistant plastic molded in an irregular shape at the top to provide smooth insulating surface at top and inner edge. Material in these bushings must not melt or support flame. PVC CONDUIT A. Floor Penetrations Exposed: Where PVC penetrates a floor in an exposed location from underground or in slab, a black mastic coated steel conduit elbow shall be used. B. Location: No PVC shall be allowed anywhere except underground or in slab. C. Ground Conductor Installation: All individual bare copper ground conductors (i.e. service, transformer, or lightning protection grounds) shall be installed in PVC conduit. D. Joints: PVC joints shall be solvent welded. Threads shall not be permitted on PVC conduit and fittings, except for rigid steel to PVC couplings. Installation of PVC conduit shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. E. Restrict Support PVC conduit shall not be used to support fixture or equipment. F. Bends: Field bends shall be made with an approved hotbox Heating with flame and hand held dryers are prohibited. RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260539 - 8 1 r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 3.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Vibrating Equipment Connection: All connections to motors or other vibrating equipment (except dry type transformers) or at other locations where required shall be made with not less than 12 inches of flexible liquid-tight steel conduit, using special type of connectors with strain relief fittings at both terminations of conduit, Kellems Type 074-09 Series or accepted substitution. B. Normal Type: Flex connectors shall have insulated throat and shall be T & B 3100 Series or accepted substitution. C. Angle Type: Use angle connectors wherever necessary to relieve angle strain on flex conduit. 3.11 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING A. Location: Install Electrical Metallic Tubing (thin wall) inside buildings, above the ground flcorwhere not subject to mechanical injury. B. Handling: All cut ends shall be reamed to remove rough edges. END OF SECTION 260539 1 1 1 RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260539 - 9 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 260539-10 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 il--- North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary - Conditions and Division 1, Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION - A. Extent: Electrical identification work as required by the Contract Documents or other specifications. B. Types: Electrical identification work specified in the Contract Documents include the following; 1. Electrical power, control and communication conductors. 2. Operational instructions and warnings. 3. Danger signs. 4. Conduits, boxes, etc. 5. Distribution Equipment. 6. Cabinets. 7. Equipment/system identification signs and tags. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of electrical identification products of types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of identifying labels and markers for wiring and equipment. C. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standard 969, "Marking and Labeling Systems", pertaining to electrical identification systems. D. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI Standard A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems", and ANSI Standard Z53.1 "Color Designation." E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standard No's. WC-1 and WC-2 pertaining to identification of power and control conductors. F. ADA Compliance: All signage shall meet ADA standards. Identification for maintenance purposes shall be as specified herein. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit shop drawings of all identification materials to be used for this project. Submit one sample of each item with the shop drawings. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS 260553-1 1:1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS OR MANUFACTURERS A. General: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering electrical identification products which may be incorporated in the work include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Alarm Supply Co, Inc. 2. Direct Safety Co. 3. Ideal Industries, Inc. 4. LEM Products, Inc. 5: Markal Company 6. National Band and Tag Co. 7. Panduit Corp. .8. Seton Name Plate Co. 9. ' Thomas and Betts Co. 10. Carlton Industries, Inc. 2.2 LANGUAGE A. General: Provide all products in this section in English. 2.3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than one single type is specified for an application, selection shall be at the installers option, however, provide a single selection for each application. B. Conduit System Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible, permanent, conduit markers, extending 360 degrees around conduits. Markers shall be designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint, matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker, or pretensioned snap-on. Color shall match system printing requirements. C. Voltage Marking: Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering which indicates voltage of the conductor(s) in conduit. Provide 4 inch minimum length with 7/8 inch minimum lettering for 2 inch and smaller conduit. Provide 8 inch minimum length with 1-1/4 inch minimum lettering for larger than 2 inch conduit. Provide one marker for each 20' section of conduit. Color shall match system printing requirements. D. Plasticized Tags: Manufacturer's standard preprinted or partially preprinted accident prevention and operation tags, of plasticized card stock with mattfinish suitable forwriting, approximately3-1/4x5-5/8 inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large size primary wording, e.g., DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE. E. Baked Enamel Danger Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard "DANGER" signs of baked enamel finish on 20 gauge steel; of standard red, black and white graphics; 14 x 10 inch size exceptwhere 10 x 7 inch is the largest size which can be applied where needed, and except where larger size is needed for adequate vision; with recognized standard explanation wording, and subsequent directive e.g. HIGH VOLTAGE, KEEP OUT; BURIED CABLE, DO NOT DIG; LIVE PARTS, DO NOT TOUCH SWITCH. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS 260553 - 2 1 ?l M North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion F. Engraved Plastic Laminate Nameplates: Provide engraving phenolic plastic laminate, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with 1/16 inch thick lines with square standard pica lettering and wording as specified herein, black face and white core plies (letter color) for normal systems, kelly green and white for equipment, bright orange and white for critical, bright yellow and black for life safety, and red and white for fire alarm and where noted in the specifications. Punch for mechanical fastening, except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. Material thickness shall be 1/16 inch. Provide beveled edge in order to eliminate sharp corners. Provide self-tapping stainless steel round head screws. Provide contact type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or shall not penetrate the substrate. Adhesive nameplate shall be permanently installed. Titles shall be 1/2 inch high and all other lettering shall be 1/4 inch high. G. Junction Box Identification: Provide neat indelible felt tip, stenciled marking on junction boxand pullbox covers indicating panel and circuit numbers contained irl the box Letter sizes shall be 1 inch high " minimum. Provide non-stenciled markings inside the junction box and on the exterior edge to match the cover markings. 2.4 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in electrical identification work, with corresponding designations specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by the manufacturer and as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of the electrical system equipment. Complywith ANSI A13.1 pertaining to minimum sizes for letters and numbers. B. Size: System identification labeling consists of providing minimum 1/2 inch high stenciled black letters for raceway systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Installation: Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, as required by the NEC and as specified herein. B. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require a field finish application, install identification after completion of such application. C. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for the identification of electrical work. D. Hazards: Identify all rooms, spaces, and equipment that house potential electrical hazards, and label with appropriate signage or indicators. 3.2 RACEWAY SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Color Coding: All electrical conduit shall be identified by color-coding. Apply color-coded identification on electrical conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner. Utilize a stencil for application of paint. B. Identification: Identify all raceways provided or utilized as part of this project as follows; 1. Apply bands 10 feet on center along the.raceway system and at each side of walls or floors, and at branches from mains. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS 260553 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1 2. Identify the following services: Service a. Low Voltage b. Fire Alarm c. Telephone d. Computer e. -Telephone/computer Spot Painting on Rough-in: Label 120/208 Voltage Fire Alarm Telephone Computer Telephone/computer F1 L a. Conduit, raceways, boxes, backboxes, panelboards, etc. shall be spot painted. Conduit shall be identified within 6 inches of the box or enclosure. The entire box and coverplate shall be painted. b. Use following colors for color bands and for color coding: Svstem Color (1) Normal Power Royal Blue (2) Miscellaneous Communications Brown (3) Fire Alarm Red (4) Telephone\Computer Black 3.3 CABLEICONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. General: Apply cable/conductor identification, including voltage, phase and feeder number, on each cable/conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where conductors of more than one circuit or communication (such as color coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for the project's electrical work. B. Color Coding: Color code all power and lighting cable. Use wire colored by integral pigmentation, making the wire 100 percent colored. Where not practicable or available (in larger conductor sizes), color code the wire by using colored plastic tape, painting the ends accessible at junction or pull boxes, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. Use the following chart as applicable; 3.4 OPERATIONAL IDENTIFICATION AND WARNINGS A. General: Provide identification and warning wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of the electrical systems. Provide identification and warning identification if necessary for signage to help prevent misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel. B. Plasticized signs: Install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearlywritten messages adequate for the intended purposes. C. Locations: In addition to installation of danger signs required by governing regulations and authorities, install appropriate danger signs at locations indicated and at locations subsequently identified as constituting dangers for persons in or about the project. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS 260553 - 4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations R Expansion D. High Voltage: Install danger signs wherever it is practicable, for persons to come into contact with electrical power of voltages 208 volts to ground or higher. E. Critical Switches/Controls: Install danger signs on switches and similar controls, regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent operation (by anyone) could result in significant danger to persons, or damage to or loss of property. F. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Provide warning signage at the entrance to each such room; identify the - hazard, and direct non-qualified personnel to stay away. G. Equipment Identification: - 1. Nameplates: Install an engraved phenolic plastic laminate nameplate on each unit of electrical equipment in the building, including central or master unit of each electrical system unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system.- Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. 2. Locations: Provide nameplates for each unit of the following categories of electrical work: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. (1) Provide a nameplate outside above the door (if equipped with one) listing its designation, voltage, source and circuit number. b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities. C. Motor starters. d. Disconnect switches. e. Enclosed circuit breakers. I 1 [i 1 1 t .1; 3. Viewing: Install nameplates at locations indicated and where not otherwise indicated at a location for the best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. a. Secure to substrate with rigid fasteners. Utilize adhesive where fasteners cannot penetrate substrate. 4. Names: The names or wording used for a particular machine shall be the same as the one used on all motor starters, disconnects and remote button stations nameplates for that machine. END OF SECTION 260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS 260553 - 5 1 1 i 1 1 1 t t fl t 1-1 1 1-1 i North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion SECTION 262420 - SAFETY SWITCHES PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Switches and all components shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA and UL. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Product data shall be submitted on: 1. Switch rating, including voltage, continuous current, short-circuit. 2. Fuse ratings, when,applicable. 3. Cable terminal sizes. 4. Enclosure type. 5. Conduit entry/exit locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES A. General: All disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty type, unless specifically noted otherwise. Switches shall be fusible or non-fusible and sized as noted on the drawings. Provide units manufactured by Siemens, GE, Square D or Cutler Hammer. B. Switches shall be 240 volt rated on systems up to and including 120/240V. All switches serving motor loads or shall be horsepower rated. C. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure, unless otherwise noted. All switches mounted outdoors shall be NEMA Type 3R or as noted NEMA Type 4X, stainless steel. D. Provide lugs on disconnect switch as required to accept conductors called for on drawings. E. Provide switches with an externally operated handle; quick make quick break mechanism; the handle shall be interlocked with the switch cover by means of a defeatable interlock device. The switch shall be lockable in the "off"position with a padlock. F. Switches shall have arc suppressors and pin hinges. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. Switch blades and jaws shall be plated copper. Provide with line side terminal shields. SAFETY SWITCHES 262420-1 L North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 2.02 FUSES A. General: All fuses shall be of the same manufacture to retain selectability as designed. No fuse shall be installed until equipment is ready to be energized and after tightening of all electrical connections, inspection of all ground and grounding conductors and a megger test of adequate insulation to ground of all circuits. B. Current Limiting: All fuses shall be current-limiting with 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity. C. 601 Amps and Above: Fuses rated 601 amperes and larger shall be UL Class L and have a minimum time-delay of 45 seconds at 300% rating and have 0-ring gas seals at the end bells. D. 600-Amps and Below. Fuses rated 600 amperes or-less, installed ahead of circuit breakers or circuit breaker panels, shall be UL Class K-1. Fuses rated 600 amperes or less for all general power circuits shall be dual-element, UL Class K-5 time-delay type. They shall be self protecting from extraneous heat. E. Motor Circuits: Fuses installed in individual motor circuits shall be dual element time-delay type, UL Class K-5. Use fuse reducers when fuse clip spacing is larger than the fuse dimension. F. Rejection Fuses: Fuses called for to be rejection type are to have rejection fuse holders. G. Identification Label: A fuse identification label, showing type and size, shall be placed inside the door of each fused switch. Labeling for rejection type fused switches shall read "Waming-Use Only Current Limiting Fuses Class _, Type _,_, , MFR _," engraved in red laminated plastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. General: Examine area to receive safety switch and assure that there is adequate clearances to meet NEC requirements and normal maintenance issues. B. Correction: Start work only after any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide safety switches in complete accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and all applicable codes. B. Support: Switches shall be rigidly supported and installed per manufacturers recommended supporting instructions. Switches shall not be directly mounted to masonry walls; Use Kindorf, uni-strut or similar support. C. Storage and Delivery: Safety switches shall be delivered to the site during that phase of installation in order to avoid storing switches on site where damage may occur. Replace any damaged parts prior to energizing. Cover to avoid damage to finish. H. Operations and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions for tightening connections, cleaning, operation and maintenance. SAFETY SWITCHES 262420 - 2 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations S Expansion 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. General: Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. B. Connections: Tighten lug connections and mechanical fasteners. C. Finish: Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 262420 SAFETY SWITCHES 262420 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 262726 -WIRING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1,2 DESCRIPTION _ - A. General: Provide factory fabricated wiring devices in type, color and electrical rating for the service indicated to provide convenient access to the electrical system for portable and permanent connections, and control of fixed outlets. B. Ratings: Voltage and ampere rating of switches and receptacles shall be marked on the device, and ' shall conform to Voltage and Ampacity of system to which applied. C. Hardware: Devices consist of all the necessary hardware to complete an installation and provide a margin of safety by inaccessibility of live electrical components. 1 3 RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be companies regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices,. of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Acceptable manufacturers are Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, and Leviton Manufacturing. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical . installation work similar to that required for the project. C. Compliance: Comply with the latest edition of the following standards; 1. NEMA WD 1, WD3 and WD5 2. UL 5, 20 and 231 3. ANSVIEEE Standard C62.41-1980 (Formerly IEEE 587) a. Test withstand voltage surges of up to 6000 volts and current surges of up to 200 amperes without damage. D. Warranty: Provide a minimum one-year warranty from time of final acceptance. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Wiring Devices: Submit manufacturer's product data on all wiring devices listed on the drawings including; 1. Colors 2. Dimensions 3. U.L. Label 4. Finish WIRING DEVICES 262726 -1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations &.Expansion 5. Voltage 6. Wiring diagrams 7. Application information B. Coverplates and Identification: Submit type of identification used for ooverplates to comply with the Identification Section as specified herein. Screws to match coverplate color. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination: Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of all wiring devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES A. Twenty Ampere Receptacles: Provide commercial specification grade single or duplex receptacles, 2- pole, 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, 20 ampere, 120 volts, with metal plaster ears, side wiring, NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. B. Color: Devices connected to the normal system shall be white in color, unless otherwise noted. C. Device Type: Unless otherwise noted, in all public areas, provide all receptacles as the duplex modular type. Provide standard devices in non-public areas such as storage rooms, janitor's closet, penthouses & mechanical spaces, and electrical rooms. D. Construction: Heavy duty nylon face and wraparound mounting strap, locked into and on the body, utilizing heavy-gauge brass ground contacts riveted to strap. Include automatic self-grounding spring to assure ground continuity between mounting strap and metal wall box T-slot one piece copper alloy contact wipes which interface with plug blades inserted at 3 points. Line terminals shall be screw terminals and accept #14 to #10 AWG copper conductors. E. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall be Pass & Seymour, Leviton or Hubbell. 2.2 Pass & Se mour Leviton Hubbell P/S 15A P/S 20A 15A 20A 15A 20A 6262-ISP 6362-ISP 8280-1 8380-1 8200 HIS 8300-HIS SWITCHES A. Toggle Switches: Provide specification grade, fast-make positive-break, flush single-pole, three and four way, silent operation toggle switches, 20 ampere, 120 volt AC with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equipped with plaster ears, and side-wired screw terminals. B. Two Pole Switches: Provide two pole switches where drawings indicate the switching of 208 volt systems consisting of two phase conductors. WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 t r North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Security Key Switches: Provide key switches where drawings indicate, where a degree of security requires limited access to control of the lighting system. D. Pilot Light Handle: Handle glows when switch is on. Handle color shall be clear, unless otherwise indicated. E. Thermal Switch: Provide fractional horsepower switch with melting alloy type overload relay, with number of poles to coordinate with the equipment being controlled. Surface or flush mounted cover, as required, equipped with padlocking device and pilot light. Provide overload relay heaters for each pole of the switch, sized per the manufacturer's instruction, and adjust heater size to permit normal operation of the motor. F. Color. Match receptacle devices. - 2.3 PLUGS AND CONNECTORS A. Standard: Comply with NEMA Standards Pub. No. WD1. ' - 2.4 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES A. Faceplates: Unless otherwise noted, provide smooth faced nylon, single and ganged switch, receptacle, telephone, blank and other outlet wall plates for wiring devices, with ganging and cutouts as required B. Multigang: Provide all necessary hardware and frames to properly mount various devices in combinations. C. Exterior Device Covers: Provide 'Weatherproof" duplex with stainless steel hinged cover. Device opening shall be standard or modular, to be compatible with the device provided for elsewhere in these specifications. D. Color: Unless otherwise noted, provide colored faceplates to match devices listed elsewhere in these specifications. 1 2.6 PRODUCT DESIGN SELECTION A. Standard Commercial Specification Grade Receptacles: Provide standard commercial specification grade receptacles as follows; Description Leviton Hubbell P & S 20 amp Simplex #5801 #5351 #5351 20 amp Duplex #CR20 #CR20 #5342 20 amp Duplex GFCI 20 amp Duplex Isolated Grid. #6898 #5362-IG #GF-5352 #IG-5362 #2091-S #IG-6300 20 amp Duplex TVSS #5380 #5352-IS #6362-SP ' B. Motor Starter Switches: Provide motor starter type switc hes as follows; WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion Description uare D Manual motor starter Class 2510 switch with overloads Manual motor starter Class 2510 switch with overloads and pilot light C. Device Covers: Provide device covers as follows; Description Leviton Hubbell P & S Weatherproof stainless - #5221-5222 WP-8 steel coverplate Weatherproof stainless ---- ---- SP-26L steel coverplate locking type PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. General: Provide wiring devices, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and National Electrical Contractors Associations "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Completion: Delay installation of devices until wiring and wall finish is completed. C. Support; Devices shall be securely supported to box, not supported to device plate. Device shall trim out flush with front of plate. Do not support the device by loosening device mounting screws and attaching the coverplate for leveling. D. Adjustment: Provide receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess building materials, debris, etc. Adjust devices to plumb when tightened, and in position to receive faceplate. Devices shall not be leveled by using the mounting screws, outlet boxes shall be flush to wall finish prevent leveling problems. Tighten devices and provide securely, so that there shall be no movement during usage. E. Position:. Position ground pin at the top of the device in vertical application, unless otherwise noted. F. Wring: Provide screw terminal connections using a single conductor only. Do not "back-stab" devices. Provide single whips for all multiple conductor connections within each box. 3.2 APPLICATION OF COVER PLATES A. Mounting: Provide coverplates in true vertical or horizontal alignment as applicable. Plates shall be properly secured by means of screws which have heads with finish matching the plate. Secure plates so as to maintain a snug fit against wall surfaces with no gaps. WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4 f 1 1 F North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion B. Replacement: Replace all coverplates which are warped, cracked, chipped, or whose color does not match the balance of the installation. Replace screws whose threads do not allow the drawing up tight of the coverplate to the device. 3.3 CLEANING A. Soiled Devices: Clean devices soiled prior to acceptance inspection, to remove all debris and foreign materials, such as paint, varnish, drywall compound, etc. B. Solutions: Do not use liquid cleaning solutions, etc. on the face of the devices without written direction from the Engineer/Architect. 3.4 TESTING A. Ground testing: Provide ground testing procedures as specified herein. Prior to energizing circuity, test wiring devices for electrical continuity, and for short circuits. B. Polarity: Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices for proper polarity, and to demonstrate operations as required in this and other sections of this Specification. C. Recording: Record all tests as required in other sections of this specification. END OF SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5 1 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Description of System: Light fixtures provided under this Division shall be provided completewith lamps and all necessary trim and mounting hardware, and installed as shown on the drawings. Light fudures shall be neatly and firmly mounted, using standard supports for outlets and Mures. Lamps shall be included in the system guarantee for a period of 90 days after final acceptance of the building. All fixtures and associated products shall be UL listed for the application intended. 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted for all fodures ballasts, lamps, special accessories, etc. Submittals for failures that require modifications either as specked or as required to fit this projects' architectural field conditions (i.e. luminous ceiling, wall/slot fixtures, special fodures) shall also be provided. 1. Shop drawings shall be complete showing all dimensions and installation instructions required for this project's architectural/field conditions. 2. Shop drawings for exterior post/pole mounted light fadures shall be provided and shall clearly indicate handhole and lightning protection ground lug mounted to post/pole at handhole inside post/pole. Submit information on pole mounting, concrete base, etc. ' S. Prc 1. 2. ' 4. 5. 6: 8. 9. )duct Data: Product data shall be submitted for all light failures showing: dimensions U.L. Label fusing metal gauge lens/louver thickness finish voltage lamps ballasts 1 C. Product data shall be submitted showing manufacturer's written recommendations for storage and protection, and installation instructions. 1 LIGHTING 265100-1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection: Physically protect fixtures against damage as recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fusing: All fluorescent fixtures provided under this Division which do not have electronic ballasts shall be individually fused with a renewable fuse in an external GLR holder. All fluorescent ballasts shall be CBM-ETL accepted, and shall be of the automatic thermal resetting type Class P. Provide ten extra renewable fuses to the Owner. B. Testing: All fixtures shall adhere to UL Test Standard No. 1571 and Section 410-65(c) of the National Electrical Code. . C. Mounting: The contractor shall provide fixture trims and supports as required to match type of ceiling system. No ceiling fixture shall be ordered until the Ceiling System Installer has given written acceptance of the method and location of fixture hanging and fixture type. Fixtures shall be supported independent of the suspended ceiling system. Provide closed link jack chain at all four comers of fixtures utilizing a trapeze inverted "Y" connection. Provide individual supports at all four comers when trapeze connections conflict with mechanical work. D. Labels: All light fixtures and ballasts shall be UL listed. All light fixtures shall not have any labels exposed to normal viewing angles. This includes manufacturer labels and U.L. labels. All labels shall be concealed within the body of the fixture. No manufacturers name or logo shall appear on the exterior of any light fixtures unless accepted in writing by the engineer. E. Exterior Fixtures: All lighting fixtures mounted outdoors subject to dampness and insects shall have gasketing material between lens door and frame to completely seal interior of fixture. Knockouts and holes in fixtures housing shall be closed and sealed. All fixtures shall be complete with lamps, shielding, brackets, concrete bases, anchor bolts and all necessary fittings and accessories for a complete installation. 2.2 ELECTRONIC BALLAST A. General: Ballast shall be electronic type, high power factor and shall be covered by a three-year warranty against defects. Warranty shall include payment for normal labor costs of replacements of inoperative in-warranty ballasts. Ballast shall be rated for voltage system to which applied. The electronic ballast shall incorporate the following min. features: 1. Solid state ballast shall be compatible for use with F-32(32W), F-25(25W) and F-17(17W) straight biax type lamps. 2. Ballast shall be high frequency (20-62.5 KHz) and operate without detectable flicker. 3. Ballast shall be constant current rated 95 percent power factor. 4. Ballast shall have a thermo-setting, non-toxic, fire retardant partial filler to serve as a conformal coating and protective insulator against both internal and external damage. LIGHTING 11 e 265100 - 2 1 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion t line d i er npu 5. Ballast shall have internal regulation of power consumption and light output un voltage fluctuations. 6. Ballast shall be minimum "A" sound rated and operate quiet. 7. Ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C. 8. Ballast shall contain MOV transient surge protection. 9. Ballast shall not cause RFI interference. ' 10. Ballast shall have total harmonic distortion of less than 20 percent. 11. Ballasts (including compact fluorescent ballasts) shall be Instant Start Type B. Manufacturers: All ballasts shall be compatible to lamps provided. Ballasts shall be provided by one of the following manufacturers. No substitutions are allowed: 1. MagneTek . 2. Advance 3. Valmont 4. Motorola ' 2.3 HID BALLASTS - A. General: High intensity discharge ballasts shall be constant wattage auto transformer, high power factor type with renewable type KTK fuses in HEB holders. Voltages shall complywith system to which applied. Provide ten extra renewable fuses to the Owner. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Valmont, Advance, MagneTek. C. Indoor HID Ballasts: Ballasts shall be encapsulated in standard fluorescent type ballasts cases for ' quiet operation. Ballasts shall be high power factor. Sound rating shall be minimum "B". D. Ballasts: All ballasts shall be compatible with lamps provided. Ballast shall be manufactured by one of ' the following: 1. Valmont 2. Advance 3. MagneTek 2.4 T-8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General: Provide lamps as follows: 1. 2 foot lamps, T-8, 17 watts, 4100 degrees K, 80 minimum CRI, 1350 minimum initial lumens, ' 20,000 average life. 2. 3 foot lamps, T-8, 25 watts, 4100 degrees K, 80 minimum CRI, 2150 minimum initial lumens, 20,000 average life. 3. 4 foot lamps, T-8, 32 watts, 4100 degrees K, 80 minimum CRI, 2850 minimum initial lumens, ' 20,000 average fife. B. Design Selection: OSRAM-Sylvania, GE, or Philips. 1 LIGHTING 265100 - 3 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.7 2 FOOT BIAX LAMPS A. General: Lamps shall be 40 watts, 4100 degrees K, CRI of 82 minimum, 3150 lumens, 20,000 average rated hours. B. Design Selection: GE, OSRAM or Philips. 2.8 COMPACT FLUORESCENT A. Lamps shall be 4100 degrees K, CRI of 82 minimum. Lamps 13 watts and below shall be rated minimum 10,000 hours life. Lamps 18 watts and above shall be rated minimum 20,000 hours life. Refer to light fixtures schedule for wattage of lamps. B. Design Selection: 1. OSRAM-Sylvania 2. GE 3. Philips PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Sealing: Ducseal shall be installed to seal all conduits entering exterior light fixtures from underground. B. Instructions: Install all fudures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NEC. C. Suspended Installation: Pendant mounted fluorescent fixtures installed in exposed ceiling areas are to be suspended from structure with all-thread rods and 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch Kindorf channels, full length of fixture/row. Mount outlet box at structure with flexible connection to fixture. D. Coordination: Coordinate fixtures installed in mechanical rooms with piping and ductwork prior to installation and relocate fixtures as required to provide proper illumination and access. E. All ballasts shall be securely mounted to eliminate resonate humming. 3.2 LAMPS A. Lamps: Provide two extra lamps for every HID lamp type. Provide ten extra lamps for every incandescent lamp type. Provide ten extra lamps for every fluorescent lamp type. B. Lamps shall be "burned in" for a period of 30 days prior to substantial completion of the project. All lamps requiring replacement (flickering, burr out, etc.) during this period through 90 days after Owner Acceptance shall be done so at no additional cost. 3.3 CLEAN-UP LIGHTING 265100 - 4 1 1 1 i i r i i North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion A. Luminaires: Prior to the Owner move-in, the Contractor shall clean all fixtures and remove any dust or dirt. Wash lens and glassware using cleaner such as ' Windext' and dry with absorbent cloth. Clean plastic per manufacturers recommendations; do not wipe. Clean "Alzak" aluminum surfaces (reflectors, fadure cones and the like) per manufacturer's recommendations being careful to remove fingerprints and smudges. - END OF SECTION 265100 LIGHTING 265100 - 5 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion SECTION 283111 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. ' 1.2 DESCRIPTION - A. Furnish and install an extension ofthe existing Notifier multiplex system. The system shall incorporate _ signal modules, addressable true alarm modules, and relay modules. Provide control outputs and monitor points for system function as described in this specification, and as shown on the drawings. The system shall utilize distributed processing techniques, be fully solid state (with exception to relays outputs for control function), be microcomputer based and use digital addressing techniques. All initiation devices shall be displayed on the Graphic Command Center (GCC) located in the landside communications center and engineering along with graphic displays showing floor plans with exact ' locations. The graphics shall have rooms labeled and icons indicating type of device with address being displayed upon alarm. The system shall be an extension of the existing Notifier Fire Alarm System. This system shall be fully usable as a "'U. L." listed fire alarm, and conform to all state and local codes covering this project. ' B. All work and materials required to perform this section, whether shown on the drawings or not shall be included to provide a complete and working system. Contractor shall provide monitoring connections for individual annunciation to the fire alarm system for all fire protection valves. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. The contractor shall visit the proposed site and familiarize themselves with local conditions, and the nature and extent of work. Contractor shall be fully aware of all aspects of the drawings and specifications prior to bid. ' B. Provide a factory-trained technician for supervisory use on the project during all control panel connections, adjustment testing, and system certification. C. All individual components of the system shall be manufactured and supplied by Notifier. All control panels and devices shall bear the same manufacturer's name. ' D. The contractor performing this work shall be a Certified Alarm System Contractor I or Certified Unlimited Electrical Contractor, as described in Florida Statutes 489, Part 11, and Florida Department of Professional Regulation. E. Warranty Acceptance: The Contractor must warranty service and make available to the Owner, a duly authorized and franchised distributor who shall service the fire alarm system and supply on-the- premise maintenance by factory trained service technicians during normal working hours. ' F. Warranty Period: The Contractor shall provide maintenance at no additional cost to the Owner for a period of 24 months from the date of substantial completion of the installation. Maintenance shall be for the standard use of the system and does not include damage caused by natural forces or physical abuse. The Contractor shall also agree that service, when provided at other than normal working hours, shall be made at a normal working hours labor rate. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111 -1 1 . North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations B Expansion- G. A copy of the manufacturers' warranty shall be provided with closeout documentation and included with the operation and installation manuals. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Fire Alarm submittals shall be submitted according to the general guidelines of this specification, including the special provisions which follow: 1. Tab indexes shall be provided which separate controllinterface equipment, alarm devices, automatic detection devices, manual devices, and system cabling. 2. The cover for the fire alarm submittal shall contain: a. The project name. b. The project building name. C. Submitting company name, address, and telephone number. B. Contractor shall submit full shop drawings indicating the following: 1. Schematic diagrams for buildings, including equipment. 2. Wiring diagrams, indicating connections between equipment. 3. Description of operation. 4. Control panel, interface/control of HVAC equipment, elevator, and smoke shutters. 5. Manufacturers catalog cut sheets indicating all devices to be used, inclusive of supplementary equipment and wiring. 6. Normal and emergency battery calculations for all devices. 7. Complete riser diagram for each system indicating wiring sequence of all alarm devices and control equipment. 8. Technical resume of project supervisor, and factory trained technician performing services for the project. 9. Full company resumes indicating years in business and a list of similar installation with telephone numbers and contacts at each location. 10. Copies of professional license of contractor, any sub contractor, and the project supervisor. 11. Manufacturers qualifications indicating years in business, service policy, warranty definitions, and a list of installations similar to installations in the State of Florida. 12. Proof that the submitting contractor is an authorized distributor of the product submitted, or written statements indicating the employment of services of an authorized distributor to perform work on the project. 13. AutoCAD (registered) Rel. 14 compatible drawings of the building layout to be used to extend the existing color graphic interface. Upon award of the contract copies of the electronic systems drawings shall be made available on diskette, without cost, to the Contractor for development of these drawings. C. Submittal shall be complete with all items listed above. Partial submittals shall be returned to the contractor immediately upon receipt for resubmittal, and will not be reviewed. Drawings shall not be less than 8'/" x 11' in dimensions, and shall bear the project name, and represent all symbols used. ' AutoCAD Rel. 14 floor plans with fire alarm devices shown will be made available to the successful contractor at no cost D. The control panel schematic, including build out of new modules selected, shall be submitted on a ' single diagram. E. The Contractor shall provide hourly Service Rates and Sem' Annual inspection prices, performed by a , factory trained and authorized personnel, for this installation with the submittal. Proof of training and authorization of the servicing personnel shall be included in the submittal. The hourly service rates shall be guaranteed for a one-year period unless otherwise specified. , ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111-2 ' North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion I F. Close-out Submittals: Two (2) copies of the following Manual shall be delivered to the Building Owners representative at the time of system acceptance. The close out submittals shall include: 1.. Point to Point diagrams of the entire Fire Alarm System as installed. This shall include all connected Smoke Detectors and addressable field modules. All drawings shall be provided in CAD and supplied in standard dwg format. Vellum plots of each sheet shall also be provided. A system-generated point-to-point diagram is required to ensure accuracy. 2. The application program listing for the system as installed at the time of acceptance by the building owner and/or Locat AHJ (Disk and Hard copy printout). 3. Name, address and telephone of the authorized factory representative. 4. All drawings must reflect device address and programmed characteristics as verified in the _ presence of the engineer and/or the end user unless device addressing is electronically generated, and graphically printed. 5. Operating manuals covering the installed Fire Alarm System 1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection: Physically protect smoke and heat detectors against damage as recommended by - manufacturer. Minimize exposure of detectors to dirt and dust from construction. Provide plastic covers during construction. Remove covers after the project has been cleaned and is ready for operation. Testing must be done after the removal of protective covers. ' B. Packaging: Store equipment in original packaging. Store inside well ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, dust, extreme temperatures, and humidity. C. Damage: Remove and replace with new, all broken pull stations, detectors, annunciation devices and other accessories, damaged before final acceptance at no additional expense to the contract. No allowance shall be made for breakage or theft before final acceptance. 1.6 MAINTENANCE ' A. First Year Tests: The Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, observe the systems in operation and conduct tests to assure that systems are performing in full compliance with specified requirements at least twice during the initial 6 months of operation. The testing shall be coordinated with a designated Owners representative, at a time convenient to the Owner, with results reported in writing to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. This Specification must be conformed to in its entirety to ensure that the installed and programmed System will accommodate all of the future requirements and operations required. Anyspecifiied item or operational feature not specifically addressed will be required to be met without exception. 1 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111-3 1 - North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment furnished for this project shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and otherfacilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer. If any of the equipment provided under this Specification is provided by different manufacturers, then that equipment shall be recognized as compatible by both manufacturers, and "Listed" as such by Underwriters' Laboratories. B. System installation and, operations shall be verified by the manufacturer's representative and a verification certificate presented upon completion. The manufacturers representative shall be responsbTe for an on-site demonstration of the operation of the system and-initial staff training as required by the Architect and/or Engineer. C. The system shall be capable of detecting the electrical location of each intelligent device including new and existing devices. It shall be possible to display the intelligent device map on a computer. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Firms shall be regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment types and service required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years. B. Service Availability: The supplier shall have sufficient stock on hand and have a fully equipped service organization capable of guaranteeing response time within 8 hours of service calls, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week to service completed systems. C. The Engineered Systems Distributor of the Fire Alarm Equipment specified herein shall provide a copy of their certificate of successful completion of an authorized Training Course given bythe Manufacturer of the Fire Alarm Equipment. D. Installer: The installing firm shall have at least three years of successful supplying and installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project. E. Equipment design is based upon equipment manufactured by Notifier. Due to the nature of the project, and the requirement for amendment to the existing Fire Alarm Service Agreement, no substitutions shall be permitted, without the authorization of the Hillsborough County Aviation Authority. 2.4 AUDIO VISUAL SIGNALS A. Equivalency: All strobe appliances or combination appliances with strobes shall be capable of providing the "Equivalent f=acilitation" that is allowed under the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibilities Guidelines (ADA(AG)), and shall be UL 1971, and ULC S526 Listed. B. Same Manufacturer. All appliances shall be of the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Panel specified to assure absolute compatibility between the appliances and the control panels, and to assure that the application of the appliances is done in accordance with the single manufacturer's instructions. C. Visual Alarms: The strobes shall have a red metal face plate. They shall provide 75 cd, (or candela value as indicated on plans), synchronized flash outputs. The strobe shall have lens markings oriented for wall mounting. Removal of an installed strobe to change the lens markings shall not be acceptable. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111-4 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion D. Audible Alarms: Provide electronic homs. The hom shall have a red plastic housing. Homs shall be selectable for high or low dBA output Selection of low or high output shall be reversible. Homs shall be selectable for steady or temporal rated output Selection of steady or temporal output shall be reversible. A synchronized temporal pattern sound output level of 100 dBA at 10 feet shall be provided. E. Audio-Visual Alarm 1. Provide audbMsual alarms. The device shall have a red plastic housing and shall be selectable for high or low dBA output Selection of low or high output shall be reversible. Horns shall be selectable for steady or temporal output - Selection of steady or temporal output shall be reversible. <A synchronized temporal pattern sound output level of 97 dBA average shall be provided. 2.6 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL STATIONS i A. Manual fire alarm pull stations shall be single action, semi-flush, non-coded, normally open with two contacts. A downward pull of the lever shall activate a contact to initiate a pre-alarm. A key switch on the pull station shall activate a second contact that will initiate a general alarm. Keys for the general alarm switches shall match keys used in pull stations located in e)asting pull stations of the TlAfacility. B. Station shall remain actuated until station is reset by means of a special key. This station-reset key shall match keys used for this purpose in e)asting pull stations of the TIA facility. 2.6 ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS A. The detectors shall be of the addressable photoelectric type and shall utilize a light emitting diode (LED) and light sensing photodiode positioned within a sensing chamber. The LED shall emit light to the photodiode at all times. Upon entry of smoke or other materials, light from the LED shall be scattered about the sensing chamber causing the detector to enter a pre-alarm condition. The threshold sensitivity of detectors shall be maintained and adjustable from the control panel. All detectors shall be a two-wire device configured for Class B circuits. Alarm conditions shall be generated by the control panel upon comparing the stored value and sensor value of a particular device. B. Detector bases shall be individually addressable thereby allowing the removal of detectors and replacement without special programming to the detector. C. Each detector or detector base shall incorporate a steady state light to indicate if the device is in alarm and connections for use with remote tamps. ' D. Detector bases (or directly adjacent to base) shall be labeled with the assignment point configured in the system. E. All detectors shall be listed under UL 268. 2.7 ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC DUCT DETECTORS A. The air duct mounted detectors shall operate on a cross sectional air sampling principle to overcome stratification and skin effect. The air duct detector shall consist of a photoelectric detector mounted in an air duct sampling assembly with sampling tubes that protrude across a minimum of 75% of the width of the duct for sizes 24' and below, and the entire width of the duct for sizes 24" and above. The air duct detector shall be installed in the duct as indicated in the manufacturer's instructions. The air sampling tubes shall conform to the dimensions of the air duct construction and shall be constructed of ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111-5 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion %0 EMT tubing. Sampling tubes that span the entire width of duct shall protrude through the side of the duct and finish with an escutcheon plate. B. The lamp in the detector and at the remote lamps shall light to indicate the initiation of the alarm. The detector base shall have terminals for making all connections; no soldering shall be required. If maintenance is required, the disassembled detector shall be capable of normal handling without causing damage to components such as field effect transistors. Detector, when duct mounted in non- metallic (fiberglass), shall be mounted on sheet metal collar installed in duct so that detector is firmly secured even after repeated removal. Detector housings shall be adequately gasketed to prevent air leakage from the duct or detector housing. Hinged access doors.shall be provided as required to permit access to detectors above non-accessible ceilings or in -chases. Door shall be labeled with an engraved laminate label reading: "Fire Alarm Duct Detector." C. Each detector or detector base shall incorporate a steady state light to indicate if the device is in alarm and connections for use with remote lamps. D. Detector bases shall be individually addressable thereby allowing the removal of detectors and i replacement without special programming to the detector. E. Detector bases shall be labeled with the assignment point configured in the system. Labels shall be printed, background color to match base, and permanently affixed to the base or detector housing. F. Duct detectors shall have a supervised output for a fan shutdown relay and be programmable for activation upon any alarm. Contacts shall be rated at 10 Amps. G. All detectors shall be listed under UL 268. 2.8 REMOTE TEST STATION A. A remote test station shall be provided for each duct or concealed detector to test smoke detector operation remotely. Test stations shall be located in readily accessible locations, labeled with the identification of the HVAC unit associated with the detector, and when the HVAC unit location is not obvious from the location of the test station, a permanently engraved sign shall be installed at the test station location, which graphically depicts access to the HVAC unit. The test station shall contain a lamp(s) to indicate alarm. Labeling shall be complete and indicate the AHU unit number, supply or return duct, and the addressable point assigned to the detector being monitored. 2.9 THERMAL DETECTORS: ANALOG TYPE A. Automatic heat detectors shall be analog type rated at 135 degrees fixed temperature and rate-of-rise type, ceiling-mounted, unless noted. Heat detector shall show unit in alarm. Provide point addressable auxiliary modules with each detector that is not analog. B. Detector bases shall be labeled with the assigned point configured in the system. Labels shall be printed and permanently affixed. 2.10 NON ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULE A. Modules shall be provided for all non-addressable system devices. These devices include but are not limited to: 1. Waterflow switches 2. Tamper switches 3. Thermal detectors 4. Fire pump controller and low air for pre-action systems per NFPA ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111-6 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 5. Generator controller per NFPA 2.11 ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL MODULE WITH ISOLATION RELAY A. Modules shall be provided for interface and control of other systems in the facility. These include, but are not limited to: smoke shutter door operation, fire and exit door release in conjunction with the access control system, elevator recall services, fire sprinkler system valves, etc.... 2.12 FIRE ALARM ANNNCIATOR PANEL (FAAP) A. Location: Provide a FAAP at the main entrance to the building as determined by the local fire marshall. B. Mounting Height: 60 inches above floor to centerline. - - C. Control: The FAAP shall have the same control functions as the FACP. FAAP shall have 80 character r - LCD display to provide the same annunciation as the main control panel. 2.13 AIR HANDLING SYSTEM SHUTDOWN ADDRESSIBLE MODULE A. Operation: Provide a data addressable module at each air handling system and exhaust fan for shutdown on alarm from the fire alarm system as per the systems operation description. The unit shalt be wired such that it shall be self monitoring for integrity. A failure of the relay or associated wiring shall cause unit shutdown. The coil voltage of the relay shall match the fire alarm control panel voltage and a fire alarm signal shall initiate interruption of the air handling unit starting circuit. 2.14 DOOR HOLD OPEN DEVICES A. Equipment: Devices as indicated on the drawings shall be as follows: 1. Door solenoid holder/closer header type 24 volt where required. 2. Two piece magnetic door and wall mount unit 24 volt where required. B. Operation: Door holders shall be deenergized from the FACP during alarm. C. Power: 24 VAC power shall be provided from the power supply of the FACP. 2.15 FIELD CONTROL PANELS A. Materials: Provide a multiplex system using distributed memory, processing and control figured in a regenerative network. Insure survivability in life safety emergency situations. Provide RS-485 datalines as standard. B. Configuration: Provide Style A dataline configuration as required. Each field panel shall be capable of f regenerating into a fully operational system as specified herein. C. Configuration: Provide Style B dataline configuration as required. Each field panel shall be capable of regenerating into a fully operational system as specified herein. D. Interaction: Alarm silence, trouble silence and drill switches shall remain coordinated and interactive with remaining operative panels and other system components. E. Spare Capacity. Provide each cabinet with capacity for 2 additional full size modules to be installed at a later date. F. Mounting Height: 72 inches above floor to top. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111-7 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 2.16 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Operation: Smoke Dampers or combination Smoke and Fire Dampers shall operate as specified herein. B. Power. Power for electrically operated Smoke Dampers or combination Smoke and Fire Dampers shall be from the same power source as the Air Handing Unit or Exhaust Fan where the associated duct is controlled by that damper. Shut down of Air Handling Unit or Exhaust Fan for servicing shall cause associated dampers to close. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The entire system shall be installed in a skillful manner in accordance with approved manufacturers' manuals and wiring diagrams. The contractor shall furnish all condui , wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for the complete installation. All wiring shall be of the type recommended by the NEC, approved by local authorities having jurisdiction far the purpose, and shall be installed in dedicated conduit throughout. B. All penetration of floor slabs and fire walls shall be fire stopped in accordance with all local fire codes. C. End of Line Resistors shall be furnished as required for mounting as directed by the manufacturer. D. All wiring shall be installed according to NEC standards per the drawings submitted by the authorized Engineered Systems Distributor, unless otherwise noted. E. Installation: Provide all conduit, cable, equipment, accessories and materials as detailed in the manufacturers' installation manual and require for the satisfactory operation of the fire alarm system, the elevator detection system, mechanical systems control, and the interface between components and systems. F. Mounting Heights: 1. Install manual pull stations 48" AFF to centerline of device. 2. Wall mounted homstspeakers shall be located 80-inches (minimum) and 96-inches (maximum) above the finished floor measured to bottom of device. I 3.2 CONDUITS A. Related documents: the requirements of section 260539, Raceways and conduit shall apply to this work. B. Raceways shall be minimum W EMT unless otherwise noted. All Fire Alarm system junction boxes and conduit shall be painted red. Raceway systems shall be complete to insure electrical continuity for grounding purposes. Ceiling mounted devices shall be served.with minimum W flexible metallic tubing and connectors on both ends. C. Maximum allowable wirefill shall be 40%. D. Provide galvanized steel sleeves when conduits pass through walls/floors, sized for at least %a' clearance. Maintain fire rated integrity of penetrations. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111-8 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CEILING DETECTORS A. General: All ceiling mounted detectors shall be installed in accordance with requirements of NFPA 72. Detectors shall be positioned to avoid drafts from supply air diffusers and an adequate distance from equipment producing sudden temperature changes which would result in nuisance false alarms. Ceiling smoke detectors shall be so located as to not allow supply air grills to impede the effective operation of the detector. Position detector a minimum of 3 feet from supply air grills. B. Spacing: The corridor system layout shall maintain a maximum 30 feet on center and 15 feet from the ends of all corridors spacing. Additional detectors shall be located within 5 feet and no closer than 12 inches of doors in smoke walls. C. Protection: Provide temporary protection for all detectors installed prior to completion of construction. D. Location: Locate smoke detectors a minimum of at least 15 feet from any type of furnace, hot water heater, or a gas space heater. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF DUCT DETECTORS A. General: Installation of duct mounted smoke detector housings and sampling tubes within the supply and return air ductwork shall be done by an experienced sheet metal worker. B. Location: Detector shall be mounted at least 6 duct widths downstream, from any duct opening, deflection plates, sharp bends or branch connections. Provide air pressure differential test data to engineer in areas where distance is limited by physical restraints. C. Assurance: Proper air velocities shall be maintained per the manufacturer's specifications. D. Wiring: It shall be the Contractor's responsibUity to provide the proper backbox and sampling tubes for installation within the ductwork. All electrical connections shall be completed by the Fire Alarm Contractor as required for a complete system. E. Access: Provide access panels in ductwork to afford proper service and maintenance of the duct detector. 3.5 DOORS IN SMOKE WALLS r s fl 1 t A. Hold Open Devices: All doors in smoke walls shall be required to have magnetic door hold open devices. Doors normally kept closed or locked such as toilets, dressing rooms, closets, and mechanical/electrical rooms. Do not require hold-open devices. B. Type: Contractor shall review all doors in the smoke walls to determine the most appropriate type of door holder. Doors with no convenient adjacent wall require the installation of header type units. C. Identification: Doors in smoke walls not protected by magnetic hold-open devices shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer and be provided with a sign, mounted at normal viewing height with the following statement. "Fire Door- Keep Closed At All Times" The sign shall be of laminated plastic with 2 inches high minimum letters, red on white background. The sign shall be permanently secured to the door with brass screws minimum #4. D. Smoke Detectors: Smoke detectors located at doors in smoke walls shall be located no further than 5 feet and no less than 1 foot from the door. 3.6 INSPECTIONS AND INSTALLATION TESTING A. Local Authority Having Jurisdiction: Equipment shall be installed and located in accordance with requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Demonstration: Upon completion of installation and inspection by the Contractor, an authorized Owner representative shall physically inspect the installed equipment, workmanship, and witness Contractor performed acceptance tests of the fire alarm systems that demonstrate compliance to specifications. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111-9 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion C. Personnel: The Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel as required for acceptance tests and any tests required by inspecting authorities. D. Deficiencies: The Contractor shall correct all system deficiencies and make all necessary adjustments at no cost to the Owner. Perform another acceptance test after correction of deficiencies. E. Notification: Before proceeding with any testing, inform the staff of the location where the alarm signal will sound to prevent any unnecessary action. At the conclusion of testing, those previously notified (and others necessary) shall be further notified that testing has been concluded. F. Hazardous Locations: Any method or device used for sensing in an atmosphere or process classified as hazardous by Article 500 of NFPA 70, National Electrical code, shall be listed, and suitable for such use. G. Reports: Records of all inspections and tests shall be made and submitted at the conclusion of the work. 3.7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS: I A. Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination required with the elevator vendor in order to provide wire/conduit to interface points in elevator equipment room for elevator cables, and elevator recall and shutdown functions as required by NFPA and ANSI 4A sections on elevators. Test elevator recall operation (see inspection and testing form attached to this specification). 3.8 WIRING AND COLOR CODES: A. Fire alarm raceways shall be utilized only for the detection, alarming, or auxiliary functions associated with the Fire Alarm system. Wiring for other systems is strictly prohibited. Splices shall be located only in junction boxes containing a fire alarm device with approved connectors, or in terminal cabinets utilizing barrier strips and spade lugs. Fire alarm pipe and boxes shall be painted red. B. Terminal cabinets shall be laid out, prior to wire pulling to determine the amount of terminal strips required and clear space between each strip. Conductors shall be neatly bundled upon entry to the cabinet, and "fanned" out on an as needed basis. Conductors shall individually exit the main bundle directly adjacent to the lug at which they will be terminated. C. System wiring shall be as required for the system configuration. Special emphasis shall be placed on the use of conventional wiring in locations where required. Use as per manufacturer specification. D. All wiring shall test free from shorts, opens, grounds, or other faults. E. Wiring color code for the system circuits shall be as follows: Alarm/Supervisory initiating Alarm Indicating Visible Indicating Control Circuits (AHU Control, Door Control) (Elevator Control, Ex Fans) other Circuits. AC Power Red- Positive Black- Negative Twisted Shielded Yellow Jacket Orange- Positive Brown- Negative Pink- Positive Gray- Negative- 24V Yellow-120V Red & Black- (Remote Lamps, Etc...) Pink & Gray-(Distributed Control Power) Phase- Black Neutral- White Grounding- Green ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111 -10 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion F. Maximum allowable wirefill in conduit shall be 40%. G. Pull Strings to be provided in all conduits. 3.9 DEVICE LABELING 1 A. Label all initiating devices with their associated node number, channel number and address (device number). B. Label all indicating devices with their associated signal circuit number. 3.10 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING r 1 1 1 1 1 1 t A.- Protection: Physically protect smoke and heat detectors against damage as recommended by manufacturer. Minimize exposure of detectors to dirt and dust from construction. Provide plastic covers during construction. Remove covers after the project has been cleaned and is ready for operation. Testing must be done after the removal of protective covers. B. Packaging: Store equipment in original packaging. Store inside well ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, dust, extreme temperatures, and humidity. C. Damage: Remove and replace with new, all broken pull stations, detectors, annunciation devices and other accessories, damaged before final acceptance at no additional expense to the contract. No allowances shall be made for breakage or theft before final acceptance. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of trained manufacturers representative. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all the functions as specified. 3.12 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS A. The Fire Alarm System specified herein shall be installed by a Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor. B. Field Connected Devices may be installed and wired, and primary power may be wired by licensed contractors under the direct supervision of a Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor. 3.13 EXAMINATION A. Prior to the commencement of any of the work detailed herein, an examination and analysis of the area(s) where the Fire Alarm System and all associated components are to be installed shall be made. B. Any of these area(s) that are found to be outside the manufacturers' recommended environments for the particular specified products shall be noted on a Site Examination Report which shall be given to the Building Owners' Representative, and the local AHJ. C. Any shorts, opens, or grounds found on existing wiring shall be corrected prior to the connection of these wires to any panel component or field device. 3.14 CLEANING A Method: Clean all detectors and remove dust or dirt that has accumulated. For each detector, the cleaning, checking, operating,and sensitivity adjustment shall be attempted only after consulting the ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111 -11 1 North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovations & Expansion manufacturers instructions. These instructions shall detail methods such as vacuuming to remove loose dust and insects and washing to remove heavy grease and grime deposits. In lieu of these cleaning methods, the manufacturer may provide cleaning service at the field location. Fallowing partial disassembly or washing of the detector to remove contamination, the appropriate sensitivity test required shall be performed. END OF SECTION 283111 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283111 -12 PLING AN REPORT OF -TH- 9 NWHAP LIMITED RENOVATION SURIm. , SAM EVALUATION OFASBESTO&CONTAINING MAMMA at the NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY 905 N. MARTIN LUTHER KING AVENUE CLEAR WATER, FLORIDA April 8, 2011 GE Project Number 1051-1044 Submitted to: City of Clearwater Mr. Leroy Chin Parks and Recreation Department P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, Florida 337SO- 4748 Prepared by: Greenfield Environmental, Inc. 432 3'd Street North St Petersburg, Florida 33701 432 9"d Street NpM, .St. PO g..FL 331 I ? 'M UNW- 721,894.1 2" + Fo a 727.896.150 ...EXEClFT1YE 80111 A" the survey y aod l boratory onaly i a conductor! at the North Or*enwp+aOAJbmry in , Cfeamoter, Morida wicated, that none of the materfais saMpled were found to contain. p ea rG8 . ?„ abbe . than one, i po ?oilz 0 r. AS :s!?cna,, : sbtos n , an?o .° ? . , ane uin?i riot to r lin rr di spool ?' r hand : 9 0. + q P tirtg'renovation activftres_ r i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Se` on Pane •'Q . I. .. .•.,•.. •.. •.•.........•••.,...:r... .. .... ......... ' ....... • .. 9 INTRODUCTION.-j.: .:.r,; .............. . ......... ?...... ... .. - *.: 2 U FACILITY DESCRIPTION ... ... ..3 306 SURVEY METHODS AND. LABORATORY ANALYSIS............. ......... 4• ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ...........................................4 0 SUSPECTED . 5 5.0.. DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS .........................................................r.................: CQNCI. .... (? ?.Y. USIONS •.A......?r .. •.• .. .......+ i .. •.r.aV L1$T OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A- LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS APPENDIX g- CERTIFICATIONS APPENDIX C- SITE DRAWING Ot Projeet No. `7051.1044 1.0. iNTRODUCT ON curvey for asbestos:ontainl ng materials (ACM9) was conducted by. Ca n1d Environmental, Inc. (GE) at the North Greenwood Library In Clearwater, Flodda, The survey was rformed on March 30, 2011 b y Jeff redit IE A Asbestos pe Summers Aoc Inspector. Gro enfield.Environmental, Inc. is a Florida Licensed Asbestos Consulting Finn VAth a corresponding Iioensi riurt"r of ZA-000026a The survey was conducted 1h order to identify any as6estds-containing materiels which may oxist f riorto renovation activities in accordance with'the National Emissions 5§Mndard for Hazardous Nr Pollutants (NESHAF') Regulation. More specifically, our scope of services for this project consisted of the five following steps: Site Walk-Through and Observations, . - Bulk Sampling of Suspect ACMs, Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) Analysis of Bulk Samples, Hazard Assessment and Evaluation, and Final Report Development. The findings of this report represent Greenfield Environmental, Inc.'s (GE) best professional judgement and no other warranty is expressed or implied. This report is intended only for the use of the CITY OF CLEARWATER.. and its agents. The contents should not be relied upon by any other parties without the expressed written consent of Get 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 4- 1 i 1 1 1 N 1 . CaE P'r?pjsd tJv..1 ?5??10d4 2.6 fA' IC' d 1I' DESD iPtiON The?.Obr4ry: ,was..obsorved:. to, bo a coomte block strucxure. tr teribir f(hishe.s consist:oi dry nAil car'pet and coiling tiles, The HVAG duct was fiberglastA isWateit shoet n%. I and -he .... easte'n u ing area by t compotemos t atop sbrvo....:: r fibs lass flea-dtrr the reh6vstiort. building - eftr a roo Brea wens rat in _ iC1 this survey. GE Prolwi Wc: 305'1-1044 10 SURVEY METMOQS AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS Th®sa'mping eorrd?icted in this asbestos survey was performed in'acxavrdaeice with Title ( ' rt wati latiorta ct ?'Ite spO, ACM S? ReguI "HO a CPRj, P? ERa 1,690 Fedsl l t lqulm that sample loc??'ti©na tae randomly 'seieAed. All auspeot asboOos?ontoming . . , ?materrais , - the OSHA Asbes gnatenals and RSADM presumed to contain asbestos ender Rctle, .29 MFR 191 E ? ire idahwed. and sampiea of each different matOdal were.6btained: The bulk sampling proceduire utilized for collection of suspect samples required the establishmentothomogeneous sampling areas. A homogeneous sampling area isdeflned as an area of friable or non-friable material of similar type that appeared to be applied or installed during the same .general period of time. All sample locations were identified with numbers correspol.ul ft to those listed in Section $.D " Description of Materials, of this report. amples which were collected from these pre-determined homogeneous sampling areas S were labeled and transported to Air Quality Environmental, Inc. (NVLAP No. 200957-0) for analysis. All samples were analyzed using EPA approved Polarized Light Microscopy (P.LM) coupled with dispersion staining. Properties such as refractive indices, birefrln9ence, sign of elongation and extinction angle are unique to crystalline -asbestos forms and are used to identify the type of asbestos mineral as chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite, tremolite or actinolite. Percentages of the identified types of asbestos are determined by visual estimation. Attempts are made to mix the sample. thoroughly to provide a more accurate percentage. Any material containing greater than one percent (11%) by weight of any type of asbestos is considered by the EPA to be an ACM and if disturbed Must be handled according to specific reguiations. r i GE project No.1051 1044 5 N C F MATERIAI_$ ?lPTi ?. 'DIES olloVyi?g is A desc ption of,the materials. sawled at the library:; Thaf 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 r i i r i -GE PMIW Nq IMI-1044. f out ot'sseryatons ark :IaboratQ , tostin? a? Thy reoU v t8 (leafwater, Ftorids indicated#hat of ft fins ('1? osampid5colleoWi , of the mater als samplod wore found to contain asbestos in amounts.. greater than. one 0 ) erc nt ng ispo;ial .tochr?lqu an3. , ;As sr , ? sp ft? asbestos handling or d n34uirart priqk toqr dunng renvvaWn activjtles. , - .IC ESPROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 1 I r 1 1 1 APPENDIX A LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RIESULTS 1 1 1 1 F 1 powder layer 1 327120 DryWail Sy$lem joinl compound mat layer powder layer 132,731' 3 Drywall System jairi[ compnVnd mat layer pOvdet layer 1.322 d coiling Tice White f tan 132723 . 5,.. Ceiling "rile while / tan 1327124' 6 Ceiling The white I tan 132725: 7 Cove Base brawn base tan mastic 132726 B Cove Base brown base tan mastic .. 132721 ' 9. Cove. Base brawn base. tan mastic 13"2728 10 CgUlk white 132729 11 Caulk while 132730 12 Caulk white Lab lFiie:Nurrlb9r:' 191.81 IVAu NAD NAb NAD NAD NAD NAD NAP MAD NAP NAD NAD NAD NAD . NAP. . NACI NAD NAD NAD is a-A Mass t-pers 166 Cellulose E% Glass Fibers 100% CeNurase $% Glass.. Fibers 3.5% Cellulose 35% 'Minefai wool 35% Cellulose 3'S?"?e .Miner??1No41 ..35V6 Cellulose I'm ki*# wool 16% *hthetics 15% Synthetics 15% 5ynthetics sz h uypsum ana tunders 100% Carbonates and Binders 92% Gypsum and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders W.% Gypsum and Binders„ 30% Penile artd''Binders: '30% Perli.ite and Binders 30% Pedite'and Dlnders„ 00% Carbonates and Binders 00% Binders 00% Carbonates and Binders 0% Binders OD,% CWb6dates and Binders 00% Binders 85% Binders 85% Binders 85% Binders IiUVWL sp. E". rr1 V. toe&, n n?r>x by . neuttrb.ea??eirer a"lalf3va? Penn ?rwh a 7N.?. WiLAP Lob No, 20ff,04 1 1 i' 1 11 r 1 1 1 APPENDIX B CERTIFICATIONS 1 1 11 Ili I 11111 loll gm III JUIETRA TRAININGSERVICES Florida Approval-FL49-0001008 113 5- Disstort Avenue 'tarpon Springs,. FL 14699 1-727-538-5459 IT 414 11th S_WW _t:?? 15!r ? l la +utcessitt1ly comptacd:the Rcquisitc TrWning fiat AJicsLos.:tcrt. djL;ktum :, requ red by TSCA TCIe H I.?epir?uota L?a?t i 30' Course LtIcaLi.m. J rfws, J"F'..- -.y Silver / ? ?y / ?JJJIJ?JJ R - our. O ACIfil i"Ist-MI101r - DA STATE OF KORI O.., 8. OSZ*?E8, MD PR-_- #?F8 OMMAL Rsr Tarox ? pS T.DS ENL ? :..: . ? ig ? 8 5 0 AS It?TS3VG ..1k7N? 07 . 3_940., NORTH: NONROB 'STREE'T. . TALLAHASSEE: gL 33"990783 GR$SNF3ELD. MMIRONMENTAL INC MICH"L RMIUMURG 432' 3RD STREET NORTH ST PETERSEVRO. FL 33701 i 1 1 1 Congtatufations! :.. With this license you become one nd the ansai ttis... - by thcDepartment B m Prof ss cnal one Reg iulation. ,. ",: ? O •, . . 1 Q n ur.prafe&alaAsls"and bpsinesses range from.ercktrtscks to.yacht tarokrs, tram ecomy strong. v- ?' • al boxers to barbettue restaurants, and that keep Florida's no eery day.we.work to. im oft the way we .do business in order.to serve.you better:. • ,. r...,'.. ,. , For infrxmatlon titlpiff oUr:aervices, piease.log onto rrww. orldalivenne..c6m; T" aS Tl?¢re you too firm )pre Ihiormetinn shoot ourdiyiaians a the ?egWadions that ? . Impod, rtmn't. s llserlW t department newsletters and Isom more et?oirt the t Our rnission at the Department is.. License Eyffidently, R.egWateTbIrty. We k stilvelos'erve Thannty for doin slness ibetter n r d and nara?latlans your customers. n w license! z . ?r? fs ?d?r s'?Zi?q' xs3 Yo.. 9 b g Y.. ?+ ,;r?rsen e'?ti? V 0 , t At WA" ,yu x, l?y L49102361307 APPENDIX G SITE DRAWING 1 1 l 1 1 1 . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n 1 t-, j y 1 REPORT OF THE NFS IAP L11iNCi'ED RENOVATION SURVEY, SAMPLING AND EVALUATION OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINIIMGNIATERIALS at the NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY 905 N. MARTIN LUTHER KING AVENUE CLEARWATER, FLORIDA April 8, 2011 GE Project Nurnbar 1051-1044 Submitted to: City of Clearwater Mr. Leroy Chin Parks and Recreation Department P.O.13ax 4740 Clearwater, Florida 33758.4748 Prepared by: Greenfield Environmental, Inc. 432 3'd Street North St Petersburg, Florida 33701 432 3w Stree1 !*M S!. Pete4bft. FL. 3$701 pt.4tw: 7227.896.1266 FCW: 727;8963560. EXI CUTINf IOUMMAO car?u Tho : survey and laboratory analysis cted at the North GMerlwbod Li>?ra?y in Cle?rwater, Florida irtdl ted that none of the materials saffi&O were fdond. 10 contain chw hQ . call ed a ... a$bestos in arr? pats gre4tor than one a :: :. . ?? petcec>t. Assu .:. handling or dipo uring r6vatior? actnn"ties. . ",I tedhr?u, are requir?ed prior f4 or d TABLF,:QvcQW-TBNTS 11.V INTRODUCTION•....r:: .:.:.::..r.••r:•.•••...•..•.:..•.•..•.•...•.r..•:..i.w...........rt.r. ••••..•..•.....•:iy.:.•:. T 2.6 FACILITY ..•.. ........:. .......•:::. a .., T•.: ....r..:.:?...:..:...q......2ntr.r.., ;:2 .. , DESCRIPTION , .. 3.6 SURVEY METHO . , QS AND RN L. 4.p SUSPECTED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ...........................................4 ,. 5.0 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS .r .............:..........•.......:r............•..........: ... 5 6/QN..?./.LJ1l1V?.,.... .. /.'.?w..'?R* .. ?:,......? .. ti' . .. .. ... M.y rr.:.... ? VLVSL!???Mr7 i•Y.rte....?.?:: .rl •.••r ...... ... ••.•.•w.••••.•••r••••.•.•...••L.••:..+. •. i. .:. .. r •. . ?6 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A- LABQRATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS APpENpiX B- CERTIFICATIONS APPENDIX C- SITE DRAWING r3E'F'ro ect I?d.,? 06 -1044 a s-coirtainih m The. survey was conducteW in order to Identity any a5besto a#erl ? whfit+h g , me. Yexist priorto renovation activities. in accordarioe with-the National EM1sslons Standard for Hazardous Air Pallutants (NESHAP) Regulation. More specifically, our scope of services for this project consisted of the five iol gdng steps; Site Walk-Through, and Observations,. Bulk Sampling of Suspect ACMs, Polarized. Light Microscopy (PLM) Analysis of Bulk Samples, Hazard Assessment and Evaluation, and Final Report Development. The findings of this report represent Greenfield Environmental, int.'s (GE) best professional judgement and no other warranty is expressed or implied. This report is intended only for the use of the CITY OF CLEARWAM and its agents. The contents should not be relied upon by any other parties without the expressed written consent of GE: 11 f ri I 1 t 1 1 r_J1 1 I 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 Ll 1 1 i 1 w 1 GE Project I4o..1( -1019 osa-,o4a `i'OR'' ANALYSIS 3-:0 SURVEY M ADS D ?-. ' A ? ,. ce with Title stos su rvey was. pe Th'e'samplira9 oonducted in this asbe rformcd in acxordan . Fur l R lat?ait : GfR rt f r`' u t tAGN TI 'EFJ# ? 8010 ins ed, Ali cusp as os=c ntaring le loft s ba randgmly `selact iquita that amp lL)I"1 A+'l s?beatos under the OSHA Asbeetas #erf and,,PA (.metooll *O ed to wntaln a rna ? . _ btalnad: q a,? . sam lee, of ea erent rrlaerial were t .14) were ldgnVfied and 9:; :. . The bulk sarrmpling procedure utilized for coilecEl?in of suspect samples retiulred the e#041ishrliontOf homogeneous sampling areas. A homogeneous sampling area is defined as an area .of friable or nor-friable material of similar type that appeared to be applied or ihstaiied during the seme general period of lima. Ail sample.locations were Wenttiffed with of Matertals" of thl nympers't:orre' po0ding to thosa? Cs#ed 'In Section 5.0 " Description. s . report. collected from these pre-determined homogeneous sompling areas Samples which were were labeled, arid transported to Air Quality Environmental, Inc. (NVLAP No. 200957-0) for analysis. All samples were analyzed using EPA approved Polarized Light Mic rosoopy aining. Properties such as refractive indices. (PLM) coupled with diepersiv'ra st sign of elcangafior1 and extinction angle are unique to crystalline asbestos hiref1n_nce, , farms and are used to identify the type of asbestos mineral as chrysotile, amosite, crocidoliite, ahthdphyllite, tremolite or actinolite. Percentages of the identified types of asbestos are determined by visual estimation.. Attempts are made to mix the sample thoroughly to provide a more accurate percentage. Any material containing greater than :one perdbrit (1%) by weight of any type of asbestos is considered by the EPA to bean A.CM arut if disturbed Mutt be handled according to specific regulations. 1 1 1 11 f] n 1 n 1 f] 1 f 4 GE Project No. IW-1044 5 RT10N ?F M _. - ATERUkLS F f #a :rrtsteria is sampled at t ho Obrary:; hd'follp"n Is:0. dascr t&y o hest Its. of out t b rvations and is ratgry testing s# the reanw o lp as y in o4 M The e F46 da indl? n ? ? sarnplos cotiectedN riOhe : df;:the ibiearwater; # the #vnei?!e 1 materials sarnpl'sd were found to contain Asbestos in amounts greater than one :(I) :.. ?, nd spe r??fl?ed asbestos handling or idisposal techniques are iced . rc? rtit; ed? u priq ? to or durin renov # ri acts 'Wei. 1 PRaf?ESSfQNA;L. CEI?T ONS IFICATI i 1 1 1 AP A i , LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS 1 1 t 1 CW Nam: Greentield t n.Wrronrr r Priest NamOc iai1 #10 4 Oly Of G ? ertbt lwtller'King, ?3 woo Clearwater, Florid 3rd , tn?l 9D0 N: ,iA. .. . St. Petersb,trrg, Florida W1701 DSte Analyzed: Apra .. 01.1 Asbestd3: t3u8c is .. , .. ... Tee4 iw[ethad't M 1 A$ - tP/1 Method t`lR?3I1 i 6 t.ab # t 1Y it " .. 86tnpleType' DwApBorr. T Asbestos 'Xo 'Clther Firms . ` ":::: Vii: Binders 932719 1i Drywall Syslern "nt contpour,d NAD 10096 'Carborates and Binders 192720 1.3Z721'I 132722 4. 132723 S '' 132724 6 132725 7 132726 8 132727 9 132728 132729 132730 mat layer NAG 00a6 Cellulose powder layer NAD 9'?b Glass Fibers. 92% Gypsum and Binders l)ryvvall System Iolnt'compound NAD . 100% Carbonates and Binders . chat layer NAIL 1009E Cellulose powder layer NAD .8% Glass Fibers 92% Gypsum and Binders I]rywall System Joinl:cvmpound NAD 1.00% Carbonates and Binders mat toyer NAp 10Q% Cellulose . powder layer fJAD $76. Glass Fibers .9 % Gypsum and Binders Ceiling Tile Waite ! tan. MAD. 36% .f:.eUulose 30% Perlite and B:ind04 11 12 Tile white ! tan NAD Ing tile e Base e Base e Base Vhite I tan rrown base an mastir: town base an ntastrc crown base. an mastic e NAIL' NAD NAD NAD NAD NAP NAD NAD NAD NAD W% Pedite and Binders 3p% Perlite and Blinders 10096 Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 1Qp96 Binders 11*% Car'tronales And. B* Wers 100% Binders 85% Binders 85% Binders 85% Binders j? Agqauryaad ?;.. v?'?t1?rtr#an lam, fl L - Limb No. 2OUS". . 3A Mlhetal .WOO 35% Cellulose r6 Mineral llllvcjl 34%. Cellulose `?a`?• tfAitiere1 Wool f' 15% S"f fics 1.5% Synthetics 15% Synthetics, iaiib.t=llc Nurrit?er tea AI>ahc?l?_P:a?es= ? of 1 i r 1 1 1 t 1 1 APPENDIX B CERTIFIOATIONS RETRA TRAINING SERVICES i i i i i i Florida Approval FL49-OWIOOS i.13-S : DisSiott Avenue, TaWn Spl- ngs,-FL. 34699 1-727-938-5459 jf. u 310 2.010 ?i, 3u iw cs J, wfxil' L.xpirwmii Owe: juh 20-11 fJ Congratulatibns1 With this:ticense you become one of the nearly one million Flondlane ° pceri. 'esd by the f)epartrrmnt of Bytress and Prefessions1 Reguladon. , . Our professionais and :"nesses range frorn.a.rchkeate to.yacm brokers; from ' •. a ?, , borers to barbet{ue riestaurO* and they keep Florida s economy strong ? * y4 sr" Q 9 q E1 3" er Is n the Every al±.. "bd.ouseryiCes; please p? ?n ord o 1 ? For. Inform rker.°y ridalica you w .a a don: h'dre u ca T d k to ?tF im 'mtarrt?tian about'oo a ulse.cvm., . ya e,e. fh, edonsthat ma subscribe de ant news!', s im? Yo after nd ie De .attment'sirtit?atives: a dm more Dodo{ the _ . ,,. Our nissian. at.the'i?epartment isi License Eyfiio r ua _ ank yt hartBr so that ? co ..... Youfdag r4n gra to Fhi y. in bu"s` mss in Fiorlderan d U can $? ? ??n xis ?,riY»fsED' tulattans o you new license! 1 1 DETACH HERE APPENDIX. C BITE C1RAWING p ?,15r . W wA? i ?I+ilM4ir ?rr?r?a -?-'r i OF -fFf 'ewe ? f?+?9EtE+au?ari -- (DIFEWT(pum-Tom ??veuo?uw a I'fY l?lECt®CBMPLAN v. i 1 1 1 i 1 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 r GreWfleld NESHAP ` .. LiMI"MP.A.SNQVATION; Sl1RVEY, SAMP'IJNdAND REPORT OF THE EVALUATION OF ESTGS-aCGNT+A WING :MATERU4,l at the ' RECREATION CENTER. GREENWOOD 900 N. MARTIN LUTHER KING AVENUE dL IkWATER, FLORIDA March 22, 20101 GE Project Number 10514043 Submitted to: City of Clearwater Mr. Leroy Chin Parks and Recreation Department P,O. Box 4746 Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 Prepared by: Greenfield Environmental, Inc. 432 3'4 Street North St Petersburg, Florida 33701 ,432 3id Street North. St. Petersbwg, FL 33701 + Phone: 727.896.1266 9 fox 727.896.1566 FXL UTN05SUMMA#tY The :survey and. laboratory snalysts oonduc?ecl at the Greern d Ftocreaticn Center In 'fou to cpcielo CearvYater FI¢ritla iditlated that none of the mataria s ` I sa. mp led were ntl .. ar -As a T,. ?t i#Or. tha percr srt 00 p+ecialFsEtest s tos irl 9 ? t ring rer?vation activities: i1 P r s iretl P "Or hand . n or .sal techh The renovation consists of carpet removal, ceiling tile replacement, exterior door installat on at the southwest will area iodated by the gym and the southwest roof area wilt be replaced, See highlighted orann ng• :. ENT T LT0 COW, Sec?io? P INTRO LOTION;:... , .. :,. ae..••• r...• 2.0 FA . .. .r.-.. ? •n .... i• ..... .. ...* q•. r. ..a•. GiL 1 DESCR1PTLO :..:.. n r. 0 :: .: A. ..? •. ? AND LABORATORY, ANALYSIS...:..::.; 3:0 SURVEY METHODS .....::...::.: :3 . 4.0.5US0ECTED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS;...:..:. . ,........ ..,..A 5,O D$C" R(RTION OF _. •?.r rr• .. r.r.nrrr • .r.....r .i .. .. MATERIALS .. w.r, ...... rr r• ..y. ra. .. ..... S .'o COMCLIJSIONS ........ ................. ,............................ ...::..:,.:.... .. .:.........: a LIST QF APPENDICES APPENDIX A- LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS APPENDIX B- CERTIFICATIONS APPENDIX O- SITE DRAWING 1 Ge pgtgod tic. 1051-1043 rg (AtrMs) was conducted by Greenfield •A survey for asbestos-containing mater Enviro nmental, Inc..'(GE) at the Greenwood Recreation Center In Clearwater. The survey was Performed on March 14, 2010 by Jeff Suminers, A redited FO Ast stns inspector. Greenfield Environmental, Ins Is a Florida Licensed Asbestos Consultlrtig Firrn with a corresponding license number of ±A?QW0289. Th,e suryey was fjr y conducted. in order to Identity an asbes#os-Mntalnlrtg materiels which may exi" ' y sk prior to renovatlQn activities in accordance with the National Emission0tandard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Regulation. More specifically, our scope of services for this project consisted of the five follo%Mng Steps: - Site. Walk-Through and. observations, Bulk Sampling of Suspect ACMs, • Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) Analysis of Sulk Samples, Hazard Assessment and Evaluation, and Final Report Development. The findings of this report represent Greenfield Environmental, Inc,-Is (CE) best professional judgement and no other warranty is expressed or Implied.. This report is intended only for the use of the CITY OF CL.EARWATER and its agents. The cQntents should not be relied upon by any other parties without the expressed written consent of GE. 1 Im pro ? 05'14043 1 F? L1 cRl The reaeabl6r'? center, ?rao Ibsen k4 be :? ?n?,blcaclc,struc?t?!e. ,, Intei?r ?n?F??s don st QI dqwd, pt, ?n iloo r jler and pel tiles. Tho.Wl 1 aad fibs' lass fl®x- lucta The extetivra nsists of opiti a plow rid Icsulafect sheot rriete ctet SLao.. 'i b.orwareacvn rift: of mlled frog me al ovor fiber.b©6td. .. . 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GE Project Na; 3051-1043. ' 3.0 S.U VIEY 1N THQi3S AND LAR4RATQRY ANALYSIS The sampling conducted in this asbestos surve?r was performed i avcordance WO `i1tle i regret atipis 4 oc]is:o Ferl" 11eguletlpns (MFR); 'Part '163 forauspec t AC:tils'. The re tire' i +at.... m 1 koations 'ra oml selected. All st"biA ashes D 1P Y S-ofiifltsilr Ing p imator cis and PALM i~mMeows presumed ta`aomain asbestos uhder.the OS14AMWi6tos btained We and eampl®s o ae?differssnt material werep- Rule, CFiR'19.1 Q iden #ibd re The bulk sampling pro66dure utilized for collection of suspect samples required the htimogerieous sampling areas. A homogeneous sampling area isdofned establishtnent of . „ erlal of slrnilar type that appeared to be applied Or as an area of friable or nori-friable mat Installed during the same general period ot:time. All sample locations were identified with numbers corre spo di oso listed n 5.0 Descriptioq of MateOats' „ n tlg to th fisted in 5ectio of this report. samples.which were collected from these pre-determined homogeneous sampling areas were labeled and transported to Air Quality Environmental, Inc. (NVLAP No, 200957.0) for analysis. All samples were analyzed using EPA approved Polarized Light Microscopy (PLNI) coupled with dispersion staining. Properties such as refractive lndlcos, biref'ringende, sign of elongation and extinction angle are unique to crystalline asbestos. forms and are used to Idantify the type of asbestos mineral as chrysotlle, amosite, crocidolite, anthophylllte, tremolite or actinolite. Percentages of the Identified types of asbestos are determined by visual estimation. Attempts are made to mix the sample thoroughly to provide a more accurate pereentage, Any material containing greater than one percent (M) by weight of any type of asbestos Is considered by the EPA to be an ACM and if disturbed must. be handled 800.0rding to specific regulations. 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -GP Prgod No. 105M W 5.4 DESCRIPT10N't)F MATERIALS rtig is;a. descriptonf th-ematerials tnp saled et therecreatrorr cer? e ttovv? - ter 'M -1rv o . 02 he Stucco Located :Ph o As Friable Good 0? baer orVyail Areas Detect ed 04 White Gelling Tiles No Asbestos 05 Lorated Throughout Detected Friable Good .06 Area The Renovation 07 Peach 12" x . yl ~ Vin 08 Mastic Floor Tiles With No Asbestos Non-, Good Q.. LociiteO In The Detected Friable vation Area 10 hiteboct ?c n T W 4 . 11 he onted No Asbestos Non- Go 12 Fiberglass DUO Above Detected Friable The Suspended Ceiling 13 Grey Duct Mar-tic ?4 Located On The Metal No Asbestos Nan- Good 15 Duct Above The Detected Friable Suspended Ceiling 16 Grey Rolled Rooting No Asbestos Non- 6 17 Located On The South Detected Friable Good 18 East Roof Area I.9 Black Vinyl Base Cove No Asbestos 'Non- 7 20 Located At The $ase t3f Detected Friable Good 21 The Wall. Areas 1. .6.tf: ?Q?C?;1151?NS: T4results ofourb0servatlgnsar4 fa0oratorytestin4'atth6Grenwaod RecreationCenter the qty, v 21.) sples,c:ailected,Hotta of the In de..rwr . r9?l?i trrdlra? e?1 thet.of at?a materials sampled were found to contain asbestos in amounts greater than one (i) stfestvs handling or disposal teGiiniques are required Iw, pe r>{. M'such, no sp?C?d ' r to.vrltturirV tlenovaton a eso P. or- +oti 1 1 1 ? a dERTIFIC .: ATIQNS PRDFE$SIO?VAI. discussions d cbnclrxsions containd in this asbestos survey have been prepared The an e and reviewed bp(hg1oltow ng 66 i.ronmdhw profossion'OK ff Summers Michpip W. Rothenburg,.;P5 .. of Manager Florida Woensed Asbestos Consultant AHEM Inspector#025621 #EA0400041 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 APPENDIX A LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS . ?a Alur-X 'i900 486 FAt J72.7)1 9323 Sesvirnle t egprd, Sentrino1c; Pianos 33773 R727139Qt. ,, Prate Name: 1051-?10A3 My of! Clearwater Client Nr3irte: GreeMe? Emiir 4$2 Srd o ntal , No Greenwood I* Center $P ersbu Flarida.33701; We Analyzed: M' 7, 2011 eat. et1'Iad: PLM 1 DS.. EPA Method 60b/R=931'116 iAsiyestas, t3i7lk sam Y M Die Ahelysli; _ . ....:.. Description Binders er Fibers Cab It : t.lient 9 T6 :A:Sliestos 139$70 i Stucco pink? gray NA.Q 100% Du.0z and Binders 1$1371 2 Stucco pink /.gray NAD 100% Duartz and Binders 131372 3 Stucco pink l gray NAD 100% Duartz.and Binders 131373 4 Ceiling Tile white / tan MAD 3514. Cellulose 30% Pedite and Binders 131374 6 131,375 6 131376.7 1.31377 B 131378 9 131379 1.0 131380 i1 131381 112 Coiling Tile white / tail NAD Ceiling fide 1whito /tan NAb Floor rile door Tile Floor Tile Insulation Insulation Insulation 01b roe 1 O~. 40m the m mastic , tile. nN mastic . the )w mastic wrap layer rw insulate wrap layer Yw insulate wrap layer m insulate NAI:) ,NAD : NAD NAb NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD. NAD NAD 35% Mind Wool 35% Cellulose 36% Mineral Wool 3596 Cell jo, so 3.5%. Mineral Wool 30% Cellulose 30% Glass Fibers 1,00% Mineral Wool 30% Cellulo$e 30% Gless Fibers 1110+ Mineral Woo 30% Cellulose 30% Glass Fibers 100% Mineral Wool ir: itMo.r+.e ae I? 30% Perlite and Binders 301/ Perlite and Binders 10096 Carbonates and Binders ., 100% Binders 10099 Carbonates and. Binders 100% Bidders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 40% Fail and Binders 40% Foil and Binders 40% Foil and Binders lideian IV'VLAp 1"b, 20p7# AnalyaisP51" 1 o(2 1 ' earWater 1'?? NOt? S,neenfield Envgortmehtal ' '1l>r51.-70+1 G{1i of Cl ± d' , 432 3rd Scree orth ? , ...... Center SC PeterWAM F16406 33701 p , Rec at??4riairz?: arch t 2vt1 Asbestos Sulk 8 aiern1 sam1 `77i w?eu?dd 93117 rsis 1 t,ab # :.. Sam An e T ....... .. ? :Asbestos `!6Otfter.WLFlibeirs. 1iA / L15 .» .EPp y?Msead ti00lR- 131.3$2 13 Ma acct gray NAD .15% Cellulose 66% Carbonates and Binders 1 j31383 14 Mastic gray . NO 1596 G®liwow SMA Carbonates and r3ir,ders 131384 1S mastic gray :NAD 15% Cel, -G 85% Carbonates and. Binders Binders 131305 1.8 Stoofing Material mO material NAD. 3091 Synthetics 70.96 Bitumen and rioof material 2 NAD 309x« (class Fibers 70.% Bitumen and Binderep ? 1313$8. 17 ROOfing Mater mof material 7 NAD 309'• Synthetics 70% Bitumen and Binders roof mate" 2 14AD 30% Glass Fibers 7096 Bitumen and bindere 1 .131387 18 Roofing Material roof material 1 NAD 30% Synthetics 70% B.itumoh and Binders roof materiel 2 NAD 30% Olass.Fibers 709E OliUmen and Binders 1$1388 19 Cove Base black base NAD 100%'Carbona'tes and Binders ,. white mastic NAD Igo% Binders - ryA . finders 137.389 ?.Q 64ve Base black base D 10()96, Carbonates ahd white mastic NAD 10096 BiAdsis 131390 21. Cove Base bIaWc base 16n, Carbonates and Binders ' 1?{11U 440 mastic ? . 100% Binders 1 1 1 1 1 i?? +?aapi >•nit!'fti+ldlpf?Nh!i Q +l? + ± d,Ar e?aglllll r nl DOEM c?ida+yrwrla - A?b..7gir,CJOt?tnlwt?. .. ?°?? t'i?itrur t76pw1?pVrw4 ????par. ?n6drus1iCi1t?rleparM +rt+tNb?li?id.. ei?rd?ipNs Aneiymd [?: o.m ISO 4r#?• ulltllNMrYlR4rs1 ti1? MV 3 °. radlrAmfsp?yet ?ppwMilafrlf?N1111lRbffLAI AW ii {.pgrrr 1 N;r Mall op- tyr?Ylp?+r iF4 e?yprdtil?l aiYsAlaWn6 Mi7? MblrS3lAzAdd= bawidtik?rr ?dan: abw +us1 ? ? d?ns? tripwr a 4ifiv?r rari/? Ir M*irodAM ' .. ?rW?n?l?vl?hu?MMm-Ik -ICS4r1.?ddsp?N. U lb F1[S'l 1.9D49 : WAY Lab.Ntt. 20p M4 i APPENDIX B CERTIFICATIONS ., i ..rft.. limb, -rvmk. .msl? fie. .!ab, w?:il?a? ' :wild. oe!ah,. .pab, . ? ?.. 'Na` : Mlmb?. :.volift, - -mmalb... .ok: ?. . RETRA TRAINING SERVICES 3:4 W Mote EyYrsrxlic?n Late: -- c'.?tu :?t??t?ti ?a yrp r? .Spr rtes, .!Fir RI suVBf -771- irticte.?r R_P ?_ ourse Ad-minislrmor 1 APPENDIX C SITE DRAWING 1 IL REPORT OFTHE . GEOTEC AX. IINTVESTLGATION 1 NOIRTHWE M.!PR? PON AND -- - -• - kr- 'i _`.'i ::T:?'. ,? ..5t:.. =-:k?i:.,.'.'t`r?• :.?-?i:_;:.?..--.;,?i ".;k`• Rte-'-?---•. PIN Y:LAS CO E iJ1?1.TY,:FX.ORI)A f , 1 .. 1y : • Draggers Engineering Services Incorporated L.-I ?. Wade-' `lnm; Itlrc: May 3.l', 206 9S?:leniaiia Hg?ivi+ay 'Tati?•F}arid? 3?6?? _ - . n n_ lIr: Gregory S: Tn, P.E. RR: Rcpart of the Geoteehnic.Investigsiion. jti t s wester r` I `een e eII e` Ime'Eo; W .n. ??P? . # S r±ret?. 11001-as 061tin.tyj. Florid ' tQ r Falak TEES. 003875' . :. Dear gi,,.Trite:' 1rt:ccordance with your rape and autiiQriation, D!RIGE.9 EITiNEENiG S)P4VI . j T'C.. has comolete4 an rrtwestrgatton of sdbsurface p,6-h itiQfa the iia planned for the p dosed recreatioi end gUatia Cehiei::f ti;l ty. Pre$ented Jereiat art± file resulta of ouP: fell stuenge er..:avtfb geoteclitca(:reoQmir?ertrlatis:farX.aur-ceiitori "V STI STRUCTURE AREA - To investigate subsurface soil and groundwater conditions within the o 'Ds str c re are q, a p . ?, .? .? v (5) St x?darc? ??rixtrat#oA Test (SP'i').boringS.werc egnduc#ed:.>acb lot rirt ° iva$'adyan?ci? toga r on 'I di p of 5 'eef lie bvy+ i`tii ale. Plate T o 0 ... e g g? { yep rt . attachments identifies the approximate positioning of the borings, The Standard Penetration Test (SPT) method of sampling was- utilized to secure soil samples for visual classification and to develop Standard Penetration resistance information reflective of the strength and bearing capability of the soils penetrated. The testing was conducted in accordahce with ASTM-0-15$?:.l4rgs of t#>c, test b©rin-gs are presented in the attachments indicating visual and estiinated Unified Soil Classifics:#ion. Clearwater Sarasota PD. Box 17Ei3J; Oearwacer. Florida 33782 Tampa 941/371-3943 12220 49th Streat ?5lcrth. U.aarwawr. Florida 33762 813/94q-60'27 Feic;B4'I f3 9-@982 727/571-1Z$13 Fqz: 727 /572- 0190 Fax: 1313/ 8=7645 ' e.wnall?t?sichnar?ao?.oom I GEOTEC •_+N•,•CAL ENGINIEERING .bitd cbiOSTR CTION MATERIALS TESTING 1 ?.. - 2 PAVEl1+IENT AREA - Three (3) classificati66-& hared anger barings, were.performed within the proposed parking afar drive areas. The hnrings were advanced to'Jbpths ref 8 t69 feet.. The,hand auge?,p?ce?s,pravides ,soil, sariiples' cantinpottsly Ora below.exis#inp graa to thy; rrainpj.etiom. dep o 't :baring id he 'returinid to,- 014t fatioratra y for exairtinat o? l y the pro sct eiigiireer; Logs,o tl%ese Dori gts are presented in the report attachments indicating v steal acrd estimated Unified Soil -.Class-if cation. DIAI<RA'GI?; AR>& Tvi?$ (2 Double-Ring Inltratigri- tits were ciiducfed at'the lbcatieriis requesfcd fey you,and depicted oii Pf ate L Tlie'infiltiation rate for Dll? t. 5vas measured' at less than 5.3 inches' per hour at a• test depth of 1.5 feet below present grade. A test rate for. '.: DRS vuas,zneasuarec aI 6, l finches pEr l rr at a test. depth of -1:A tool. Caz must e y be 1rat1 n e a #r s H Itt tt e1"[ 'T'kto '" arias ses.t±i` seepage:lnfiltration muse include a cOefiil. assessiient of the permeability Ch r clerlstres_of Ike stibstrafi mrsiaiii;, hrydrat} c seepage.bottn ary cgnditiot s.-arid othersh- 0 9 . rvI? i W- li " Bence posed 'op?rating. characteristics; &ia vas a1sp pgrfg-bd• adjaceitt t eacFh DRI location, The borl A ci ssif tali: wrin. were advanced fa depths=of& to 14 fei~t below present grade. The log's of the liartd -auger borings formed are attkhed fox 'our review. Per ?' - ]POOLAEEA - Within the Planned, awvl_ .. :areas; ivi+o ha#id a er burin were requested. __. .. -_. _..?_ ........ -. -. ... Eaol boring::, vas'extended,. to depth O.f & to 9' feet Ei l v? pre t t f:gt a e : T'ltd p urpose oftl esd 1zQririgs; was fq cliectt: flee soli s,v?r ieh will be excavated frosts fhe yyl?Vo1 area to patcnt(a us as ill tnaterra.ai. leg ttf;eaclt { ng is. nio3l d .fix tiie se cis q GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS SOIL COO LDITIONS. The resetts of our geotechnical.siudies indicate the presence: of a gray aiad brown fine sand with trace sett fines content to dePths of 8 to l'8 'feet below @Tade. This. zone . was represented by the SP to SP-SM Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) designation. Occasionally, a surficial zone of orange or orangish-brown slightly clayey sand was noted.. This 1 , zone represents the clayey soils utilized for the existing ballfield infield. Also within the upper sand stratuin, thin zones of variably organic sands were identifiiad. Laboratory testing suggests these organic seams to possess organic content- of less.•,thao &%,by weight which is considered marginal bait not excessive. triggers Engineering Services Incorporated L l 3 Below 8 to 18. feet, the borings penetrated gray and brown fine sands with variable silt and clay fines content to the surface of a green Arid gray sandy clay and "clay unit typically beginning a.Aeptltis 1ieow l.feet. Associated; With,_t4s clay-stratuii•yer sew ox.zc ot`a tan doloiriitic l iricstone..Tlirs rriferlietided.unit continued to the completion depth of the borings. 2S feet below present grsd'e. Standard penetra64' ' resistance data revealed predoriiinantly a joose to- w6diir4 01se, relati d density vvifhir the up c sands vyrfh:occasipnal-zOnes" of very.lbose cortditrons. n clay soil§ WeM getrerally` kith a hard' in consistency. GROUND W'ATEP. CQt+ DITYUl1tS. t Gm t}tadvVAldr:i3!Os reeQtde4 diiqn/yQ the cojurse ofonr: .- eat> 1 0& '.: #` ` 01te y}?Sr tt '. i Q .,er''that ou studies were.co' ucfe Burin" a' eriod of'mi` ai rainfa l'? .oteritial ftticfti ii i??-watex level :slip i d 'tain]y.be itt ip tect;flar ugl r tit the y4w: me to V41abili:ty" it rart'1 used, pri soiX°coditioris e?cbtiritered and our review of'the Soil (ori5ervatiori i •. ervrce SCS ma 's; we v?+ould ar fieiliate a `ripritial seasana1 high gr6undwater;IeVel to occur, ai a. Trent' areas: depth of i8 itictres bielow; arnb eut' Ode..wRhin t?be stormwatcr mar 4''' confirmation of boteot al. fluctoatiahr irt:groundwater.levels wol necessitate installaticnfofpiezorrieters to be monitored during the rainy season. E' ALUATtG AND'G'E61'ECRNI.C-'L ;-..... ::..,.?._.._. I' C"';.I?;NDA1'Ifll5+i 1Vh; B 11" inform. FX ii itl- Wdber & Tiir '6n; P:A.; t is proposed s"c"ture wi}i consist bf masonry construction primarily supported by load hearing wall. The shlicture will include a large gpas wixh attached oie=stpry of ces aid associated xciriurs, :If is our urulerstaildiirg that maxityMiia wail,.loads. should ne re?i the We of &kips Per lifieal foot for the gymnasium buflding and 2:5 kips per lineal foot for the attached office buildings and rooms, Further; we were itrforrned. by Mr. Steve'S'liaw at your office that the finished floor elevation for the structure and associated pavement areas may necessitate some minor fill on the order of 1 to 1.5 feet. Should structural loads or fill requireinerits exceed these levels, this office should be contacted to review recommendations herein. to-effect any-necessary modifications. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated A 1 1 1. r r i t 4 FOUNDATION CONDITIONS- -The results of our geotechnical st4di.es indicate. that the . proposed facility may be supposed utilizing conventional shallow foundations. Shallow iR. foundations rr4ay big designei .laased upo . .a11Q ?afile soil be rang..pressure of lip ;o Z,SQa o f a " p finds p ex sclu atm. po pp .ropriate subgrado *, vaxation,a, Q, liti.ed "?emins wa i?rould fafal scttleerifs of bearing walls would, be co the oitler of p:5 izichi;_ anticipate thafriacaximuma with,di#Ierenfial settlements oit tlie'oi-der of a.5 inch o'r'less. . Yoiir attention. e-directed to .the orgy i .suit etrc6untered :within the upper 5 feet Wow ., t... :. -.: ... 4 . ?•Q.: ...` ...: •. _•: is _••::"...._.:.:"..::.. "• ;. .. ': ? •.. cuirent grades.- A1thdiigh so i itlt..excessive organac content were Hof penefratec?; it: voiild be advisable to carefully inspect and probe the bottom of foundation areas grid iri#enor slabs in order t cenri higher one c ent 'on o t or a t ate''al t. a * t.r a al. la cot. If r: ` " t. cJl-exwf?fll"?detl?ten?o S":Is.sh??•:""'Sr?? - , . _ si` 'ficarirlafeFal?antl rt ?. a 4X ? ice.. :.ye atd'e, tined with suitable; inarginio stx'ucturai fill`tepreeiitiri t• SP 16 SP5M Uiaified'Soi1. .. . . Ulssieatloit Systeiri (USGS). tlesfgnat?on:: Backfl ils.sho?il'd be placed" iri accoilance with. t?e?df?.elie??recomibetdation?. ,. .. .. .. • Appended., ato spepiriG rpcoo0e0dalio's. f 6r' s6grade prepairatioo -and foundation desigtx tiased?iiptiii-tlaeresiilts ofou? geotechrii?al studies; . RAVINE, ?T.- DESIG CONSIDERA?Tt011TS - Oiir geatechn catstudies have identified the a e i tide for siiport of a 2. tic s p eri " ted- flexb ' le a e n# soilsth taar it o siib tide su id - - v m str c :' ?ilagt e.pieparaii i irittst iaecesss,,rily n??lud stil' `off alt ye$ atiprt aid higW ht o' anid 5^^ilsiIr+?ed b nnrAq:4 -rryilirip #°tle su ; tle:'sd a tryy de?elo.'{° a.itnifci dpiisi{,:`?'y? ?ryfi?pt ..•?R•,1•; xe. ,C, ;Y+:?..i', .. v4i a{..:T.-..nti .Y:, :ai+-:. r. Y.- .. .,Z....:"O._.• lest.:ilodferotaz; +.d liitix:, mss' a of compactlon should be achieved to a depth of not less than l2 iiiehes lielovr the bottom of the base or stabilized subgrade, Although specific pavement thickness design'rnust be based[ upon detailed'infomiatiori relative to traffic frequency and vehicular wheel loads,, we have included a table depicting typical pavement sections commonly utilized for parking and access drives for Commercial developments: This is intended as a preliminary guide to aid your. design civil consultant and may require adjustment in the thickness of the pavement structure to accommodate specific area uses. Origger's Engineering Services Incorporated L. 4?". t a PAi(iG D17 t:Ot CDR?iQRS." LICY,i'i° 1•60 OjRAMPS L.(#ialp lV PS' ]M EMENT TRAMPIC (*.16t- (v ib st bi 6i4 ELEMENT ASPNAL T1 C[?NRET>* 1,25 - 20. ` - . 2.0 . - ( s-1' s-iar} BASE COURSE 6:0 9.0 6.0 . R.rMl±ttocx. • ' S ? . •.:i? _r:l ?-+C??-h'_:jms?.iT -i»,--i1?"'i. i _ R? v?•'': '..'.,: _ .?i•:'?._ STAOILMM- t 4GkADE (1:1? a 40? 12 12 120• COMPA'C7BQ51qt!J?ADE 5- 1 - ; *Seveh (7)' &y -c' strez?gth o'f AD psi:(miilirrinrri) ' ould• consider both A'Osfltetics -ad The selection of the type of asphaltic Concrete sur#`ace sh ufil' Cii?txtaitl , if FDT Tyke-1II rxux iscodstier ed riot a suiahle iii aiea$ # v+?iil ?e ' ?'• e srii elite to p ity light vaicri ar w?t'ee1 lortds and `dot tfAf c-, This is,. b sr?ed i that ',r-u ll` t sih . fSn:th . o b' 11 : e T ,S dl ? ?. e#y's ; h tae., ..a - . r _g? : , ? .. ?: .., .. , '1?..0 brad i aiat# i ?s: ialf t, ess i'ah16:11i^fdot traffc'ai`das:. cri vier; this. it lx ::riitxch u ser tougher and-has higher stability than a Type S-Ilrand is more suited for truck lo4dir4 arid- , =adh,1 alas t o maNy he subjected to concentrated, wheel :loads and shearing. stWAF. associated vr+ltls i alcr +l eel tCM. The Type 9-111 xriiz.'4? tlN wheel he ding co dit oh.. is Mob susceptible to marring and deformation especially in the early life of the mix during periods of ' elevated tempoi attire. ' Although details of designed pavement grades have not been provided for our- review, it is our understaoding that pavement grades will necessitate about l to 1.5 feet of fill. Accordingly, we would not anticipate the need for any special pavement underdraioage,, In . ' geaie al* we reoommerid maintaining the bottora of the base. or stabilized sti'bgrade not less than 1$ inches above the expected wet season. groundwater table, , „ Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated ' Although we would not anticipate the need: forpavement:iinde dra nags it aiiaybe prudent to consider a base course t4x v fliaf has soitia increased. capacity for minimizing .. defibbOons• during periods of•exteosi fali that:*ldresuhj f b si i etevat t? tof gmimdwater levels into thb paPe etitS ciure•. B6th s6v %e rit°and c ust d.cri xcret hA' been Used n this applk t o?:vvifh•dem6nstrated sudeemi Alfhbii W6,conil .aml=cement. _ : sorio*f sOedor #d;crushed ccncrete,, it,must he reGgomie ffi* spit -Cerzieii : ri?cin3 cE 1 deY gs d ,Mg age cracks Whtch? in trial, will rcAegt?thibug? 4 if:`a5pl Alt?? cbnGteto Wearti g surface and are,ccii sidered aes#lieticall r dis leas%ng tQ sue.: AJ. though nor is dr eg shrinkage cracks, will ty ically occur' they are itint di6i4etita1=tir-paveii e'nt performancd' , DRIGGOS ENGINUMNG $ERVICE$ INC, appreciates this qpc?rturj.t??r to serve _ }- - ,-p. sih . `.ti` "ave an esti zis.c` e n 'l no .li ita?trr ter.' =;= - :: a f? o.. Qnc mt i?rr -riot= `'ox i?? I t es i contact this Ai4 atyour?convenience? RespeCtfiill3? s ib niited; , I RIGi' El\T INEERING SFWMES, YNC: i .. 1 Warne. -rigger ; El ProJeet Engineer` i e triggers, P.E. r tdent L Regi9tratio No. 16989: WSDIFJD/wsd WSD-REP\003875 ' Copies submitted: (4) Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated r i f 1... APPENDIX RECONIME IIDA I01'+T8 'Ql S.iJBGRAD:E'IPREPARATION AND FOUNDATION DESIGN ;- ., . a, -PRATE I ^ 7 B0R?? N... '.. TT•. STAI IbA D 'E TE'TIt ?TION TEST (SM BORING LOG'S i HAND AUGER, BOAING LOGS r S I B L ' ' 'I' N WT ' D OU LE-RING. NFX T RA E5 I SULTS TIO sUM o LARris,TS C.PAIN$IZE A,XAt'YSEs METHOD OF TESTING 1 ?I - trigger r. Enginmp1 nQ : 1. lFx3wporated A 1 RECOAIMENDATIONS FOR SUBGRADE PREPARATION ' '. AND FOUNDATION DESIGN SUBGRADE PREPARATION 1. The entire structure areas and for a distance of at least 5 feet beyond the outside footing ' .perimeter should be stripped of all surface vegetation, pavements, highly organic soils, r root concentrations, existing structures and other objectionable material. Exact depth of stripping should be determined by a representative of the soil engineer in the field. The exposed foundation areas, prior to filling, should be carefully inspected to check for soils with increased organic content which may warrant removal and replacement. A qualified ' soils technician should be present during stripping. operations and foundation inspection to delineate the plan limits and depth of removal of any unsuitable material identified ' during foundation inspection. 2. The exposed subgrade should be uniformly compacted using a heavy, vibratory roller ' having a minimum static drum weight of 5 tons. Subgrade compaction should consist of no less than ten (10) complete coverages in a rriss-crossed pattern throughout the entire I structure area, plus the 5 foot margin- Compaction should achieve a minimum density of ! no less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density as established in ASTM D-1557. i 3. A qualified engineer or technician should be present during initial compaction operations ' to check proper compactor performance and compaction procedures. The compaction should be performed at a speed equivalent to that of a slow walking pace. 4. Density tests should be used to control subgrade compaction. At least one (1) density test ' should be performed for every 5,000 ft .2 at the surface of compaction and at a depth of 12 inches.. ' 5. The excavated footing areas shall be compacted with a hand-guided vibratory compactor , having a minimum plate width of 24 inches or the footing width whichever is less. No fewer than ten (10) coverages shall be effected. Compaction tests shall be. conducted to ' check that a density of not less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density has been maintained. I s 2 FILL OR BACKFILL PLACEMENT 1. Fill or backfill required to develop proposed grade should be inorganic, clean to slightly silty, fine sand, free of unsuitable debris: Soils with a Unified Soil Classification of SP to SP-SM would certainly be considered suitable. 2. The fill should be placed in lift thicknesses not exceeding, 12 inches for heavy compaction and 9 inches for hand-guided compaction with each lift compacted to a density of no less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density. Moisture content within the fill soil should be controlled to within f2% of optimum as established in ASTM D-1557 to help ensure development of both density and stability during compaction operations. No fewer than six (6) to'eight (8) coverages should be made on each lift using the above ' specified heavy, vibratory roller. 3. Density tests should also be used to control fill placement. At least one (1) density test should be performed for each 5,000 ft.2 per fill lift. - 4. Careful inspection and compaction tests should also be performed to confirm required uniformity of compaction prior to slab-on-grade construction. FOUNDATION DESIGN ' 1. Shallow foundations may be designed based upon an allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,500 pounds per square foot based upon dead plus live plus wind load requirements. 2. We recommend a footing embedment of no less than 16 inches below finished grade, but excessive embedment should be avoided to take advantage of the surficial compaction. 3. Slab-on-grade construction may be utilized. To maintain slab support, excavation for utilities and foundations should be backfilled and compacted in lifts with a small compactor. Before backfill is placed, all water and loose debris should be removed from the excavations. 4. A bearing wall footing width of no less than 16 inches is recommended. 1 •r?::.R ?r;,y - - --_ • t.._,..? ..,. _ _.:/:. - r. - PLATE I ; DOR: NCx- LOCATrON PLAN D'riggers Engineering Services Incorporated , z N O ?N .N a d P v, c a s N r N m' x J V 6 L u N O O m L F 0 N. I , -------_-----_ _-,_,j:--- PENNSYLVANIA AVENUE _L---- -----.. - -- - ---- -----?- --i-- Fri-70F I z 494.95'rPl,. I N 00' 18'42" E 95. 10'IFI IF150.55 flPryls * lo-crr I v 00.18'4?' E \ . It•rn ,-7 ?t 1Tt IYU,o n YMI 0 p ,7 x °C s::: tc oul l p Yt0 i'(t rJ ?IT tY( i .o ' vctD IQ e DRI-1 i (, ro. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I a ,n.0 i ; a, to-cl a}? .0 , 4'r4 o m ?J O,a'trr ?•c qzt Ii {.'oo' o m la• 'I 1 =` V 32-M 21, a' m. 4'ar?J Z I ?Ii'o.c H _ I SPT-1 SPT-2 p - .I .p TRIPLE 1'1'1. ((?? q• ,o' I a•Irt?:J V D? •''IeU - I °` I. ,lo.olJ 101. 10(P) I. l c 7•c• x00'18'42-E .10f.13'('FJ I _ y),CIS- - s IMF} - _ - = - I/ I ® HA-5 L,rp I : a. J 3,v*t i I HA-6 SPT-5 e to ? .J I pp{? /? ul rn I 1 - tlltC?tE 0 11,1 w ' ctcs. ;rain I:•,W ^; In I' DRI-2"..t,l HA 4 I SPT-3 l%_Cr, I„ r ti? 'I SPT-4 0 ; I o,. 0 HA-11 ® 0 QO Io o >a 60 sea" 111 FEET SCALE: 1" -..6 I o' SPT- 11'(rP '1"" ' 011-cM•o t ' I LEGEND: " `b tl = A HAND AUGER BORING LOCATION ?i - - I - a?`?s• • • ?`"' 0 (S `" I?0 9 STANDARD PENETRATION TEST I I M J 6.1 1& Is ?, H R I BORING LOCATION 1 I .BHA-2 vAHA-3 ° "? • "° ° t t I DOUBLE-RING INFILTRATION TEST/ I 1 "" ` I HAND AUGER BORING LOCATION o I 1 I _1 JT U L 1 . . I Q•p" I ' r 1 t' I ' uroull ao--- trsc lo ---- - ,a _ .'--• ••_•-^ It' _....13_ ...__ ---------------------------- 8Sq l Y' w -•w°"rw : DNti n o --- ----------------------- ------sao`DT'7s -sa6.71-rF'7'b4b-aU'rPi AORTN ?REENWPOITAVEN(7E----- -- Ml?.u- ? r< PLATE RECORD DRAWINGS ...... ?(^? 4.. A"i ._. ?..._ = CITY OF CLEARWATER. FLORIDA PARKS AND RECREATION amm wr. Pwmw T DGB NORTHWEST RECREATION & ICLFARVATER AQUATIC CENTER Tw ?" REVISION ' '? PARTMENT DE m SITE PLAN ° ^ d GREGORY S. TRIM. P.E. s 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 003875 BORING NO. SPT--1 - Project, -Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center, Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman D.P. Completion - Depth To Depth 26.5' Date 4/25/01 Water 7.3'- Time Date 4/27/01 v -r °? H W a Q ca SOIL DESCRIPTION URF. EL: +23.2+/-' Z w H 00.0 N iC w P. CL oaao y s m STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOAM? R-1Q2 LB.D. HAMMER, 30" DROP _ 10 20 40 6080, 0 Grayish-grown Fine SAND (SP) Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) Loose to medium dense gray 6/8/7 i+t to light brownish-gray Fine SAND (SP) 5/4/5 5 6/6/7 is '• Loose brownish-gray silty Fine SAND (SM) 5/5/5 10. 1.QX1 Loose to medium dense brownish-gray 3/3/3 rMa i 1ia !: slightly silty Fine SAND (SP-SM) . _ ;W-4: 6/7/10 cr l? 1: Loose gray silty, clayey Fine SAND ISM-SC) 15 7/3/3 Stiff greenish-gray CLAY (CH) 20 2/3/7 Hard gray variably cemented, sandy CLAY (CH) 25 .: 12/13/25 30 Remarks B orehole Grouted Casing Length DRIGGERS • ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED b Project No. DES 003875 BORING NO. SPT-2 Project Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center Clearwater, Florida .' Location 'See Plate I Foreman D.P. Completion Depth To Depth' 26.5' Date 4/25/01 Water 7.0' Time Date 4/27/01 o J ° m W g y - SOIL DESCRIPTION URF. EL: +24.0+/-' Z U H 0 z ? 0.' a g a0 ma H is STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER-140 LB. HAMMER, 30" DROP 10 20 40 60 80 L. 0 Dark gray slightly silty Fine SAND with roots _-• and finely divided organic material (SP-SM) - ?' i h Fi S Brown - ray ne AND (SP) s • E s i Loose to medium dense to r ish-b 3/3/4 ?ii• gray g ay rown Fine SAND (SP) . 5 3/4/4 3/5/8 r owl, "' Medium dense light brownish-gray slightly silty 7/5/7 10 FIl?pi Fine SAND (SP-SM) Loose to very loose brownish-gray 4/5/5 silty Fine SAND (SM) 3/1/2 15 Very loose gray silty, clayey Fine SAND (SM-SC) 1/2/1 - Tan dolomitic LIMESTONE 20 50` enetr io s •_ Hard greenish-gray variably cemented CLAY (CH) 25 • . 15/23/30 • 3fl -: ' Remarks Borehole Grouted Casing Length 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F1 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES I RPORATED Project No. DES 003875 BORING NO. SPT-3 Project Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center, Clearwater, Florida_ ^ Location See Plate I T Foreman D.P: - Completion Depth To Depth 26.5' Date 4/25/01 Water 8.0' Time bate , 4/27/01 Iii _ 0 .a m y W g SOIL DESCRIPTION SURF. EL: + 23.1 + /-' - - Z LO H c . N W w w --? 4 Q v STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS/FT. ON 2. O.D. SAMPLER-140 LB. HAMMER, 30' DROP 10 20 40 60 80 0 Grayish-brown Fine SAND with roots (SP) } Orangish-brown slightly silty, slightly clayey Fine SAND (SP-SM) - - Fi SAND M di d li h b 5/4/9 ne rown e um ense gray to g t (SP) 3/5/9 5 i Wll' Medium dense light brown slightly silty 8/9/9 '•?'rl FlipX IM 4 Fine SAND (SP-SM) P Medium dense light brown to grayish-brown 5/9/10 Fine SAND (SP) 10 9/10/12 7/9/8 5 Loose greenish-gray silty, clayey Fine SAND (SM-SC) 2/3/3 - 1771 20 Tan dolomitic LIMESTONE 50'" ene r io • Hard green variably cemented CLAY (CH) 25 ' . 16/19/19 30 Remarks Borehole Grouted Casing Length 1 .. I DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 003875 BORING NO. SPT-4 Project Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center, Clearwater, Florida _ Location See Plate I ?r Foreman D.P. Completion Depth To Depth 26.5' Date 4/25/01 Water 7.3' Time Date 4/27/01 = 0 -a g y to w J g rQ SOIL. DESCRIPTION URF. EL: +23.6+/-' z Lau, N 0 v, W z _J a 0 g a as 0 to STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS/Fr. ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER-140 LB. HAMMER- 30" DROP _ 10 20 40 6080 I 0 ,.. Orange slightly clayey Fine SAND (SP-SM) , Gray Fine SAND (SP) Loose light gray Fine SAND (SP) .4/6/5 5 irSa 1? rr»a: Loose to. medium dense light brown 4/5/5 i E71e 17111 1 slightly silty Fine SAND (SP-SM) . . 7/10/10 CrJya: Loose brownish-gray silty Fine SAND (SM) 4/4/4 ' f 1 Loose grayish-brown slightly silty Fine SAND 3/3/2 F(f7+. (SP-SMI Loose brownish-gray Fine SAND (SP) 2/3/3 15 147:1:1= cr»a: Loose brownish-gray slightly silty Fine SAND 117 •ll: (SP-SM) 4/4/6 r.r.7a:i• Frl?a; Very stiff greenish-gray to green CLAY (CH) 20 5/6/11 25 6/11/15 . 30 Remarks Borehole Grouted Casing Length 1 1 1 t I - 1, I I I I I i DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCOR ATED Project No.. DES 003875 BORING NO. SPT-5 Project Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate 1 Foreman D.P. Completion Depth To Depth 26.5' Date 4/25/01 Water 7.2*. Time Date 4/27/01 +I . Ui O -+ m° 2 r j w g rQ J SOIL DESCRIPTION U-RF.EL:+24.1+/-' w H 0 a. y 0 w z . 3: -a a0. Saw caa0 STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS/Fr. ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER-140 LB. HAMMER, 30" DROP 10 20 40 6080 0 Dark gray Fine SAND with roots nd finely divided organic material (SP) " Brown Fine SAND (SP) Mediu nse ra wn Fi d t b SAND (SP) 10/11110 g y m e o ro ne 5 - light gray at depth 4' 5/5/7 3'(7/11 ` Medium dense to very loose light grayish-brown 6/6/6 10 to brownish-gray silty Fine SAND (SM) 5/3/3 2/2/2 15 Loose dark gray silty, clayey Fine SAND {SM-SC) 3/2/3 Tan dolomitic LIMESTONE 20 6/504 ` 0.2' Penetr do Ward gra sand CLAY (CH) IA I 25 y y 13/17/21 30 Remarks Borehole Grouted Casing Length DRIGGERS ENGINEERING .SERVICES INCORPORATED . P Project No. DES 003875 BORING NO.- SPT-6 Project Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center, Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate J. Foreman D.P. Completion Depth To Depth 26.5' Date 4/25/01 Water 6.4' Time Date 4/27/01 O J ° g H a SOIL DESCRIPTION URF. EL: +23.2+/-' O a N y w z CL m a 0 cn z STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWSIFT; ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER-140 LB. HAMMER, 30 DROP 10 20 40 6080 Brownish-gray Fine SAND with roots (SP) Loose dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 2/3/3 CW-)' • Loose light brown slightly silty Fine SAND 2/3/3 5 1 •ia 1. F C9 ??: (SP-SM) cer: Medium dense light brown Fine SAND (SP) 6/6/7 rtiia: Loose light brownish-gray to brownish-gray 4/5/4 ?i:! slightly silty Fine SAND (SP-SM) 10 4/3/3 rF?sill , I c?a;l; cr? a 4/4/3 a : E L:1' 15 Medium dense light brown Fine SAND (SP) 5/10/7 Very stiff greenish-gray to green CLAY (CH) 20 6/7/8 25 $/i 5/15 30 Remarks Borehole Grouted. Casing Length HAND AUGER ROUINIG LDGS . . Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 1 '._ DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED 1- 1 t l! HAND AUGER BORING LUG PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center CLIENT: Wade-Trim, Inc. Greenwood Avenue & Palmetto Street Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: 6.8' DATE: 4/27/01 TECHNICIAN: S.E. DATE 4/27/01 COMPLETION DEPTH: LOCATION: See Plate I TEST NUMBER: HA-1 ELEV. DESCRIPTION DEPTH O m } H REMARKS Gray Fine SAND (SP) 0 Surface Elevation: +23.2+/-' 22 - ra Fine SAND (SP) Li ht y g g 2 Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 20 Light brown Fine SAND (SP) 4 18 6 Fine SAND htl silt ish-brown sli Gra ?' Ir g y y y (SP-SM) ?V rI. 7:4 r t i:wc1 16 . :j.; . • 8 h4.1 i• J3rL] •1:MGi a:?; r •r iXLr 14 10 12 12 10 14 INCORPORATED HAND AUGER BORING LOG PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center CLIENT: Wade-Trim Inc. Greenwood Avenue A Palmetto Street Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: 6.4' DATE: 4127/01 TECHNICIAN: S.E. DATE: 4/25/01 COMPLETION DEPTH: I3.5' LOCATION: See Plate 1 TEST NUMBER: HA-2 LE . Wr) ESCRIPTION EPTH J O c r N EMARKS Orange slightly clayey Fine SAND (SP-SM) 0 f' Surface Elevation: +23.0+1-' - Note: Borin erformed 22 Orangish-brown Fine SAND with pockets g p in baseball infield. Of clayey Fine SAND (SP/SC) Gray Fine SAND (SP) 2 Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 20 - - Light brown Fine SAND (SP) 4 , 18 6 Li ht ra SAND (SP) Fi g g y ne 16 13 14 10 12 12 10 14 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES ' :. DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED HAND AUGER BORING LOG PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center CLIENT: Wade-Trim, Inc. Greenwood Avenue & Palmetto Street Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: • 4127/01 TECHNICIAN: S.E. DATE: 4/27/01 COMPLETION DEPTH: 8.5' LOCATION: See Plate 1 TEST NUMBER: - HA-3 ELEV. - DESCRIPTION DID H O in ?. d! REMARKS Brown Fine SAND with roots (SP) 0 Surface Elevation: +22.8+/-' L'• 22 Brown Fine SAND (SP) Gray Fine SAND (SP) " - 2 Dark brown organic, , C3 20 slightly silty Fine SAND (SP-SM) $?• ? M•r ? w. I C 4 7:5 C Gray Fine SAND (SP) 18 ' B li htl ilt Fi SAND . rown s g y s y ne (SP-SM) ? c f] 11: • 6 : .? .r t}. :LT r I. 16 Light brown Fine SAND (SP) 8 4 1 . 10 12 12 10 14 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES L 1 WQORPORATED ' HAND AUGER SOMG LOG PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center CLIENT: Wade-Trim, Inc. Greenwood-Avenue & Palmetto Street Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: 6.6' 4/27101 TECHNICIAN: S.E. DATE: 427/01 COMPLETION DEPTH: - 8.6' LOCATION: • See plate I TEST NUMBER: • FiA-4 F ) • DESCRIPTION DEPTH J O? y REMARKS Gray Fine SAND with roots (SP) 0 Surface Elevation: +23.1+/-' Dark brown slightly silty Fine SAND k'r r: 22 with pockets of orange slightly clayey Fine SAND (SP-SM) Gray Fine SAND (SP) 2 20 4 18 Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 6 Light grayish-brown Fine SAND (SP) 16 74 10 12 12 10 14 t 1 l i 1.1 n 1 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED HAND AUGER $OMG LOG PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center CLIENT: Wade-Trim, Inc. Greenwood Avenue & Palmetto Street Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE:. 4/27/01 TECHNICIAN: • S.E. DATE: 4/27/01 COMPLETION DEPTH: 8.6' LOCATION: See Plate I TEST NUMBER: HA-5 FE I' DESCRIPTION D PTH J O to tq REMARKS Dark gray slightly silty Fine SAND 0 Surface Elevation: +23.5+/-' with finely divided organic material x - and surficial roots (SP-SM) 2 C3 22 1. 2 Gray Fine SAND (SP) 2 20 Dark gray slightly- organic, sli silt Fine SAND (SP-SM) htl 4 • rr g y y x Brown Fine SAND (SP) 18 Brownish- ra ver silt Fine SAND g y y y (SM) 6 1fi ' 8 14 10 12 12 10 14 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATES HAND AUGER BORING LOG . PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center CLIENT: Wade-Trim, Inc. Greenwood Avenue & Palmetto Street Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE. 6.3' DATE: 4/27101 TECHNICIAN: S.E. DATE: 4/27101 COMPLETION DEPTH: 8.5' LOCATION: See Plate I TEST NUMBER: HA-6 ELEV. (FT) DESCRIPTION DH ID r } v, REMARKS Dark gray slightly silty Fine SAND 0 I Surface Elevation: +23.7 with finely divided organic material and roots (SP-SM) = ! Dark gray silty Fine SAND with seams ', b: of orange cemented, slightly clayey M .- 22 Fine SAND (SM/SP-SM) Fine SAND (SP) Gra 2 y Dark brown slightly organic, 20 slightly silty Fine SAND (SP-SM) 4 a L C Brown Fine SAND (SP) 18 • 6 Light grayish-brown Fine SAND (SP) 16 S 14 10 12 12 10 14 1 1 I Job No: DES 003875 Client : Wade-Trim. Inc. Project: Northwest Recreation & Location: See Sketch Test Depth: 1.5' Description of Soil at Test Depth: Depth of Groundwater Below Test D Test No. DRI-1 Date: 4/27/01 Aquatic Center; Greenwood Ave. & Palmetto SL; Pinellas County, FL -Outer Cyl: Diam: 36" Inner Cyl. Diam: 12" GM and brown Fine SAND epth: 4.0' Infiltration. Rate: 5.31NHr 1. f I l 20 15 O z m ? 10 C Q • 5- 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Elapsed Time of Infiltration - HOURS TEST PROCEDURE: The test was conducted in general accordance with ASTM D 3385-75. A seven (7") inch hydraulic head was utilized. The infiltration rate was determined at selected time intervals by recording the time for a 1 inch drop in water level. The seven (7") inch head was then re-established until the next test interval. The test ' was continued (minimum 4 hours) until stability was achieved and the infiltration rate did not vary in excess of 5% between successive one (1) hour measurements. Readings were recorded at intervals not exceeding 30 minutes. The plotted infiltration rate above represents the average of all observations during each hour interval. Technician: S.E. Reviewed by: i i ORIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATEO HAND AUGER BOMG LOG PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center CLIENT: Wade-Trim, Inc. Greenwood Avenue & Palmetto Street Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: 5.5? DATE.4/23nD1 TECHNICIAN: T.T: DATE: 4123/01 COMPLETION DEPTH: 8.0' LOCATION: See Plate I TEST NUMBER: DRI-1 E E . DESCRIPTION kD j O REMARKS e SAND with surficial toots Fin B e•"i?" Surface Elevation: "+23.4+P rown and trace of orange clayey Fine SAND (SP) i SAND SP) 22 ( Gray and brown F ne Light gray Fine SAND (SP) 2 20 li il Fi SAND •? r ne . ghtly s Brown s ty L% r 3 (SP-SM) 4 . 1 [r r i• c 1: fJ 18 A% . A cr r1:L1: 6 a?ri}i :1303 SAND i il Fi 16 ty ne ghtly s Light brown sl (SP-SM) 'L j; r ]. I Lr = • " 8 :i r i 14 10 12 12 10 14 t L I i 1 i i Job No: DES 003875 Test No. DRI-2 Date: 04124/2001 Client : Wade-Trim, Inc. . Project: Northwest Recreation & uatic Center; Greenwood Ave. & Palmetto St.; Pinellas Coun , FL Location: See Sketch Test Depth: 1.0' Outer Cyl. Diam: 36" Inner Cyl. Diam: 12" Description of Soil at Test Depth: Gray Sli h Sil Fine SAND Depth of Groundwater Below Test Depth: 4.T Infiltration Rate: 6.1 In/Hr 20- 15 a= O Z Z_ m 10- 5- o 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Elapsed Time of Infiltration - HOURS ¦ TEST PROCEDURE: The test was conducted in general accordance with ASTM D 3385-75. A seven (7") inch hydraulic head was utilized. The infiltration rate was determined at selected-time intervals by recording the time for 1 a 1 inch drop in water level. The seven (7") inch head was then re-established until the next test interval. The test was-continued (minimum 4 hours) until stability was achieved and the infiltration rate did not vary in excess of 5% between successive one (1) hour measurements. Readings were recorded at intervals no exceeding 30 minutes. The plotted infiltration rate above represents the average of all observations_ during each _49r interval. ' Technician: S.E. - Reviewed by: i r EFON I M - -M I DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED HAND AUGER BORING LOG PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center CLIENT: Wade-Trim, Inc. Greenwood Avenue & Palmetto Street Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: 5.7' DATE: 4/23/01 TECHNICIAN: T.T. DATE: 4/23/01 COMPLETION DEPTH: 10.0' LOCATION: Sea Plate I TEST NUMBER: DRI-2 ELEV I. IFT ESCRIPTION ID H • J O mo w EMARKS G li h l il AND Fi 0 0+/ ' 23 S f El i ray s g y s ne S t ty with s irficial roots (SP-SM) I? c/ - on: + ur ace evat . 22 h 11 1 7:h r t - Grayish-brown slightly silty Fine SAND with finely divided organic material 2 ?Zc (SP-SM) Light grayish-brown Fine SAND (SP) .20 Brown Fine SAND (SP) Light brown Fine SAND (SP) 4 18 Light. gray Fine SAND (SP) ' B 16 Grayish-brown slightly silty Fine SAND (SP-SM) a*-CI r 8 . 'ra.Fa. 7:rC t 14 .t :t t r a:?: r c 10 =r 12 12 10 14 L Lit SUMMARY OV LABORATORY TESL' RESULTS '• Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated '' SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS BORING NO. Dg Oil DLSCR[PT[ON W% IY^ a ( C') G, ATPERB£RG LIMITS P.P. U.C. CON G.S. ORG PH CL SO4 RES. P LL PL SL list) [Ya) (pp-) (PPm) {Ob-cm) SPf-I 10.0-11.5 Bmwoisblpy slightly silty Fine SAND SPT-3 15.0-16.5 Greenish-gray silty, clayey Fine SAND 23.2 34 19 .. 26.S SPT 4 - 4.0-5.5 Light brown slightly silty Fine SAND • HA I - 2.4-35 Dark brown Fine SAND • HA -3 . 2,4-4.I Dark brawn organic, slightly silty Fine SAND • 73 HA-5 3.94.8 Dark gray slightly organic, slightly ailty Fine SAND ' 3.9 DRI.1 1.7-3.4 Light gray Fiat SAND DRI-2 0.0.1.6 pray slightly silty Fine SAND W% a Water Content Con. a Consolidation Test Y s (hcf) - Dry Density G.S. (+1) Grainsize Analysis (Hydrometer) Gs - LL a Spedric Gravity Li uid Li it ORG. (%) Organic Content CLIENT: Wade-Trim, inc. q m Cl. (ppm) - Total Chloride PL - Plastic Limit SO, (pp-) m Total Sulfate PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center SL - Shrinkage Limit RES. (ohm-cm) Lab Resistivity , Greenwood Avenue & Palmetto Street. Clearwaw, Florida P.P. (tsi) - Pocket Peactrorneter • a See Test Curves FILE: DES GD3275 U.C. Unconfined Compression *? Percent Passing No. 200 Sieve ?. - -ANAL YS91S ?: Qriggers Engineer iog Services Incorporated i DRiGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. 11 C ' r + 3 1 v.. awv? s? VDM?^R In ugnaa 3 2 4 o 10 a D 0 D D D } U. S StaeEud Siara,NmnLus 11 If 70 30 W 1 i 0.06 LL G006 -.11 'aKW in millimeters GRAVEL SA I Coutia F ne umber ilePih Natural L L P. L P. 1. Classification Moisture PT-T 10.0' - 11.5' raven s -grays g t y siity Fine shun 10 20 30 40 so L 60 70 80 90 loo 1 SILT or CLAY CLIENT: Wade-Trim, Inc. PROJECT. Greenwood Recreation & Aquatic Center, Greenwood Ave. & Palmetto St., Clearwater. Florida FILE: DES 003875 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. la a a< x .160 3 B !0 sa ?a m se 0 s 0 to to w16• 50 so u 4 PO so go 00 an au. Q,ce m mnammelers umber Depth nsumal ILL P. L P. I. CLIENT a e- r Inc. Moisture Clsss+ficali0n , PT-4 4.0' Light brown slightly silty Fine SAND PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation 6 Aquatic Center, Greenwood Ave. A Palmetto 5t...Clearwater. Florida FILE: DES 003875 _ F. DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. t 3 c ? 3 2 3 U. S St}ndW SNre Hampers 14 Is ao 30 e0 so loo 1w 34Q+oaelr 0 0 0 0 0 Q 3 - s ILL 1 30 0 ?o 0 b? 0 L" Y A 0 a io %Imll AII! Ilt AilipRietaTS RAVEL SAND SILL CUY Cosne .rg F Number Depth Natural LL P. L P. I. CJassificaGon CLIENT. a e- r m, AC. Moisture PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation A Aquatic HA-1 2.4' - 3.5' Dark brown Fine SAND Center, Greenwood Ave. & - Palmetto St., Clearwater, Florida FILE: DES 003875 ?w ww w?w ww w w w w w w w w?w wi . w I 3 I H l 0.01 0.005 a.ml TRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. I q It S e 6 a ?s 44 1 a 30 20 SI S 30 w so e? 60 10 so 20 100 It 1.I.itFYF: Wade-Triat, Inc. PROJECT: Greenwood Re-creation & Aquatic Center, Greenwood Ave. & Palmetto St.. Clearwater, Florida FILE: DES 003875 lumber Depth Natural L L P, L P. I. Moisture Classification HA-3 2.4' -4.11 ark brown organic, slightly silty Fine'S GAVEL urmn ast in mnumelers --SAND I Crone r.ne SILT or CLAY DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. 3 0 0 0 S 0 0 0 10 cram ,11.16 In P l"inieters GRAVEL SAN Louse _Nu SILT or CLAY umber Depth Natural L L P L P. 1, Classification CLIENT: Wade-Trim. Inc. Moisture HA-5 3.9' - 4.8' ar grays g y organ c. PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation E Aquatic slightly silty Fine SAND Center. Greenwood Ave. S Palmetto St., Clearwater. Florida FILE: DES. 003875 Vp6mnp fa ,xn.. U. S 51604ar40 SWA humbol -- to0 s 'a a o • 20 to 40 s0 r ioo I 2M a ' WWI I I I I INk 1 1111 1 1 11 1 80 1 70 3 e 40 30 7 20 I to + - - -- I iI 1 100 50 30 5 1 0.5 011 0115 Ojai 0.005 0.001 DAIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. M S srmdr4 {Ir+s DP-- in Aec+wa U. S Standard SiM Numbers too ; 11 54 16 20 so w so 10 iao 140 M 0 90 I T T to ao m IO 30 so 40 30 so 40 30 :o zfl so :o 0 100 too 50 10 s l o.s or oos 0.01 coos 0.001 Grain Site in Milhmelers GRAVEL SA Coarse r n, SILT or CLAY Number I Dep1A Natural Moisture L L P. L P. I. Classification CLIENU Wade-Trim, Inc. DRI-1 1.7' - 3.4' Light gray Fine SAND PROJECT: Greenwood Recreation d Aquatic Center, &reankood Ave. & Palmetto 4t., Clearwater, Florida FILE: DES 003875 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. i E 7 t 3 E tL 4 3 2 1 ... i +r A awry Vgnra? m D D D D TFF- D D 3 f U. S Standud Sim Hum4va If is . 20 30 40 1 7-71H< 11 - I • Hjd?omeW -• r 1 100 t0 5 1 115 01 0.05 0.01 0.005' 0.0 10 20 30 40 ' ?i 50 C V 6 V V It 70 e0 90 urain size in reiwmeters RAVEL SAND Caine r SILT or CLAY Number Depth Natural L L P. L P. I. Classification Wilde-Trim, Inc. Moisture DRI-2 0.0' - 1.6' Gray slightly silty Fine SAND PROJECT. Greenwood Recreation A Aquatic Center, Greenwood Ave. b Palmetto St., Clearwater, Florida .FILE.. DES 003875 MIE CAD OF TWWG.•. ?w - Driggers Engineering Services Incorporai:ed STANDARD PENETRATION TEST AND SOIL CLASSIFICATION STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (ASTM D-1 In the Standard Penetration Test borings, a tot" drilling rig is used to advance the borehole to the desired test depth. A viseoua w drilling fluid is circuLm ed througb the drill rods and bit to stabilize tbc borehole and to assist in removal of soil and rook cuttings up and out of the borehole. -Upon reaching the desired test depth, the 2 inch O.D. split.banvi sampler or "sptibspoom as it is sometimes called, is attached to an X. size drill rod and lowered to the bottom of the borehole. A 140 pound hammer, attached to the drill string at the ground surf ce, is that used to drive the sampler into the formation. The hammer is sucoiwively raised and dropped for a distance of 30 inches using a rope and "cathcad" assembly. The number of blows is recorded for each 6 inch interval of penetration or until virtual refusal is achieved In the above manner, the samples are ideally advanced a total of IS inches. The sum of the blows required to effect the final 12 inches of penetration is called the blowcount, penetration resistance of W value of the particular material at the sample depth. After penetration, the rods and sampler are retracted to the ground sutface where the core sample is removed, sealed in a glass jar and transported to the laboratory for verification of field classification and storage. WATER TABLE 4 -. ='N" VALUE OR 6 SLOW COUNT 7 zl SOIL SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION FINE SAND MUCK CLAYEY FINE SAND SILTY FINE SAND SHELBY TUBE SANDY CLAY CLAY CLAYEY LIMESTONE SANDY LIMESTONE CORE RUN-- LIMESTONE Soil and rock samples secured in the field sampling operation were visually classified as to texture, color and consistency. Soil classifications are presented descriptively and symbolically for ease of interpretation. The stratum identification lines represent the approximate boundary between soil types. In marry cases, this transition may be gradual. Consistency of the soil as to relative density or undrained shear STRATUM strength, unless otherwise noted, is based upon Standard Penetration CHANGE resistance values of 'N' values and industry-accepted standards. 'W values, or blowcouuts, are presented in both tabular and graphical form on each respective boring log at each sample interval. The graphical plot of blowcount versus depth is for illustration purposes only and does not warrant continuity is soil consistency or linear variation between sample intarwk The borings represent subsurface conditions at respective boring locations and sample intervals only. Variations in subsurfm conditions 50/0.3' may occur between boring locations. Groundwater depths shown represent water depths at the dates and time shown only. The absence of water table information does not necessanly imply that groundwater DENOTES 50 BLOWS FOR ` not encountered OS PENETRAT I ON ' . SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: D ........ ............ I ..................................................... CONTRACT BON ........................................ .................................... 3 CONTRACT ...................................................... CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ................. .................................... 6 ........................... ND .................................... 7 ....................................................... PROPOSAL BO VIT .................................. .................................... 8 AFFIDA ............... IDAVIT .................................... 9 ............................................ NON-COLLUSION AFF ................................... .. L ...................................10 . ........................................................ PROPOSA CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET .............................. ...................................13 .................. O L ' ...................................14 ...................... ......................... SA S PROP BIDDER SectionV.doc Page i 9/27/2010 1 FLORIDA SURETY BONDS, INC. 1 JUN 2 8 2011 June 27, 2011 rr,, 1 ' City of Clearwater, Florida 100 South Myrtle Avenue Oearwater, FL 33756-5520 1 620 N. Wymare Road, Suite 200 Maitland, FL 32751 407-786.7770 Fax 407.786-7766 1326 S. Ridgewood Avenu(-', Suite 015 Daytr)na Beach, Fl, 32114 386-898.0507 Fax 386-898-0510 888-786-8OND (2663) Fax 888.718-BOND (2663) www.FloridrrSuretyBoncis.com t Re: Authority to Date Bonds and Powers of Attorney Principal: Pillar Construction Group, LLC. ' Bond No.: GSB 25412 Project, North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovation and Expansion, North Greenwood Library Renovations (08-0020-PR), 400 N. Martin Luther King, Jr. Avenue, Clearwater, FL 33756 1 Dear Sir or Madam: Please be advised that as Surety on the above referenced bond, executed on your behalf ' for this project, we hereby authorize you to date the bonds and the powers of attorney concurrent with the date of the contract agreement. Once dated, please fax a copy of the bonds to our office. Sincerely, ' The Gray Insurance Company 1 C Cheryl Foley Attorney-in-Fact and Florida licensed Resi&nt Agent Executed In 3 Counbw"f s Public Work F.S. Chapter 255.05 (1)(8) Cover Paige THIS BOND IS GIVEN TO COMPLY WITH SECTION MM OR SECTION 713.23 FLORIDA STATUTES. AND ANY ACTION INSTITUTED BY A CLAIMANT UNDER THIS BOND FOR PAYMENT MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE . WITH THE NOTICE AND TOE LIMITATION PROVISIONS IN SECTION 2655.05(2) OR SECTION 713.23 FLORIDA STATUTES. BOND NO: GSB 25412 CONTRACTOR NAME: Pdk'tt Construgbon GMu LLC. CONTRACTOR ADDRESS: 1312 Bowman Street Cle FL 34711 CONTRACTOR PHONE NO: 2 SURM COMPANY: The Gray Insurance Como-any 62 2 PO §0 Metairie LA 70009-5202 504 868-7790 OWNER NAME: City of-ClibafwateL Florida OWNER ADDRESS: 100 South nffge Avenue C star FL 33756-5520 OWNER PHONE NO.: (ZZ71 OBLIGEE NAME: (If contracting wal y is different fram ft owner, the contracting public entity) OBLIGEE ADDRESS: 1 OBLIGEE PHONE NO.: BOND AMOUNT: $654,298.70 CONTRACT NO.: (If applicable) DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Recreation n r Renovation nd Fx n n North Greenwood North G Renovations Library PROJECT LOCATION: 900 N. Martin Luther Ki Jr. A nue arwater, FL 33756 LEGAL DESCRIPTION: (if appiia") 1 F NT P AN other bond p"*) are & WNW %*@" d to lhla pap mpWhm of any p"ea number(s) that nay be printed thereon. 1 The attached statutory cover page forms and becomes a part of this bond. BOND NUMBER: GSB 25412 Executed in 3 Counterparts CONTRACT BOND STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF PINELLAS KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we PILLAR CONSTRUCTION GROUP, LLC Contractor and THE GRAY INSURANCE COMPANY (Surety) whose home address is P. O. BOX 6202, METAIRIE LA 70009-6202 HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of: SIX HUNDRED FIFTY-FOUR THOUSAND TWO HUNDRED NINETY EIGHT DOLLARS AND SEVENTY CENTS ($654,298.70) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the3C3'' day of ?U h 20l entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER RENOVATION AND EXPANSION & NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS (08-0020-PR) a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, on the part of the said Contractor agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. O T T BON ' (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby ftwther bind themselves, their successors, executors, ' administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by ' reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper. performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents ' or servants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the ' work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, ' extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, ' alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this ' day of , 20 PILLAR CON TR TION GROUP LLC CONTRACTOR By:` ATTEST: WITNESS: 1 1 COUNTERSIGNED: /A The Grav Insurance Co®aun SURETY By: ATTORN Y-IN-FA & FL Lic. esident Agent Cheryl Foley (407) 786-7770 1 CONTRACT ' This CONTRACT made and entered into this 30 day of TU r1 e , 2011 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and LLAR CO STRU ION R UP L of the City of CLAREM_ ONT, County of LA and ' State of FLORIDA hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: 1 The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at eir own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the ' following: NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER RENOVATION AND EXPANSION NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS (6"20-PR) FOR THE SUM OF SIX HUNDRED FIFTY-FOUR THOUSAND TWO HUNDRED NINETY- EIGHT DOLLARS AND SEVENTY CENTS ($654,2".70) ' In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any ' advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and ' assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as i contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in ' accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY ' AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF ' THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY ' CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. 1 Pale 3 1 ' CONTRACT (Z) ' In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: ' employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees ' or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause. ' The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including oontracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. ' It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the ? event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of1M.fi0 per dmv for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.U0 ner i ay shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be consUued as liquidated damages for failure of the ' Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or ' sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, famish an additional 1 bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful ' performance of the work under the teams hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. 1 Pop 4 CONTRA (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA -I,&- , By: William B. Horne, II ' City Manager Countersigned: r - By: Frank Hibbard, Mayor-Councilmember 1 (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) ' (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own 1 name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). 1 Pala 5 Attest: (Seal) Rosemarie Call City Clerk App as to form Camilo Soto Assistant City Attorney ?91 - 4C. -t"C' (Contractor) By: SEAL CONTRACTOR'S AMPAVIT F FINAL PAYMM (CORPORATION FORM STATE OF COUNTY OF On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) of PILLA. ' C ST UCTIO GRO a Florida Corporation, with its principal plaice of business located at 1312 BOWMAN STREET. CLAREMM, FLORIDA 34711 (herein, the "Contractor"). That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of 20_? with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of: ' NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER RENOVATION AND EXPANSION & NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS (08-0020-PR) That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described properly. ' That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of ffinal Full AmouRl of C tract in fhll satisfaction and discharge of said contract. That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might a nse out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Sworn and subscribed to before me PIL U O O P AFFIANT This day of , 20 BY: NOTARY PUBLIC i My Commission Expires: Pale 6 PRESIDENT i D (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) 1 KNOWN ALL MIEN HY THESE )PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, as Principal, and The Gr Insurance Comps -- as ea Surety, who's address is P.O. Box 62E Metairie U4 70Dt1la-9202 are held and firmly bound unto ' the city of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Dollars ($ V y )_9 , r ) (being a minimum of l o% of Contractor's total bid arnount) for the payment 1/? of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves. our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. 71tc condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Pillar Cor??truction as principal, and The Gray Insurance Company Gam'-1" C Surety, for work specified as: Pr ed 00e-0020-PR:0North Greenwood Recreation Center Renovation & Norlt+ Greenwood Li Renovations 900, . M gLbL Kina. Jr. Ave., Wa &E EL 33756 ' all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and and the centract awarded to the spceigcations provided herrfor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted above ttasamed bidder, acid the said bidder shall within ten days aver notice of said award enter into a contract, in wrking, and fish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manage', this obligation shall be void, otherwise the saw shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated 1 damages Signed this 1 h.._ day of Ma , 2011_... $i .fit ' Limited Lis ili Carporat?? (Principal must indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or individual) Pillar Const Grou LLLC Principal The person *Ong shall, in his own handwriting. sign the Principal's B - itle name, his own narne and his title; ' the pemm signing for a corporation must, by affidavit, show his authority to bind the corporation_ Surety ` By:_ ' Leslie M. Donohue Mtomey-ht-Fact & FL Lie. Resident Agent fte 7 of 14 91MI2010 THE GRAY INSURANCE COMPANY THE GRAY CASUALTY Bc SURETY COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY 145422 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT The Gray Insurance Company and The Gray Casualty A Surety Company, corporations duly organized and existing under the laws of Louise and having their principal offices in Metairie, Louisiana, do hereby make, constitute, and appoint Susan L Reich, Jelfirey W. Reich, Dos bran doge, Kim L Niv, J. Gregory MacKenzie, Leslie M. Donahue, Patricia L. Slaughter, Teresa L. Dsrham, Cheryl Foley and Gloria A. Riehards, of MaRlaad, Florida Joindy or severally on behalf of each of the Companies named above its trite and lawful Attorney{s}-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal std deliver, for and on its behalf and as its decd, bonds, or other writings obligatory in the (nature of a bond, as surety, contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, eoruntct or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship exeautod under this authority shall exceed the amount of $10,000,000. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the foilowing Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both no Gray Insuwance Company and The Gray Casualty A Surety Company at meetings duly called and held on the 20 day of June, 2003 "RESOLVED, drat the President, Executive Vice President, my Vice President, or the Secretary be and each or any of than hereby is authorized to execute a power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of The Company bonds, undertakings, and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them is hereby authorized to attest to the execution of such Power of Attorney, and to attach the seal of the Company; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or oertificato bearing such facsimile; signature or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company now and in the future when so affixed with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, The Gray Insurance Company and The Gray Cmu ty dt Surety Company have caused their official seals to be hereinto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 15th day of February, 2006. By: Attest: SEAL Michael T. Gray Mark S. Manguno It SEAL ?- President. The Gray Insurance Company Secretary, .? # and The Gray Insurance Company, r Vice President, The Gray Casualty & Surety Company The Gray Casualty R Surety Company State of Louisiana ss: Parish of Jefferson On this I Sth day of February, 2006, before she, a Notary Public, personally appeared Michael T. Gray, President of The Gray Insurance Company and Vice President of The Gray Cm alty dt Surety Company, and Mark S. Manguno, Secretary of The Gray Insurance Company and The Gray Casualty R Surety Company, personally known to in% being duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney and affixed the seals of the companies as officers of, and acknowledged aid instrument to be the voluntary act and deed, of their companies. * * Lisa S. Millar, Notary Public, Parish of Orleans State of Louisiana My Commission is for Life 1, Mark S. Manguno, Secretary of The Gray Insurance Company and The Gray Casualty A Surety Company, do hereby certify that the above and forgoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by the companies, which is still in full form and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and sifted the seals of the Companies this /P day of N SEAL mSEAL Mark S. Manguno, Secretary The Gray Insurance Company * The Gray Casualty $ Swely Company Pr77A10001 as 611 ym 560102 2115/2//6 t ADDEIIIDUM NO. I BIDOWSPROPOW PROJECT: NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER RENOVATION R EXPANSION ' NORTH GREENWOOD WIIRARY RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO.: Q9-OI3aPR{A) Eta I'rttlut8 )EST. UNIT Nlvl1., PRICE TOTAL 1 1 ArohkeetwW (Base Bid) Ca111drucgan ?pensi10n A renore4isrts of the North Greenwood Ramon Carper Rryvol No. PR-y, single dory 41*906iOt A renanllMals all OOKKiMep ft m required per r Bess arl>11i1eahrral drWAV6 bV W1`annerriecfter Jensen Architects Inc LS 1 S S Bid and the technical specifications: miscellaneous items and aN b o J- tither llama not inducted In hill of quenti ies bid Horns listed l 2 Ells dent work for the North Greenwood Recreation Center per Bm Bid drw&inps by Deuel & Associates sheets C1, C2, C3 and the 1ticaliorR: miscellaneous items to provide a LS 1 S 3gy L S 3 / , r rations site infrastructure s ystem Attermtla SM Nara ConetruGlion Renovations of the North Greenwood Library PV*J d No. 08.0020PR{A) renovatlons of compuW class 3 1`100111 and all associated dams required per architectural ALT t dr&WhW by W? Jane Anlh?ta Inc. and the ?: rtdeae8anevua Mania and all other Hems LS 1 S ,3g a?; •3 ; Ad kwkxW in bW of quardities to provide a complete r0orn t? Construct overhead canopy from Recreation Center main buftng entrance 10'X 75' +i. to driveway; drawings 4 ALT Shall be provided to the contractor awarded the project tD price OW nelpodate wkh the Owner (allowance dollar LS 1 549'W om S 45,0t10.00 3 SURETY PERFCWJ4L*`Tt 7 BOND -- L3 1 ZJ?ev. 2, 0 uU. o 6 SUB-TOTAL ITEMS 1. $ 3,4 A 5 $ qg 1`) S 1 a D 7 1 Dlr. C'•ONt'NOENCY OF LINE 6 LS 1 9 9 4l ? S -S ('10 S TOTAL 0OWS7'1 VCI'ION COSTS (1TEAM 1. Z, 3.4, 3 A 7) R CLUVES I ll'Y C0Nl IN( ENC Y S = (oS y. z?$, •) J coM%ACr*p J,L- A(t, ?. ?n fi (? V trt? o &0v Q r L. l.C_ BIDDER'S TO'T'AL LINE ID S ?O 5 019 F, ^I L-) (Numbers) BiDDBR,s TOTAL LINE • s S {f I u?? 3 F: C- T ? ?-JA 7-H a 0 S y ?? i ?,.? a .r D ?LGa 71 li, 10% "nlirWN'My shall be utilized only upon wrkbn request by to C0ntraWW for additional soope of work not incLided In the bil d *MOON to Ste Owner. wf tDn approt d by the Owner for the additional scope of work in the ud adon of the t0% t:tlrtdr011`11Cy. any hods NX utilized shall be returned b the owner upon does pit of the pumisee order short. THE BIBlWrS TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL DID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES RsQllti AM title F"K= Is P011 WAVINIAT101r di,Y AT I= TWz GR ONwWa OWL TPW CITY W L1. MAKE TIRE TABULATION FROM TIM OUT i'WAM Aid LUMP IM P11tiL8 Btlt•, IFTi11111111IME ISAN LMOi III THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE C IANOW AS ONLY THL W1` VWM A?* LUMP DUN ?( I MWL GOVE1. 'Tali G" RA MRY6a TW FdG1r1' TO SKIA T ANY AL7ZRNATIK 1`M a AND OR WJ1KT ALLBM. T1 m 'TOTAL RICK $11ALL its BAmaN Ita'xM 8nJ CTzD ¦Y TML Ow?4 R TO COIRRRULT 14 1 1 1 1 AF VI (To be tilled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA ) ' COUNTY OF Lake ) Lily Collins being duly swom, deposes and says that he/she is SecreWy of Pillar Construction Group, LLC a corporation organised and exiising under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: 1312 Bowman Street: Clermont Lake FL Street dt Number ' Affant further says that he is familiar with the records; minute books and by-laws of Pillar Construction Group, LLC (Nam of Corporation) 1 u [l I t11.Y ANTI COLI..INS W/ Qf;NulAAISNM 0 E60 i 3160 20 11 krt& ( N tary Public / Type/print/stamp name of Notary fl Title or mask, and Serial No., if any P*e I of 14 9/2712010 Affiant further, says that Fred Boutros City County State Manager is (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corpora#ion, is duly authorised to sign the Proposal for Pillar Construction Group, LLC for said corporation by virtue of State of Florida provision by laws (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of the Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date f adoption). Affiant Swoon to before me this lathday of May 1 1 1 1 NQN-COLL12MN- AF,,... AVIT STATE OF FLORIDA FL COUNTY OF Lake Fred Boutros Manager being, first duly swom, deposes and says that he is of Pillar Construction Group, LLC ' the PAY making the %tegaiM Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a busitress way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has rat collided, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refiain ftorrl bidding, and has not in any numner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or cm nunication or Vie, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to ' fix any overhead, profit or cost elemerlt of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearatcr, Florida. or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements oonwined in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data ' relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. 1 Swom to and subscribed before me this 18th of May 20 11 Y NN GLLINN LIL A "MY COMMIOWN 0 EE013160 EXPIRES OCtobst 115, 2014 iBlAtl1 ? Notaryublic 1 30dwev.dw Pop ! of 14 §V27/2010 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ?ROP9FhAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER RENOVATION do EXPANSION A NORTH GRMWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO.: Mt-MI?,&PIR-(A) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER RENOVATION & EXPANSION lh NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO.: 88-M&PR{A) Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Floral that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Dnector that fiends are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorrtey; and such bidder is hereby charms with this notice. "I'he signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or patties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, bmtructions to BkMers, Contract Specifications, Plans; Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is accessary to dek mine the character arW extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of cwtract; henft annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to eomplew the contract within the time intentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requites of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as heroin and herevvdWr set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: S"SiGav.dve Psi 10 or 14 WM910 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MCMA (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as started in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the gill amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the fill amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanyng this Proposal, or the aaatotutt of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a bawl or certified check on Bank, for the sum of (being a minimum of I OIA of Contractors total bid amount). (S (Q T1 `1 -0 , u ) The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (if corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whore bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-eoomwtor, materialtnan, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: Fred Boutroas ADDRESSES: 1312 Bowman Street Clermont, Fla 34711 Lily Collins 1312 Bowman Street Clermont, FL 34711 Signature of Bidder: (The bidder mast indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual). seedoav.doc Page I I K 14 7f-4FT1im 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 EROPQBAL (3) The person siph* sWI, in his awn handwrWM sign the Principal's native, his own name and his tide. Where the Mson signiM for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by dfiidavit, show his authority, to bind the orporation. Fred 13o roe Principal: By: Title: Manager Business Address of Bidder: 1312 Bowman Street City and State: Clermont, FL Zip Code 34711 Dated at t OWMVAW thk 18 th day of May .. , .. , _.... ?, A.D., 20 11 tie 12 0( 14 W2712010 F WA ADDEND SHEET PROJECT: NORTH GREENWOOD RECREATION CENTER RENOVATION d: EXPANSION A NORTH GREENWOOD LIBRARY RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO.: 0948.39-PR-(A) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Ad&nWum No. 1 Dame: 5 / 10 / 11 Addendum No. 2 Date: 5/13/11 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendun No. Date. Addendum No. Dame: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendwn No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Pillar construction Group, LLC (Name of B' (yS? of Offk er) Manager (Title of OfFAW) 5/18/11 MM) tlMt Mv./ot tie 11 K 14 *27noto 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADDRNDIJU NQ ] IUDDRR'S FROPMAL PROI=r.- NORTH. GREENWOOD RRCRRATIONI CENTER RENOVATION A EXPANWON NORTH GREENWOOD UMIRARY REWWATIONS PROJECT NO.: 98-MO-PR-(A) dp71 REMffi ?pT ?• UallT PAlCIS OTAL ?T ArsUeatla#a1(lese ®4n CondrimMw ewp&Wm A mnaMO*m a to Mom i3rearwrood Recreadon CSF r ft IR4 MM-PRJA, dngla story d Onsion A & CJ t? ' reMOra W w 80 Mo6deled Item m*Ared per and Ow .le n AmMMcb Inc. Ls 1 S a "` (? , s6 S o I 0dw Mame4 nol 6ndudad in M otqu&,Mm We bm - dW warp 1qr Ntia W.?th Good R 2 obon C, per Sm Bid drwA*W by beast i Aosadkfts aheals Cl. CZ. CS and Mss tehrkd ?: ? Mem M pmvft a LS 1 $ 3?S6Y, 2 S 3 ? r sv y a Allarrimb BId Rm dbn lRes modem of Vw Wargt QMwmuod ?ry 3 ALT r0m and 04 8060dabd left requlrad wdeactim byVftMMM4*WJ n Mn Ir1c and the LS 0 rd ?i . lei wedleaftrim: 11 em"neom am and SN over Mama 1 S X. not included in I N of quenlam to prM& a Carnpieao Celle&M overhead amno f py rom Atlon Center mein bWWft w*af=10' X 7S' +1- b drhlr aW; drewVip 4 A4 MOM be provided 10 the cor4ratkif awantled the g mim t 10 Price and 111e9060 with the Owner (allmm oa dollar a?q LS 1 S45,M00 $ 45.000.00 3 SURETY P R E YOIIMA>' a BOND LS 1 6 SUB-TOTAL I TEMS 1, 2.3.4 ! 5 3 `S" Srt gl S 7 10%CONMOVICY (W LINE 6 LS 1 S g : A AL CONSTAUCTmm COTS Mm? ?• ?' 3.4.5 ! 77 1096 [:UATI' .. T s t; 2A. 0 mmewS TOTAL wNR e 3 -?? 5 ? 'l $ , 1 d mbera) 5 k v,J ?? F`? I` ? u ?,z 11 uuS w.. J (Numbers) BIDDER'S TOTAL LME IS 10% conch M" small be ulked 0r11Ir upon wdM n raguemt by the a©nlradvr for addMonai the bill of quantom to ft owner. MAMM l e OM1nar for the add limM of work unot hckmJed gh mm 10% cor0 go". any UM nol ufted ;6V= b the wmw scope of work in the upon of On u110n cloe;el oud of the pMlvhaee order short. 7M6 TOTAL Amon 41148 Tom m mom oaf MIS uwr mKm Am L14NP am mm Arm TM iMwAmm OvAmmas IXQt= a. TM PM1M! 15 FM W0111111111MMM 0ftV AT TM TIME M 0FX MM ML TM CRY WKL MAW TINT TAWMATMOM MM '(= MT tMM MM W6I2MPMMEi V TMM ¦ AM >l11111pR M TM6 TOTAL NV IM NOW & IT MMM eE OMM = AA CMLV T1MB n!!/!T POW AM UdMP SI M PUM 1pMLL O0MK TIIIR OWv 'M M TM M(Mr TO MM T AM ALTMI MTS nZMa AND OR WXCT ALL *M lM TOTAL PMCE aMALL Me1CD laI R16MS lMJXI= D1' TIML ow m TO copa mucr lA